978-93-88182-33-1

CONTENTS
vii Preface

viii-xi Blueprint & Marks Distribution

xii-xvii Be Board Ready

xviii-xix Make the Most of Your Time

xx-xxi Scope of Choosing Different Streams After Class X

xxii Career Launcher's CBSE Board Exams App

xxiii Stream Selector: The Career Assessment Test

 Mathematics
1.1 - 1.12 Real Numbers
1.2 [Topic 1] Euclid's Division Lemma and Fundamental Theorem of Arithmetic
1.2 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 1
1.3 Solutions
1.7 [Topic 2] Irrational Numbers, Terminating and Non-Terminating Recurring
Decimals
1.7 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 2
1.8 Solutions

2.13 - 2.22 Polynomials

2.14 [Topic 1] Zeroes of a Polynomial and Relationship between Zeroes and
Coefficients of Quadratic Polynomials
2.14 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 1
2.15 Solutions
2.17 [Topic 2] Problems on Polynomials
2.19 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 2
2.19 Solutions

3.23 - 3.42 Linear Equation

3.24 [Topic 1] Linear Equations (Two Variables)
3.25 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 1
3.26 Solutions
3.31 [Topic 2] Different Methods to Solve Quadratic Equations
3.32 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 2
3.33 Solutions

4.43 - 4.60 Quadratic Equations

4.44 [Topic 1] Basic Concept of Quadratic Equations
4.45 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 1
4.46 Solutions
4.55 [Topic 2] Roots of a Quadratic Equation
4.55 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 2
4.56 Solutions
4.59 Value Based Previous Years’ Examination Questions
4.59 Solutions

(iv)
 5.61 - 5.80 Arithmetic Progression
5.62 [Topic 1] Arithmetic Progression
5.63 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 1
5.64 Solutions
5.69 [Topic 2] Sum of n Terms of an A.P.
5.69 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 2
5.70 Solutions
5.79 Value Based Previous Years’ Examination Questions
5.79 Solutions

6.81 - 6.102 Coordinate Geometry

6.82 [Topic 1] Distance between two Points and Section Formula
6.82 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 1
6.84 Solutions
6.92 [Topic 2] Centroid and Area of Triangle
6.92 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 2
6.93 Solutions

7.103 - 7.122 Triangles

7.105 Previous Years’ Examination Questions
7.108 Solutions

8.123 - 8.142 Circles

8.124 Previous Years’ Examination Questions
8.129 Solutions

9.143 - 9.154 Constructions

9.144 [Topic 1] Construction of a Line Segment
9.144 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 1
9.144 Solutions
9.145 [Topic 2] Construction of a Tangent to a Circle from a Point Outside it.
9.146 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 2
9.146 Solutions
9.148 [Topic 3] Construction of a triangle Similar to a given Triangle
9.149 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 3
9.150 Solutions

10.155 - 10.172 Introduction to Trigonometry

10.156 [Topic 1] Trigonometric Ratios
10.157 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 1
10.158 Solutions

(v)
 10.164 [Topic 2] Trigonometric Identities
10.164 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 2
10.165 Solutions

11.173 - 11.192 Some Applications of Trigonometry

11.174 Previous Years’ Examination Questions
11.177 Solutions

12.193 - 12.210 Areas Related to Circles

12.196 Previous Years’ Examination Questions
12.199 Solutions

13.211 - 13.238 Surface Areas and Volumes

13.212 [Topic 1] Surface Area & Volume of a Solid
13.213 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 1
13.215 Solutions
13.222 [Topic 2] Conversion of Solid
13.222 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 2
13.223 Solutions
13.228 [Topic 3] Frustum of a Right Circular Cone
13.228 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 3
13.230 Solutions
13.236 Value Based Previous Years’ Examination Questions
13.236 Solutions

14.239 - 14.260 Statistics

14.240 [Topic 1] Mean, Median and Mode
14.241 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 1
14.246 Solutions
14.256 [Topic 2] Cumulative Frequency Distribution
14.256 Previous Years’ Examination Questions Topic 2
14.257 Solutions

15.261 - 15.272 Probability

15.263 Previous Years’ Examination Questions
15.265 Solutions

1-5 Sample Paper 1

1-5 Sample Paper 2

(vi)
PREFACE

Class X Board Exams are a race against time. You must know how to manage time
efficiently if you want to ace your exams. At Career Launcher, we understand the struggle
of attempting such a crucial examination for the first time and the pressure that comes
along with it. Which is why, our Chapter and Topic-Wise Solved Papers for Mathematics
have been designed to help you become acquainted with the exam pattern and hone
your time management skills, both at the same time.
Exclusively designed for the students of CBSE Class X by highly experienced teachers,
the book provides answers to all actual questions of Mathematics Board Exams
conducted from 2011 to 2018. The solutions have been prepared exactly in coherence
with the latest marking pattern; after a careful evaluation of previous year trends of the
questions asked in Class X Boards and actual solutions provided by CBSE.
The book follows a three-pronged approach to make your study more focused. The
questions are arranged Chapter-wise so that you can begin your preparation with the
areas that demand more attention. These are further segmented topic-wise and
eventually the break-down is as per the marking scheme. This division will equip you
with the ability to gauge which questions require more emphasis and answer
accordingly. Apart from this, several value-based questions have also been included.
At the end of the book, two sample papers are provided for you to practice, and you
can get the solutions on the Career Launcher CBSE Board Exams App. The App further
provides important formulae, examination pattern, marking scheme and syllabus as
well as the date sheet.
We hope the book provides the right exposure to Class X students so that you not only
ace your Boards but mold a better future for yourself. And as always, Career Launcher's
school team is behind you with its experienced gurus to help your career take wings.
Let's face the Boards with more confidence!
Wishing you all the best,
Team CL

(vii)
 Blueprint &
Marks Distribution
Class 10th Mathematics 2018 Analysis Unit Wise
Unit No. Name No. of Periods Marks

I Number Systems 15 6
II Algebra 45 20
III Coordinate Geometry 14 6
IV Geometry 31 15
V Trigonometry 33 12
VI Mensuration 24 10
VII Statistics & Probability 28 11
Total 80
Internal Assessment 20
Grand Total 100

No. of Questions of Various Forms Total Marks

Very Short Answer (1 mark each) – 6 6
Short Answer (2 marks each) – 6 12
Short Answer (3 marks each) – 10 30
Long Answer (4 marks each) – 8 32
Total 80

(viii)
UNIT I: NUMBER SYSTEMS (15 ) PERIODS
1. REAL NUMBERS
Euclid’s division lemma, Fundamental Theorem of Arithmetic - statements after reviewing
work done earlier and after illustrating and motivating through examples, Proofs of results
- irrationality of 2 , 3 , 5 , decimal expansions of rational numbers in terms of
terminating/non-terminating recurring decimals.
UNIT II: ALGEBRA (45 ) PERIODS
1. POLYNOMIALS
Zeros of a polynomial. Relationship between zeros and coefficients of quadratic
polynomials. Statement and simple problems on division algorithm for polynomials with
real coefficients.
2. PAIR OF LINEAR EQUATIONS IN TWO VARIABLES
Pair of linear equations in two variables and their graphical solution. Geometric
representation of different possibilities of solutions/inconsistency.
Algebraic conditions for number of solutions. Solution of a pair of linear equations in two
variables algebraically - by substitution, by elimination and by cross multiplication method.
Simple situational problems must be included. Simple problems on equations reducible
to linear equations.
3. QUADRATIC EQUATIONS
Standard form of a quadratic equation ax2+bx+c=0, (a 0). Solution of the quadratic
equations (only real roots) by factorization, by completing the square and by using
quadratic formula. Relationship between discriminant and nature of roots.
Situational problems based on quadratic equations related to day to day activities to be
incorporated.
4. ARITHMETIC PROGRESSIONS
Motivation for studying Arithmetic Progression Derivation of the nth term and sum of the
first n terms of A.P. and their application in solving daily life problems.
UNIT III: COORDINATE GEOMETRY (14 ) PERIODS
1. LINES (IN TWO-DIMENSIONS)
Concepts of coordinate geometry, graphs of linear equations. Distance formula. Section
formula (internal division). Area of a triangle.

(ix)
UNIT IV: GEOMETRY (31 ) PERIODS
1. TRIANGLES
Definitions, examples, counter examples of similar triangles.
1. (Prove) If a line is drawn parallel to one side of a triangle to intersect the other two
sides in distinct points, the other two sides are divided in the same ratio.
2. (Motivate) If a line divides two sides of a triangle in the same ratio, the line is parallel
to the third side.
3. (Motivate) If in two triangles, the corresponding angles are equal, their corresponding
sides are proportional and the triangles are similar.
4. (Motivate) If the corresponding sides of two triangles are proportional, their
corresponding angles are equal and the two triangles are similar.
5. (Motivate) If one angle of a triangle is equal to one angle of another triangle and the
sides including these angles are proportional, the two triangles are similar.
6. (Motivate) If a perpendicular is drawn from the vertex of the right angle of a right
triangle to the hypotenuse, the triangles on each side of the perpendicular are similar
to the whole triangle and to each other.
7. (Prove) The ratio of the areas of two similar triangles is equal to the ratio of the
squares on their corresponding sides.
8. (Prove) In a right triangle, the square on the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of the
squares on the other two sides.
9. (Prove) In a triangle, if the square on one side is equal to sum of the squares on the
other two sides, the angles opposite to the first side is a right traingle.
2. CIRCLES
Tangents to a circle motivated by chords drawn from points coming closer and closer to
the point.
i. (Prove) The tangent at any point of a circle is perpendicular to the radius through the
point of contact.
ii. (Prove) The lengths of tangents drawn from an external point to circle are equal.
3. CONSTRUCTIONS
i. Division of a line segment in a given ratio (internally).
ii. Tangent to a circle from a point outside it.
iii. Construction of a triangle similar to a given triangle.

(x)
UNIT V: TRIGONOMETRY (33 ) PERIODS
1 . INTRODUCTION TO TRIGONOMETRY
Trigonometric ratios of an acute angle of a right-angled triangle. Proof of their existence
(well defined); motivate the ratios, whichever are defined at 0° and 90°. Values (with
proofs) of the trigonometric ratios of 30°, 45° and 60°. Relationships between the ratios.
2. TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES
Proof and applications of the identity sin2A + cos2A = 1. Only simple identities to be
given. Trigonometric ratios of complementary angles.
3. HEIGHTS AND DISTANCES
Simple and believable problems on heights and distances. Problems should not involve
more than two right triangles. Angles of elevation / depression should be only 30°, 45°,
60°.
UNIT VI: MENSURATION (24 ) PERIODS
1. AREAS RELATED TO CIRCLES
Motivate the area of a circle; area of sectors and segments of a circle. Problems based on
areas and perimeter/circumference of the above said plane figures. (In calculating area of
segment of a circle, problems should be restricted to central angle of 60°, 90° and 120°
only. Plane figures involving triangles, simple quadrilaterals and circle should be taken).
2. SURFACE AREAS AND VOLUMES
(i) Problems on finding surface areas and volumes of combinations of any two of the
following: cubes, cuboids, spheres, hemispheres and right circular cylinders/cones.
Frustum of a cone.
(ii) Problems involving converting one type of metallic solid into another and other mixed
problems. (Problems with combination of not more than two different solids be taken).
UNIT VII: STATISTICS AND PROBABILITY (28 ) PERIODS
1. STATISTICS
Mean, median and mode of grouped data (bimodal situation to be avoided). Cumulative
frequency graph.
2. PROBABILITY
Classical definition of probability. Simple problems on single events (not using set notation).

(xi)
 Be Board Ready

MASTER MATHEMATICS
The theories and principles of Mathematics apply to different fields of life. But despite the
relevance, for many students, Mathematics remains the most difficult subject of the
curriculum. It may be slightly tricky, but there's no denying that Mathematics is one of the
highest scoring papers. If one has a clear understanding of the basic concepts of all
chapters, a good practice regimen and a command over formulae,scoring well in Maths is
not difficult for anyone.
We have come up with a few smart strategies to help you perform well in your Mathematics
paper.
These will reduce your stress and ease your preparation:
1. Work on your speed: Often, students aren't able to attempt questions they know
because of lack of time. They thus, end up scoring a lot less than what they should
have. Improving speed is a must. To do so, practice a variety of questions from all
topics. Keep a check on the amount of time spent on solving questions from various
sections. Ideally, you should spend 3-5 minutes on questions carrying lesser marks.
That way, you will be able to afford more time for the 6-markers, which are typically
lengthy/tricky questions.
2 Focus on accuracy: Never give accuracy a miss. Do calculations very carefully. Be
accurate in applying any formula. Remember, even a lapse in change of sign from (+)
to (-), or vice versa, can lead to losing marks. Being aware of the chapter-wise marking

(xii)
 scheme is beneficial, as it helps increase your level of preparedness. Give extra attention
to topics with higher marks weightage.
3. Stick to NCERT for basic questions: It has been observed that around 90% of the
questions in Board exams are either taken directly from NCERT textbooks or are their
replicas. Hence, for basic concepts-and for getting an idea of the type of questions-
you should stick to NCERT and prescribed CBSE books. Practice every question that is
there in the textbooks, including the solved examples. However, for a comprehensive
preparation, a good reference book is a must.
4. Practice previous year papers and sample papers: Doing time-bound solved papers
practice will prove to be of great help in understanding the flair and pattern of the
exam. For better practice, solve the sample papers (especially the ones released by
CBSE) and model papers within the specified time frame.
5. Write down the steps neatly: You must already be aware that writing the steps
down carries marks. So, even if you do not know the complete solution to a question,
you should try to write the steps you are sure of.
Follow these strategies, and boost your chances of scoring a 90+ in the exam!
SAIL THROUGH SCIENCE
Science is considered a tough subject by many, yet it is the most sought afterstream for
students after Class X. For students, their performance in Class X Boards exams forms the
basis for stream selectionin Class XI. Many schools also have 'minimum marks criteria' to
be met by students who want to take up Science in Classes XI & XII.
You need to understand it is not the complexity of the subject that acts as a roadblock to
success, but simply the mindset. In fact, when one works hard and prepares smartly,
acing the Science Board paper becomes easy. What you need to do is follow a correct
strategy while attempting the paper, and learn some hacks.
1. Specialized strategies for each subject: For scoring overall good marks in Science,
your individual performance in Physics, Chemistry and Biology must be excellent. This
will only happen when you adopt the right preparation strategy for individual sections.
Let's discuss a few pro tips, shared by our experts:
• Physics: To score well in Physics, you should attempt all NCERT questions and
additional exercises as many times as possible. Practice numerical; and solve at least
five previous years' papers. You will also need to correctly memorize all formulae,
practice derivations and use the right SI and other conversion units in your answers.
• Biology: Biology doesn't consist of practical questions and numerical but the devil
here is in the details. Answer questions in the form of points, as it presents a neat
and summarized appearance.Underline key words; and draw large diagrams (where
needed) with the right labeling.

(xiii)
 • Chemistry: Regularly practice numerical-based questions, as well as balancing
chemical equations. Revise names and examples of reactions, word problems,tables
and periods from periodic classification, valency, metals and non-metals, and
important points from acids, bases, and salts. Write crisp, concise answers and you
will fetch good marks.
2. Be aware of examination pattern and marking scheme: Being familiar with the
examination pattern and marking scheme goes a long way in ensuring a good
performance in boards. Your level of preparedness improves a great deal if you are
also aware of chapter-wise marking scheme. Pay special attention to topics with higher
marks weightage. Practice writing long answers for 3-5 markers and limit to one to
two lines in case of 1-2 markers.
3. Stick to NCERT for basic questions: Time and again, it has been seen that around
90% ofquestions in Board exams are taken directly from NCERT textbooks. It
only makes sense to stick to NCERT and CBSE books for basic concepts and types of
questions.
4. Practice previous years' papers and sample papers: Sample papers (especially the
ones released by CBSE) and model papers should be solved within the specified
timeframe, for better practice.
5. At the exam, use reading time wisely: In the allotted 15 minutes, make sure you
read the question paper thoroughly; and select the questions you wish to attempt
first. If there is any topic you are not comfortable with, attempt it towards the end.
Also, make sure you spare at least 10 minutes for revision in the end.
6. Focus on basic concepts and study important topics in detail: While it goes
without saying that your basics need to be clear, merely reading the summary of a
topic will not help. You need to study each topic in detail. The Science paper of 2018
saw tricky questions which required in-depth reading of topics.
SUCCEED IN SOCIAL SCIENCE
Social Science paper, as a medium to score high marks is often overlooked. Most students
feel that too much theory will not fetch them good marks. On the contrary, with a few
smart tips, you can easily score over 95 in your Social Science paper.
First, and foremost, prepare properly for the examination. If you are sure about your
learning and knowledge, then you have no reason to be worried.
1. At the exam, use reading time wisely: Once you are handed the question paper, use
the allotted reading time to study the questions carefully. Go through the entire paper,
a silly mistake made in understanding a question can prove fatal and will lead to
loosing marks. If you are not confident about a topic or a question, do not panic. Ask
before you start writing answers.

(xiv)
2. Divide time judiciously: Check how lengthy the question paper is. This will help you
estimate how much time you will have for each section and accordingly divide time.
3. Answer Sequentially: Try to solve questions in the given sequence. Do not ponder
over any problem if you do not know the solution. Instead, skip the question, and
come back to it later; or, answer it in the best way you can.
4. Answer clearly and precisely: Give precise answers that are simple and easy to follow.
Avoid using words just to make the answer seem lengthy. Rather than using words
you have mugged up, it is always preferable to explain a concept in your own words.
Make sure your answers do not appear to be haphazard or unorganized. Well-structured
answers will fetch you more marks. Highlight the important information, key words,
and headings in every answer, so that they attract attention immediately. It will also
help you score good marks.
5. Write in points: Try writing answers in form of points, instead of paragraphs. This will
ensure that you save time for difficult questions.Try to attempt all questions. Even if
you write some related facts, and not exactly what has been asked for, you might
score some marks.
Bonus Tips:
• Mark out the map work neatly.
• Ensure that the respective question number is written against every answer.
• Draw and properly label all diagrams.
HANDLE HINDI WITH EASE
One of the biggest apprehensions for many CBSE Board examinees is how to obtain a
good score in the Literature and Language papers, especially Hindi. With a total of 55
marks being devoted to the Language section (15 for Grammar, 20 for an unseen passage,
and 20 marks for creative writing, i.e., essay and letters), what follows is that you must be
ready to let your analytical andcreative juices flow, because memorizing the textbook will
just not do.
Listed below are some tips and tricks on how to go about your Hindi syllabus, so that you
score well in the Hindi Board examination.
First and foremost, read all the chapters in your textbooks; and revise them regularly.
Questions from textbooks will comprise almost 50% of the question paper.
1. Grammar (Vyakaran): It is quite easy to score high marks in Hindi, but only if you are
clear on basics. Have complete clarity on grammatical rules related to topics prescribed
in your syllabus. Do not waste your time mugging up definitions from every chapter.
Rather, understand concepts in depth and read solved exercises provided at the back
of chapters. Practice answering questions on grammar as much as you can. Be aware
of not only the rules of grammar, but also the exceptions. Read the NCERT textbook
thoroughly.

(xv)
2. Descriptive answers (Essay and Letter Writing): Have thorough knowledge on the
format for essay and letter writing (both formal and informal). Focus more on the style
of writing formal letters, as it will not be possible for you to use fine professional
language during the exam. While attempting descriptive questions, first jot down in a
rough space, the points you will cover;and then proceed to writing answers. This will
help you structure your answers properly, and will also fetch you good marks. Add a
lot of facts and figures to make your essay look attractive and authentic. Ensure your
handwriting is neat.
3. Reading Comprehension: There is a widespread, but incorrect notion among students
that unseen passages do not require any preparation. In reality, you are advised to
practice such passages as well. While attempting questions, read the passage carefully;
and underline the important words and phrases. Understand the type of questions
that have been asked. Do not devote more than 40 minutes to this section.
4. Literature: Undeniably, Literature, with its chapters and poems, is the toughest section
to attempt. However, if you know your NCERT chapters thoroughly, chances are, you
will not face a lot of trouble. You can get a good score, if you have a clear understanding
of chapters. Learn the name of the authors and the titles of the poems. Make sure all
your answers are properly structured-having an introduction,body, and a conclusion.
There will be internal choices for questions, but no overall choice. Carefully, and wisely,
choose the questions you want to answer. Attempt only those questions in which you are
totally confident.
EXCEL IN ENGLISH
English is the only subject that is compulsory across various streams and classes. It is also
a high-scoring subject. Class X English may seem easy, but it's important to understand
that one cannot gain mastery over the subject in a few days or weeks. It can only be done
over a period of time!
The English paper is divided into four sections: Reading, Writing, Grammar, and Literature
& Long Reading texts. To get good marks overall, you will need to score well in each of
these.
Now, let's take a look at the ideal study plan for these sections, individually:
1. Reading: The first section of the paper comprises unseen passages. The most common,
and effective way to improve reading-comprehension is by reading an unknown passage
and summarizing it point-wise. Read anything and everything you can find; and before
you realize it, you will find yourself gaining a strong hold over this section! While
reading, keep a check on the time spent on a passage, and in solving all the questions
of that particular passage. Ideally, not more than 10-12 minutes should be spent on a
moderately difficult passage.
To improve your vocabulary, make notes of the words, whose meaning you are not
aware of.

(xvi)
2. Writing: This section tests your writing skills. Questions based on letter writing, formal
letters(Complaints/Inquiry/Placing Order/Letter to the Editor), articles, applications, etc.,
will be asked in the exam. Hence, you will need to improve your writing skills. Try to
summarize what you write. Practice a different writing composition every day; and
while doing so, make sure to stay within word-limit. You should also be comfortable
with common, general topics, as well as social issues, as articles based on these can be
asked in the examination.
3. Grammar: This section tests your knowledge on topics like tenses, modals (have to/
had to, must, should, need, ought to; and their negative forms), use of passive voice,
subject-verb agreement, reporting (commands and requests, statements, questions),
clauses, determiners, conjunctions, articles, and prepositions. Revise concepts of basic
grammar, while focusing on usage. Remember, questions asked can be in the form of
sentence correction, gap filling, editing or omission, etc.; so, you need to practice all
of these.
4. Literature & Long Reading: Questions on long reading texts are usually in-depth; so,
you will need to go through the entire chapter. Do note that questions can be from
any part of the chapter. In case of poems, you need to have complete clarity on the
context of lines. Usually, questions on theme/plot are asked in case of a long text.
Practice writing character sketches, as it will help you answer better.
Follow this study plan, and the tips and tricks discussed above; and we are sure nothing
can stop you from excelling in the English paper!

(xvii)
 Make the Most of
Your Time

The Class X Board exams play a crucial role in shaping your career, irrespective of the
stream(Science, Commerce, or Humanities) you opt in Class XI. A crucial factor that decides
how you fare in the X board exams is time management. However, most of us don't
realize its importance. Yes, we do design a timetable, while preparing for the Class X
Boards, but seldom adhere to it. The results are often disappointing.
A simple strategy of effective time management can work wonders, and guarantee your
success. After all, the exam is nothing but a race against time; and to survive in this race,
you need to have a fool-proof time-management strategy.
Here are some tips to propel your chances of success:
1. Organize your tasks: Organization not only helps eliminate stress, but also leads to
devising an effective strategy. Start early to stay ahead. Commencing your preparation
just 2-3 months before your Board exams won't help.
2. Avoid being over-enthusiastic: Set realistic goals; and plan your preparation for the
upcoming weeks and months. This will help you get a clear picture of how much time
you have,and how to allocate that time among the various subjects and topics.
3. Analyze your requirements: To begin with, analyze how much time you need
for studying, sleeping, and for other miscellaneous activities. This way, you will
avoid confusion, have clarity, and gain the motivation to shift gears, as and when
required.

(xviii)
4. Study the way you are comfortable in: Some of us are morning birds, while others
are night owls. Know when you are happy and your mind is refreshed; and reserve this
time for the most difficult and tricky topics and theoretical revisions. When you feel
dull and sleepy, start doing practice problems, make mind maps, or pick up the easier
topics. Active engagement will help your brain remain switched on and alert.
5. Dedicate a place to yourself: Having a fixed place to study helps your mind to
re-position itself to the study mode as soon as you sit down. The place can also prove
to be a confidence booster a week or so before your exams.
6. Prioritize your subjects: Utilizing your time in the best-possible manner is the key to
your success. Prioritize, as per your strong and weak areas, in each chapter or topic.
Devote less time to your strong areas; more to the weaker areas; and the remainder to
your daily activities. Do not skip any topic during preparation. Over-confidence can get
the better of you during the exam.
7. Prepare a schedule: Draw up a timetable based on your priorities. Do not get over-
ambitious. Stick to a balanced and simple schedule. Remember to include sleep time,
break time, and other recreational activities.
8. Adhere to the schedule: The biggest challenge is not to prepare a timetable, but to
follow it. If you don't, all your effort will go in vain. Be sincere and honest. Remember,
there is no shortcut to success. While preparing the schedule, ask yourself, how it is
going to benefit you. Manage time accordingly.
Advantages of time management
 It reduces tension; and calms you down, even in stressful moments during preparing
for an exam.
 It increases your productivity; and hence, leads to better performance in exams.
 It gives you confidence and motivation.
Every famous personality has faced success and failure in their careers. However, their
strategy would always have been to put to use wisely the available time and resources.
Similarly, without proper time management in your preparation for the Class X Board
exams, success will be impossible to achieve.

(xix)
 Scope of Choosing
Different Streams After
Class X
As a student, you are expected to make an informed choice, while selecting a specialization,
post Class X. The current CBSE system offers students three streams to lay the
foundation of their career:
1. Commerce
2. Science
3. Humanities
Each of these fields opens up a wide range of lucrative careers. However, the final choice
a student makes should depend on his/her own area of interest.The scope of each of
these streams is discussed below, in brief.
1. COMMERCE
The field of Commerce today is producing leaders and successful personalities like never
before. It is being chosen by a large number of students after completion of their 10th
standard due to its worth interms of finding early employment; and also as the first step
towards entrepreneurship. A student taking up Commerce starts to inculcate knowledge
of business from the very beginning. He/she also attains knowledge of business, trade,
basics of the economy, fiscal policies, sharemarket, stock markets, etc., by studying subjects
like Business Studies, Economics, and Accountancy.
Those who study Commerce can opt for a Bachelor's and Master's Degree in Economics,
Business Administration, CA, CS, CFA, and so on.

(xx)
2. SCIENCE
Science, as a stream, has always been prestigious and is highly preferred by students. Its
relevance and contribution to society keeps it at the top of the game. Over the years,
Science stream has given us successful doctors, engineers, and scientists; who have brought
about revolutionary changes in the society, by improving the way things work. When you
opt for Science stream, interms of selection of subjects, Physics and Chemistry are
compulsory; but, you do get the option to choose between Mathematics and Biology.
Then again, there is the option of choosing PCMB combination (i.e.,choosing both Math
and Biology, along with Physics and Chemistry), as well.
3. HUMANITIES
Earlier, it was a common notion that toppers never opt for Arts/Humanities. But, the
realm of academia has seen this perception change significantly over the last decade.
After all, as they say, change is the only constant.
Nowadays, the mantra is to pursue what you love; and build a career in the field of your
interest. Life is a void without dancers, painters, singers, poets, and artists; which you
only get to be by studying Arts & Humanities.
Humanities also help us understand others through their languages, histories, and cultures.
Arts & Humanities is an extremely diverse stream; and students mainly deal with subjects
like Literature, Sociology, Psychology, Political Science, etc. As astudent of Humanities,
you can opt for a wide range of careers, such as teaching, social work, law, politics,
business, media, fashion, journalism, etc.

(xxi)
 Career Launcher's CBSE
Board Exams App
You can now prepare for the Class X Boards with Career Launcher's CBSE Board Exams
App, available for free download on Google Play Store.
The App provides free sample papers and their solutions, along with the marking scheme
& syllabus prescribed by CBSE. All solutions have been designed by experts in coherence
with CBSE exam syllabus; after a careful evaluation of previous year question pattern.
Other than this, the app provides value based content which will act as supplement to
your exam preparation. You can quickly revise important formulae and key concepts on
the go. We've also included examination pattern, marking scheme, syllabus as well as
date-sheet within the app.
In addition, to help you with selection of streams after Class X, the Board Exams App
offers 'Stream Selector', wherein you will be able to identify suitable stream, based on
details filled out in a form.
Make the most of the App; and boost your Class X exam preparation.

(xxii)
 Stream Selector:
The Career
Assessment Test
Before choosing a career path, you need to figure out what ignites the fire in you. Future
Map is a one-stop, reliable, career-guidance program from Career Launcher. It helps you
choose the best and the most exciting career on the basis of your Aptitude, Personality,
and Interest.
Future Map is conducted through three consecutive online quizzes: Aptitude quiz,
Personality quiz, and Interest quiz. These quizzes are administered over a period of three
days.
Steps to take the Future Map test:
1. To take the test, you need to register for the program first. Register for Future Map at
http://www.futuremap.in/index.jsp.
2. You will receive your FutureMap login credentials through an email on your registered
mail ID.
3. To login, key in the user id and password received.
4. Click on the 'Take the Test' button on the right-hand side.
5. You will be directed to a page asking for payment of a token amount.
6. If you have a Discount Code, key in the details; and then take the test.
We hope you are able to find the right career based on what your personality and interests
are. At Career Launcher, we are there to guide you in becoming the best YOU at every
step of your education!

(xxiii)
CHAPTER 1

Real Numbers
Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams
Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Proving Irrational number 2 marks 2 marks
Question based on H.C.F. and L.C.M. 1, 3 marks 1, 3 marks
1.2 CHAPTER 1 : Real Numbers

[TOPIC1] Euclid's Division Lemma and Fundamental

Theorem of Arithmetic
Step 3: Wr it e d = er + r 1 wher e 0 < r 1 < r
Summary St ep 4: Cont inue t he pr ocess t i ll t he r emainder is
zer o. The divisor at t his st age will be t he r equir ed
Euclid's Division Lemma
H CF.
Dividend = divisor  quot ient + r emainder.  Odd int eger s of t he for m 6q + 1, 6q + 3 or 6q + 5
Given two posit ive integer s a and b. Ther e exist unique shows t hat 6 is t he divisor of given int eger
int eger s q and r sat isfying
 Any posit ive int eger can be of t he for m 3m, 3m + 1,
a = bq + r wher e 0  r < b 3m + 2. Such t hat it s cube would be of t he for m
wher e a is dividend, b is divisor, q is quot ient and r is 9q + r.
r emainder.
 I f a = bq + r, then every common divisor of a Fundamental Theorem of Arithmetic
and b is a common divisor of b and r also. Ever y composi t e nu mber can be expr essed as a
pr oduct of pr i mes and t hi s expr essi on i s unique,
Euclid's Division Algorithm
except fr om t he or der i n whi ch t he pr i me fact or s
To obt ain t he H CF of t wo posit ive int eger s, say c and occur.
d, wit h c > d, follow t he st eps below:  HCF is the lowest power of common prime and LCM
Step 1: Apply Euclid’s division lemma, t o c and d. So, is t he highest power of pr imes.
we find whole number s, q and r such t hat c = dq + r ,  H CF (a, b)  L CM (a, b) = a  b.
0  r < d.
 Any number ending with zer o must have a fact or of
Step 2: I f r = 0, d is t he H CF of c and d. I f r  0, apply
2 and 5.
t he division lemma t o d and r .

3. I f a = (22  33  54) and b = (23  32  5), t hen H CF

PREVIOUS YEARS’
(a, b) is equal t o:
(a) 900 (b) 180
(c) 360 (d) 540
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS
[TERM 1, 2013]
TOPIC 1 4. The H CF of t wo number s is 27 and t heir L CM is
162, if one of t he number is 54, find t he ot her
1 Mark Questions number.
[TERM 1, 2017]
1. L .C.M . of 23  32 and 23  33 is:
(a) 23 (b) 33 5. What is t he H CF of t he smallest pr ime number
(c) 23  33 (d) 22  32 and t he smallest composit e number ?

[TERM 1, 2012] [TERM 1, 2017]

2. I f p and q ar e t wo co-pr ime number s, t hen H CF 2 Marks Questions

(p, q) is:
6. Show t hat 8n cannot end wit h t he digit zer o for
(a) p (b) q
any nat ur al number n .
(c) pq (d) 1
[TERM 1, 2011]
[TERM 1, 2013]
CHAPTER 1 : Real Numbers 1.3

7. Euclid's algor it hm, find t he H CF of 240 and 228. 19. Fi nd H CF and L CM of 404 and 96 and ver i fy
[TERM 1, 2012] t hat H CF × L CM = Pr oduct of t he t wo given
number s.
8. E x pl ai n w h y 1  2  3  4  5  6  7  5 is a
[TERM 1, 2017]
composit e number ?
[TERM 1, 2014] 4 Marks Question
9. F i n d t h e l east posi t i v e i n t eger w h i ch 20. Use Euclid's Division L emma t o show t hat t he
on di mi nishi ng by 5 is exact l y di visibl e by 36 squar e of any positive int eger is either of the for m
and 54. 3m or 3m + 1 for some int eger m.
[TERM 1, 2015] [TERM 1, 2012]

10. Expr ess 5050 as pr oduct of it s pr ime fact or s. I s it

 Solutions
unique?
[TERM 1, 2016] 1. Given, 23  32 and 22  33

3 Marks Questions We know, L CM is t he pr oduct of t er ms cont aining

highest power s of
11. Show t hat squar e of any posi t i ve i nt eger i s
(2,3)  23  33
ei t h er of t h e f or m 3 m or  3m  1 f or som e
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (c). [1]
int eger m .
2. L CM of t he given number  pq
[TERM 1, 2011]

12. Fi nd t he L CM and H CF of 336 and 54 and pr oduct of numbers p  q

H CF   1
ver i fy t hat L CM  H CF = Pr oduct of t he t wo L CM of numbers pq
number s. Two int eger s ar e co pr ime when t hey have no
[TERM 1, 2012] common fact or ot her t han 1.
13. Using Euclid's division algor it hm, find whet her Ther efor e t he H .C.F is 1.
t he pair of number s 847, 2160 ar e co-pr imes or H ence t he cor r ect opt ion is (d). [1]
not . 2 2
[TERM 1, 2012]

3. The H CF of a and b  2  3  5 
14. Find H CF and L CM of 180, 252 and 324.   4  9  5
[TERM 1, 2013]
  36  5
15. Pens ar e sold in pack of 8 and not epads ar e sold
in pack of 12. Find t he least number of pack of  180 [1]
each t ype t hat one should buy so t hat t her e ar e
equal number of pens and not epads. 4. H CF (54, b) = 27 and L CM (54, b) = 162
Accor ding t o t he for mula,
[TERM 1, 2014]

16. Explain whet her t he number 3  5  13  46  23 L CM  a, b  HCF  a, b  a  b [½]

is a pr ime number or a composit e number.  27  162  54  b
[TERM 1, 2015]
27  162
b 
17. Fi nd t he gr eat est number of six digi t number 54
exact ly divisible by 18, 24 and 36.
162
[TERM 1, 2016] b 
2
18. U si ng di vi si on al gor i t hm fi nd quot i en t and
 b  81
r emainder dividing x3  13 x2  x – 2 by 2x + 1
So, t he ot her number is 81. [½]
[TERM 1, 2016]
1.4 CHAPTER 1 : Real Numbers

5. The smallest pr ime number is 2. H ence, 113 is t he l east posit ive int eger which
And t he smallest composit e number is 4. on di minishing by 5 i s exact ly di vi sible by 36
and 54.
Fact or s of 2  1  2
10. 5050 can be fact or ed as,
4  1  2  2. [½]
5050  2  5  5  101
So t he H CF of t he smallest pr ime number and
t he smallest composit e number is 2. [½] We can wr it e it as 2  52  101
6. The pr ime fact or izat ion should have 2 and 5 as a H er e all t he fact or s ar e pr ime number s and can
common fact or for a number t o end wit h the digit be expr essed as pr oduct of it s pr ime number s.
zer o. [1]
So, Yes it is unique. [2]
8n  (2  2  2)n does not have 5 i n i t s pr i me 11. L et c be any posit ive number and d = 3
fact or izat ion. Then c  3q  r for q  0
H ence, 8n cannot end wit h t he digit zer o for any
nat ur al number n . [1] Also, r = 0, 1, 2 as 0  r  3 [1]
7. We know, by Euclid's Division L emma, Thus, c  3 q or c  3q  1 or c  3q  2
a  bq  r , 0  r  b 2 2
 c2   3q or  3q  1 or  3q  2
2

Applying Euclid's Lemma,

St ep 1 : Since 240 > 228, we apply t he division  c2  3  3q2 or 9 q2  6q  1 or 9 q2  12q  4
 
lemma t o 240 and 228, t o get 240  228  1  12
 c2  3  3q2 or 3 3q2  2q  1 or 3 3q2  4 q  1  1
     
[1]
St ep 2 : Since t he r emainder 12  0 , we apply [1]
t h e di v i si on l em m a t o 228 an d 12, t o get  c2  3m1 or 3m2  1 or 3m3  1 wher e
228  12  19  0
m1  3q2 , m2  3q2  2q and m3  3q2  4 q  1
The r emainder has now become zer o.
Since t he divisor at t his st age is 12, t he H CF is H ence, squar e of any posit ive int eger is eit her of
12. [1] 3m or (3m + 1) for some int eger m. [1]
12. Find t he fact or s of 336 and 54.
8. We can wr it e 1  2  3  4  5  6  7  5 as
336  2  2  2  2  3  7
 5 1  2  3  4  6  7  1
54  2  3  3  3 [1]
 5 1  2  3  4  6  7  1  5  1009 [1] H CF of 336 and 54  2  3  6
H ence we can say t hat t he given number has at L CM of
least one fact or ot her t han 1 and number it self. [1]
336 and 54  2  2  2  2  3  3  3  7  3024
  5, 1009, 1,5045 Pr oduct of t wo number s  336  54  18144
T h er ef or e 1  2  3  4  5  6  7  5 is a H ence ver ified. [1]
composit e number. [1] 13. a = 2160, b = 847
9. Finding t he L CM of 36 and 54, By Euclid's lemma, given posit ive int eger s a and
b, t her e exist unique int eger s q and r sat isfying
36  2  2  3  3
54  2  3  3  3 a  bq  r , 0  r  b. [1]

[1] As 2160  847 , we apply t he division lemma t o

L CM  2  2  3  3  3  108
2160 and 847, t o get 2160  847  2  466
Now it is given t hat t he number is diminished
by 5. Since the r emainder 466  0, we apply the division
This means t he least posit ive will be: lemma t o 847 and 466, and cont inue t he same
pr ocess t ill we get r emainder 0. [1]
5   L CM of 36 and 54 
847  466  1  381
 5  108
[1] 466  381  1  85
 113
CHAPTER 1 : Real Numbers 1.5

381  85  4  41 I t means it has 23 and 391 as it s fact or s ot her

t han 1 and 8993.
85  41  2  3
H ence, it is a composit e number. [1]
41  3  13  2
17. Gr eat est number of 6 digit s is 999999
3  211 The number s given ar e 18, 24 and 36.
2  111 H er e L CM of 18, 24, 36.
1=1+0
18  2  3  3 = 2  32
As 1 is the H CF of 847 and 2160. 847 and 2160 ar e
t he co-pr imes. [1] 36  2  2  3  3 = 22  32 [1]
14. Consider 252 and 324. L et , a = 324 and b = 252
by Euclid's division lemma- 24  2  2  2  3 = 23  3
N ow,
a  bq  r , 0  or  r  b
The L CM of 18, 24 and 36 = 23  32  72
324  252  1  72
Now dividing 999999 by 72 [1]
252  72  3  36
72  36  2  0 [1] 999999
 13888 wit h r emainder 63
72
Ther efor e, H CF  252, 324   36
And,
Now consider 36 and 180,her e a = 180 and b = 36. 999999 – 63 = 999936
By Euclid's division Thus 999936 i s t he gr eat est number 6-di gi t
a  bq  r , 0  or  r  b [1] number divisible by18, 24 and 36. [1]

180  36  5  0 18. x3  13 x2  x – 2 can be divided by 2 x  1 as

Ther efor e, HCF 180, 36  36 [1] 1 2 25 21

x  x
2 4 8
15. Pens ar e sold in pack of 8 and not epads ar e sold
in pack of 12, 2 x  1 x3  13 x2  x – 2
1 2
L CM of 8 and 12 is: x3  x [1]
2
8  23 and 12  22  3 [1]  
L CM  23  3  8  3  24 25 2
x  x2
2
24 25 2 25
L east number of pack of pen  3 [1] x  x
8 2 4
 
24
L east number of pack of not epads  2 21
12  x2
H ence, 3 packs of pen and 2 packs of not epads 4
one should buy t o get 24 pens and not epads. [1] 21 21
 x
4 8
16. 3  5  13  46  23
 
I t can be r e-wr it t en as: [1]
5
3  5  13  2  23  23 8
 23  3  5  13  2  1
 23  391 1 2 25 21
H er e quot ient is x  x and r emainder
 8993 [1] 2 4 8
H er e 8993 i s wr i t t en as t he pr oduct of t wo 5
is . [1]
differ ent number s 23  391 . [1] 8
1.6 CHAPTER 1 : Real Numbers

19. The pr ime fact or s of:

96  2  2  2  2  2  3
[1]
404  2  2  101
Ther efor e t he H CF = Pr oduct of smallest power of each common pr ime fact or = 2 × 2 = 4 [1]
And L CM = Pr oduct of gr eat est power of each pr ime fact or = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 101 = 9696
To pr ove:
H CF × L CM = 101 × 96
H er e, H CF × L CM = 4 × 9696 = 38784
101 × 96 = 38784
H ence pr oved, H CF × L CM = Pr oduct of t he t wo given number s. [1]
20. We know, By Euclid's Division L emma,
I f a and b ar e t wo posit ive int eger s, t hen
a  bq  r wher e 0  r  b ...(1) [1]
L et a be any posit ive int eger and b = 3, using equat ion 1, we get ,
a  3 q  r wher e 0  r  3
We know can be eit her 0, 1 or 2 [1]

If r  0 If r  1 If r  2

The equat i on becomes, The equat i on becomes, The equat i on becomes,

a  3q  0 a  3q  1 a  3q  2

 a  3q
Squar ing bot h sides, Squar ing bot h sides,

Squar ing bot h sides, a 2  (3q  1)2 a 2  (3q  2)2

a 2  (3q )2  a 2  9q 2  6q  1  a 2  9q 2  12q  4

 a 2  9q 2  a 2  3(3q 2  2q )  1  a 2  9q 2  12q  3  1

 a 2  3(3q 2 ) L et m  3q 2  2q  a 2  3(3q 2  4q  1)  1

L et m  3q 2  a 2  3m  1 L et m  3q 2  4q  1

 a 2  3m  a 2  3m  1
[2]

H ence, squar e of any posit ive number can be expr essed of t he for m 3m or 3m  1 for some int eger m .
H ence pr oved.
CHAPTER 1 : Real Numbers 1.7

[TOPIC 2] Irrational Numbers, Terminating and

Non-Terminating Recurring Decimals
Summary Decimal Representation of Rational
Numbers
Irrational Numbers p
Theorem: L et x  be a r at ional number such t hat
All r eal number s which ar e not r at i onal ar e cal led
q
q  0 and pr ime fact or izat ion of q is of t he for m 2n  5m
3
ir r ational number s. 2, 3 ,  5 ar e some examples wher e m , n ar e non-negat ive int eger s t hen x has a
of ir r at ional number s. decimal r epr esent at ion which t er minat es.
Ther e ar e decimals which ar e non-t er minat ing and 275 52  11 11 11
For example : 0.275    
non-r ecur r ing decimal. 10 3
2 5 3 3
2 5 3 40
Example: 0.303003000300003… p
Theorem: L et x  be a r at ional number such t hat
H ence, we can conclude t hat q
An i r r at i onal nu mber i s a n on -t er mi nat i n g and q  0 and prime factorization of q is not of the form 2m  5n,
non-r ecur r i ng deci mal and cannot be put i n t he wher e m , n ar e non-negative integer s, then x has a
decimal expansion which is non-ter minating repeating.
p
for m wher e p and q ar e bot h co-pr ime int eger s and 5
q For example :  1.66666...
q  0. 3

Rat ional number F orm of prime fact orisat ion D ecimal expansion
of t he denominat or of rat ional number
p
x , wher e p and q q = 2m 5n wher e n and m ar e non-negat ive int eger s ter minating
q
ar e copr ime and q  0 q  2m 5n wher e n and m ar e non-negat ive int eger s non-t er minating

 I f t he denominat or is of t he for m 2m  5n for some non negat ive int eger m and n, t hen r at ional number has
t erminat ing decimal ot her wise non t erminat ing.

(c) 2 m  5 n Wher e m and n ar e r at ional number s

PREVIOUS YEARS’ (d) Not of t he for m 2 m  5 n wher e m and n ar e

non-negat ive int eger s.
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS [TERM 1, 2011]

TOPIC 2 2. The decimal expansion of

6
will t er minat e
1250
1 Mark Questions aft er how many places of decimal?
(a) 1
1. The pr ime fact or izat ion of t he denominat or of the (b) 2
r at ional number expr essed as 46.123 is: (c) 3
(a) 2 m  5 n Wher e m and n ar e int eger s (d) 4
[TERM 1, 2011]
(b) 2 m  5 n Wher e m and n ar e posit ive int eger s
1.8 CHAPTER 1 : Real Numbers

23  Solutions
3. Decimal expansion of 3 2 will be:
(2 5 )
1. As t he deci m al expan si on 46.123 i s a n on -
(a) Ter minating t er mi nat i ng r epeat i ng, t he gi ven number i s a
(b) Non- t er minat ing
p
(c) Non t er minat ing and r epeat ing. r at ional number of t he for m wher e q is not of
q
(d) Non-t er minat ing and non-r epeat ing
[TERM 1, 2012] t he for m 2 m  5 n .

2 Marks Questions L et x = 46.123 ...(1)

4. What can you say about t he pr ime fact or izat ion 1000 x = 46123.123 ...(2)
of t he denominat or of t he r at ional number 0.134
46077
p (2) – (1)  =x
when wr i t t en i n t h e for m . I s i t of f or m 999
q
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (d). [1]
2 m
 5 ? I f yes, wr it e t he values of m and n .
n 2. Expr ess 6 and 1250 as a pr oduct of pr ime fact or s.
[TERM 1, 2013] 6 23

5. Find t he smallest posit ive r at ional number by 1250 2  54
1
which should be mult iplied so t hat it s decimal 6 2  3 23 48
7  
4

3

1250 2  5 2 5  24
4
expansion t er minat es aft er 2 places of decimal.
[TERM 1, 2011] 6 48 48
    0.0048
1250  5  2 4 10000
2
6. Show t hat  3 5  is an ir r at ional number..
H ence, deci mal expansi on t er mi nat es aft er 4
[TERM 1, 2015] places of decimal.
The cor r ect opt ion is (d). [1]
76
7. Wr i t e down t he deci mal expansi on of , 3. We know by a t heor em t hat ,
6250
wit hout act ual division. p
If x  be a r at i onal number, such t hat t he
[TERM 1, 2016] q
8. Find how many int eger s bet ween 200 and 500
pr i me fact or i zat i on of q i s i n t he for m 2n 5m ,
ar e divisible by 8.
wher e n , m ar e non-negat ive int eger s. Then x
[TERM 1, 2017]
has a decimal expansion which t er minat es. [½]
9. Given that 
2 is ir r at ional, pr ove t hat 5  3 2  23
H en ce, Deci m al expan si on of wi l l be
is an ir r at ional number. 23 52
[TERM 1, 2017] ter minating [½]
10. Pr ove t hat 3  2 is ir r at ional. So, t he cor r ect opt ion is (a).
[TERM 1, 2011] 4. L et x = 0.134 ....(1)
Now, 100x = 134.134 ....(2) [1]
Subt r act eqn (1) fr om (2) We get ,
4 Marks Question 999x = 134
11. Define ir r at ional number and pr ove t hat 3  5 2
134
is an ir r at ional number. x
999
[TERM 1, 2017]
CHAPTER 1 : Real Numbers 1.9

134 p
x  8  2 15 
9 111 q
p
134  2 15  8
x q
32 111
1 p 
The above expr essi on can-not be wr i t t en as  15    8
2 q 
2m  5n . [1]
 p 
5. Deci mal expansi on of a any r at i onal number  15    4
 2q 
t er mi nat es i f t he denomi nat or of t he r at i onal
number is in t he for m 2n5m T h e RH S i s t h e di f f er en ce of t w o r at i on al
number s.
1
L et t he number mult iplied by be x , Ther efor e L H S will also be r at ional.
7
But we know t hat 15 is ir r at ional.
1 1
x So our assumpt ion is wr ong. [1]
7 n m
2 5
2

7
H ence,  3 5  is an ir r at ional number..
x  [1]
2 n 5m 76 76
7. 
Now her e when n = 2 and m = 0 6250 55  2
H er e,
7 7
x 2 0
 76 p
2 5 4 is in t he for m of and q is in t he for m
6250 q
When n = 0, m = 2 of 2 n 5 m w h er e n an d m ar e n on - n egat i ve
Now if we put n = 2 and m = 2, int eger s. [1]

7 7 76
We have x  2 2  Hence has ter minating decimal expr ession.
100 6250
2 5
N ow,
7
H ence we can see t hat is smallest possible 76 76 76  24 76  16 1216
100    
6250 55  2 55  2  24 10 5 100000
1
r at ional number we mult iply by so t hat t he  0.01216
7
decimal expansion will t er minat e aft er 2 decimal 76
Thus t he decimal expansion of is 0.01216 .
places. [1] 6250
2 [1]
6. L et  3 5  is a r at ional number..
8. The fir st number t hat is divisible by 8 bet ween
200 and 500 is 208 and t he last number t hat is
2 p
  3 5  
q
Where p, q are co-prime divisible by 8 ar e 496.
So, t he sequence will be 208, 216, 224 .......... 496.
2 2 2
Using  a  b  a  b  2ab we get , Common differ ence d = 8
Fir st t er m a = 208 [1]
2 p
 3   5  2 3 5
q
[1] L et t her e be n t er ms is t he sequence
Using t he for mula an  a   n  1 d
p
 3  5  2 15 
q Wher e an  496, a  208 and d  8
1.10 CHAPTER 1 : Real Numbers

496  208   n  1 8 2

  3c  3b2
 n  1 8  288
 b2  3 c2
n  1  36 So, b2 is divisible by 3 and it can be said t hat b is
n = 37 divisible by 3.
Hence, between 200 and 500 ther e ar e 37 integer s This means t hat a and b have 3 as a common
t hat ar e divisible by 8. [1] fact or which is a cont r adict ion t o fact that a and b
p ar e co-pr ime.

9. Suppose 5  3 2   q p
H ence, 3 cannot be expr essed as q or 3 is
 
Now assume 5  3 2 is a r at ional number..
ir r at ional.
Ther efor e p and q should be co-pr ime number s.
[1] Si mi l ar l y, 2 i s i r r at i onal . The sum of t wo
ir r at ional number s is an ir r at ional number.
5  3 2   qp 3  2 is sum of t wo ir r at ional number s, hence
it is an ir r at ional number.
p
 5  3 2 H ence pr oved. [1]
q
11. I r rat ional numbers: ar e t hose number s t hat
p 5
   2 p
3q 3 cannot be wr it t en in for m wher e p and q ar e
q
p5
  2 int eger s and q  0 . I n ot her wor ds, t hese ar e t he
3q
n u m ber s wh ose deci m al expan si on i s n on -
Since 2 is ir r at ional number.. t er minating and non-r epeat ing.
Thus t he assumpt i on i s i ncor r ect and hence L et 3  2 5 be a r at ional number [1]
5  3 2  is an ir r at ional number..  We can find t wo int eger s a, b  b  0 such t hat
H ence pr oved. [1]
a
10. L et 3 is a r at ional number. So, t wo int eger s a 3 25  [1]
b
a
and b can be found so t hat 3 a
b 2
5 3
b
Assume t hat a and ar e co-pr ime.

 a  3b a
Since a and b ar e integer s,  3 is also a r ational
b
Squar ing bot h t he sides,
number and hence 2
5 should be r at ional. [1]
 a 2  3b2 [1]
So, a2 is divisible by 3 and it can be said t hat a is This cont r adict s t he fact t hat 2
5 is ir r at ional.
divisible by 3. Ther efor e, our assumpt ion s wr ong and hence,
L et a2 = 3c, wher e c is an int eger.
3  2 5 is an ir r at ional number.. [1]
a2  3b2
CHAPTER 1 : Real Numbers 1.11
1.12 CHAPTER 1 : Real Numbers
CHAPTER 2

Polynomials
Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams
Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Solving Equations 4 marks 3, 4 marks 3, 4 marks
Zeroes of Polynomial 3 marks 3 marks
2.14 CHAPTER 2 : Polynomials

[TOPIC 1] Zeroes of a Polynomial and Relationship

between Zeroes and Coefficients of Quadratic
Polynomials
Summary Thus, f ( x)  a0 x n  a1 x n 1  a2 xn  2    an 1 x  an is
a polynomial of degr ee n , if a0  0.
Polynomials On t he basi s of degr ee of a pol ynomi al , we have
following st andar d names for t he polynomials.
An expr ession p(x ) of t he for m p(x ) = a0x n + a1x n – 1 +
a2x n – 2 + ... + an wher e all a0, a1, a2, ..., an , ar e r eal A pol y n om i al of degr ee 1 i s cal l ed a l i n ear
number s and n is a non-negat ive int eger, is called a 1
polynomial. polynomial. Example: 2 x  3, u  7 et c.
3
The degr ee of a pol ynomi al i n one var i abl e i s t he
A pol yn om i al of degr ee 2 i s cal l ed a quadr at i c
gr eat est exponent of t hat var iable.
polynomial. Example: x 2 + 2x + 3, y 2 – 9 et c.
a0, a1, a2, ..., an ar e cal l ed t he co-effi ci ent s of t he
A polynomial of degr ee 3 is called a cubic polynomial.
polynomial p(x ).
an is called const ant t er m. Example: x3  7 x  3 ,  x3  x2  3 x et c.
A pol ynomi al of degr ee 4 i s cal l ed a biquadr at ic
Degree of a Polynomial
polynomial. Example: 3u 4  5u 3  2u 2  7 .
The exponent of t he t er m wit h t he highest power in a
polynomial is known as it s degr ee. Value of a Polynomial
f ( x)  8 x3  2 x2  8 x  21 an d g( x)  9 x2  3 x  12 I f f (x ) is a polynomial and  is any r eal number, t hen
t he r eal number obt ained by r eplacing x by  in f (x ) is
ar e polynomials of degr ee 3 and 2 r espect ively.
called t he value of f (x ) at x =  and is denot ed by f ().

PREVIOUS YEARS’
3. I n t he given figur e, t he number of zer oes of t he
polynomial f  x  ar e:

EXAMINATION QUESTIONS y

TOPIC 1
1 Mark Questions f (x )

1. The gr aph of t he polynomial p(x ) int er sect s t he

x’ x
x-axis t hr ee t imes in dist inct point s, t hen which –4 0 3 5
of t he following could be an expr ession for p(x ):
(a) 4 – 4x – x 2 + x 3 (b) 3x 2 + 3x – 3
(c) 3x + 3 (d) x 2 – 9 y’
[TERM 1, 2011]
(a) 1 (b) 2
2. The polynomial whose zer oes ar e – 5 and 4 is:
(c) 3 (d) 4
(a) x 2 – 5x + 4 (b) x 2 + 5x – 4
[TERM 1, 2013]
(c) x 2 + x – 20 (d) x 2 – 9x – 20
[TERM 1, 2012]
CHAPTER 2 : Polynomials 2.15

3. Fr om t he gr aph we can say t hat t he number of

2 Marks Questions t imes t he gr aph t ouches t he x-axis is 3.
3 2 So, t he number of zer oes of t he polynomial is 3.
4. Di vi de 6 x  13 x  x  2 by 2 x  1 , and fi nd
quot ient and r emainder. H ence t he cor r ect opt ion is (c). [1]
[TERM 1, 2011]
4. Use long division t o divide 6 x3  13 x2  x  2
5. Find a quadr at ic polynomial whose zer oes ar e
by 2x + 1.
2  3 and 2  3 .
[TERM 1, 2012] 3 x2  5 x  2
6. Find t he quadr at ic polynomial whose sum and 2 x  1 6 x3  13 x2  x  2
21 5
pr oduct of the zer oes ar e and r espectively..  (6 x3  3 x2 )
8 16
[TERM 1, 2012] 10 x2  x  2

3 Marks Questions  (10 x2  5 x)

7. F i n d t h e zer oes of t h e f ol l owi n g qu adr at i c  4x  2

polynomial and ver ify t he r elat ionship bet ween  (4 x  2)
t he zer oes and t he coefficient s. 0
2
2x  3  5x
[TERM 1, 2012] H ence, quot ient is 3 x2  5 x  2 and r emainder
8. Solve for x: is 0. [2]
5. L et t he zer oes of a quadr at ic polynomial be
1 1 2
  , x  1, 2,3
 x  1 x  2  x  2 x  3 3 a  2  3 and b  2  3
[TERM 1, 2014] We know t hat ,
 Solutions The quadr at ic polynomial wit h a and b as zer oes
is x2  (a  b) x  ab
1. I t i s gi ven t hat gr aph of t he pol ynomi al p (x )
inter sects the x -axis three times in distinct points, Subst i t ut i ng val ues of a and b i n t he above
so t he number of zer oes for t he polynomial is 3 equat ion, we get ,
and it is a t hir d degr ee polynomial of t he for m
 x2  (2  3  2  3) x  (2  3)(2  3) [1]
ax3  bx2  cx  d  0 wher e a  0.
Fr om t he given opt ions, t he one opt ion mat ching Applying, (a  b)(a  b)  a2  b2
wi t h t he st andar d equat i on of a t hi r d degr ee
 x2  4 x  (4  3)
polynomial is 4  4 x  x2  x3  x3  x2  4 x  4.
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (a). [1]  x2  4 x  1
2. L et a  5and b  4 H ence, t he r equi r ed quadr at i c pol ynomi al i s

Sum of zer oes x2  4 x  1 [1]

 a  b  5 4  1 ...(1) 6. L et t he polynomial be

Pr oduct of zer oes p( x)  ax2  bx  c

 a  b   5  4   20 ...(2) [½]
21
The gener al equat ion of t he quadr at ic is: I t s given t hat , Sum of zer oes =
8
x2  (a  b) x  ab  0 b 21
Substituting values fr om equation 1 and 2, we get,  
a 8
x 2  x  20  0 Assuming a = 1,
H ence, The polynomial whose zer oes ar e – 5 and 21
4 is (c). [½] b 
8
2.16 CHAPTER 2 : Polynomials

5 1
We also know t hat , Pr oduct of zer oes = Ther efor e,   and   3 ar e the r oots/zer oes
16 2
of t he given equat ion. [1]
c 5
  N ow, we ver i fy t he r el at i onshi p bet ween t he
a 16
zer oes and t he coefficient s. We know t hat :
Assuming a = 1,
coefficient of x
Sum of zer oes = 
5 coefficient of x2
 c
16 b
i.e.     
21 5 a
Now, a  1, b   ,c [1] LH S
8 16
1 5
H ence, t he r equir ed quadr at ic polynomial     3 
2 2
= ax 2  bx  c RHS
Subst it ut ing t he values of a, b and c in t he above b 5
  
equat ion, we get , a 2
Ther efor e, L H S = RH S
21 5 Const ant t er m
x2  x Pr oduct of zer oes =
8 16 Coefficient of x2
M ult iply t he equat ion by 16. c
   
 16 x 2  42 x  5 a
LH S
H ence, t he r equi r ed quadr at i c pol ynomi al i s
1 3
 3  
16 x 2  42 x  5 [1] 2 2
RHS
7. L et p  x   2 x 2  5 x  3 Const ant t erm 3 3
 
Zer o of t he polynomial is t he value of x wher e 2 2 2
Coefficient of x
p(x ) = 0. So, equat e t he given expr ession wit h 0, Ther efor e, L H S = RH S.
we get :
As in bot h t he condit ions, L H S = RH S, t her efor e
2 x2  5 x  3  0 the relationship between coefficient and the zeroes
is ver ified. [1]
Compar e t he given equat ion wit h t he gener al
8. Solving for x , using common denominat or
equat ion ax 2  bx  c , we get :
x 3 x 1 2
a  2, b  5, c  3 [1]  
 x  1 x  2 x  3 3
L et ,  and  ne t he r oot s of t he given equat ion. 2x  4 2
  [1]
Find t he r oot s of t he given equat i on by using  x  1 x  2 x  3 3
quadr atic for mula: Cancel out like t er ms
2( x  2) 2
b  b2  4 ac 5  25  4  2  (3)  
  x  1 x  2 x  3 3
2a 22
Cr oss mult iply
5  25  24 5  49 5  7  3   x  1 x  3 [1]
 
4 4 4
 x2  3 x  x  3  3
So, t he r oot s will be:
 x2  4 x  0
5  7 2 1
    x  x  4  0
4 4 2
H ence, x = 0 and x – 4 = 0
5  7 12 Ther efor e, x = 0 and x = 4. [1]
   3
4 4
CHAPTER 2 : Polynomials 2.17

[TOPIC 2] Problems on Polynomials

Summary (ii) We find t hat y = ax 2 + bx + c r epr esent s a par abola

opening upwar ds. Ther efor e, a > 0. The t ur ning
point of t he par abola is in four t h quadr ant .
Zeros of a Polynomial
b
  0
A r eal number  is a zer o of polynomial f (x ) if f () = 0. 2a
b  – b>0
T h e zer o of a l i n ear pol yn om i al ax + b i s  .
a  b<0
Const ant t er m y
i.e. 
Coefficient of x
Geomet r ically zer o of a polynomial is t he point wher e
2
y = ax + bx + c
t he gr aph of t he funct ion cut s or t ouches x -axis.
When t he gr aph of t he polynomial does not meet t he x
O
x
x -axis at all, t he polynomial has no r eal zer o.
A
Q
Signs of Coefficients of a Quadratic y (–b/2a, –D/4a)
Polynomial Par abola y = ax 2 + bx + c cut s y -axis at Q and
The gr aphs of y = ax 2 + bx + c ar e given in figur e. y -axis. We have x = 0. Ther efor e, on put t ing x = 0
I dent ify t he signs of a, b and c in each of t he following: in y = ax 2 + bx + c, we get y = c.
(i) We obser ve t hat y = ax 2 + bx + c r epr esent s a So, t he coor dinat es of Q ar e (0, c). As Q lies on
par abola opening downwar ds. Ther efor e, a < 0. We negat ive y-axis. Ther efor e, c < 0.
 b D H ence, a > 0, b < 0 and c < 0.
obser ve t hat t he t ur ning point   , of t he
 2a 4 a  (iii)Cl ear ly, y = ax 2 + bx + c r epr esent s a par abola
par abola is in fir st quadr ant wher e D  b2  4 ac opening upwar ds.
Ther efor e, a > 0. The t ur ning point of t he par abola
lies on posit ive dir ect ion of x-axis.
b
  0
2a b
  0
 – b<0 2a
 – b>0
 b>0 [a  0]
 b<0
y
2
y y = ax + bx + c
(–b/2a, –D/4a)
Q
A

x x
O Q A
x x
2 O
y = ax + bx + c (– b/2a, –D/4 a)
y
y
Par abola y = ax 2+ bx + c cut s y -axi s at Q. On
y -axis, we have x = 0. The par abola y = ax 2 +
bx + c cut s y -axis at Q which
Put t ing x = 0 in y = ax 2 + bx + c, we get y = c. lies on positive y-axis. Putting x = 0 in y = ax2 + bx + c
we get y = c. So, t he coor dinat es of Q ar e (0, c).
So, t he coor dinat es of Q ar e (0, c). As Q lies on t he
Clear ly, Q lies on OY .
posit ive dir ect ion of y -axis. Ther efor e, c > 0.
 c > 0.
H ence, a < 0, b > 0 and c > 0.
H ence, a > 0, b < 0, and c > 0.
2.18 CHAPTER 2 : Polynomials

(iv) The par abola y = ax 2 + bx + c opens downwar ds.

 b D
(vi) Clear ly, a < 0 Tur ning point   ,   of t he
 b D  2a 4 a 
Therefore, a < 0. The turning point   ,   of
 2a 4 a  par abola lies in t he four t h quadr ant .
t he par abola is on negat ive x -axis, b
  0
b 2a
  0
2a b
 0
2a
 b<0 [a  0]
 b>0 [a  0]
y
y

(– b/2a, –D/4 a)
x x x x
A O O (–b/2a, –D /4a)
Q
Q A
y y
2
y = ax + bx + c
2
Par abola y = ax 2 + bx + c cut s y -axis at Q (0, c) y = ax + bx + c
which lies on negat ive y-axis. Ther efor e, c < 0. As Q (0, c) lies on negat ive y -axis. Ther efor e, c < 0.
H ence, a < 0, b < 0 and c < 0. H ence, a < 0, b > 0 and c < 0.
(v) We not ice t hat t he par abola y = ax 2 + bx + c opens  T he gr a ph of qu adr a t i c pol ynomi al i s a
upwar ds. Ther efor e, a > 0. par abol a.
 I f a is +ve, graph opens upward.
 b D
Tur ning point   , of t he par abola lies in I f a is – ve, graph opens downward.
 2 a 4 a  
 I f D > 0, parabola cuts x-axis at two points i.e.
t he fir st quadr ant .
it has two zeros.
b
  0
2a

b
 0
2a

 b<0 [a  0]

2
y = ax + bx + c
I f D = 0, parabola touches x-axis at one point
y i.e. it has one zero.
I f D < 0, parabola does not even touch x-axis
Q
at all i.e. it has no real zero.
A

x
(–b/2a, –D/4a)
x
Division Algorithm for Polynomials
O
L et p(x ) and g(x ) be polynomials of degr ee n and m
r espect ively such t hat m  n . Then t her e exist unique
y polynomi al s q(x ) and r (x ) wher e r (x ) i s ei t her zer o
polynomial or degr ee of r (x ) < degr ee of g(x ) such t hat
As Q (0, c) lies on posit ive y -axis. Ther efor e, c > 0. p(x ) = q(x ) . g(x ) + r (x ).
H ence, a > 0, b < 0 and c > 0. p(x ) is dividend, g(x ) is divisor.
q(x ) is quot ient , r (x ) is r emainder
CHAPTER 2 : Polynomials 2.19

PREVIOUS YEARS’  Solutions

1. Using t he long division we get ,
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS x2  4 x  1
TOPIC 2 x2  2 x  35 x4  6 x3  26 x 2  138 x  35
x4  2 x3  35 x2
2 Marks Question  + +
1. Find the quotient and remainder when polynomial
 4 x3  9 x 2  138 x  35
4 3 2 is di v i ded by
x  6 x  26 x  138 x  35
 4 x3  8 x 2  140 x
x 2  2 x  35 . +  
[TERM 1, 2015] x2  2 x  35
3 Marks Questions x2  2 x  35
 + +
2. On dividing x3  2 x2  x  2 by a polynomial g(x ),
0
t he quot i ent and r emai nder wer e x  2 and
 2 x  4 r espect ively. Find g(x ). H en ce t h e qu ot i en t i s x 2  4 x  1 an d t h e
r emainder is 0. [2]
[TERM 1, 2011]
2. Dividend = Divisor × Quot ient + Remainder
3. Find all t he zer oes of x3  11 x 2  23 x  35 , if t wo
H er e, dividend  x3  2 x 2  x  2
of it s zer oes ar e 1 and – 5.
[TERM 1, 2012] Quot ient  x  2 and
4. I f two zer oes of t he polynomial x 4 + 3x 3 – 20x 2 – 6x Remainder  2 x  4
+ 36 ar e 2 and  2 , find all t he zer oes of t he Divisor  g  x 
polynomial.
[TERM 1, 2013]  x3  2 x2  x  2  g  x    x  2   2 x  4  [1]

5. I f x3  4 x2  5 x  k i s compl et el y di vi si bl e by Subt r act ing  2 x  4 fr om bot h si des of above

x – 4, t hen find t he value of k. equat ion,
[TERM 1, 2014]
 x 3  2 x 2  x  2  2 x  4  g  x    x  2
6. W h at sh ou l d be added i n t h e pol y n om i al
 x3  2 x2  3 x  6  g  x    x  2  [1]
3 x4  4 x3  6 x2  4 so t h at i t i s com pl et el y
divisible by x 2 – 2. Divide t he above equat ion by  x  2 ,
[TERM 1, 2015]

4 Marks Questions x3  2 x2  3 x  6
g  x 
x2
7. Find all t he zer oes of 2 x4  7 x3  19 x 2  14 x  30
x 2  x  2  3  x  2
given t hat t wo of it s zer oes ar e 2 and  2 .  g  x 
x2
[TERM 1, 2011]

8. I f t he pol ynomi al x 4  6 x3  16 x2  25 x  10 i s
 x  2   x 2  3
 g  x   x2  3
x2
divided by x2  2 x  k , t he r emainder comes out
t o be x + a find k and a. H ence, t he value of g  x is x 2 – 3. [1]
[TERM 1, 2012]
2.20 CHAPTER 2 : Polynomials

3. Consider t he polynomial x3  11 x 2  23 x  35  ( x2  2)  x  6  x  3
Let,  and  are zeroes of the quadratic polynomial   x  6 x  3  0
so,
  x  6  0 and  x  3  0
  1 and   5
 x  6 and x  3
     5 1  4 Ther efor e t he ot her zer oes ar e 3 and – 6. [1]
   5  1   5 [1]
5. I f x3  4 x 2  5 x  k i s compl et el y di vi si bl e by
So, t he gener al equat ion can be wr it t en as: x – 4, Then using long division

x 2       x    0 x2  5
3 2
x  4 x  4 x  5x  k
Or, x 2   4  x – 5  0
x3  4 x2
 
 x2  4 x – 5  0 ....(i) [1]
0 0  5x  k
Divide t he given polynomial by (i)
5 x  20
[2]
x7  
x2  4 x  5 x3  11 x2  23 x  35  k  20  0
3 2 H er e t he r emainder is zer o,

 x  4 x  5x  H ence,
7 x 2  28 x  35
 k  20  0
7 x 2  28 x  35 k = 20 [1]
0 6. Solving using long division we get ,
Ther efor e, we get anot her polynomial x + 7 3 x2  4 x
Put t he polynomial equal t o zer o, we get ; x 2  2 3 x 4  4 x3  6 x 2  4
x+7=0 3 x4  6 x2
 x=–7  +
H ence, all t he zer oes of t he polynomial 1, – 5 ar e
– 7. [1]  4 x3 +4
3
 4x +8 x
4. L et p  x   x 4  3 x3  20 x2  6 x  36 [2]
+ 
gi v en 2 and  2 ar e t h e zer oes of t h e  8x  4
polynomial. Her e t he r emainder is  8 x  4 which can become
zer o t o make t he given polynomial divisible by
H ence x  
2 and x   
2 ar e t he fact or s of
x 2  2 on adding it s compliment i.e. on adding
t he given polynomial. t o t he given polynomial.

x  2  x  2   x2  2 [1] H ence, 8x – 4 must be added t o t he polynomial

3 x4  4 x3  6 x2  4 so t h at i t i s com pl et el y
4 3
On di vi di ng ( x  3 x  20 x  6 x  36) wi t h 2
divisible by x 2 – 2. [1]

( x2  2) we get t he quot ient as ( x2  3 x - 18) 7. The fact or s of 2 x4  7 x3  19 x 2  14 x  30 ar e

( x4  3 x3  20 x2  6 x  36)  ( x2  2) ( x2  3 x  18) x  2 and x  2 .

 ( x2  2) ( x2  6 x  3 x  18)  
 x  2 x  2 is a fact or of 
 ( x2  2)  x  x  6   3  x  6  [1] 2 x4  7 x3  19 x 2  14 x  30 . [1]
CHAPTER 2 : Polynomials 2.21

4 3 2 8. L et p( x)  x4  6 x3  16 x2  25 x  10
 x2  2 is a fact or of 2 x  7 x  19 x  14 x  30 .

D i v i de 2 x4  7 x3  19 x 2  14 x  30 by x 2 – 2 And q(x)  ( x2  2 x  k)
using long division,
Di vide p( x) by q( x)
2 x2  7 x  15

x2  2 2 x4  7 x3  19 x2  14 x  30 x2  4 x  8  k
x2  2 x  k x4  6 x3  16 x2  25 x  10
 2 x4
  4 x2  x4  2 x3  kx2

7 x3  15 x 2  14 x  30  4 x3  16 x2  kx2  25 x  10
 4 x3  8 x 2  4 kx
 7 x3
  14 x  8 x2  kx2  25 x  4 kx  10
2
 15 x  30 8 x2  16 x  8k [2]
 15 x2
  30  [1]  kx2  9 x  4 kx  10  8 k
 kx2  2 kx  k2
0
 9 x  2 kx  10  8 k  k 2
2 x  7 x  19 x  14 x  30  x  2 2 x  7 x  15
4 3 2
 2
 2

H ence, Remainder  9 x  2 kx  10  8 k  k 2
2

Fact or ize 2 x  7 x  15 , 
  2 k  9  x  k 2  8 k  10
4 3 2
 2 x  7 x  19 x  14 x  30 
I t s given, Remainder = x + a
2
x  2 2 x2  10 x  3 x  15
  On compar ing t he coefficient s of x , we get ,
2k  9  1
 2 x4  7 x3  19 x2  14 x  30 
2 k5 [1]
x 
 2  2 x  x  5  3  x  5 
Also, k 2  8 k  10  a
4 3 2
 2 x  7 x  19 x  14 x  30 
Put k  5 in above equat ion, we get ,
2 [1]
x 2   x  5 2x  3 a  25  40  10
Equat ing t o zer o,
a  5
2 H ence, k = 5 and a = – 5. [1]
x  2  0, x  5  0 and 2 x  3  0

3
 x   2 , x  5 and x 
2

3
H ence, t he zer os ar e 2 ,  2 , – 5 and [1]
2
2.22 CHAPTER 2 : Polynomials
CHAPTER 3

Linear Equation
Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams
Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Word Problem based on Boat and Stream 4 marks 4 marks 4 marks 4 marks
Word Problem based on Time and Work 4 marks
Word Problem based on Speed, Time 3 marks 3 marks 4, 4 marks
and Distance
Word Problem based on Rectangle 2 marks 2 marks
3.24 CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation

[TOPIC 1] Linear Equations (Two Variables)

Summary System of Two Simultaneous Linear

Equations in X and Y
Pai r o f L i n ear Eq u at i o n s i n Tw o Consistent system: A syst em of t wo linear equat ions
is said t o be consist ent if it has at least one solut ion.
Variables
I ncon si st en t syst em : A sy st em of t w o l i n ear
1. The equat ion of t he for m ax = b or ax + b = 0, equations is said to be inconsist ent if it has no solution.
wher e a and b ar e t wo r eal number s such t hat L et a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 is a syst em
x  0 and x is a var iable is called a linear equat ion of t wo linear equat ions.
in one var iable.
The following cases occur :
2. The gener al for m of a l i near equat i on i n t wo
a1 b1
var iables is ax + by + c = 0 or ax + by = c wher e (i) if  , it has a unique solut ion. The gr aph of
a2 b2
a, b, c ar e r eal number s and a  0, b  0 and x , y
l i n es i n t er sect s at on e poi n t . T h e syst em i s
ar e var iables.
independent consist ent .
3. The gr aph of a linear equat ion in two var iables is a
st r aight line.
4. The gr aph of a linear equat ion in one var iable is a
straight line par allel to x -axis for ay = b and par allel (x, y)
t o y -axis for ax = b, wher e a  0.
5. A pai r of l i near equat i ons i n t wo var i abl es i s
sai d t o for m a syst em of si mul t aneous l i near
equations. a1 b1 c1
(ii) if   . I t has no solut ion. The gr aph of
6. The value of t he var iable x and y sat isfying each a2 b2 c2
one of t he equat ions in a given syst em of linear bot h lines is par allel t o each ot her. The syst em is
equat ions in x and y si mult aneously is called a inconsist ent
solut ion of t he syst em.

Graphical Method of Solution of a

Pair of Linear Equations
1. Read t he pr oblem car efully t o find t he unknowns
(var iables) which ar e t o be calculat ed.
2. Depict t he unknowns by x and y et c. a1 b1 c1
(iii)i f   . I t has i nfi ni t e many sol ut i ons.
3. Use t he given condit ions in t he pr oblem t o make a2 b2 c2
equat ions in unknown x and y . Ever y solution of one equat ion is a solut ion of other
4. M ake t he pr oper t ables for bot h t he equat ions. also. The gr aph of both equations is coincident lines.
The syst em is dependent consist ent .
5. Dr aw t he gr aph of bot h t he equat ions on t he same
set of axis.
6. L ocat e t he co-or dinat es of point of int er sect ion of
t he gr aph, if any.
7. Coor dinat es of point of int er section will give us the
r equir ed solut ion.
CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation 3.25

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 8. D r aw the gr aph s of t he equ at i on s

x – y  1  0 and 3 x  2 y – 12  0 . Wr i t e t he

EXAMINATION QUESTIONS co-or dinates of t he ver tices of t he t r iangle for med

by t hese l i nes and t he x-axi s and shade t he
TOPIC 1 cor r esponding t r iangular r egion.
[TERM 1, 2013]
1 Mark Questions 9. Check gr aphically whet her t he following pair of
1. Which of the following is not a solut ion of the pair l i near equat i ons i s consi st ent . I f yes, sol ve i t
of equations 3 x  2 y  4 and 6x – 4y = 8? graphically
2 x  5  0 and x  y  0
(a) x  2, y  1 (b) x  4, y  4
[TERM 1, 2014]
(c) x  6, y  7 (d) x  5, y  3
10. Deter mine gr aphically whether the following pair
[TERM 1, 2011] of linear equat ions
2. x = 2, y = 3 is a solution of the linear equat ion:
2x  3 y  8
(a) 2 x  3 y  13  0 (b) 3 x  2 y  31  0 4 x  6 y  16

(c) 2 x  3 y  13  0 (d) 2 x  3 y  13  0 has

[TERM 1, 2012] (i) A unique solut ion
(ii) I nfinit ely many solut ions
3. The pair of equations y  0 and y  – 5 has
(iii)No solut ion
(a) One solut ion (b) Two solut ion
[TERM 1, 2015]
(c) Thr ee solut ion (d) No solut ion
[TERM 1, 2013]
4 Marks Questions
4. Find whether the lines r epr esenting the following 11. Dr aw t he gr aphs of t he following equat ions:
pair of linear equation int er sect at a point, ar e x+y=5
par allel or coincident: x– y=5
3 5 3 2 (i) Find t he solut ion of t he equat ions fr om t he
x  y  7 and x y  6 gr aph.
2 3 2 3
(ii) Shade t he t r i angul ar r egion for med by t he
[TERM 1, 2016]
lines and t he y-axis.
2 Marks Questions [TERM 1, 2011]

5. F or w h at v al u e of k, 2x  3 y  4 an d 12. Check gr aphically, whet her t he pair of sequence

is consist ent . I f so, t hen solve t hem gr aphically.
 k  2 x  3 k  2 w i l l h av e i n f i n i t el y m an y x + 3y = 6
sol ut i ons. 2x – 3y = 12
[TERM 1, 2011] [TERM 1, 2012]
6. F or w h at val u e of c, t h e pai r of equ at i on s 13. Sol ve t he fol l owi ng pai r of l i near equat i ons
x – 4 y  2 and 3 x  cy  10 has no sol ut ion? graphically 6 x  y  4  0 and 2 x  5 y  8.
[TERM 1, 2013] Shade the r egion bounded by the lines and y-axis.

3 Marks Questions [TERM 1, 2016]

7. For whi ch value of k wil l t he fol lowing pai r of 14. Find t he gr aphically solut ion of x  2 y  0 and
li near equat i ons have no sol ut ion? 3 x  4 y  20
3 x  y  1,  2k  1 x   k  1 y  2 k  1 [TERM 1, 2017]

[TERM 1, 2012]
3.26 CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation

 Solutions 4. Compar e given equat ions wit h ax  by  c ,

1. Check ever y opt ion one by one. 3 5

x y7
(a) The value of y for x = 2 is 2 3
3 3 3 5
x  2   2  2  1 which is t r ue.  a1  , b1  and c1  7
2 2 2 3
(b) The value of y for x = 4 is
3 2
x y 6
3 3 2 3
x  2   4   2  4 which is t r ue.
2 2
3 2
 a2  , b  and c2  6 [½]
3 3 2 2 3
(c) The value of y for x = 6 is x  2   6   2  7
2 2 N ow,
which is t r ue.
(d) The value of y for x = 5 is 3 5
a1 2 b1 3 5
3 3 11  1  
x  2   5  2  a2 3 and b2 2 2
which is not equal t o
2 2 2 2 3
given value is of .
H er e,
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (d). [1]
2. We have, a1 b1

a2 b2
x  2and y  3
Let us subst itut e the above values in the equat ion Thus,t he lines for med by following pair of linear
equat ion int er sect at a point . [½]
2 x  3 y  13  0 , we get
5. The given equat ions ar e 2 x  3 y  4.......(i ) and
LHS   2  2   3  3  13  4  9  13  13  13  0
 k  2 x  3k  2.......(ii )
RH S = 0
Since, L H S = RH S, t he r equir ed linear equat ion For infinit ely many solut ions,

is 2 x  3 y  13  0 . a1 c1

H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (a). [1] a2 c2
3. Bot h t he lines y = 0 and y = – 5 r epr esent par allel H er e, a1  2, a2  k  2, c1  4 and c2  3 k  2 .
lines. H ence t hey do not int er sect and don't have
a solut ion. 2 4

k  2 3k  2
y
 2  3 k  2   4  k  2 [1]
10
y =5
Using the distr ibutive pr oper ty a  b  c  ab  ac
5
 6k  4  4k  8
x
 2k  4
– 10 –5 5 10
Divide t he above equat ion by 2,
–5
y =0 k=2
– 10 H ence, for k = 2, 2 x  3 y  4 and

 k  2 x  3 k  2 w i l l h av e i n f i n i t el y m an y
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (d). [1]
solut ions. [1]
CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation 3.27

6. Given equat ions ar e 8. x  y  1  0

x – 4 y  2 and 3 x  cy  10 Or
Compar ing t he equat ions wit h ax + by = c, we get x  y 1
a1  1, a2  3, b1  4 and b2  c [1]
For equat ion t o have no solut ion, X 0 1 2
Y 1 2 3
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
3 x  2 y  12  0
1 4
   3 x  12  2 y
3 c
Di vi de t he above equat ion by 3,
 c  4  3
12  2 y
 c  12 x
3
H ence, t he value of c for equat ions t o have no
solut ion is – 12. [1] x 4 2 0
7. Consider 3 x  y  1 and y 0 3 6 [1]
 2k  1 x   k  1 y  2k  1 H ence, t he gr aphic r epr esent at ion i s as foll ows:

Com par e t h e abov e t w o equ at i on s w i t h

ax  by  c , we get ,

a1  3, b1  1, c1  1

a2  2 k  1, b2  k  1, c2  2 k  1 [1]
We k now t hat for no sol ut ion,

a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2

3 1 1
Or,  
2k  1 k  1 2k  1
Consider
[1]
3 1 Fr om t he fi gur e, i t can be obser ved t hat t hese

2k  1 k  1 li nes ar e i nt er sect ing each ot her at poi nt (2, 3)
 3( k  1)  2 k  1 [1] an d x- axi s at (– 1, 0) an d (4, 0). T her efor e
t he ver t i ces of t he t r iangle ar e (2, 3), (– 1, 0) and
Applying dist r ibut ive pr oper t y, (4, 0) [1]
Or 3 k  3  2 k  1 9. To plot 2x – 5 = 0, set of point s we have,
Subt r act 2k on bot h si des and t hen, we get , 5
x=
 3k  2k  3  2k  2k  1 2

 k  3  1 for all values of y

To pl ot x + y = 0, set of poi nt s we have,
Now add 3 on bot h si des,
 k  3  3  1  3 x 0 1 –2
k=2 y 0 –1 2 [1]
H ence, for k = 3 t he equat ions have no sol ut ion.
[1]
3.28 CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation

Pl ot t he point s t o obt ain t he gr aph.

Gr aph we have i s: x y
y
4 0
10

8
Point of 0 
5 I nter section
3
 5  5
 , 
2 2
x 7 2
– 10 –5 5 10 [1]
(0, 0)
–5 Pl ot t ing t hese point s we obt ain t he gr aph as:

y
– 10 10

[1]
x I nt ercept
As we can see fr om t he gr aph t he li nes int er sect 5
(4, 0)

each ot her at point , hence t hey ar e consist ent

2x – 3y = 8
 5 5
and have a uni que sol ut i on  ,   . x
2 2 – 10 –5
H ence t he syst em is consist ent and t he solut i on 4 x – 6 y = 16
5 5
is x  , y   . [1]
2 2
y I nt ercept

10. 2 x  3 y  8  8
 0, 
3
 3 y  2x  8
Since t he gr aph is a pair of coincident lines. Each
2x  8 point on t he l ines is a solut i on and so t he pai r of
 y
3 equat ions have infinit ely many solut ions. H ence,
Su bst i t u t i n g ar bi t r ar y v al u es of x t o get t he cor r ect opt i on is (ii ). [1]
cor r espondi ng y val ues we get , 11. (i ) Pl ot t h e equ at i on s of t h e t w o l i n es
x  y  5, x  y  5 .
x y For x  y  5 ,

4 0 x y
0 5
8
0  5 0
3
1 4 [1]
7 2
For x  y  5 ,
[1]
x y
Now 4 x  6 y  16
0 5
 6 y  4 x  16
5 0
4 x  16
 y
6 6 1
[1]
Agai n subst it ut i ng ar bit r ar y values of x t o get
cor r espondi ng y val ues we get ,
CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation 3.29

Pl ot t he point s on gr aph. When x = 3, we have, y = – 2

The sol ut ion of equat ions is point of int er sect i on When x = 6, we have, y = 0
of t wo li nes. H ence, pl ot t ing bot h equat ions on t he gr aph,

y Y
7
10
x – y =5 6
5
x +y =5 5
x 4
– 10 –5

(5, 0) 3
3y +
2 x–
6=
0

[1] 1 (6, 0)
(3, 1) X
H ence, t he sol ut ion i s (5, 0).
–1 0 1 2 3 4 = 05 6 7
(ii) The t r iangular r egion for med by the lines and 12
–1 x–
t he y axi s i s shown below. +2
3y
–2 (3, – 2)
y Y’
10 [1]
x – y =5 Si nce, fr om t he gr aph it i s clear t hat bot h t he
A li nes int er sect at a common point (6, 0).
5
x +y =5 × H ence, t he given equat ions ar e consi st ent and
B t he sol ut ion i s (6, 0). [1]
x
13. Consider 6 x  y  4  0
– 10 –5
×  y  6x  4
–5
C (5, 0) When x = 0 t hen y = 6(0) + 4 = 4
When x = 1, t hen y = 6(1) + 4 = 10
– 10
The t able gi ves poi nt s for 6 x  y  4  0

ABC i s t he r equi r ed r egion. [1] x 0 1

y 4 10 [1]
12. x  3y  6 (1)

2 x  3 y  12 (2) For, 2 x  5 y  8
Solving equat ion 1,  5 y  2x  8
We have x  3 y  6
2x  8
 y
 3y  6  x [1] 5
When x = 0, we have, y = 2
2  4  8
When x = 3, we have, y = 1 When x = 4, t hen y  0
5
Solving equat ion 2,
We have, 2 x  3 y  12 2  9  8 10
When x = 9, t hen y   2
5 5
2 x  12
 y [1] The t able gives point s for 2x – 5y = 8
3
3.30 CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation

x 4 9 Al so, 3 x  4 y  20 .......(ii)

y 0 2 On simpli fying Eqn. (ii ), we get

[1]
So t he desi r ed gr aph i s: 20  4 y
x
3
y Subst it ut e val ue of y t o get val ue of x
10
6x – y + 4 = 0
(1, 10) x 8 4 0
(9, 2) y 1 2 5 [1]
5 (0, 4)
(4, 0)
Pl ot t he point s on a gr aph.
x
– 10 –5 5 10 3x + 4y = 20
y
–5
Point of I nt er sect i on
(– 1, – 2)
2x – 5y = 8 8 Point of I ntersection
(4, 2)
– 10 6
4
[1] 2
The r egion bounded by t he li nes and t he y axis is
x
shaded in t he gr aph.
The poi nt of i nt er sect i on of t wo equat i ons i s –8 –6 –4 –2 2 4 6 8
–2
(– 1, – 2) . H ence t he solut ion i s (– 1, – 2). [1]
–4
14. H er e, x  2 y  0 ......(i)
–6
On simpli fying equat i on (i ), we get x – 2y = 0
x = 2y –8
Subst it ut e val ue of y t o get val ue of x
[1]
x 0 2 4 As t he bot h t he li nes i nt er sect at (4, 2), t her efor e
y 0 1 2 [1] t he sol ut i on of x  2 y  0 and 3 x  4 y  20 i s
(4, 2). [1]
CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation 3.31

[TOPIC 2] Different Methods to Solve Quadratic

Equations
Summary a1 x  b1 y  c1  0 ...(i)

a2 x  b2 y  c2  0 ...(ii)
Methods of Solving Linear Equation
1. Find t he value of one var iable, say y in t er ms of
E L I M I N AT I O N M E T H O D ( E l i mi nat i n g On e ot her var i abl e, i .e. x fr om equat i on (i ), t o get
var iable by making t he coefficient equal t o get equat ion (iii).
the value of one variable and than put it in any 2. Find t he value of t he same var iable (as in st ep 1) in
equat ion t o find ot her variable). t er ms of ot her var iable fr om equat ion (ii) t o get
1. Fir st mult iply bot h t he equat ions by some suit able equat ion (iv).
non-zer o const ant s t o make t he coefficient s of one 3. By equat ing t he var iable fr om equat ion (iii) and
var iable (eit her x or y ) numer ically equal.
(iv) obt ained in above t wo st eps. We get t he value
2. Then add or subt r act one equat ion fr om t he ot her of second var iable.
so t hat one var iable get s eliminat ed. I f you get an
4. Subst it ut ing t he value of above said var iable in
equat ion in one var iable, go t o st ep 3.
equat ion (iii), we get t he value of anot her var iable.
3. Sol ve t he equat i on i n one var i abl e ( x or y ) so
obt ained t o get it s value. CROSS M U LTI PLI CATI ON M ETH OD
4. Subst it ut e t his value of x (or y ) in eit her of t he L et t he equat ion
or iginal equat ions t o get t he value of t he ot her a1 x  b1 y  c1  0 …(i )
var iable.
 I f equat ions ar e of t he following for m: a2 x  b2 y  c2  0 …(i i )
ax + by = cxy To obt ain t he values of x and y, we follow t hese st eps:
dx + ey = fxy 1. M ult iply Equat ion (i) by b2 and (ii) by b1, t o get
Then, t r ivial solut ions x = 0, y = 0 is one solut ion
b2 a1 x  b2 b1 y  b2 c1  0 …(i i i )
an d t h e ot h er sol u t i on can be obt ai n ed by
eliminat ion met hod. b1 a2 x  b1b2 y  b1 c2  0 …(i v )
a  b  ab 2. Subt r act ing Equat ion (iv) fr om (iii), we get :
SU BST I T U T I ON M E T H OD (F ind t he value of
(b2 a1  b1 a2 ) x  (b2 b1  b1b2 ) y  (b2 c1  b1 c2 )  0
any one variable in terms of other and than use
i t t o f i n d ot h er va r i abl e f r om t h e secon d
equat ion). i .e. (b2 a1  b1 a2 ) x  b1 c2  b2 c1
1. Find t he value of one var iable, say y in t er ms of
t he ot her var i abl e, i.e., x fr om ei t her equat i on, b1 c2  b2 c1
So, x  , if a1 b2  a2 b1  0 …(v)
whichever is convenient . a1b2  a2 b1
2. Subst it ut e t his value of y in t he ot her equat ion,
and r educe it t o an equat ion in one var iable, i.e., 3. Subst it ut ing t his value of x in (i) or (ii), we get
in t er ms of x , which can be solved.
c1 a2  c2 a1
3. Subst it ut e t he value of x (or y ) obt ained in St ep 2 y …(vi )
a1b2  a2b1
in t he equat ion used in St ep 1 t o obt ain t he value
of t he ot her var iable. We can wr it e t he solut ion given by equat ions (v)
COM PARI SON M EH TOD (Find the value of one and (vi) in t he following for m:
variable from both the equation and equate them
to get the value of other variable). x y 1
  …(vi i )
b1 c2  b2 c1 c1 a2  c2 a1 a1b2  a2 b1
L et any pair of linear equat ions in t wo var iables is of
t he for m
3.32 CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation

I n r emember ing t he above r esul t , t he foll owi ng  F or t he equa t i ons l i k e a1 x  b1 y  c1 a nd

diagr am may be helpful :
x y 1
a2 x  b2 y  c2 . T he sol ut i on set can be
calculated by using
b1 c1 a1 b1
...(viii)
b2 c2 a2 b2 x y 1
 
For solving a pair of linear equat ions by t his met hod, b1 c2  b2 c1 c1 a2  c2 a1 a1b2  a2 b1
we will follow t he following st eps:
(Please note position of c1 and c2 with equality
1. Wr it e t he given equat ions in t he for m (i) and (ii).
sign and subsequent change in the third term
2. Tak i n g t he hel p of t he di agr am above, wr i t e i.e. – 1)
equat ions as given in (viii).
3. Find x and y .

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 6. Solve t he following pair of equat ions:

49 x  51 y  499 and 51x  49 y  501

EXAMINATION QUESTIONS [TERM 1, 2014]

4 5 3
TOPIC 2 7. Sol v e t h e equ at i on ,
x
3
2x  3
; x  0,
2
,
for x .
2 Marks Question [TERM 1, 2014]
1. Seema can r ow downst r eam 20km in 2 hour s and 8. Solve for x and y :
upst r eam 4 km in 2 hour s. Find her speed of
2 1
r owing in st ill wat er and the speed of the cur r ent .  4
x 1 y 1
[TERM 1, 2017]
4 1
3 Marks Questions 
x 1 y 1
 10
2. Solve for x and y . [TERM 1, 2015]
99 x  101 y  1499 9. Solve for x :
101 x  99 y  1501 2x 1 3x  9 3
   0, x  3, 
[TERM 1, 2011] x  3 2 x  3  x  3 2 x  3 2
3. Places A and B ar e 100 km apar t on a highway. [TERM 1, 2016]
One car st ar t s fr om A and anot her fr om B at t he 10. Solve by eliminat ion
same time. I f t he car s tr avel in the same dir ection 3 x  y  5 and 5 x – y  11
at differ ent speeds, t hey meet in 5 hour s. I f t hey
[TERM 1, 2016]
t r avel t owar ds each ot her t hey meet in 1 hour.
What ar e t he speeds of t he t wo car s? 4 Marks Questions
[TERM 1, 2011] 11. The numer at or of a fr act ion is 3 l ess t han i t s
4. The sum of digit s of a t wo-digit number is 7. I f denominat or. I f 1 is added t o t he denominat or,
the digits ar e r eversed, the new number decreased 1
by 2 equals t wice t he or iginal number. Find t he the fr action is decr eased by . Find the fr act ion.
15
number.
[TERM 1, 2012]
[TERM 1, 2012]
12. I n a flight of 2800 km, an aircraft was slowed down
5. Solve for x and y due t o bad weat her. I t s aver age speed is r educed
5 1 6 3 x  1 by 100 km/h and t ime incr eased by 30 minut es.
  2;   1;   Find t he or iginal dur at ion of t he flight .
x 1 y  2 x 1 y  2  y  2
[TERM 1, 2012]
[TERM 1, 2013]
CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation 3.33

13. The differ ence of t wo nat ur al number s is 5 and Accor ding t o t he quest ion,
1 20  Dist ance 
t he differ ence of t heir r ecipr ocals is . Find t he  2  Time=
10 x y  speed 
number s.
[TERM 1, 2014]  x  y  10 .....(i )
14. A t r ain t r avels at a cer t ain aver age speed for a Also,  x  y  10 .....(i )
dist ance of 54 km and t hen t r avels a dist ance of
63 km at an aver age speed of 6 km/h mor e t han  x  y  2 ......(i i )
t he fir st speed. I f it t akes 3 hour s t o complet e t he Adding equat ions (i) and (ii) [1]
t ot al jour ney, what is it s fir st speed?
 x  y  x  y  10  2
[TERM 1, 2015]
15. 4 chair s and 3 t ables cost Rs 2100 and 5 chair s  2 x  12
and 2 t ables cost Rs 1750. Find t he cost of one Divide t he above equat ion by 2,
chair and one t able separ at ely.
x6
[TERM 1, 2015]
Subst it ut ing value of x in Eqn. (i)
16. Raghav scor ed 70 mar ks in a t est get ting 4 mar ks
for each r ight answer and losing 1 mar k for each  6  y  10
wr ong answer. H ad 5 mar ks been awar ded for
Subt r act 6 fr om bot h sides of t he equat ion,
each cor r ect answer and 2 mar ks been deduct ed
for each wr ong answer, t hen Raghav would have  y4
scor ed 80 mar ks. How many questions wer e ther e So, speed of r owing in st ill wat er is 6 km/hr and
in t he t est ? speed of cur r ent is 4 km/hr. [1]
Which value would Raghav violat e if he r esor t s 2. Add t he t wo given equat ions,
t o unfair means?
99 x  101 y  1499
[TERM 1, 2015]
101 x  99 y  1501
17. Speed of a boat in st ill wat er is 15 km/h. I t goes
30 km upst r eam and r et ur ns back at t he same 200 x  200 y  3000 [1]
point in 4 hour s 30 minut es. Find t he speed of Divide by 200,
t he st r eam.
[TERM 1, 2017]
x  y  15 ....(i)

18. The r at io of income of t wo per sons is 9 : 7 and t he Subt r act t he t wo given equat ions,
r at io of t heir expendit ur e is 4 : 3 if each of t hem 99 x  101 y  1499
manages t o save Rs. 2000/mont h. Fi nd t hei r
 101 x  99 y  1501
mont hly incomes.
[TERM 1, 2017] 2 x  2 y  2
19. The sum of t he digit s of t wo digit s number is 9. Divide by – 2,
Al so 9 t imes t he number i s t wice t he number x y1
obt ain by r ever sing t he or der of digit s. Find t he [1]
 x  y1
number s.
Subst it ut e t he above value of x in (i)
[TERM 1, 2017]
20. Solve for x & y . y  1  y  15
2 y  1  15
1 1 3 1 1 1
  and    2 y  14
3x  y 3x  y 4 2(3x  y) (3x  y) 8
Divide by 2,
[TERM 1, 2017]
14
 Solutions y
2
7

1. Assume t he speed of cur r ent = y km/h Also, x = y + 1

Speed of boat in st ill wat er = x km/h  x  7 1  8 [1]
So, Speed of boat in downst r eam = x + y km/h The speed of cur eent = 7 km/hr
And, Speed of boat in upst r eam = x – y km/h The speed of boat is st ill wat er = 8 km/hr
3.34 CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation

3. Assume t he speeds of t he car s t o be x km/hr and  19 x  8 y   2 ....(iii) [1]

y km/hr
Put value of y fr om equat ion (ii) in equat ion (iii)
When t he car s ar e t r aveling in t he same dir ection
Relat ive speed = x – y  19 x  8(7  x)   2
Dist ance = 100 km  19 x  56  8 x   2

Dist ance Or, 27 x  56   2

Apply Time =
Speed Add 56 on bot h t he sides of equat ion;
100  27 x  54
Time   5 hr s
x y
Divide bot h sides by 27,
100 x=2
x  y 
5 Also, put value of x in equat ion (ii), we get ;
x – y = 20 ....(i) [1] y=7– 2
When t he car s ar e going in t he opposit e dir ect ion  y=5
Relat ive speed = x + y We know t hat t he number is 10x + y . Put t he
value of x and y in t his equat ion, we get ;
100
Time  1 10 × (2) + 5 = 20 + 5 = 25 [1]
x y
So, t he number is 25.
 x  y  100 ...(ii) [1] 5. We have,
Add equat ions (i) and (ii), 5 1
2x = 120  2 ...(1)
x 1 y  2
Divide by 2,
x = 60 6 3
 1 ...(2) [1]
Subst it ute in (ii), x 1 y  2
M ult iply equat ion 2 by 3, we get ,
60  y  100
 y  100  60  5 1 
3   23
 y  40  x  1 y  2 

H ence t he speeds of t he car s ar e 60 km/hr and 15 3

40 km/hr [1]   6 ...(3)
x 1 y  2
4. L et t he digit at t ens place be x and digit at ones
place be y , so number is given by Adding equat ion (2) and equat ion (3), we get ,
Given that the sum of digit s of a two-digit number
is 7. So, 6 3
 1
x 1 y  2
x y7 ....(i)
15 3
Subt r act x on bot h t he sides of equat ion, we get ;   6
x 1 y  2
y7x ....(ii) [1] 6 15
  7
Also, if t he digit s ar e r ever sed, t he new number x 1 x 1
decr eased by 2 equals t wice t he or iginal number.
Ther efor e, 21
  7 [1]
(10 y  x)  2  2(10 x  y) x 1
Solving for x , we get ,
 10 y  x  2  20 x  2 y
21  7( x  1)
Subt r act 10y + x fr om bot h t he si des of t he
equat ion. We get : Divide t he above equat ion by 3,
 2  19 x  8 y  x 1  3
CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation 3.35

Add 1 t o bot h sides of above equat ion,

4 5 3
x4 7. 3 ; x  0,
x 2x  3 2
Put t ing x = 4 in equat ion 2, we get ,
Solving t he given equat ion
6 3
 1 4  3x 5
4 1 y  2  [1]
x 2x  3
3
2 1  4  3x 2 x  3  5 x
y2
Subt r act 2 fr om bot h sides of above equat ion,
 6 x 2  8 x  9 x  12  5 x
 y5
H ence, t he solut ion is  6 x2  6 x  12  0
x = 4 and y = 5 [1] Divide t he above equat ion by – 6, [1]
6. 49 x  51 y  499 (1) x2  x  2  0
51x  49 y  501 (2) Split t ing t he middle t er m,
M ult iplying eq (1) by 51 and eq( 2) by 49 x2  2 x  x  2  0
 49 x  51  51 y  51  499  51
 x  2 x  1  0
2
 51  49 x  51 y  499  51 ....(3)
 51x  49  49 y  49  501  49
 x  2  0
or  x  1  0
 49  51x  492 y  501  49 ....(4) [1]
Subt r act ing eq(4) fr om eq(3)  x  2 or x  1
Th us, t h e sol ut i on of t h e gi ven equat i on i s
 51  49 x  49  51x  512 y  492 y  499  51
x  2 or x  1 . [1]
 501  49
1 1
 512 y  492 y  25449  24549 8. L et  u and v
x 1 y 1
 y 512  492  25449  24549
  Then we have,

 y  51  49 51  49  900 2u  v  4 (i)

(Using a2  b2   a  b a  b ) 4u  v  10 (ii)

Subt r act (i) fr om (ii) we have,
 y 100 2  900
4u  v   2u  v  10  4
 200 y  900
 4u  v  2u  v  6
9
 y  4.5 [1]
2  2u  6
Now subst it ut ing t he value of y in eq(1),
6
 49 x  51  4.5  499 u  3 [1]
2
 49 x  229.5  499 Subst it ut e u = 3 in (i) we have,
 49 x  499  229.5
2  3  v  4
 49 x  269.5
6v 4
269.5
x  5.5
49 64  v
H en ce sol u t i on f or t h e gi v en equ at i on i s v2 [1]
x  5.5 & y  4.5 . [1]
1
Back Subst it ut ing  u we get ,
x 1
3.36 CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation

1 10. 3 x  y  5
3
x 1  3x  y  5 ...(i)
 3  x  1  1 And

 3x  3  1 5 x – y  11 ...(ii) [1]

 3x  4 Subtr act ing (i) fr om (ii)

4 5 x – y  11
x 3x  y  5
3
 + 
1 [1]
Also, v 2x  6
y 1
x3
1 Subst it ut ing in (ii)
 2
y 1
5  3 – y  11
 2  y  1  1
15 – y  11
 2y  2  1
– y  11  15
 2y  3  y  4
3 y=4
 y
2 Thus, t he solut ion is given by

4 3 x  3 and y  4 [1]
H ence, x  and y  . [1]
3 2 11. L et t he denominat or of t he fr act ion be x . Then,
t he numer at or of t he fr act ion will be x – 3.
2x 1 3x  9
9.   0
x  3 2 x  3  x  3 2 x  3 x3
Thus, t he fr act ion is . [1]
x
2 x  2 x  3   x  3   3 x  9 When 1 is added t o t he denominat or, t he fr act ion
 0 [1]
 x  3 2 x  3 1
get s decr eased by .
15
 4 x2  6 x  x  3  3 x  9  0
x3 1 x3
 4 x2  10 x  6  0 
x
 
15 x  1
Solving by split t ing t he middle t er m,
x3 x3 1
 4 x2  4 x  6 x  6  0    [1]
x x  1 15
 4 x  x  1  6  x  1  0

 x  3  x  1  x   1
  x  1 4 x  6  0 [1] x  x  1 15

 x  1  0 or 4 x  6  0 x3 1
 
2 15
3 x x
 x  1,
2  x 2  x  15 x  45
3
As given in t he quest ion, x   x 2  14 x  45  0
2
H ence, t he sol ut i on of t he gi ven equat i on i s   x  9 x  5  0
x = – 1. [1] [1]
 x  9 or x  5
CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation 3.37

When x = 9, t he fr act ion will be Now. Since speed can't be negat ive, so we ignor e
x = – 700
x3 93 6
  Ther efor e, t he or iginal aver age speed of t he flight
x 9 9 = 800 km/h
When x = 5, t he fr act ion will be Thus, t he or iginal dur at ion of t he flight
x3 53 2 2800
    3.5 hours
x 5 5 800
6 2 H ence, or iginal dur at ion of flight is 3.5 hour s.
The fr act ions ar e and . [1]
9 5 [1]
12. Let us suppose that the aver age speed of the flight 13. L et t he t wo nat ur al number s ne N and N + 5.
is x km/h.
1
Tot al di st an ce cover ed by t h e f l i gh t i n t h e The differ ence of t heir r ecipr ocals is .
10
jour ney = 2800 km
1 1 1
2800   
 The dur at ion of t he flight  hr [1] N N  5 10
x
Now, it is given that, t he aver age speed is r educed N 5 N 1
 
by 100 k m/h and t he dur at ion of t he fl ight i s N  N  5 10
incr eased by 30 minut es, due t o bad weat her in
t he jour ney. 5 1
 New speed = x – 100 km/h
  [1]
N ( N  5) 10
2800  N  N  5  50
 New dur at ion of t he flight  hrs [1]
x  100
Now, accor ding t o t he quest ion,  N 2  5 N  50  0
New dur at ion of t he flight - Or iginal dur at ion of Split t ing t he middle t er m,
1  N 2  10 N  5 N  50  0
t he flight = 30 minut es = hr
2
 N  N  10  5  N  10  0
2800 2800 1
  
x  100 x 2   N  5 N  10  0 [1]
Applying zer o pr oduct r ule pr oper t y,
 1 1 1
 2800   
 x  100 x 2   N  5  0 Or  N  10  0

 N  5 or N  10 [1]
 x  x  100  1
 2800   N cannot be negative since it is a nat ur al number.
  x  100  x  2
 N 5
 100  1 Hence the numbers N and N + 5 are 5 and 10. [1]
 2800  
 x 2  100 x  2 14. L et x be t he init ial speed of t he bus for a dist ance
of 54 km.
100 1 Then x + 6 is the speed of bus for a dist ance of 63
 
2 5600
x  100 x k m.

 x 2  100 x  560000 Dist ance

We know t hat , Time = [1]
Speed
 x2  100 x  560000  0
The t ot al t ime t aken for t he jour ney is 3 hour s.
  x  800 x  700  0 [1]
54 63
Equat ing each fact or t o zer o, So,  3
x x6
 x  800 or x  700
3.38 CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation

54  x  6  63 x  5  150  2 y  1750
3
x  x  6  750  2 y  1750 [1]

 54  x  6  63 x  3 x  x  6 Subt r act ing bot h sides by 750

[1]
 750  2 y  750  1750  750
 54 x  324  63 x  3 x 2  18 x
 2 y  1000
 3 x2  99 x  324  0 Dividing bot h sides by 2
Divide t he above equat ion by 3,
2 y 1000
 
 x2  33 x  108  0 [1] 2 2
Split t ing t he middle t er m,  y  500
2 Ther efor e, Cost of 1 chair Rs x = Rs 150 and cost
 x  36 x  3 x  108  0
of 1 t able is Rs y = Rs 500 [1]
x  x  36  3  x  36  0 16. L et number s of incor r ect answer ed quest ion = y
  x  3 x  36  0 L et number s of cor r ect answer ed quest ion = x
Given, [1]
 x  36 or x  3 Raghav scor ed 70 mar ks in a t est get ting 4 mar ks
Speed cannot be in negat ive, hence ignor e x =– 3. for each r ight answer and losing 1 mar k for each
wr ong answer.
H ence, t he fir st speed is 36 km/hr. [1]
15. L et cost of 1 chair be Rs x . 4 x  y  70 ....(i )
L et cost of 1 t able be Rs y . [1] Had 5 marks been awarded for each correct answer
Given: and 2 marks been deducted for each wrong answer,
4 chair s and 3 t ables cost Rs 2100 t hen Raghav would have scor ed 80 mar ks.

4 x  3 y  2100 ....(i ) 5 x  2 y  80 ....(ii )

5 chair s and 2 t ables cost Rs 1750 Now mult iply (i) by 2

5 x  2 y  1750 ....(i i ) 8 x  2 y  140 ....(ii i )

Solving equat ion (i) and (ii) Subt r act (i) fr om (iii)

4 x  3 y  2100 ....(i )  2  8 x  2 y  140   5 x  2 y  80 

 8 x  6 y  4200 ...(ii i ) 8 x  5 x  2 y  2 y  140  80
3x = 60 [1]
5 x  2 y  1750 ....(ii )  3
Divide bot h sides by 3
 15 x  6 y  5250 ....(i v) [1]
3 x 60

Now, (iii) – (iv) 3 3
  8 x  6 y  4200  15 x  6 y  5250 x = 20
Put value x = 20 in (i)
 8 x  6 y  15 x  6 y  4200  5250
4  20  y  70
 7 x  1050
80 – y = 70
Dividing bot h sides by 7
80 – 70 = y
7 x 1050 y = 10 [1]
 
7 7 Tot al number of quest ions in t he t est
 x  150 = x + y = 20 + 10 = 30
Put x = 150 in (ii), The t ot al number of quest ions in t est ar e 30.
Raghav would violat e t he pr inciple of honest y if
5 x  2 y  1750 ....(i i )
he r esor t s t o unfair means. [1]
CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation 3.39

17. Assume t he speed of t he boat t o be 15 km/h Solve bot h t he equat ions by eliminat ion met hod
 Upst r eam speed of boat = Speed of boat in M ult iply equat ion (i) by 3
still water – Speed of the stream = (15 – x ) km/h
 3  9 x  4 y  2000
Al so, Downst r eam speed of boat = Speed of
boat i n st i l l wat er + Speed of t he st r eam =  27 x  12 y  6000 .......(ii i ) [1]
(15 + x ) km/h
M ult iply equat ion (ii) by 4
Dist ance
Apply Time = [1]  4  7 x  3 y  2000
Speed
 28 x  12 y  8000 .....(iv)
30
Time for upst r eam  Subt r acting Eqn. (iv) fr om (iii)
15  x

30 27 x  12 y  6000
Time for downst r eam  [1]
15  x 28 x  12 y  8000
( ) () ()
1
4 hour s 30 minut es  4 hour s x  2000 [1]
2

30 30 1  x  2000
Tot al t ime   4
15  x 15  x 2 Subst it ut ing value of x in Eqn. (i)

 15  x  15  x  9 9(2000)  4 y  2000
 30  
 15  x 15  x   2  18000  4 y  2000
Divide t he above equat ion by 3,  4 y  16000
 30  3 Divide above equat ion by 4,
 10   [1]
 225  x 2  2  y  4000
Divide t he above equat ion by 3, Now, I ncome of per son A = 9  2000  Rs.18,000
 10  1 And I ncome of per son B = 7  2000  Rs.14,000
 10  
 225  x 2  2 H en ce, m on t h l y i n come of t wo per son s ar e
Rs.18,000 and Rs. 14,000 [1]
 200  225  x 2
19. L et t he one's digit of t he number = x
 x2  225  200  25 And t he t en's digit of t he number = y
Taking squar e r oot , Sum of t he digit s of t wo digit s number is 9
 x  5 x y9
The speed cannot be negat ive. So, t he speed of  y  9  x .....(i ) [1]
st r eam is 5 km/h. [1]
Now, t he value of number will be = 10 (9 – x ) + x
18. Given r at io of income of t wo per sons = 9 : 7
Aft er r ever sing t he digit s, t he number wi ll be
The r at io of t heir expendit ur e = 4 : 3
= 10 (x ) + (9 – x )
L et income of per son A = 9x , income of per son
Accor ding t o t he quest ion,
B = 7x
And expendit ur e of per son A = 4y , expendit ur e of 9 10(9  x)  x  2 10( x)  (9  x)
per son B = 3y
We will pr oceed wit h simplifying t he equat ion,
We know t hat I ncome – Expendit ur e = Saving
Accor ding t o t he quest ion,  9  90  10 x  x  2 10 x  9  x 

9 x  4 y  2000 .....(i )  9  90  9 x   2  9 x  9 [1]

7 x  3 y  2000 .....(ii ) [1]  810  81 x  18 x  18
3.40 CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation

 810  18  18 x  81 x 3 1 5
 p  
 792  99 x 4 3 12
Divide t he above equat ion by 99, Now we need t o find out t he values of x and y ,

792 1 1
x [1] As assumed,  p and q
99 3x  y 3x  y
x8 1 5 1 1
Subst it ut ing value of x in Eqn. (i), we get ,   and 
3 x  y 12 3x  y 3
y  98 1
12
So t he r equir ed number is 18. [1]  3x  y  .....(ii i ) and 3 x  y  3 ......(i v)
5
1 1 Using eliminat ion met hod, adding equat ion (iii)
20. L et  p and q
3x  y 3x  y and (iv).

Now, t he r educed equat ions ar e 12

3x  y 
3 5
pq  3x  y  3
4
 4 p  4 q  3 .....(i ) 27
6x 
5
Also,

p 1 9
q x [1]
2 8 [1] 10
 4 p  8 q  1 ....(ii ) Put t ing t he value of x in Eqn. (iv), we get
We will use eliminat ion met hod t o solve t hese  9
Eqn. (i) and (ii)  3   y  3
 10 
Subt r act ing Eqn. (ii) fr om (i)
27
4 p  4q  3  y3
10
4 p  8 q  1
( ) (  ) (  ) 27
 y 3
10
12q  4
3
 y 
4 10
q
12
9 3
So, t he value of x is and value of y is  .
1 10 10
q [1]
3 [1]
Substituting value of q in Eqn. (i)
1 3
p 
3 4
CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation 3.41
3.42 CHAPTER 3 : Linear Equation
CHAPTER 4

Quadratic Equations
Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams
Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Relation between Zeroes and 2 marks 2 marks
Coefficient of Quadratic Equation
Finding Value of constant by putting the 1 mark 1 mark
values of zeroes in Quadratic Equation
Relationship between discriminant 2, 3 marks 3 marks 3 marks
and nature of roots
Finding roots of Quadratic Equation 2 marks
4.44 CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations

[TOPIC 1] Basic Concept of Quadratic Equations

Summary Solution of a Quadratic Equation by

Factorisation
Quadratic Equations Consider t he following pr oduct s.

A polynomial of degr ee 2 (i.e. ax 2 + bx + c) is called a 6  0  0;  b  0  0, 0  a  0

quadr at ic polynomial wher e a  0 and a, b, c ar e r eal Above example illust r at e t hat whenever t he pr oduct
number s. is 0, at least one of t he fact or s is 0.
Any equat ion of t he for m, p(x ) = 0, wher e p(x ) is a  I f a and b are numbers, then ab = 0, iff a = 0
pol ynomi al of degr ee 2, i s a quadr at i c equat i on. or b = 0.
Ther efor e, ax 2 + bx + c = 0, a  0 is called t he st andar d Above pr inciple is used in solving quadr at ic equat ion
for m of a quadr at ic equat ion. by fact or isat ion. L et t he given quadr at ic equat ion be

e.g. 2 x2  3 x  7, 8 x2  x  19 ax2  bx  c  0. L et t he quadr at i c pol ynomi al be

expr essed as pr oduct of t wo linear fact or s i.e. (px + q)
CLASSI FI CATI ON OF A QU ADRATI C EQU ATI ON and (r x + s), wher e p, q, r , s ar e r eal number s and
I t is classified int o t wo cat egor ies: p  0, r  0,
(i) Pur e quadr at ic equat ion (of t he for m ax 2 + c = 0 Then, ax2  bx  c  0
i.e., b = 0 in ax 2 + bx + c = 0)
 ( px  q) (r x  s)  0
e.g. x 2 – 4 = 0 and 3x 2 + 1 = 0 ar e pur e quadr at ic
equations.  Eit her ( px  q)  0 or (rx  s)  0
(ii) Affect ed quadr at ic equat ion (of t he for m ax 2 + bx +
px   q or rx = – s
c  0.
e.g. x 2 – 2x – 8 = 0 and 5x 2 + 3x – 2 = 0 ar e affect ed q s
x or x
quadr at ic equat ions. p r
ZEROS OF QU ADRATI C POLYN OM I AL Following st eps ar e involved in solving a quadr at ic
equat ion by fact or isat ion.
For a quadr at ic polynomial p( x)  ax2  bx  c , t hose  Tr ansfor m t he equat i on i nt o st andar d for m, i f
necessar y.
values of x for which ax2  bx  c  0 is sat isfied, ar e
 Fact or ise ax 2 + bx + c.
cal l ed zer os of quadr at i c pol ynomi al p ( x ), i .e. i f
 Put each fact or cont aining var iable = 0.
p()  a 2  b  c  0, t hen  i s cal led t he zer o of
 Solve each of t he r esult ing equat ion
quadr atic polynomial.
Solution of a Quadratic Equation by
ROOTS OF QU ADRATI C EQU ATI ON
Completing the Square
I f ,  ar e zer os of polynomial ax2  bx  c, t hen , 
Following st eps ar e involved in solving a quadr at ic
ar e called roots (or solutions) of cor r esponding equation
equat ion by quadr at ic for mula
ax2  bx  c  0 which implies t hat p()  p()  0.
 Consider the equation ax2  bx  c  0 , wher e a  0
i.e., a 2  b  c  0 and a2  b  c  0.
CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations 4.45

 Dividing t hr oughout by ‘a’, we get  I f b2 – 4ac  0 t aking squar e r oot of bot h sides, we
obtain
b c
x2  x  0
a a b  b2  4 ac
x 
2a 2a
2
1 
 Add and subt r act  coefficient of x , we get
2   b  b2  4 ac
Ther efor e x 
2a
2 2
b  b  b c T he Quadr at ic F or mula: Quadr at i c equat i on,
x2  x      0,
a  2a   2a  a
ax 2  bx  c  0, wher e a, b, c ar e r eal number and

 b
2
b2 c b2  4 ac a  0 , has t he r oot s as
 x    2
 
2a 4a a 4 a2
 b  b2  4 ac
x
2a

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 2 Marks Questions

5. For m a quadr at ic polynomial whose zer oes ar e
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS 3 3 3 3
and
TOPIC 1 5 5
[TERM 2, 2013]
1 Mark Questions 6. Solve t he foll owing quadr at i c equat ion for :

4 3 x2  5 x  2 3  0
1. The r oots of the equat ion x 2 + x – p(p + 1) = 0
wher e p is a constant, ar e [TERM 2, 2013]

(a) p, p + 1 (b) – p, p + 1 7. Fi nd t he quadr at ic polynomial whose zer oes ar e

(c) p, – (p + 1) (d) – p, – (p + 1) 3  5 and 5 3.
[TERM 2, 2011] [TERM 2, 2014]

2. T h e r oot s of t he qu adr at i c equ at i on 8. Solve t he foll owing quadr at i c equat ion for x :

2 x  x  6  0 ar e
2
4 x2  4 a2 x  a4  b4  0
 
3 3
(a)  2, (b) 2,  [TERM 2, 2015]
2 2
9. Solve t he following quadr at ic equat ions for x :
3 3
(c)  2,  (d) 2, 4 x2  4bx  a2  b2  0
 
2 2
[TERM 2, 2012] [TERM 2, 2015]

3. Solve the quadr atic equation 2 x 2  ax  a2  0 for 2

10. I f x and x  3 ar e r oot s of t he quadr at ic
x. 3
[TERM 2, 2014] equation ax 2 + 7x + b = 0, find the values of a and b.
[TERM 2, 2016]
1
4. I f x   , is a solution of the quadr atic equat ion 11. F i n d t h e r oot s of t h e qu adr at i c equ at i on
2
2 x2  7 x  5 2  0
3 x 2  2 kx  3  0 , find t he value of k.
[TERM 2, 2017]
[TERM 2, 2015]
4.46 CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations

12. I f t he sum of t wo nat ur al number s is 8 and t heir 23. The numer at or of a fr act ion is 3 l ess t han i t s
pr oduct is 15, find t he number s. denominat or. I f 2 is added t o bot h t he numer at or
[TERM 2, 2012] and t he denominat or, t hen t he sum of t he new
13. Sol ve t he fol l owi ng qu adr at i c equat i ons for 29
fr act ion and or igi nal fr act i on is . Fi nd t he
x : x 2  4 ax  b2  4 a2  0 20
or iginal fr act ion.
[TERM 2, 2012]
[TERM 2, 2015]
3 Marks Questions 24. Solve for x :
14. Solve for x :
2 3 23
  , x  0, 1,2
16 15 x  1 2  x  2 5 x
1  ; x  0, 1
x x 1 [TERM 2, 2015]
[TERM 2, 2014]
25. I f  an d  ar e t h e zer os of t h e pol yn om i al
15. Solve for x :
f  x   x 2  6 x  k , f i n d t h e v al u e of k f or
3x  2 2x  2 3  0
2

[TERM 2, 2015]  2   2  40 .
1 1 11 [TERM 2, 2015]
16. Solve for x ,   , x  4,7.
x  4 x  7 30 26. Solve for x :
[TERM 2, 2017]
1 2 4
2 2
  , x  1, 2, 4
17. Solve for x , x  (2b  1) x  (b  b  20)  0 x1 x 2 x 4
[TERM 2, 2017] [TERM 2, 2016]
27. A motor boat whose speed is 24km/h in st ill water
4 Marks Questions t akes 1 hour mor e t o 32 km upst r eam t han t o
18. A mot or boat whose speed i s 20 k m/h i n st i l l r et ur n downst r eam t o t he same spot . Find t he
wat er, t akes 1 hour mor e t o go 48 km upst r eam speed of t he st r eam.
t o t h e sam e spot . F i n d t h e speed of t h e [TERM 2, 2016]
st r eam. 28. Solve for x :
[TERM 2, 2011]
1 3 5 1
19. Solve t he following for x :   , x  1,  , 4
x  1 5x  1 x  4 5
1 1 1 1 [TERM 2, 2017]
  
2a  b  2 x 2a b 2 x
1
[TERM 2, 2013] 29. Two t aps r unning t oget her can fill a t ank in 3
13
20. Sum of t he ar eas of t wo squar es is 400cm 2 . I f hour s. I f one t ap t akes 3 hour s mor e t han t he
t he differ ence of t heir per imet er s is 16, find t he ot her t o fill t he t ank, t hen how much t ime will
sides of t he t wo squar es. each t ap t ake t o fill t he t ank?
[TERM 2, 2013] [TERM 2, 2017]

21. Solve for x :  Solutions

x  2 x  4 10
  ; x  3,5 1. We have, x2  x  p( p  1)  0
x3 x5 3
[TERM 2, 2014]  x2  ( p  1  p) x  p( p  1)  0
22. A mot or boat whose speed in st ill wat er is 18 km/
h, t akes 1 hour mor e t o go 24 km upst r eam t han  x2  ( p  1) x  px  p( p  1)  0
t o r et ur n downst r eam t o t he same spot . Find t he
 x( x  p  1)  p( x  p  1)  0 [½]
speed of t he st r eam.
[TERM 2, 2014]  ( x  p  1) (x  p)  0
CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations 4.47

 ( x  p  1)  0 or ( x  p)  0 1
4. I t i s gi ven t hat x   i s t he sol ut i on of t he
 x  ( p  1) or x  p . 2
quadr at ic equat ion 3 x 2  2 kx  3  0 .
The r oot s of t he given quadr at ic equat ion ar e p
and – (p +1). I t means it will sat isfy t he given equat ion.
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (c). [½]
1
2. Using factor ization method of splitting the middle Subst it ut e x   in 3 x 2  2 kx  3  0 we get ,
2
t er m, we can sol ve t he quadr at i c equat i on as
follows: 2
 1  1
2 3     2k     3  0 [½]
2x  x  6  0  2  2
 2 x2  4 x  3 x  6  0
3
  k3  0
2 4
 
 2 x  4 x   3 x  6  0
3  4 k  12
 2 x  x  2   3  x  2  0 [½]  0
4
  x  2 2 x  3  0  9  4 k  0
 x  2  0 or 2 x  3  0  4 k  9
3 9
 x  2 or x   k
2 4
3
Thus, x  2 and x   ar e t he t wo r oot s of t he 9
2 H ence, t he value of k is  . [½]
4
2
2 x  x  6  0 equat ion. [½]
Opt ion (b) is cor r ect . 3 3 3 3
5. and ar e the zer oes of the quadr atic
5 5
3. Given 2 x 2  ax - a2  0
polynomial.
Compar ing t he given equat ion wit h t he st andar d
3 3 3 3
quadr at ic equation (ax2  bx  c  0), L et   and   [½]
5 5
we get a  2, b  a and c   a2 Sum of zer oes    
Using t he quadr at ic for mula, 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6
   
5 5 5 5
b  b2  4 ac
x , we get : [½] Pr oduct of zer oes  
2a
 3  3  3  3 9  3 6
 a  a2  4  2  a 2
        [½]
x  5  5  25 25
22
The quadr at ic equat ion whose zer oes ar e  and 
ar e:
 a  9 a2
  x ²       x    0
4

 a  3a a  a  3a  6  6
x and x   a  x²    x     0
  5  25 
4 2 4
So, t he solut ions of t he given quadr at ic equat ion M ult iply bot h sides by 25
ar e
25 x 2  30 x  6  0
a Ther efor e, t he r equir ed polynomial is
x and x   a [½]
2
25 x 2  30 x  6  0 [1]
4.48 CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations

6. 4 3 x 2  5 x  2 3  0 4 a2  16b4
x
4 3 x2  8 x  3 x  2 3  0 8
Fact or i ng out t he common t er ms,
4 a2  4b2
x
4x  3x  2  3   3x  2  0  8
Di vi ding t he numer at or and denominat or by 4
 4 x  3  3x  2  0  [1] we get ,

Equat ing bot h t he fact or s t o a2  b2

x
4x  3  0 2

3 a2  b2 a2  b2
x x or x 
4 2 2

And 3x  2  0 a2  b2 a2  b2
H ence, t he values of x ar e and .
2 2
2
x [1]
[1]
3
9. The given quadr at ic equat ion is
7. Quadr at i c pol yn om i al i n t er ms of x , wh er e
coefficient of x is sum of zer os and const ant t er m
wi ll be pr oduct of zer os. 4 x2  4bx  a2  b2  0
 
 x2   3 5 5  3 x   3 5  5 3  2 2
So, a  4, b  4b , c   a  b  
[1]
Quadr at ic for mula t o find t he r oot s is
2

 x  2 5 x   5  3 
b  b2  4 ac
2 x
 x  2 5x  2 2a
H ence t he r equir ed quadr at ic polynomial is

 x2  2 5 x  2 [1] 4 b   4b2  4  4   a 2
 b2 
x
24
8. 4 x2  4 a2 x  a4  b4  0  
This equat ion is of t he for m 4b  16b2  16 a2  b2  
x [1]
2 24
ax  bx  c  0
2 4 4 4b  16b2  16a2  16b2
H er e a  4, b  4 a , c  a  b   x
8
The quadr at ic for mula t o sol ve for x is
4b  16 a2
b  b2  4 ac x
x 8
2a
4 b  4 a
x
2 2 8
4 a2   4a   4  4  a4  b4
 
x b  a
2  4 x
2

4 a2  16a4  16a4  16b4 x

b  a  b  a
,
x [1] [1]
8 2 2
CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations 4.49

10. T h e r oot s of the qu adr at i c equ at i on

 x 2  8 x  15  0
2
ax2  7 x  b  0 ar e  3 and 3 .  x2  3 x  5 x  15  0

  Coefficient of x   x  x  3   5  x  3  0 [1]
The sum of r oot s 
Coefficient of x 2   x  3 x  5  0
2  7  x  3  0 or x  5  0
 3  
3 a  x  3 or x  5
9  2 7 Ther efor e, if fir st nat ur al number is 3, the second
  [1] number will be 5. And, if fir st nat ur al number is
3 a
5, t he second number will be 3. [1]
7 7
  13. We have, x 2  4 ax  b2  4 a2  0
3 a
 a  3 ...(i)  x2  4 ax  4 a2  b2  0
 
Al so, we know t hat t he pr oduct of r oot s
2
Const ant t erm   x  2a  b2  0 [1]

Coefficient of x2   x  2a  b  0 or  x  2a  b  0
2 b   x  2a  b x  2a  b  0
 3  
3 a
 x  2a  b or x  2 a  b
b
 2  (Using (i )) Thus, 2a – b and 2a + b ar e t he t wo r oot s of t he
3
equat ion x 2  4 ax  b2  4 a2  0 . [1]
 b  6 [1]
14. Consider t he equat ion:
H en ce, t h e val u es of a an d b ar e 3 and – 6
r espect i vely. 16 15
1 
x x 1
11. Fact or izing the equation 2 x2  7 x  5 2  0 ,
we'll get 16 15
  1 [1]
x x 1
 2 x2  2 x  5 x  5 2  0
16  x  1  15 x
 2x x  2  5
   x  2  0 1
x  x  1
  2 x  5  x  2   0 [1]  16 x  16  15 x  x  x  1

 x  16  x 2  x [1]
Eit her  2 x  5  0 or  x  2   0
 x2  16
5 5 2 Taking squar e r oot ,
x    or x   2
2 2
x  4
H ence, t he r oot s of t he given quadr at ic equat ion
Ther efor e t he solut ions ar e x  4 . [1]
5 2
ar e  and  2 . [1] 15. The given quadr at ic equat ion is
2
12. L et one nat ur al number be x. Ther efor e, anot her 3 x2  2 2 x  2 3  0
nat ur al number will be 8  x . So,
Now, I t is given t hat t he pr oduct of t hese t wo a  3 ,b  2 2 , c   2 3 [1]
nat ur al number s is 15.
Thus, The quadr at ic for mula t o find t he r oot is

 8 x  x2  15 b  b2  4 ac
x
2a
4.50 CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations

2
17. H er e, t he given equat ion is

x

 2 2    2 2  
 4  3  2 3  x2  (2b  1) x  (b2  b  20)  0
2 3 Finding the discr iminant

x
2 2  8  24 D  b2  4 ac
[1]
2 3 2
D     2b  1  4  1  b2  b  20
 
2 2  32
x
2 3 D  4b2  1  4b  4 b2  b  20
  [1]
2 24 2
x using  a  b2  a2  b2  2ab
2 3  

2 24 2 2 2 4 2 D  4b2  1  4 b  4 b2  4 b  80
x ,
2 3 2 3 D  81 [1]
N ow,
6 2 2 2
x ,
2 3 2 3 b  D
x
2a
3 2  2
x , [1]
3 3 ( (2b  1)  81
x
16. We will fir st simplify t he given equat ion, 2
2b  1  9
1 1 11 x
  2
x  4 x  7 30
We will pr oceed wit h t aking t he L CM of L H S, 2b  1  9 2b  1  9
x ,
2 2
 x  7   x  4  11
 [1] 2b  8 2b  10
 x  4 x  7 30 x ,
2 2
x  7  x  4 11
  x  b  4, b  5 [1]
 x  4  x  7 30
18. L et t he speed of t he st r eam be x km/h,
11 11
  L et t he dist ance of t he spot be d = 48km,
 x  4  x  7 30
Speed of boat in upst r eam will be km/h
After cr oss multiplicat ion of bot h t he fr action, we
have, Speed of boat in downstream will be  20  x km/h
 11  30  11  x  4  x  7 [1]
 30  x  x  7  4  x  7 Differ ence in t ime t aken by t he boat in upst r eam
and downst r eam is 1 hr
 30  x2  7 x  4 x  28
d d
 30  x 2  3 x  28   1
20  x 20  x
 30  x 2  3 x  28  0 [1]
48 48
After simplification, we have a quadratic equation   1
20  x 20  x
 x2  3 x  2  0 48  20  x  20  x 
Fact or ising t he equat ion,  1 [1]
 20  x 20  x
 x2  2 x  x  2  0
 96 x  400  x2
 x  x  2  1  x  2   0
 x 2  96 x  400  0
  x  1 x  2  0
 x2  100 x  4 x  400  0 [1]
 x  1, 2 [1]
CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations 4.51

 x  x  100  4  x  100  0  2 y2  8 y  384  0 [1]

  x  100 x  4   0  y2  4 y  192  0
x  4 or  100 Split t ing up t he middle t er m,
Speed of st r eam cannot be negat ive  y2  16 y  12 y  192  0
H ence speed of t he st r eam is 4km/h [1]
 y( y  16)  12( y  16)  0
1 1 1 1
19.     ( y  12)( y  16)  0
2a  b  2 x 2a b 2 x
1 1 1 1  y  16 or y  12 [1]
   [1]
2a  b  2 x 2 x 2a b As we know t hat y cannot be negat ive, hence,
2 x  2 a  b  2 x (2a  b) y  12 .
 
(2 x)(2 a  b  2 x) 2 ab Now subst it ut ing t he value of y in (2),
 (2a  b) (2a  b) x  y  4  12  4  16
  [1]
(2 x)(2 a  b  2 x) 2 ab
Hence, side of squar e 1 = 16 cm and, side of squar e
 2ab  (2 x)(2a  b  2 x) 2 = 12 cm [1]
21. Consider t he equat ion:
 2 ab  4 ax  2bx  4 x 2
x  2 x  4 10
 4 x2  2bx  4 ax  2 ab  0  
x3 x5 3
 2 x(2 x  b)  2a(2 x  b)  0 [1]
 x  2 x  5   x  4 x  3  10
 (2 x  2a)(2 x  b)  0 
 x  3 x  5 3
2 x  2a  0  x   a
x2  5 x  2 x  10  x2  3 x  4 x  12 10
b   [1]
And 2 x  b  0  x  2
x  3 x  5 x  15 3
2
b 2 x2  14 x  22 10
H ence, x   a, [1] 
2

2 x  8 x  15 3
20. L et us assume t he side of fir st squar e t o be x cm
and for t he second one be y cm.  3 2 x2  14 x  22  10 x2  8 x  15
   
H ence, t he ar ea of squar e 1 = x 2 and, t he ar ea of
squar e 2 = y 2  6 x2  42 x  66  10 x2  80 x  150 [1]
Similar ly, t he per imet er of squar e 1 = 4x and, t he  10 x2  150  6 x2  66  80 x  42 x  0
per imet er of squar e 2 = 4y [1]
Accor ding t o t he quest ion, 4 x 2  38 x  84  0

x2  y2  400 (1) 2 2 x2  19 x  42  0
 
and, 4 x  4 y  16
2 x2  19 x  42  0 [1]
Dividing bot h sides by 4 Split t ing t he middle t er m,
x y 4 2 x2  12 x  7 x  42  0
 x  y4 (2) 2 x  x  6  7  x  6  0
Subst it ut ing t he value of x in equat ion (1),
 x  6 2 x  7  0
2 2
( y  4)  y  400
x  6  0 or 2 x  7  0
 y2  16  8 y  y2  400 7
x6 or x [1]
2
4.52 CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations

22. L et us suppose t hat t he speed of t he st r eam is x 29

k m/h. Sum of or iginal and new fr act ion is ,
20
Speed of mot or boat in st ill wat er is 18 km/h
Speed of m ot or boat u pst r eam w i l l be x  3 x  1 29
H ence,   .
x x  2 20
18  x km/h
Speed of m ot or boat dow n st r eam w i l l be 
 x  3 x  2  x  x  1  29
x  x  2 20
18  x km/h [1]
Dist ance t r avelled by t he mot or boat on one side x2  3 x  2 x  6  x2  x 29
is  
x  x  2 20
24 24
 1
18  x 18  x 2 x2  2 x  6 29
  [1]
x  x  2 20
 1 1 
24   1 [1]
18  x 18  x 
  20 2 x2  2 x  6  29 x  x  2
 
 18  x   18  x  
24   1  40 x 2  40 x  120  29 x2  58 x
 18  x 18  x  
 40 x2  29 x 2  40 x  58 x  120  0
18  x  18  x 1

18  x18  x 24  11 x 2  98 x  120  0 [1]
Now solving t his quadr at ic equat ion by split t ing
2x 1
 t he middle t er m,
18  x18  x 24
 11 x 2  110 x  12 x  120  0
48 x  18  x 18  x 
 11x  x  10  12  x  10  0
48 x  324  18 x  18 x  x2 [1]
 11x  12 x  10  0
x 2  48 x  324  0
x 2  54 x  6 x  324  0 12
H ence, x = 10 or x 
11
x  x  54   6  x  54   0
Si nce x can onl y be a whol e number, hence
 x  54 x  6  0 denominat or is 10.

x  54  0 or x6  0 And t he numer at or is  x  3  7 .

x  54 or x  6 7
H ence, t he or iginal fr act ion is . [1]
Speed cannot be negat i ve so – 54 wi l l not be 10
consider ed. 24. Solving for x ,
Thus t he speed of t he st r eam is 6 km/h . [1] 2 3 23
  
23. L et t he denominat or be x . x  1 2  x  2 5 x
Now since numer ator of t he fr act ion is 3 less than
it s denominat or, 4  x  2  3  x  1 23
  [1]
Ther efor e numer at or is x  3 . 2  x  1 x  2 5x
A n d i f 2 i s added t o bot h n u m er at or an d
denominator, 4 x  8  3x  3 23
 
2 5x
New fr act ion is 
2 x  x  2x  2 
x 3 2 x 1
 [1] 7x  5 23
x2 x2  
2 5x [1]

2 x x2 
CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations 4.53

Cr oss mult iplying bot h sides,

 x  2 x  4  2  x  1 x  4
2

 5 x  7 x  5  46 x  x  2   4  x  1 x  2

 35 x 2  25 x  46 x 2  46 x  92  x  4 x  2  2 x  2 [1]
Re-ar r anging t he t er ms,
 4 x2  2 x  x  2
 
 11 x2  21 x  92  0 [1]
Solving the above quadr at ic equat ion by splitt ing
t he middle t er m,  x  4  3 x  4   4 x2  12 x  8
 11 x2  44 x  23 x  92  0 3 x2  4 x  12 x  16  4 x 2  12 x  8
 11x  x  4   23  x  4   0 x2  4 x  8  0 [1]

 11x  23 x  4  0 N ow,

23  b  b2  4 ac 4  16  32
H ence x = 4 and x   [1] x 
11 2a 2
25. Given f  x   x 2  6 x  k
4  48

 a  1, b  6, c  k 2

And  2   2  40 [1] 44 3

x
Sum of r oot s 2

 b    6  Or, x  2  2 3 [1]
        6
a 1 27. L et speed of st r eam  x km/h
c Speed of boat in st ill wat er  24 k m/h
    
a
k Speed of boat downst r eam   24  x  km/h
 k [1]
1 Speed of boat upst r eam   24  x  km/h [1]
We have ,
Dist ance  32 k m
    2   2   2   2
Fr om Quest ion,
2
  6   40   2 k [1] 32 32
 1
24  x 24  x
 36   40  2 k
32 24  x   24  x  
 36  40  2 k  1 [1]
 2 k  4
 24  x 24  x
 k  2 [1] 32  2 x 
 1
26. L .C.M of all t he denominat or s is . 576  x2
M ult iply t hr oughout by t he L .C.M we get ,
64 x
 x  1 x  2 x  4   1
576  x2
1 2   64 x  576  x2
 x  1 x  2 x  4    [1]
x  1 x  2 
 x 2  64 x  576  0
 4 
  x  1 x  2 x  4  
 x  4 
4.54 CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations

Split t ing t he middle t er m, 29. L et in x one pipe fills t he cist er n.

 x2  72 x  8 x  576  0 Ot her pipe will fill in  x  3 hour s

 x  x  72  8  x  72  0 [1] Time t aken by bot h pipes, r unning t oget her
1 40
  x  8 x  72  0 = 3 hour s = H our s x [1]
13 13
  x  8  0 or  x  72  0 1
Cist er n filled by one pipe in 1 hour =
x
x8 or x  72
1
Speed of st r eam cannot be negat ive. Cistern filled by other pipe in 1 hour = [1]
x3
Ther efor e, Speed of st r eam is 8 k m/h [1] Cist er n filled by bot h pipes, r unning t oget her for
1 3 5 1 1 1
28.   , x  1,  , 4 1 hour = 
x  1 5x  1 x  4 5 x x3

5x  1  3x  3 5 1 1 13
    
 x  1 5 x  1 x  4 x x  3 40
2x  3 13
  x  4  8 x  4  5  x  1 5 x  1 [1] 
2

x  3x 40
  x  4  8 x  4  5  x  1 5 x  1
 13 x2  39 x  80 x  120 [1]

 8 x2  32 x  4 x  16  5 5 x2  x  5 x  1
   13 x2  41 x  120  0

 8 x2  36 x  16  25 x 2  30 x  5 [1]  13 x2  65 x  24 x  120  0

 17 x 2  6 x  11  0  13 x  x  5  24  x  5  0

 17 x2  17 x  11 x  11  0   x  513 x  24   0

 17 x  x  1  11  x  1  0 [1]  x  5  0 or 13 x  24  0

 17 x  11 x  1  0 24
 x  5 or x  
13
 17 x  11  0 or x  1  0 As t ime cannot be negat ive.
11 Time t aken by one pipe t o fill cist er n = 5 hour s
x or x  1 [1] Time t aken by ot her pipe t o fill cist er n
17
= 5  3  8 hour s [1]
CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations 4.55

[TOPIC 2] Roots of a Quadratic Equation

Summary  Two equal roots, if b2 – 4ac = 0.

b0
I f b2 – 4ac > 0, t hen x  
Nature of Roots 2a
b
I n pr evious sect ion, we have st udied t hat t he r oot s of i .e. x  
2a
t he equat ion ax2  bx  c  0 ar e given by
b
So, t he r oot s ar e bot h 
2
 b  b  4 ac 2a
x
2a  N o real roots, if b2 – 4ac < 0
I f b2 – 4ac < 0, t hen t her e is no r eal number whose
A quadr at ic equat ion ax2  bx  c  0 has
squar e is b2 – 4ac.
 Two distinct real roots if b2 – 4ac > 0.
 (b2 – 4 ac) determines whether the quadratic
I f b2 – 4 ac > 0, we get t wo di st i nct r eal r oot s
equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 has real roots or not,
b b2  4 ac b b2  4 ac hence (b2 – 4ac) is called the discriminant of
  and  
2a 2a 2a 2a quadratic equation. I t is denoted by D.

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 6. Find t he value of k for which t he equat ion

x 2 + k (2x + k – 1) + 2 = 0 has r eal and equal r oot s.
[TERM 2, 2017]
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS
3 Marks Questions
TOPIC 2 7. Fi nd t hat non-zer o val ue of k , for whi ch t he
1 Mark Question quadratic equation kx2  1  2( k  1) x  x2  0 has
equal r oot s. H ence find t he r oot s of t he equat ion.
1. I f t he quadr at ic equat i on px2  2 5 px  15  0
[TERM 2, 2015]
has t wo equal r oot s,
8. I f ad  bc , t h en pr ov e t h at t h e equ at i on
Then find t he value of p.
[TERM 2, 2015] (a2  b2 ) x2  2(ac  bd) x  (c2  d 2 )  0 h as n o
r eal r oot s.
2 Marks Questions [TERM 2, 2017]
2. Find the value of p so t hat t he quadr atic equat ion
9. I f t he equat ion (1 + m )x + 2mcx + c2 – a2 = 0 has
2 2

px( x  3)  9  0 has t wo equal r oot s. equal r oot s t hen show t hat c2 = a2(1 + m 2).
[TERM 2, 2017] [TERM 2, 2017]
3. Fi nd t he value of p for which t he r oot s of t he 10. I s i t possi bl e t o desi gn a r ect angul ar par k of
equat ion px (x – 2) + 6 = 0, ar e equal. per i met er 80m and ar ea 400m 2? I f so fi nd i t s
[TERM 2, 2012] length and br eadt h.
4. Fi nd t he val ues of p for whi ch t he quadr at i c [TERM 2, 2017]
equat i on 4x 2 + px + 3 = 0 has equal r oot s. 4 Marks Questions
[TERM 2, 2014]
11. Fi nd t he val ues of k for whi ch t he quadr at i c
5. I f – 5 i s a r oot of t h e qu adr at i c equ at i on
equ at i on ( k  4) x2  ( k  1) x  1  0 h as equ al
2 x2  px  15  0 and t he quadr at i c equat i on r oot s. Also find t hese r oot s.
p(x2 + x) + k = 0 has equal r oots, find the value of k . [TERM 2, 2014]
[TERM 2, 2016]
4.56 CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations

 Solutions The gi ven equat i on wi ll have equal r oot s, if

D=0
1. The given quadr at ic equat ion is
 4 p2  24 p  0
px2  2 5 px  15  0
 4 p  p  6  0
So, a  p, b  2 5 p, c  15
 p  0 or p  6
When t he r oot s of t he quadr at i c equat i on ar e
equal, t hen it s discr iminant wi ll be zer o. Here, p = 0 is not possible because putting p = 0 in
the equation will eliminate the ter m containing x 2.
D  b2  4 ac  0 [½] Thus, t he value of p is 6. [1]
2 4. Consider t he equat ion:

 2 5 p   4  p  15  0
4 x2  px  3  0
2
 20 p  60 p  0
For r oots to be equal, discr iminant is equal to zer o.
 20 p  p  3  0
b2  4 ac  0
 20 p  0 or  p  3  0 H er e a  4, b  p, c  3 [1]
 p  0 or p  3 Subst it ut e t he values i n t he equat i on

px2  2 5 px  15  0 i s gi v en a qu adr at i c  p2  4  4  3  0
equat ion, so, p cannot be equal t o 0.
 p2  48  0
H ence, p  3 [½]
 p2  48
2. We have, px( x  3)  9  0
 p  48  4 3 [1]
 px2  3 px  9  0 5. – 5 i s a r oot of t h e qu adr at i c equ at i on
For t wo equal r oot s, D  0 2 x2  px  15  0 so it wi ll sat isfy t he equat ion.
 b2  4 ac  0 [1]
2  ( 5) 2  p   5   15  0
 (3 p)2  4 p(9)  0 50  5 p  15  0
 9 p2  36 p  0 35  5 p  0
p=7
 9 p(p  4)  0
B y pu t t i n g t h e val u e of p i n t h e equ at i on
 9 p  0 and (p  4)  0
p x2  x  k  0 , we get
 
 p  0 and p  4
H er e, value of p cannot be 0. 7 x2  7 x  k  0 [1]
Ther efor e, t he value of p is 4. [1] This equat ion has equal r oot s so it s discr imi nant
wi ll be zer o
3. The given equat ion is
D  b2  4 ac  0
px  x  2  6  0
H er e, a  7, b  7 and c  k
2
 px  2 px  6  0
72  4  7  k  0
H er e, a  p, b  2 p and c  6 . [½] 49  28 k  0
2
 D  b  4 ac 49  28 k
49 7
2
  2 p  4  p  6 k 
28 4
 4 p2  24 p [½] 7
The val ue of k i s [1]
4
CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations 4.57

6. Si mplifyi ng t he given equat ion:

 4 x2  4 x  1  0 [1]
x2  k 2 x  k  1  2  0
  On split t ing t he middle t er m we get ,

4 x2  2 x  2 x  1  0
x2  2 xk  k2  k  2  0
 2 x  2 x  1  1  2 x  1  0
x2  2 kx  k2  k  2  0
 
  2 x  1 2 x  1  0
a  1; b  2k; c  k2  k  2
  [1]
1 1
A quadr at ic equat ion has r eal and equal r oot s i f: x and x 
2 2
D = 0 i.e. di scr iminant i s zer o]
The value of k is 3 and t he r oot s of t he equat ion
Appl ying t he above condi t i on in given equat ion:
1 1
D  b2  4 ac ar e and . [1]
2 2
 2 k 2  4  1   k 2  k  2  0 8. We have,

4 k2  4 k2  4 k  8  0 (a2  b2 ) x2  2(ac  bd) x  (c2  d 2 )  0

4k  8  0 a  (a2  b2 ), b  2(ac  bd ), c  (c2  d 2 ) [1]
 4k  8
D  b2  4 ac
8 Ther efor e,
k 2
4 2
So value of k = 2 [1] D   2(ac  bd )  4  (a2  b2 )  (c2  d 2 )
7. Given t he quadr at ic equat ion   4( a2 c2  b2 d 2  2abcd) 
 
kx2  1  2( k  1) x  x2  0 .
4  ( a2  b2 )  ( c2  d 2 )
I t can be wr it t en as:
 4(a2 c2  b2 d 2  2abcd) 
 
 k  1 x2  2( k  1) x  1  0
This equat ion is of t he for m 4 a2 c2  a2 d 2  b2 c2  b2 d 2
 
 a2 c2  b2 d 2  2 abcd
ax2  bx  c  0
 4   

Discr iminant is given by t he for mula, 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 
D  b2  4 ac

  a c  a d  b c  b d  
2
 a2 c2  b2 d 2  2abcd  
D   2  k  1   4  k  11  4   [1]
 a2 c2  a2 d 2  b2 c2  b2 d 2  
 4 k2  1  2k  4 k  4
   4  2abcd  a2 d 2  b2 c2 
 
 
 4 k 2  12 k
 4 k  k  3 [1]  4  a2 d 2  b2 c2  2abcd 
 
 
For t his quadr at ic equat ion t o have zer o r oot s 2
t he discr iminant is zer o.  4  ad  bc
Given ad  bc
 4 k  k  3  0
Ther efor e,
 4 k  0 or k  3  0
 ad  bc  0
 k  0 or k  3
2
But it is given t hat k is non-zer o.   ad  bc  0
k3 2
 4  ad  bc  0
To find t he r oot s of t he equat ion subst it ut e k  3
in t he given quadr at ic equat ion we get , D0
So, t he given equat ion has no r eal r oot s. H ence,
  3  1 x 2  2(3  1) x  1  0
pr oved. [1]
4.58 CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations

9. For t he given equat ion   y  20 y  20  0

1  m2  x2  2mcx  c2 – a2  0  y  20,20
As t he r oot s ar e r eal, given sit uat ion is possible
2 2 2
 
a  1  m , b  2mc, c  c  a but t he r oot s ar e equal, so it is a squar e wit h t he
lengt h of each side equal t o 20m. [1]
We know t hat when quadr atic equation has equal
11. I t is given t hat t he quadr at ic equat ion has equal
r oot s, it s discr iminant is zer o. r oot s, so it s discr iminant will be zer o.
i.e. D  b2  4 ac  0 [1]  D  b2  4 ac  0
Put t ing t he values, we'll get Compar e given quadr atic equat ion with standar d
for m of quadr at ic equat ion ax2  bx  c  0 ,
 D  b2  4 ac
a  k  4, b  k  1, c  1
2
  2mc  4  1  m 2  c2  a2  0
    2
  k  1  4   k  4   1  0
 4m 2 c2  4  c 2
 a2  c2 m 2  a2 m 2  0
  k 2  2 k  1  4 k  16  0 [1]

 4 c2 m 2  4 c2  4 a2  4 c2 m 2  4 a2 m 2  0 [1] (Using  a  b 2  a2  2ab  b2 )

 4 c2  4 a2  4 a 2 m 2  0
 k 2  2 k  15  0
2 2 2 2 Split t ing t he middle t er m,
 4a  4a m  4c

 4 a2 1  m 2  4 c2
   k 2  5 k  3 k  15  0
 k( k  5)  3( k  5)  0
 c2  a2 1  m 2     k  3 k  5  0
H ence pr oved. [1]  k  3 or k  5 [1]
10. L et t he lengt h of t he par k = y m Subst it ut e, k  5 in
Given per imet er of t he par k is 80m. So,
( k  4) x2  ( k  1) x  1  0
2  y  widt h   80
 9 x2  6 x  1  0
 y  widt h  40 2
  3 x  1  0
 widt h  40  y [1]
1 1
Accor ding t o t he quest ion, t he ar ea of t he par k is x , [1]
2.
3 3
400m So,
Subst it ut e, k  3 in
lengt h  widt h  400
( k  4) x2  ( k  1) x  1  0
 y  40  y  400
x2  2 x  1  0
 40 y  y2  400 [1]
2
  x  1  0

 y2  40 y  400  0  x  1,1
H ence, t he equal r oot of t he gi ven quadr at i c
 y2  20 y  20 y  400  0 1
equat ion is eit her 1 or . [1]
 y( y  20)  20( y  20)  0 3
CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations 4.59

Value Based So, t B 

1500
x  250

PREVIOUS YEARS’  t A  t B  30 min [1]

I t i s gi ven i n t he quest i on t hat t he pl ane got
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS delayed by half an hour.

4 Marks Question 1500 1500 30

  
x x  250 60
1. A passenger, while boar ding t he plane, slipped
fr om t he st air s and got hur t . The pilot t ook t he 1500  x  250  x 1
passenger in t he emer gency clinic at t he air por t  
x  x  250 2
for t r eat ment . Due t o t his, t he plane got delayed
by half an hour. To r each t he dest inat ion 1500
 x2  250 x  750000
km away in t ime, so t hat t he passenger s could
catch the connecting flight, t he speed of the plane  x2  250 x  750000  0 [1]
was i ncr eased by 250k m/hour t han t he usual
Split t ing t he middle t er m,
speed. Find t he usual speed of t he plane. What
value is depict ed in t his quest ion?  x2  1000 x  750 x  750000  0
[TERM 2, 2016]
 x  x  1000  750  x  1000  0
 Solutions
1. L et t he usual speed of t he plane be x km/h.   x  750 x  1000  0
L et t he t i me t ak en by t he pl ane t o r each t he  x  750 or x  1000
dest inat ion be .
Speed cannot be in negat ive, x  750
Dist ance
Using Time = , T h er ef or e, t h e u su al speed of t h e pl an e i s
Speed
750k m/hr .
1500 The pr omptness shown by the pilot is appr eciable.
So, t A  [1] The pi l ot i s a car i ng per son who has set an
x
example of a t r ust wor t hy cit izen. [1]
The incr eased speed is  x  250 km / hr .
4.60 CHAPTER 4 : Quadratic Equations
CHAPTER 5

Arithmetic Progression
Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams
Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Terms of AP 1 mark 1 mark 2 marks 1, 2 marks 1 mark 1, 2, 4 marks
Sum of AP 2, 4 marks 2, 4 marks 3, 3, 4 marks 3, 4 marks 2, 3 marks 3 marks
Word Problem on AP
5.62 CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression

[TOPIC 1] Arithmetic Progression

Summary nth Term of an A.P.

L et a1, a2, a3 …….. be an A.P., wit h fir st t er m as a, and
Sequence and Series common differ ence as d.

Sequence: A sequence is an ar r angement of number Fir st t er m is = a (i)

in a definit e or der, accor ding t o a definit e r ule. Second t er m (a2) = a + d (ii)
Terms: Var ious number s occur r ing in a sequence ar e
called t er ms or element . = a + (2 – 1)d
Consider t he following list s of number : Thir d t er m (a3) = a2 + d (iii)
3, 6, 9, 12, …………… =a+d+d [fr om (i)]
4, 8, 12, 16, …………… = a + 2d
– 3, – 2, – 1, 0, …………… or = a + (3 – 1)d
I n all t he list above, we obser ve t hat each successive Four t h t er m a4 = a3 + d
t er ms ar e obt ained by adding a fixed number t o t he
or = a + 2d + d [fr om (iii)]
pr eceding t er ms. Such list of number s is said t o for m
on Ar it hmet ic Progr ession (AP). = a + 3d
Arithmetic Progression: An ar it hmet ic pr ogr ession = a + (4 – 1)d
is a list of number s in which each t er m is obt ained by  nt h t er m an = a + (n – 1)d
adding a fixed number t o t he pr eceding t er m except  The nth term of the A.P. with first term a &
t he fir st t er m. common difference d is given by an = a + (n –
This fixed number is called t he common difference 1)d
(d) of t he A.P.
an is also called as gener al t er m of an A.P.
Common differ ence can be posit ive, negat ive or zer o.
I f t her e ar e P t er ms in t he A.P. t hen ap r epr esent s t he
L et us denot e fir st t er m of A.P. by a or t , second t er m last t er m which can also be denot ed by l .
by a2 or t 2 and nt h t er m by an or t n & t he common
TO FI N D nth TERM FROM TH E EN D OF AN A.P.
differ ence by d. Then t he A.P. becomes
Consider t he following A.P. a, a + d, a + 2d,...(l – 2d), (l
a 1 , a 2 , a 3 …………………… an
– d), l
wher e a2  a1 = d
wher e  is t he last t er m
or a2 = a1 + d
last t er m l = l  (1  1)d
similar ly a3 = a2 + d
2nd last t er m l  d = l  (2  1) d
  I n general, an – an-1 = d
3r d last t er m l  2d = l  (3  1)d
or an = an-1 + d
T h u s a, a + d , a + 2 d , ………………….. ……………………………

for ms an A.P. whose fi r st t er m i s ‘a ’ & common ……………………………

differ ence is ‘d’  nth term from the end = l  (n  1) d
This is called gener al for m of an A.P. CON DI TI ON FOR TERM S TO BE I N A.P.
Finite A.P. : An A.P. cont aining finit e number of t er ms I f t hr ee number s a, b, c, in or der ar e in A.P. Then,
is called finit e A.P. b – a = common differ ence = c – b
e.g. 147, 149, 151 ………………….. 163.  b– a= c– b
I nfinite A.P. : An A.P. cont aini ng i nfini t e t er ms is  2b = a + c
called infinit e A.P.
 a, b, c are in A.P. iff
e.g. 6, 9, 12, 15 ………………………..
CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression 5.63

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 10. H ow many t wo-digit number s ar e divisible by 3?

[TERM 2, 2012]

EXAMINATION QUESTIONS 11. H ow many t hr ee di gi t nat ur al number s ar e

divisible by 7?
TOPIC 1 [TERM 2, 2013]

12. Find t he number of nat ur al number s bet ween

1 Mark Questions 101 an d 999 wh i ch ar e di vi si bl e by bot h 2
1. I n an AP, if d = – 2, n = 5 and an = 0 then the value and 5.
of a is
[TERM 2, 2014]
(a) 10 (b) 5
13. Find t he middle t er m of t he A.P. 6, 13, 20, ....,
(c) – 8 (d) 8
216.
[TERM 2, 2011]
[TERM 2, 2015]
2. The common differ ence of the A.P.
14. The 4 t er m of an A.P. is zer o. Pr ove t hat t he
th

1 (1  p) (1  2 p) 25t h t er m of an A.P. is t hr ee t imes it s 11t h t er m.

, , ... ... ... is:
p p p [TERM 2, 2016]
(a) p (b) – p 15. Which t er m of t he pr ogr ession
(c) – 1 (d) 1
[TERM 2, 2013]
1 1 3
20,19 ,18 ,17 ,...... is t he fir st negative ter m?
4 2 4
3. I f k, 2k – 1 and 2k + 1 ar e t hr ee consecutive t er ms
of an A.P., the value of k is [TERM 2, 2017]
(a) 2 (b) 3
(c) – 3 (d) 5
3 Marks Questions
[TERM 2, 2014]
16. Find the value of t he middle ter m of t he following
AP: – 6, – 2, 2, ...., 58.
4. The fir st t hr ee t er ms of an AP r espect ively ar e
[TERM 2, 2011]
3 y  1,3 y  5 and 5y + 1. Then y equals:
17. Det er mine t he AP whose four t h t er m is 18 and
(a) – 3 (b) 4
the differ ence of the ninth ter m fr om the fifteenth
(c) 5 (d) 2
t er m is 30.
[TERM 2, 2014]
[TERM 2, 2011]
5. For what value of k will k  9,2 k  1,2 k  7 ar e
t he consecut ive t er ms of an A.P.? 1
18. I f t he sevent h t er m of an AP is and it s nint h
9
[TERM 2, 2016]
6. Find t he 9t h t er m fr om t he end (t owar ds t he fir st 1
t er m) of t he A.P. 5, 9, 13, ........, 185. t er m is , find it s 63r d t er m.
9
[TERM 2, 2016]
[TERM 2, 2014]
7. What is the common differ ence of an A.P. in which
19. Which t er m of A.P. 3, 15, 27, 39,…… wi ll be 132
a21  a7  84 ?
mor e t han it s 54t h t er m.
[TERM 2, 2017]
[TERM 2, 2017]
8. I n an AP, if t he common differ ence (d) = – 4, and
the sevent h ter m (a7) is 4, then find the fir st t er m. 4 Marks Questions
[DELH I 2018] 20. Show t hat a1, a2, a3, ........, an for m A.P. wher e an
2 Marks Questions is defined as an = 9 – 5n.
[TERM 2, 2017]
9. Find whet her – 150 is a t er m of t he AP 17, 12, 7,
2, ....?
[TERM 2, 2011]
5.64 CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression

4. I f a, b and c ar e in AP,
 Solutions
b a  cb
1. Given t hat ,
d = – 2, n = 5 and an = 0 2b  a  c
We know t hat 2  3 y  5  3 y  1  5 y  1
an = a + (n – 1) d [½]
6 y  10  8 y
Subst it ut ing t he given values in above equat ion.
 0  a  (5  1)(2) 10  8 y  6 y
2y = 10
 0  a  (4)(2)
y=5
0  a8
H ence t he cor r ect opt ion is (c). [1]
a8 [½] 5. Ar it hmet ic mean, 2b = a + c
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (d). a  k  9, b  2 k  1, c  2 k  7
2. The given A.P. is
By put t ing t he values of a, b and c in equat ion
1 (1  p) (1  2 p) 2(2 k  1)  k  9  2k  7
, , ... ... ...
p p p
4 k  2  3 k  16
And,
4 k  3 k  18
1 k = 18
Fir st t er m  a1  
p
H ence, for k = 18; k  9,2 k  1,2 k  7 will be t he
(1  p) consecut ive t er ms of an A.P. [1]
Second t er m  a2   [½]
p 6. The last t er m of t he AP fr om t he end, l = 185

Common differ ence (d) = a2 – a1 Common differ ence, d = 9 – 5 = 4

To find t he 9t h t er m fr om t he end, r ear r ange t he
(1  p) 1 A.P. 185, 181,.......,13, 9, 5
 
p p
The fir st t er m of t his A.P. is 185 and t he common
differ ence is -– 4.
1 p1
 T h e n t h t er m of t h e A P i s gi v en by
p
an  a   n  1 d . [½]
 d  1
Thus t he common differ ence of t he given A.P. is So, t he 9t h t er m of t he A.P. is
"– 1". = 185 + (9 – 1) (– 4)
H ence t he cor r ect opt ion is (c). [½] = 185 – 8 × 4
3. L et a, b and c ar e in A.P. t hen b – a = c – b = 185 – 32
H er e t he t hr ee consecut ive t er ms of an A.P. ar e = 153
k , 2k -– 1 and 2k + 1 H ence, t he 9t h t er m fr om t he end is 153. [½]
 2 k  1  k  2k  1   2 k  1 7. L et be t he fir st t er m d be t he common differ ence
of Ar it hmet ic pr ogr ession.
 2k  1  k  2k  1  2k  1 As,
 k 1  2 an  a  (n  1) d
 k  21  3
 a21  a   21  1 d  a  20 d
The cor r ect answer is (b). [1]
CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression 5.65

10. Number s divisible by 3 ar e mult iples of 3.

a7  a   7  1 d  a  6d [½]
3, 6, 9, 12, 15…
Given a21  a7  84 The smallest t wo-digit number divisible by 3 is
12. And t he lar gest 2-digit number divisible by
  a  20 d    a  6d   84 3 is 99.
So, t he ser ies of t he 2-digit mult iples of 3 st ar t s
 a  20 d  a  6 d  84
with 12 and ends with 99. The differ ence bet ween
 20 d  6 d  84 t he number s is 3.
Ther efor e, t he A.P. is 12, 15, 18, 21, 24 …90, 93,
 14 d  84
96, 99. [1]
Dividing bot h sides by 14
I n t he sequence, t he fir st t er m, a = 12. The last
14 d 84 t er m, l = 99. The common differ ence, d = 3. The
  n t h t er m is an = 99.
14 14
Now, an  a1   n  1 d
d6
Therefor e, the common differ ence of A.P. is 6 [½]  99  12   n  1 3
8. The nt h t er m = a + (n – 1) d
 99  12  3n  3
Wher e a = fir st t er m, n = 7, d = – 4
 99  3n  9
Put t ing t hese values,
a + (7 – 1) (– 4) = 4  3n  90
a + 6(– 4) = 4  n  30
 a = 4 + 24 T h er ef or e, t h er e ar e 30 t wo-di gi t n u m ber s
 a = 28. divisible by 3. [1]

So t he fir st t er m is 28. [1] 11. Following ar e t he t hr ee digit nat ur al number s

divisible by 7:
9. Given, t he AP 17, 12, 7, 2, ....
105,112,119,126.........,........,...994
We have, a  17, d  12  17  5
The given ser ies is A.P.
L et , an  150 Fir st t er m (a) = 105
Common diff (d) = 7
But , an  a  (n  1) d [1]
n t h t er m (an) = 994 [1]
Subst it ut e t he value of an in t he above equat ion.
I t is known t hat t he t er m of an A.P. is given by,
 150  17  (n  1)(5)
an  a   n  1 d
 150  17  5n  5
Subst itut ing a  105, d  7 and an  994
 150  22  5n
994  105   n  1 7
 150  22  5n
 994  105  7 n  7
 172  5n
 994  98  7 n
172
n  7 n  994  98
5
But "n " cannot be a fr actions. "n " is always a whole  7n  896
number.  n  128
Ther efor e, – 150 is not a t er m of the given AP. [1] Thus 128 three digit natural number s ar e divisible
by 7. [1]
5.66 CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression

12. Number s t hat ar e divisible by bot h 2 and 5 will 14. Given, 4t h t er m is zer o.
be ar e mult iples of 10. So, a + 3d = 0
The nat ur al number s between 101 and 999 which
 a  3 d
ar e divisible by bot h 2 and 5 will be : 110, 120,
130, ...., 990. n t h Ter m of an A.P. is given by,
This for ms an A.P. with fir st ter m as 110, common an  a   n  1 d [1]
differ ence 10 and last t er m as 990.
a11  a  10 d
n t h t er m of an A.P. an  a   n  1 d [1]
Subst it ut e t he value of a,
Substitute the value of a, d and an
a11  3d  10 d  7 d
 990  110   n  1 10
Similar ly, a25  a  24 d
 990  110  10 n  10
 880  10 n  10 a25  3d  24 d  21d
 10 n  890
Or, a25  3  7 d
 n  89
Ther efor e, 89 nat ur al number s lie bet ween 101 a25  3  a11
and 999 which ar e divisible by 2 and 5. [1] H ence pr oved. [1]
13. 6, 13, 20, ...., 216.
15. Given,
I n t he given sequence a  6, an  216 and d  7 Fir st t er m a = 20
Common differ ence
We know t hat an  a   n  1 d
Subst it ute a = 6, an = 216 and d = 7 in t he for mula 1 77  80 3
d  19  20  
t o find t he number of t er ms we get , 4 4 4

216  6   n  1 7 L et n t h t er m of AP be t he fir st negat ive t er m

 an  0
 216  6  7 n  7
 216  7 n  1  an  0 [1]

 217  7 n  3
 20   n  1     0
 4
217
n  31 [1]
7
 3 3n 
Ther efor e t he number of t er ms i n t he gi ven  20    0
 4 4 
sequence is 31 which is odd.
 n  1 3 3n
Ther efor e the middle ter m will be   th ter m  20  
4 4
0
2 
of t he A.P.
83 3n
31  1   0
  16th t erm 4 4
2
We know t hat nt h t er m in an A.P. is calculat ed by  83  3n  0

t he for mula an  a   n  1 d  3n  83

2
 16th t er m  6  16  1 7  n  27
3
= 6 + 105
 n  28
Now her e n = 16
Ther efor e, 28t h t er m is t he fir st negat ive t er m of
H ence, t he middle t er m is 111. [1]
t he A.P. [1]
CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression 5.67

16. Clear ly, – 6, – 2, 2, ...., 58 is an AP wit h t he fir st Subst it ut e t he value of d in equat ion (i)
t er m and common differ ence d = – 2 – (– 6) = – 2 + a + 3(5) = 18
6 = 4. L et t her e be n t er ms in t he given AP. Then,
a = 18 – 15 = 3
an  58  Fir st t er m a1 = 3

an  a  (n  1) d Second t er m a2 = a1 + d = 3 + 5 = 8
Thir d t er m a3 = a1 + 2d = 3 + 2(5) = 13
a  (n  1) d  58 Ther efor e, t he AP is 3, 8, 13, .... [1]
(6)  (n  1)4  58 [1] 18. L et a be t he fi r st t er m and d be t he common
differ ence of t he given A.P.
 6  4 n  4  58
4n – 10 = 58 1
a7 
9
4n = 58 + 10
 4 n  68 1
a9 
7
68
n  17 1
4 a7  a   7  1 d 
9
th
 n  1 1
H er e, n is odd, so, t he middle t e r m is  a  6d  ..... 1 [1]
 2  9
t er m [1]
1
a9  a   9  1 d 
th th 7
 17  1   18 
i.e.     9th ter m is t he middle
 2   2 1
a  8d  .....  2
t er m and is given by, 7
Subt r act ing (1) fr om (2)
a9  a  (9  1) d
= – 6 + 8 (4) 2
2d 
= – 6 + 32 63

= 26 1
d
The value of t he middle t er m of t he given AP is 63
26. [1]
1
17. Given t hat , four t h t er m a4 = 18 and the differ ence Put d  in t he equat ion (1)
63
of t he nint h t er m fr om t he fift eent h t er m is 30,
a15 – a9 = 30 [1]  1 1
a  6    [1]
Clear ly,  63  9
a4 = 18
1
 a  3 d  18 ..........….(i ) a
63
a15 – a9 = 30
a63  a   63  1 d
a  14 d  (a  8d)  30
1  1
a  14 d  a  8 d  30   62  
63  63 
 6 d  30
63
30  1
d 5 [1] 63
6
H ence, a63 = 1 [1]
5.68 CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression

19. H er e, a = 3 and d =15 – 3 =12. 20. Given an  9  5n

Now, we fir st find t he 54t h t er m of t he given A.P.
a1  9  5(1)  4
A s w e k n ow t h at n t h t er m i s gi v en by
an  a  (n  1) d wher e n = 54 [1] a2  9  5(2)  1

 a54  3  (54  1)12 a3  9  5(3)  6 [1]

 a54  3  53  12 Differ ence bet ween, a2 and a1

= a2 – a1
 a54  3  636
=– 1– 4=–5 [1]
 a54  639 [1] Differ ence bet ween a3 and a2
L et 's say an is t he t er m which is 132 mor e t han Also, an = 9 – 5n can be wr it t en as
54t h t er m. So, accor ding t o t he Quest ion, an  4  5  5n
an  a54  132
 an  4  1  n  5
 a  (n  1) d  639  132
 an  4  (n  1)(5) which is the standar d for m
 3  (n  1)12  771 of t he n t h t er m of an A.P. [1]
 3  12n  12  771 Also, as t he di ffer ence is same bet ween t hese
t er ms, hence, t hey for m an A.P.
 12n  9  771
H ence pr oved. [1]
 12n  771  9
 12n  780

780
n
12

 n  65
Ther efor e, 65t h t er m will be 132 mor e t han 54t h
t er m. [1]
CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression 5.69

[TOPIC 2] Sum of n Terms of an A.P.

Summary Sn 
n
2 a   n  1 d 
2
Sum of n Terms of an A.P. Sn 
n
 a  an 
2
L et a be t he fir st ter m and d be t he common differ ence
wher e an = a + (n – 1)d
of an A.P. l is t he last t er m wher e l = a + (n  1) d.
Sum of fir st n t er ms of t he given A.P. is given by Selection of Terms in A.P.
Sn  a   a  d    a  2d   ....  l  2d    l  d   l …(i ) Some t i mes cer t ai n number of t er ms i n A.P. ar e
r equir ed. The following ways of select ing t er ms ar e
Wr it ing in r ever se or der convenient .
Sn  l   l  d    l  2d   ....  a  2d    a  d   a …(i i ) N umber Terms common
of terms difference
Adding (i) and (ii) we get
2Sn   a  l    a  l    a  l   .....   a  l  3 a – d , a, a + d d
 
n t imes
4 a – 3d , a – d , a + d , a + 3d 2d
2Sn  n  a  l 
5 a – 2d, a – d, a, a + d, a + 2d d
n n
Sn   a  l    a  a   n  1 d  6 a – 5d , a – 3d , a – d , a + d , 2d
2 2
[  l = a + (n – 1)d] a + 3d , a + 5d

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 4. H ow many t er ms of t he A.P. 18, 16, 14 ... be t aken

so t hat t heir sum is zer o?
[TERM 2, 2016]
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS 5. H ow many t er ms of A.P 27, 24, 21, .... should be
TOPIC 2 t aken so t hat t heir sum is zer o (0)?
[TERM 2, 2017]
1 Mark Question 6. Find t he sum of fir st 8 mult iple of 3.
1. I f t he n t h t er m of an A.P. is (2n + 1), t hen t he sum [DELH I 2018]
of it s fir st t hr ee t er ms is
(a) 6n + 3 (b) 15 3 Marks Questions
(c) 12 (d) 21 7. Find t he sum of all mult iples of 7 lying bet ween
[TERM 2, 2012] 500 and 900.

2 Marks Questions [TERM 2, 2012]

8. F i n d t h e n u m ber of t er m s of t h e A .P.
2. The fir st and t he last t er ms of an AP ar e 5 and 45
r espect ively. I f t he sum of all it s t er ms is 400, 1 1
find it s common differ ence. 18, 15 ,13, ...........,  49 and find t he sum of
2 2
[TERM 2, 2014] all it s t er ms.
3. I n an AP, if S5 + S7 = 167 and S10 = 235, t hen find [TERM 2, 2013]
t he AP, wher e Sn denot es t he sum of fir st t er ms.
[TERM 2, 2015]
5.70 CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression

9. The sum of t he 5t h and t he 9t h t er ms of an AP is 21. The r at io of t he sums of fir st m and fir st n t er ms

30. I f it s 8t h t er m is t hr ee t imes it s 25t h t er m, find of an A. P. is m 2 : n 2.
t he AP. Show t hat t he r at io of it s m t h and n t h t er ms is
[TERM 2, 2014] (2m – 1) : (2n – 1).
10. I f Sn denot es t he sum of fir st n t er ms of an A.P., [TERM 2, 2017]

pr ove t hat S12  3  S8  S4  . 22. The sum of four consecut ive number s in an AP is
32 and t he r at io of the pr oduct of t he fir st and the
[TERM 2, 2015] last t er m t o t he pr oduct of t wo middle t er ms is
11. The 14t h t er m of an AP i s t wi ce i t s 8 t h t er m. 7 : 15. Find t he number s.
I f it s 6t h t er m is – 8, t hen find t he sum of it s fir st [DELH I 2018]
20 t er ms.
[TERM 2, 2015]  Solutions
12. I f t he r at io of t he sum of fi r st n t er ms of t wo 1. We have,
A.P's is (7n + 1) : (4n + 27) find t he r at io of t heir
m t h t er ms.
an   2n  1
[TERM 2, 2015]  a1  2  1  1  3
13. I f t he sum of fir st 7 ter ms of an A.P. is 49 and t hat So, t he given sequence is an A.P. wit h fir st t er m
of it s fir st 17 t er ms is 289, find t he sum of fir st n a = a1 = 3.
t er ms of t he A.P. And t he second t er m, a2  2  2  1  5 .
[TERM 2, 2016] So, t he common differ ence,
1 1 d  a2  a1  5  3  2 [½]
14. I f m t h t er m of an A.P. is and n t h t er m is ,
n m Ther efor e, t he sum of fir st 3 t er ms of t he A.P. is
t hen find t he sum of it s fir st mn t er ms. given by
[TERM 2, 2017] n
Sn  2a   n  1 d 
15. Find t he sum of t er ms of t he ser ies 2
3
 1  2  3  6   3  1 2
 4     4     4    ...... 2
n n n
3
 6  4
[TERM 2, 2017] 2
16. The sum of n t er m of an A.P is 3n 2  5n . Find 3
 10  = 15
t he A.P and it s 15t h t er m. 2
[TERM 2, 2017] H ence t he cor r ect opt ion is (b). [½]
2. L et a be t he fi r st t er m and d be t he common
4 Marks Questions differ ence.
17. Find the common differ ence of an A.P. whose fir st Given
t er m is 5 and t he sum of it s fir st four t er ms is a=5
half t he sum of t he next four t er ms. an = 45
[TERM 2, 2012] Sn = 400
18. I n an AP of 50 t er ms, t he sum of fir st 10 t er ms is
We know an  a   n  1 d
210 and t he sum of it s last 15 t er ms is 2565. Find
t he A.P. 45  5   n  1 d ]
[TERM 2, 2014]
40 =  n  1 d .......... 1
19. Find t he 60t h t er m of t he AP 8, 10, 12, ...., if it has
a t ot al of t er ms and hence find t he sum of it s last n
And Sn   a  an  [1]
10 t er ms. 2
[TERM 2, 2015] n
400   5  45
20. I f t he r at io of t he sum of t he fir st n t er ms of t wo 2
A.Ps is (7n + 1) : (4n + 27), t hen find t he r at io of n 400
t heir 9t h t er ms. 
2 50
[TERM 2, 2017]
n  2  8  16
CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression 5.71

On subst it ut ing n = 16 in (1) 4. The fir st t er m of t he AP is 18

40 = (16 – 1) d Common differ ence = 16 – 18 = – 2
40 = (15) d L et t he sum of t he fir st x t er ms of t he AP be 0.
40 8 So, t he sum of t he fir st x t er ms is given by-
d 
15 3 x
8  2  18   x  1 2   0
Thus, t he common differ ence is . [1] 2
3
x
3. S5  S7  167 (Given)  36   2 x  2   0
2
S10  235 (Given)
Sum of n t er ms is, x

2
 36  2 x  2  0 [1]
n
Sn  2a   n  1 d 
2 x
Wher e, 
2
 38  2 x  0
n = Number of t er ms
a = Fir st t er m  x 19  x   0
b = Common differ ence So, we get ,
5 7 x = 0 or 19 – x = 0
S5   2a   5  1 d  and S7  2a   7  1 d 
2 2 I gnor ing x = 0 we get ,
[1] x = 19
5
2
2a   5  1 d  72 2a  7  1 d  167 H ence, t he sum of fir st 19 t er ms of t he AP is 0.
[1]
On simplifying
5. H er e a = 27 and d = 24 – 27 = – 3,
5 a  10 d  7 a  21d  167
Accor ding t o t he Quest ion , t he sum should be
12a + 31d = 167 .....(i) zer o i.e. Sn = 0
For t he sum of fir st t en t er ms, Applying t he for mula for sum of n t er ms of an
10 A.P,
2
2a  10  1 d  235
n
Sn   2a  (n  1)d 
10a + 45d = 235 2
2a + 9d = 47 ....(ii)
n
M ult iply equat ion (ii) by 6 and subt r act equat ion 0  2  27  (n  1)(3)
2
(i) fr om it
6  2a  9 d   12a  31d   6  47  167 n
0 54  (3n  3) [1]
2
12a  54 d  12a  31d  282  167
23d = 115 n
0 or 54  (3n  3)  0
115 2
d 5
23 n = 0 or 57 – 3n = 0
Subst it ut e t he value of d in equat ion (ii), we get I gnor ing n = 0, we get ;
2a + 9(5) = 47 57 – 3n = 0
2a + 45 = 47  3n = 57
2a = 47 – 45 = 2  n = 19
2 Ther efor e, 19 t er ms of t his A.P. should be t aken
a 1
2 so t hat t heir sum is zer o (0). [1]
So t he values of a and b ar e d = 5a
H ence, t he AP is 1, 6, 11, 16, 21, 26, .... [1]
5.72 CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression

6. The fir st 8 mult iples of 3 ar e 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 8. The given A.P. is:
21, 24.
1 1
I t for m an AP wit h t he fir st t er m (a) = 3, t he 18, 15 ,13, ...........,  49
2 2
differ ence (d) = 3 and t he last t er m (l ) = 24.
And,
The sum of as an AP:
Fir st t er m (a1) = 18
n 1
Sn  a  l  [1]
2 Second t er m  a2   15
2
8 Common differ ence (d) = a2 – a1
  3  24 
2
1
 4  27  15  18
2
 Sn  108
31  36
So t he sum of t he fir st 8 mult iples of 3 is equal t o 
2
108. [1]
5 [1]
7. Bet ween 500 and 900, t he fir st mult iple of 7 is d
a = 504 and t he last mult iple of 7 is l = 896 and 2
L et t he A.P. has n t er ms.
t he common differ ence is d = 7
H ence, t he A.P will be 1
an  49
504, 511, 518, ...., 896 [1] 2

The number of t er ms in t his A.P is given by; Also, an  a  n  1 d

an  a   n  1 d Thus,
1
 896  504   n  1 7  49 a  n  1 d
2

  n  1 7  392 99 5
 18   n  1
2 2
 n  1  56
99  5n 5 
 n  57 [1]  18    
2  2 2
Ther efor e, t he sum of all t he mult iples of 7 lying – 99 = 41 – 5n
bet ween 500 and 900 is given by
5n = 140
n n = 28 [1]
Sn  2a   n  1 d 
2  The number of t er ms in t he given A.P. is 28
57 Sum of n t er ms (Sn) :
 S57  2  504   57  1 7
2 
n
Sn  2 a  n  1 d 
57 2
 S57  1008  56  7
2
28  5 
S28  2  18   28  1
57 2  2 
 S57  1008  392
2
 72  135 
57 S28  14  
 S57   1400  2 
2
 S57  57  700 S28  7  63
S28 = – 441
 S57  39900
Thus t he sum of all t he t er ms of t he A.P. is – 441.
Ther efor e, t he sum of al l mul t i pl es of 7 l yi ng
[1]
bet ween 500 and 900 is 39900. [1]
CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression 5.73

9. 5t h t er m of an A.P. = a + 4d S8 denot es t he sum of fir st 8 t er ms of an AP.

9 t er m of an A.P. = a + 8d
th
8
Sum of 5t h and 9t h t er m of an A.P. = 30 S8  2a   8  1 d  [1]
2
 a  4 d  a  8 d  30
 S8  4  2a  7d   8 a  28d ....(i)
Add t he like t er ms
S4 denot es t he sum of fir st 4 t er ms of an AP.
 2 a  12 d  30
 2  a  6 d   30 4
S4  2a   4  1 d 
2
30
 a  6d   15  S4  2  2a  3d   4 a  6d ....(ii)
2
 a  6 d  15 ....(1) [1] Now, fr om equat ions (i) and (ii);
25 t er m of an A.P. = a + 24d
th
3  S8  S4   3 8 a  28 d   4 a  6 d 
8t h t er m of an A.P. =a + 7d
Gi ven t hat t he 25t h t er m i s t hr ee t i mes it s 8t h 3  S8  S4   3 8 a  28 d   4 a  6 d  [1]
t er m
 a  24 d  3  a  7 d   3  4 a  22d 

 a  24 d  3 a  21d  6  2a  11d 
 3a  a  24 d  21d
12
 2a  3 d ....(2)   2a  12  1 d 
2 
Equat ion (1) can be wr it t en as
= S12
a  2  3d   15 ....(3) [1] H ence pr oved. [1]
Subst it ut e t he value of 3d fr om equat ion (2) in 11. 14t h t er m of t he AP = 2 × 8t h t er m of t he AP
t he above equat ion (3). (Given)
Ther efor e,
Also, an  a   n  1 d
a  2  2a  15 Given t hat a14 = 2 × a8
a + 4a = 15
 a  14  1 d  2{ a   8  1 d }
5a = 15
a=3  a  13 d  2a  14 d
Subst it ut e t he value of a in equat ion (2) a+d=0 ....(a)
Also,
2  3  3d
a6 = – 8 (Given)
d=2
H en ce, f i r st t er m of t h e A .P. i s 3 an d t h e a   6  1 d  8
common differ ence is 2 t her efor e, t he A.P. is 3, 5,
a + 5d = – 8 ....(b) [1]
7, 9, .... [1]
Subt r act equat ion (a) fr om (b)
10. To pr ove: S12  3  S8  S4 
a  5d   a  d   8  0
Pr oof: The sum of n t er ms of an AP is given by
t he for mula,  a  5 d  a  d  8  0

n  4 d  8
Sn  2a   n  1 d 
2 8
d  2
Wher e 'n ' denot es t he number of t er ms in an AP, 4
'a' denot es t he fi r st t er m and ' d ' denot es t he
common differ ence of AP.
5.74 CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression

Subst it ut e t he value of d in equat ion (a) 13. Let us suppose that the fir st ter m and the common
a– 2=0 differ ence of the given AP is 'a' and 'd' r espectively.

[1] We ar e given t he sum of fir st 7 t er ms, S7 = 49

a2
We know t hat
So t he values of a and d ar e 2 and – 2 r espect ively.
Sum of fir st n t er m is given by; n
S 2a   n  1 d 
2
n
Sn   2 a   n  1 d  7
2   2a  6d   49
2
20 7
S20  2  2   20  1 2   2  a  3d   49
2 2
S20  10  4  38  a  3d  7 ....(1) [1]

S20 = – 340 [1] Sum of t he fir st 17 t er ms, S17 = 289

12. Sum of fir st n t er ms of an A.P is, 17

 2a  16d   289
2
n
Sn   2a   n  1 d  17
2   2  a  8 d   289
2
Accor ding t o t he Quest ion,
289
n  a  8d   17
2
 2a   n  1 d  7n  1 17
 ....(2) [1]
n ' '  4n  27  a  8 d  17
2

2 a   n  1 d  Subt r act ing (2) fr om (1),
5d = 10

 2 a   n  1 d  
 7n  1 d2
' '  4 n  27 ....(1) [1]
 2 a   n  1 d  Subst it ut ing t he value of d in (1), we get ,
 a  3  2  7
t er m of an A.P. is an  a   n  1 d
So t he r at io of t he m t h t er ms is  a  76 1
Now sum of fir st n t er ms of t he A.P. will be
'
am : am  a   m  1 d : a '   m  1  d '
n
Sn  2a   n  1 d 
M ult iply bot h sides by 2 2
'
am : am  2a  2  m  1 d  : 2a '  2  m  1 d '  n
 2  1  2  n  1 
2
 2 a   2m  2  d : 2 a '   2m  2 d ' [1]  n 1  n  1  n 2
Replace n by (2m – 1) in equat ion (1) we get ; H ence, t he sum of t he fir st n t er ms of t he AP
is n 2. [1]
 2 a   2m  2 d  
7  2m  1  1 14. We know t hat n t h t er m of an A.P is given by
' '  4  2m  1  27
2a   2m  2 d  an  a   n  1 d
2  a   m  1 d  14m  6 Wher e, a i s fi r st t er m and d i s t he common

' '  8m  23 differ ence of t he given A.P.

2 a   m  1 d 
th 1
am 14 m  6 So, n t er m  a   n  1 d 
 m
'  8m  23
am
1
Or, a    n  1 d ....(i) [1]
14 m  6 m
H ence, r at io of t he m t h t er ms is [1]
 8m  23
CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression 5.75

Ther efor e, sum of fir st mn t er ms is given by;

th 1
And, m t er m  a   m  1 d 
n mn
Smn   a  amn 
2
1
Or, a    m  1 d ....(ii) Put values of a and amn fr om equat ion (iv) and (v)
n
we get ;
Equat ing (i) and (ii), we'll get
mn  1 
1 1 Smn    1
   n  1 d    m  1 d 2 mn 
m n

1 1
1 mn
 Smn  
    n  1 d   m  1 d 2 2
m n
1
nm  Smn  1  mn 
  nd  d  md  d 2
mn
H ence, t he sum of fir st mn t er ms is
nm
   n  m d 1
mn Smn  1  mn  [1]
2
1 15. Br eaking t he given ser ies in t wo ser ies, we'll get
d ....(iii)
mn
Put t ing t he value of d in equat ion (i), we'll get 1 2 3 
  4  4  4....     ....
n n n 
1  1 
a   n  1 
m  mn  1
  4  4  4....  1  2  3  ....
n
1 n 1 We K now t hat sum of an A.P i s gi ven by t he
a  
m mn mn for mula
1 1 1 n
a   Sn   2a   n  1 d 
m m mn 2

1 For t he sequence  4  4  4....

a ....(iv)
mn
a = 4, d = 0
Now, t he mn t h t er m will be given by
n
th  Sn   2  4   n  1 0
mn t er m  a   mn  1 d 2
Putting t he value of a andd in the above equation.
n
 Sn   8  4n [1]
th 1  1  2
 mn t erm    mn  1 
mn  mn 
1
For t he sequence
n

1  2  3..... 
th 1 mn 1
 mn t erm    [1]
mn mn mn a = 1, d = 1

1 n
 mn th = a mn = t er m  1 ....(v)  Sn    2  1   n  1 1
n 2
We know t hat t he sum of n t er ms of A.P is given
by; 1
 Sn   2  n  1
2
n
Sn   a  an 
2 1
 Sn   n  1 [1]
2
5.76 CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression

N ow, combi ni ng sum of bot h sequences wi t h Now, it is given t hat

1 2 3  Sum of t he fir st 4 t er ms
r espect t o  4  4  4....     .... , we get ;
n n n 1
=  sum of t he next four t er ms [1]
1 2
 4 n   n  1
2 1
 20  6 d    20  22d 
8n  n  1 2

2  20  6 d  10  11d
7n  1  11d  6 d  20  10

2  5 d  10
H ence, t he sum of t he n t h t er m of t he ser ies is
d2
7n  1
. [1] Ther efor e, t he common di ffer ence of t he A.P
2 is 2. [1]
16. Sn  3n 2  5n 18. L et 'a' and 'd' be t he fir st t er m and t he common
differ ence of an A.P. r espect ively.
2
S1  3 1  5 1  8 The n t h t er m of an A.P is given by,
As we know, S1 = a1 = a = 8 [1]
an  a   n  1 d
2
S2  3  2  5  2  12  10  22 And t he sum of n t er ms of an A.P,
So, a2  S2  S1  22  8  14 n
Sn  2a   n  1 d  [1]
2 2
S3  3  3  5  3  27  15  42
So, sum of fir st 10 t er ms of an A.P is,
So, a3  S3  S2  42  22  20
10
So, t he A.P i s 8, 14, 20, ........ wi t h common S10   2a  10  1 d 
2 
differ ence d  a2  a1  14  8  6 [1]
Now, we will find t he 15t h t er m of t his A.P. 10
 S10   2a  9 d 
2
an  a  (n  1) d
10
 a15  8  (15  1)  6  210 
2
 2a  9 d 
 a15  8  14  6
 210  5  2a  9d  [1]
 a15  92
 42   2a  9 d  ....(1)
So, 15t h t er m of t he A.P is 92. [1]
17. L et t he common differ ence of t he A.P be d. Fir st N ow, t h e 15 t h t er m f r om t h e l ast =
t er m is 5.  50  15  1th  36th t er m fr om t he beginning
Ther efor e, t he A.P can be wr it t en as
a 36  a  35 d [1]
5,5  d,5  2d ,5  3 d,5  4 d,5  5 d,5  6 d,5  7 d
Thus, sum of t he last 15 t er ms
[1]
The above sequence r epr esent s t he fir st 8 t er ms 15
= 2 a  15  1 d 
of t he A.P. 2  36
Now, t he sum of t he fir st 4 t er ms of t he A.P
15
= 5  5  d  5  2 d  5  3 d  20  6 d [1]   2(a  35d )  15  1 d 
2 
And, t he sum of t he next four t er ms of t he A.P
15
= 5  4 d  5  5d  5  6 d  5  7 d  20  22d 
2
 2(a  35d )  14 d 
CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression 5.77

15 Given,
 2  a  35d  7 d  
2  Sn 7n  1

 15  a  35d  7 d  ' 4 n  27
Sn
 15  a  42d 
2a1   n  1 d1 7n  1
 2565  15  a  42d 
  [1]
2a2   n  1 d2 4n  27

 171   a  42d  ....(2) Divide bot h numer at or and denominat or on t he

L H S by 2.
Solving (1) and (2) , we get ,
As, a19 = a + 8d
a = 3, d = 4 [1]
H ence, t he r equir ed A.P is, 3, 7, 11, 15, ........ 199   n  1 
19. The given AP is 8, 10, 12, ...., Compar ing wit h  a  2 d  we get ,
 
Fir st t er m, a = 8
Common differ ence, d = 10 – 8 = 2  n  1 d  a  8d
a
an  a   n  1 d 2

a60  8   60  1 2 [1]

 n  1  8
2
a60  8  59  2
a60 = 126 Aft er solving we get ,
 n  17 [1]
n
Sn  {2a   n  1 d } [1] Ther efor e,
2
Sum of fir st 60 t er ms
a9

 a1  8d1   7 17  1  120  24
60 a9 '  a2  8d2  4 17  27 95 19
S60  2  8   60  1 2
2
Ther efor e t he r at io of t he 9t h t er ms of t he t wo
S60  30 16  59  2
24
S60 = 4020 [1] A.Ps is . [1]
19
Sum of fir st 50 t er ms
21. We know t hat sum of fir st n t er ms of an A.P is
50 given by t he for mula
S50  2  8   50  1 2
2
n
S50  25 16  49  2 Sn   2 a   n  1 d 
2
S50 = 2850
Similar ly sum of fir st m t er ms of t he same A.P.
Sum of last 10 t er ms is S60 – S50 will be
= 4020 – 2850 = 1170 [1]
m
H ence, t he sum of t he last 10 t er ms is 1170. Sm  2a   m  1 d 
2
20. L et a1,a2 be fir st t er ms of t he t wo A.Ps.
Accor ding t o t he Quest ion
L et d1,d2 be common differ ences of t he t wo A.Ps.
Sum of t he n t er ms ar e Sm m 2
 [1]
n n Sn n2
Sn  2a1   n  1 d1 and Sn'  2a2   n  1 d2
2 2
m
Sm  2a   m  1 d  m2
n   2 
Sn 2a1   n  1 d1  2a1   n  1 d1 Sn n 2
  2  [1] 2
 2a   n  1 d  n
Sn ' n 2a2   n  1 d2
2
 2a   n  1  d2
2
5.78 CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression

m 2a   m  1 d  m2 a 2m  1
   m 
an 2n  1
n 2a   n  1 d  n2
So, t he r at io of it s m t h and n t h t er ms is (2m – 1) :
2a   m  1 d m (2n – 1)
  [1] H ence pr oved. [1]
2a   n  1 d n
22. Assume t hat t he four consecut ive number s ar e
 n   2 a   m  1 d   m   2 a   n  1 d  (a – 3d), (a – d), (a + d) and (a + 3d).
(a – 3d) + (a – d) + (a + d) + (a + 3d) = 32
 2na  n  m  1 d  2ma  m  n  1 d
 4a = 32
 2 an  mnd  nd  2 am  mnd  md a=8 [1]
Now t he number s ar e (8 - 3d), (8 – d), (8 + d) and
 2an  nd  2am  md
(8 + 3d).
 md  nd  2 am  2an Accor ding t o t he Quest ion
  m  n  d  2a  m  n 
 8  3d  8  3d   7
[1]
 d  2a  8  d  8  d  15
We know t hat n t h t er m of an A.P is given by
2 2
an  a   n  1 d ....(i) 
8  9d   7
Similar ly t er m of t he A.P will be given by 8  d  15
2 2

am  a   m  1 d ....(ii)
2
Rat io of m t o t he n t er m will be,
th th

64  9d   7
am a   m  1 d
64  d  15
2

 [1]
an a   n  1 d  960  135 d 2  448  7 d 2
Put d = 2a
 128 d 2  512 [1]
a a   m  1 2a Divide bot h sides by 128.
 m 
an a   n  1 2a
 d2  4
a a  2am  2 a  d  2
 m 
an a  2an  2 a As t he t er ms ar e consecutive hence the differ ence
cannot be negat ive
a a  2am  2 a H ence d = 2
 m 
an a  2an  2 a And t he four consecut ive t er ms ar e:
(8 – 3  2), (8 – 2), (8 + 2) and (8 + 3  2).
a 2am  a a  2m  1
 m   Or 2, 6, 10, 14. [1]
an 2an  a a  2n  1
CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression 5.79

Value Based

PREVIOUSYEARS’
Thus it for ms an A.P. as 4, 8, 12, .... 48
Number of t er ms = t ot al cl asses i n school
= n = 12 [1]
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS Sum of n t er ms of an A.P i s given by;
n
Sn  a  l  [1]
2
4 Marks Questions 12
1. I n a school, st udent s decided t o plant t r ees in and So, sum of 12 t er ms of an A.P. = S12   4  48
2
ar ound t he school t o r educe air pollut ion. I t was
decided that the number of tr ees, that each section  S12  6  4  48  24  288
of each class will plant , will be double of t he class  S12  312
in which t hey ar e st udying. I f t her e ar e 1 t o 12
cl asses i n t he school and each cl ass has t wo H ence, 312 t r ees wer e plant ed by t he st udent s.
sect ions, find how many t r ees wer e plant ed by [1]
t he st udent s. Whi ch val ue i s sh own i n t hi s 2. I nitial saving for fir st week is Rs100 and incr eases
Quest ion? ever y week by Rs20, t his for ms an A.P., wher e
[TERM 2, 2014] t he fir st t er m is a = 100 and di ffer ence, d = 20,
2. Ramkali r equir ed Rs 2500 aft er 12 weeks t o send Now t o fi nd if r equir ed t ot al saving is Rs2500
her daught er t o school. She saved Rs 100 in t he aft er 12 weeks, we need t o find t he sum of t his
fir st week and incr eased her weekly saving by AP for 12 t er ms. So, n = 12 [1½]
Rs 20 ever y week. Find whet her she will be able
t o send her daught er t o school aft er 12 weeks. n
Using Sn   2a   n  1 d 
2
What value is gener at ed in t he above sit uat ion?
[TERM 2, 2015] 12  2  100  12  1 20
S12  [½]
 Solutions 2
S12  6  200  11 20 
1. I t i s given t hat number of t r ees pl ant ed by each
class is double the class in which they ar e studying S12  6  200  220
and each cl ass has t wo sect i ons.
Number of t r ees pl ant ed by class 1  2  2  4 S12  6  420  2520 [1]

Number of t r ees pl ant ed by class 2  2  4  8 H ence we can say t hat aft er 12 week s of savi ng
Ramk al i wil l gener at e Rs 2520, which i s mor e
[1]
t han 2500.
Number of t r ees pl ant ed by class 3  2  6  12 So she will be able t o send her daught er t o school
and so on. aft er 12 week s. [1]
5.80 CHAPTER 5 : Arithmetic Progression
CHAPTER 6

Coordinate Geometry
Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams
Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Distance Formula 1, 3 marks 1, 3 marks 1 mark 2 marks 2 marks 2, 3 marks
Section Formula 2 marks 2 marks 3 marks 2 marks 2 marks
Area of Triangle 2, 3 marks 3 ,4 marks
Collinear of Points 4 marks 4 marks
Midpoint Formula 2 marks
6.82 CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry

[TOPIC 1] Distance between two Points and

Section Formula
Summary Test F or Collinearit y of T hreePoint s
I n or der t o show t hat t hr ee given point s A , B , C ar e
collinear, we find dist ances AB , BC and AC. I f t he sum
Coordinates of a Point of any t wo of t hese di st ances i s equal t o t he t hir d
L ocat ion of t he posit ion of a point on a plane r equir es dist ance, t hen t he given point s ar e collinear.
a pair of co-or dinate axes. The distance of a point fr om  I n a t riangle , sum of any t wo sides is gr eater t han
t he x -axis is called it s y -coor dinat e, or or dinat e. The t he t hir d side.
di st ance of a poi n t f r om t he y -axi s i s cal l ed i t s  Any point on x-axis is of t he for m (x, 0).
x -co-or dinat e or abscissa. The co-or dinat es of a point
 Any point on y-axis is of t he for m (0, y).
on the x -axis ar e of t he for m (x , 0) and of a point on t he
y -axis ar e of t he for m (0, y ).  Cir cumcent r e of a t r iangle is equidist ant fr om it s
three vertices.
DI STAN CE FORM U LA
T he dist ance bet ween t wo point s P ( x 1, y 1 ) and Section Formula
Q(x2, y2) is given by the formula
Sect ion for mula : The coor dinat es of t he point P(x , y )
2
PQ  ( x2  x1 )  ( y2  y1 ) 2 which divides t he line segment joining A (x 1, y 1) and
B (x 2, y 2) int er nal ly i n t he r at io m : n ar e gi ven by
which is called t he dist ance for mula.
mx2 + nx1 my2 + ny1
 I n particular, the distance of a point P(x, y) x= ,y=
m+n m+n
from the origin O(0, 0) is given by
M idpoint for mula : The coor dinat es of t he midpoint M
OP = 2
x +y 2 of a line segment AB wit h end point s A (x 1, y 1) and

COLLI N EAR POI N TS x  x2 y1  y2 

B (x 2, y 2) ar e M  1 , .
Thr ee point s A , B , C ar e said t o be collinear if t hey lie  2 2 
on t he same st r aight line.
 Diagonals of a par allelogr am bisect each other.

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 2. The mid-point of segment AB is t he point P(0, 4).

I f t h e coor di n at es of B ar e (2,3) t h en t h e
coor dinat es of A ar e
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS (a) (2,5) (b) (2, 5)
TOPIC 1 (c) (2,9) (d) (2,11)
[TERM 1, 2011]
1 Mark Questions
3. The dist ance of t he point  3,4 fr om t he x-axis
1. The point P which divides the line segment joining
t he point s A (2, – 5) and B (5, 2) in t he r at io 2 : 3 is
lies in t he quadr ant (a) 3 (b) – 3
(a) I (b) II (c) 4 (d) 5
(c) III (d) IV [TERM 1, 2012]

[TERM 1, 2011]
CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry 6.83

4. I n Figur e , P  5, 3 and Q  3, y ar e t he point s of 13. Find t he r at io in which y -axis divides t he line
segment joining t he point s A(5, – 6) and B(– 1, – 4).
t r isect ion of t he line segment joining A  7, 2 and
Also find t he coor dinat es of t he point of division.
B 1, 5 . Then y equals? [TERM 1, 2015]

Q 14. The x -coor di nat e of a poi nt P i s t wi ce i t s y -

A P B
coor dinat e. I f P is equidist ant fr om Q(2, – 5) and
(a) 2 (b) 4 R(– 3,6), find t he coor dinat es of P.
5 [TERM 1, 2016]
(c) – 4 (d)  15. L et P and Q be t he point s of t r isect ion of t he line
2
[TERM 1, 2012] segment joining t he point s A (2, -2) and B (-7, 4)
such t hat P is near er t o A. Find t he coor dinat es
5. ABCD is a r ect angle whose t hr ee ver t ices ar e B of P and Q.
(4, 0), C (4, 3) and D (0, 3). The lengt h of one of it s [TERM 1, 2016]
diagonals is
16. Pr ove t hat t he point s (3, 0), (6, 4) and (-1, 3) ar e
(a) 5 (b) 4 t he ver t ices of a r ight angled isosceles t r iangle.
(c) 3 (d) 25 [TERM 1, 2016]

[TERM 1, 2014] 17. A line intersects the y-axis and x-axis at the points
P and Q r espect ively. I f (2, – 5)is t he mid-point of
6. I f t he dist ance bet ween t he point s (4,k) and (1,0)
PQ, t hen find t he coor dinat es of P and Q.
is 5,t hen what can be t he possible values of k ?
[TERM 1, 2017]
[TERM 1, 2014]
3 Marks Questions
2 Marks Questions 18. I f t wo ver t ices of an equilat er al t r iangle ar e (3,0)
7. I f the distances of P(x,y)from A(5,1)and B(– 1,5)ar e and (6,0), find t he t hir d ver t ex.
equal, t hen pr ove t hat 3x = 2y [TERM 1, 2011]
[TERM 1, 2017] 19. Find t he coor dinat es of a point P, which lies on
8. Fi nd t hat value(s) of x for which t he di st ance the line segment joining the points A (– 2, – 2) and
between the points P(x, 4) and Q(9, 10) is 10 units. 3
B( 2, – 4) such t hat AP = AB
[TERM 1, 2011] 7
9. Fi nd t he val ue of k , i f t he poi nt P (2, 4) i s [TERM 1, 2014]
equidist ant fr om t he point s A(5, k)and(k, 7) 20. Find t he r at io in which the y-axis divides t he line
[TERM 1, 2012] segment joining t he point s (– 4, – 6) and (10, 12)
10. I fA(5, 2),B(2, – 2) and C(– 2, t )and ar e t he ver t ices Also find t he coor dinat es of t he point of division.
of a r ight angled triangle with B  90 , then find [TERM 1, 2013]
21. I f t he point A(0, 2) is equidist ant fr om t he
t he value of t .
[TERM 1, 2015]
point s B(3, p) and C(p, 5), find p. Also find t he
lengt h of AB.
3 5  [TERM 1, 2014]
11. Find the ratio in which the point P  ,  divides
4 12 22. I f t he point P(k – 1, 2) is equidist ant fr om t he
point s A(3, k ) and B(k , 5), find t he values of k .
 1 3 [TERM 1, 2014]
t he line segment joining t he point s A  ,  and
2 2 23. Find t he r at io in which t he line segment joining
B(2, – 5). t he point s A(3, – 3) and B(– 2, 7) is divided by
[TERM 1, 2015] x -axis. Also find t he coor dinat es of t he point of
division.
12. The point s A(4, 7), B(p, 3) and C(7, 3) ar e t he
[TERM 1, 2015]
ver tices of a r ight tr iangle, r ight-angled at B. Find
24. I f t he poi nt s A(– 2, 1),B(a,b) and C(4, – 1)ar e
t he value of p.
collinear and a – b =1, find t he values of a and b.
[TERM 1, 2015] [TERM 1, 2014]
6.84 CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry

25. I f t he point P (x, y ) is equidist ant fr om t he point s 3. We know t hat , y -coor dinat e or or dinat e of a point
A ( a + b, a – b) and B (a – b, a + b) Pr ove t hat is t he dist ance fr om t he x -axis.
bx = ay Ther efor e, t he dist ance of t he point (– 3, 4) fr om
[TERM 1, 2016] t he x -axis is 4 unit s.
 24  Opt ion (c) is cor r ect . [1]
26. I n what r at io does t he point  , y divide t he 4. P and Q ar e t he point s of t r isect ion of AB,
11
l i ne segment j oi ni ng t he poi nt s P(2, -2) and  AP = PQ = QB
Q(3, 7) ? Also find t he value of y Thus, Q divide AB int er nally in t he r at io 2 : 1.
[TERM 1, 2017]
L et A (7, – 2)  (x 1, y 1) and B (1, – 5)  (x 2, y 2).
4 Marks Question Applying t he sect ion for mula at point Q (3, y )
27. Find t he r at io in which t he point P(x , 2) divides wher e m : n  2 : 1, we have
t he line segment joining t he point s A (12, 5) and my2  ny1
B (4, – 3). Also find t he value of x . y [½]
mn
[TERM 1, 2014]
2   5  1   2
 Solutions  y
21
1. Gi ven t hat , Coor di nat e of poi nt A (2, – 5) and 10  2
B (5, 2).  y
3
L et (x , y ) be t he coor dinat e of t he point P, which
divides t he line segment AB in t he r at io 2 : 3. 12
 y
Coor dinat e of P ar e given by 3
y=–4
 2  5  3  2 2  2  3(5) 
 ,  [½] Thus, t he y-coor dinat e of point Q is – 4. [½]
 23 23
 Opt ion (c) is cor r ect .
 10  6 4  15 
 ,  5. For t he r ect angle ABCD , t he diagonals ar e AC
 5 5  and BD .
 16 11  Dist ance bet ween t wo point s
 ,
 5 5 
Clear ly, fr om t he coor dinat e of P, x is posit ive   x2  x1 2   y2  y1 2 [½]
and y is negat ive.
L et B = (x 1, y 1) = (4, 0) and D = (x 2, y 2) = (0, 3)
Ther efor e, P lies in I V quadr ant .
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (d). [½] L engt h of BD   0  4  2   3  0 2
2. L et t he coor dinat es of A be (x , y )
Accor ding t o t he quest ion, P is t he midpoint of L engt h of BD   4 2   32
t he line segment AB .
Coor dinat es of t he midpoint of t he line segment L engt h of BD  16  9  25  5
AB = Coor dinat e of t he point P
The cor r ect answer is (a). [½]
 x  2 y  3 6. We know t hat dist ance d bet ween t wo point s is
 ,   (0,4) [½] given by
2 2 
Equat ing t he coor dinat e on bot h t he sides. d  x1  x2 2   y1  y2 2 [½]
x2 y3
  0 and 4 I t i s given t hat t he di st ance bet ween t he t wo
2 2 point s is 5
 x – 2 = 0 and y + 3 = 8 Put t ing t he values
 x = 2 and y = 5
Ther efor e, t he coor dinat e of point A is (2, 5) 5  4  12   k  02
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (a). [½]
CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry 6.85

On squar ing bot h sides,  (x – 17) = 0 or (x – 1) = 0

 25 = 9 + k 2
 x = 17 or x = 1
 25 – 9 = k 2
Ther efor e, t he coor dinat es of t he point P could
 16 = k 2 be (17, 4) or (1, 4). [1]
 k = ±4 9. Since P is equidist ant fr om point s A and B ,
H ence, t he possible values of k ar e 4 and – 4. [½]  PA = PB
7. Given, PA = PB
Using dist ance for mula,
  5  2 2   k  4  2   k  22   7  4  2

  x  52   y  12   x  12   y  52 [1]  9   k  4 

2
 k  2 2  9 [1]

Squar ing bot h sides On squar ing bot h sides.

 (x – 5) + (y – 1) = (x + 1) + (y – 5)
2 2 2 2
 9 + (k – 4)2 = (k – 2)2 + 9
 x 2 – 10x + 25 + y 2 – 2y + 1 = x 2 + 2x + 1 +  (k – 4)2 = (k – 2)2
y 2 – 10y + 25  k 2 + 16 – 8k = k 2 + 4 – 4k
 – 10x – 2y = 2x – 10y  16 – 8k = 4 – 4k
Dividing bot h sides by 4  4k = 12
 3x = 2y k=3
H ence pr oved. [1] Ther efor e, t he value of k is 3. [1]
8. Gi ven t hat , t he di st ance bet ween t he poi nt s
10. Given A (5, 2), B (2, – 2) and C(– 2, t ) as the ver t ices
P (x , 4) and Q (9, 10) is 10 unit s. of a r ight angled t r iangle wit h wit h B = 90°
Using t he dist ance for mula. Dist ance bet ween t he t wo point s is given by t he

D  ( x2  x1 )2  ( y2  y1 )2 for mula  x2  x1 2   y2  y1 2 .
The dist ance bet ween t he point P and Q is given
by:  Dist ance AB   2  52   2  22
PQ  ( x2  x1 )2  ( y2  y1 )2  9  16  25
 AB = 5
Given, PQ = 10 N ow,

10  (9  x)2  (10  4)2 Dist ance BC   2  2  2   t  2  2

10  (9  x)2  (6)2  16  t 2  4  4 t

 BC  t 2  4 t  20
10  (9  x)2  36 [1]

On squar ing bot h t he sides. Dist ance CA   5  2 2   2  t 2 [1]

2
(10)2   (9  x)2  36   49  4  t 2  4 t
 
 CA  t 2  4 t  53
 100 = (9 – x )2 + 36
Using Pyt hagor as t heor em we get ,
 100 = 81 + x 2 – 18x + 36
(AC)2 = (AB )2 + (BC)2
 100 = x 2 – 18x – 117
 t 2 – 4t + 53 = 25 + t 2 + 4t + 20
 x 2 – 18x + 117 – 100 = 0
 – 8t = 45 – 53
 x 2 – 18x + 17 = 0
 – 8t = – 8
 x (x – 17) – 1 (x – 17) = 0
 t=1
 (x – 17) (x – 1) = 10
H ence, t he value of t is 1. [1]
6.86 CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry

11. L et P divides t he line segment joining t he point s On squar ing bot h sides.
A and B in t he r at io m : n . AB 2 = p2 – 8p + 32
A(x 1, y 1) P(x , y ) B(x 2, y 2) Similar ly,

Then t he coor dinat es of point P is given by t he BC   p  7  2   3  3 2

sect ion for mula,
BC  p2  49  14 p
 mx2  nx1 my2  ny1  On squar ing bot h t he sides.
P ,
 mn m  n 
BC2 = p2 + 49 – 14p
Wher e (x 1, y 1) and (x 2, y 2) ar e t he coor dinat es of
t he point s joined t o make t he line segment .
And AC   4  7  2   7  3 2
AC  9  16
3 5  1 3
H er e P   ,  . L et
4 12
 x1 , y1    2 , 2  an d On squar ing bot h t he sides.
AC2 = 25 [1]
(x 2, y 2) = (2, – 5)
ABC is a r ight angled t r iangle.
Using t he sect ion for mula we get ,
By Pyt hagor as t heor em
 1 3  AB 2 + BC = AC2
2m  n 5m  n
3 5   2 , 2  Putting the value of AB , BC and AC in Pythagor as
 ,   
4 12 mn mn  [1] t heor em
 
 
p2 – 8p + 32 + p2 + 49 – 14p = 25
Compar ing t he x and y coor dinat es of bot h t he  2p2 – 22p + 81 = 25
sides.  2p2 – 22p + 56 = 0

1 3  p2 – 11p + 28 = 0
2m  n 5m  n  p2 – 7p – 4p + 28 = 0
3 2 and 5 2
  
4 mn 12 mn  p (p – 7) – 4 (p – 7) = 0
 (p – 4) (p – 7) = 0
1
2m  n  p = 4, 7
Using 3  2 we get ,
4 mn H er e, if p = 7 point B and C will coincide.
A , B and C ar e gi ven ver t i ces of a t r i angl e,
 1  t her efor e, p  7
3  m  n   4  2m  n 
 2  H ence, p = 4 [1]

 3m + 3n = 8m + 2n 13. L et (0, a) be a point on t he y -axis dividing the line

segment AB in t he r at io k : 1.
 3n – 2n = 8m – 3m
We make use of sect ion for mula t o get
 n = 5m
H ence, P divides t he given line segment in t he  k  5 4 k  6 
 0, a   ,
r at io 1 : 5. [1] k 1 k  1 
12. A (4, 7), B (p, 3) and C( 7, 3) (Given) Compar ing t he x and y coor dinat e on bot h t he
sides.
The coor dinat e of A (4, 7) and B (p, 3) so, x 2 = p,
x 1 = 4, y 2 = 3 and y 1 = 7 k  5 4 k  6
  0, a
k 1 k 1
AB   x2  x1 2   y2  y1 2 Solving each one independent ly,
k  5
0
AB   p  4  2   3  7 2 
k1
–k+5=0
AB  p2  8 p  16  16
CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry 6.87

k=5 [1] Thus, P divides AB int er nally in t he r at io 1 : 2

and and Q divides AB int er nally in t he r at io 2 : 1.
Using sect ion for mula, coor dinat es of P ar e,
4 k  6
 a  1   7   2  2  1  4   2  2     7  4 4  4 
k 1 P ,
1 2 1 2    3 , 3 
Subst it ut ing k = 5  

4  5  6  3 
 a P   ,0   1,0
51  3 
P = (– 1, 0) [1]
26
a Similar ly, coor dinat es of Q ar e,
6
 2  7  1 2 2  4  1 2   14  2 8  2
13 Q ,
a 21 2 1    3 , 3 
3  

Thus, t he y -axis divide t he line segment in t he

r at io 5 : 1.  12 6 
Q ,   4,2
 3 3 
H ence, t he coor dinat es of point of division ar e
Q = (– 4, 2) [1]
 13 
 0, . [1] 16. L et t he coor dinat es for point A (3, 0), coor dinat es
3 
for point B (6, 4) and t he coor dinat es for point
14. L et t he y -coor dinat e of t he point be a. C (-1, 3).
Then accor ding t o t he quest ion, x -coor dinat e will
be 2a. C(– 1, 3)
So, t he coor dinat es of t he point P ar e(2a, a).
Si nce, t he poi nt P (2a, a) i s equi di st ant fr om
Q (2,-5) and R (-3,6).
So we can use dist ance for mula such t hat ,
2
 2a  22   a   5    2a   32   a  62
  2 a  2 2   a  5  2   2 a  3 2   a  6  2
 4 a2  4  8 a  a2  25  10 a  A(3, 0) B(6, 4)

4 a2  9  12a  a2  36  12 a Using Dist ance for mula,

 5a2  2a  29  5a2  45 [1] AB =  x2  x1 2   y2  y1 2

Squar ing bot h sides,
 5a2 + 2a + 29 = 5a2 + 45 AB =  6  32   4  0 2
 5a2 + 2a – 5a2 = 45 – 29
AB = 25  5
 2a = 16
Similar ly,
a=8
Since a = 8, t hen x -coor dinat e is 2a i.e. 2 × 8 = 16. BC = (1  6)2  (3  4)2  50
H ence, t he coor dinat es of t he point P ar e (16, 8).
AC = (1  3)2  (3  0)2  25  5
[1]
15. P 1and Q ar e t he poi nt s of t r i sect i on. H ence, So, t wo sides ar e equal. H ence, AC = AB . [1]
AP = PQ = QB Now, apply t he Pyt hagor as t heor em on t he given
Q tr iangle. I f AB 2 + AC2 = BC2 t hen it is r ight angled
A P B
isosceles tr iangle because it alr eady has two equal
(2, – 2) (– 7, 4) sides.
6.88 CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry

Subst it ut ing t his value in equat ion (2)

So, BC 2  ( 50)2  50 an d A B 2 = 5 2 = 25,
AC2 = 52 = 25  9
2
 9
AB 2 + AC2 = 25 + 25 = 50 = BC2     6     y2  0
 2  2
Hence, t he given t r iangle is r ight angled isosceles
t r iangle. [1] 81
  27  y2  0
17. Given, 4
P (0, y )
108  81
Q (x , 0)  y2 
4
M idpoint of PQ = (2, – 5)
Using midpoint for mula, 27
 y2 
4
 x  0 0  y
 ,    2, 5
2 2  3 3
 y
2
 x y
  ,    2, 5 [1] 9 3 3
 2 2 H ence t he t hir d ver t ex could be C  ,  or
2 2 
On compar ing t he x and y coor dinat es of bot h t he
sides.  9 3 3
C  2, 2  [1]
 
x y
  2 and  5 19. L et t he coor dinat es of point P be (x , y )
2 2
Now, it is given t hat ,
 x = 4, y = – 10
Ther efor e, coor dinat es of P and Q ar e (0, – 10) 3
AP = AB
and (4, 0) r espect ively. [1] 7
18. Let the equilateral triangle be ABC and its vertices
3
be A (3, 0), B (6, 0) and C (x , y )  AP =  AP + PB 
7
Now as we know t hat lengt h of each sides of an
equilat er al t r iangle ar e same,  7AP = 3  AP + PB 
AB = BC = AC
 7AP  3AP  3PB
 AB 2  BC2  AC2
 4AP  3PB
Now let 's t ake, AB 2 = BC2
 (6 – 3)2 + (0 – 0)2 = (x – 6)2 + (y – 0)2 AP 3
  [1]
 (3)2 = 36 + x 2 – 12x + y 2 PB 4

 (x 2 – 12x + y 2 + 27) = 0 (1) [1]  The point P divides t he line segment AB in

t he r at io 3 : 4.
Now, AB 2 = AC2
 (6 – 3)2 + (0 – 0)2 = (x – 3)2 + (y – 0)2
A P B
 (3)2 = 9 + x 2 – 6x + y 2
(–2, –2) (x, y) (2, –4)
 x 2 – 6x + y 2 = 0 (2)
m = 3, n = 4, x 1 = – 2, x 2 = 2, y 1 = – 2, y 2 = – 4
Subt r act equat ion (2) fr om equat ion (1),
Ther efor e, using sect ion for mula,
 (x 2 – 12x + y 2 + 27) – (x 2 – 6x + y 2) = 0
 – 6x + 27 = 0  mx2  nx1 my2  ny1 
P ,
 – 6x = – 27  mn m  n 

9
x [1]  3  2 +4  – 2 3  – 4  +4  – 2 
2  x,y  =  , 
 3+4 3+4 
CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry 6.89

Compar ing x and y coor dinat es on bot h t he sides. 21. The given point s ar e A (0, 2), B (3, p) and C (p, 5).

3  2  4   2 I t is given t hat A is equidist ant fr om B and C.

x  AB = AC [1]
7
Squar ing bot h t he sides
68
x [1] AB 2 = AC2
7
(3 – 0)2 + (p – 2)2 = (p – 0)2 + (5 – 2)2
2
x 9 + p2 + 4 – 4 p = p2 + 9
7
4 – 4p = 0
And,
4p=4
3   4   4   2 p=1 [1]
 y
7 Thus, t he value of p is 1.
12  8 L engt h of AB
 y
7
 (3 – 0)2 +(p – 2)2
20
 y Subst it ut ing t he value of p.
7

 2 20   (3 – 0)2 +(1 – 2)2

Ther efor e, the coor dinates of P (x, y) =  , 
7 7   91
[1]
 10 units [1]
20. L et us assume a poi nt such t hat t hat t he line
joining t he point s (– 4, – 6) and (10, 12) in t he r atio 22. Dist ance bet ween t wo point s
k:1
L et t his point on t he y axis be (0, y )
  x2  x1 2   y2  y1 2
Now using t he sect ion for mula Dist ance bet ween A (3, k ) and P (k – 1, 2)

 mx2  nx1 my2  ny1 

P ,
  k  1  3 2   2  k  2 [1]
 mn m  n 
AP   k  4 2   2  k  2
 10 k  4 12 k   6  
 0, y   , [1] Apply t he ident it y (A – B )2 = A 2 – 2AB + B 2
 k 1 k  1 
AP  k 2  8 k  16  4  4 k  k 2
On compar ing t he x coor dinat e of bot h t he sides.

10 k  (4) 4 2 AP  2 k2  12 k  20
  0  10 k  4  0  k  
k1 10 5 Dist ance bet ween B (k , 5) and P (k - 1, 2)

and, y 
12 k  6
[1]
  k  1  k  2   2  52
k 1
Subst it ut ing t he value of k , BP   12   32
2 BP  1  9
12  6
y 5
2 BP  10 [1]
1 Since P is equidist ant fr om A and B , AP = BP
5
6 2 k 2  12 k  20  10
 y
7 Squar ing bot h sides, we get
H ence, t he y axis is dividing t he line in t he r at io 2k 2 – 12k + 20 = 10
 6 Wr it e t he equat ion in t he for m ax 2 + bx + c = 0
2 : 5 at point  0,   [1] 2k 2 – 12k + 10 = 0
7
k 2 – 6k + 5 = 0
6.90 CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry

Split t he middle t er m
 15 
k 2 – 5k – k + 5 = 0
 7 
k (k – 5) – 1(k – 5) = 0 Coor dinat es of K   ,0
10 
 
(k – 5) (k – 1) = 0  7 
Set each fact or t o zer o
k = 5 or k = 1 3 
Coor dinat es of K   , 0 [1]
The values of k ar e 1, 5. [1] 2 
23. L et t he x -axi s di vi de t he l i ne segment AB at 24. The given point s ar e A (– 2, 1), B (a, b) and C(4, – 1)
K (x , 0) in t he r at io m : 1 Since t he given point s ar e collinear, t he ar ea of
L et t he coor dinat es of A be (x 1, y 1) and t hat of B t he t r iangle ABC is zer o.
be (x 2, y 2)
Ar ea of ABC = 0
By sect ion for mula coor dinat es of K ar e
1
  x ( y – y3 )  x2 ( y3 – y1 )  x3 ( y1 – y2 )   0
 mx2  x1 my2  y1  2 1 2
 m  1 , m  1  ....(i)
H er e x 1 = – 2, y 1 = 1, x 2 = a, y 2 = b and x 3 = 4,
y3 = – 1 [1]
 mx2  x1 my2  y1 
 x,0   m 1
,
m  1  [1] 1
2
 2(b  1)  a(1  1)  4(1  b)  0
Compar ing t he y coor dinat es on bot h t he sides.
– 2b – 2 – 2a + 4 – 4b = 0
my2  y1 2a + 6b = 2
0
m 1 Divide above equat ion by 2,
Subst it ut e t he values of y 1 and y 2 a + 3b = 1 ....(1)
Given:
m 7  3
0 a– b=1 ....(2) [1]
m 1
7m – 3 = 0 Subt r act ing equat ion (1) fr om (2)
4b = 0
3
m b=0
7
Subt r act ing b = 0 in (2).
Ther efor e t he x -axis divides t he line segment AB
a– 0=1
3 a=1
in t he r at io : 1  3 : 7 [1]
7 Thus, the values of a and b ar e1 and 0 r espectively.
Subst it ut ing t he value of m in (i), [1]
25. Accor ding t o t he quest ion, point P is equidist ant
3 
 2  3 fr om t he point s A and point B .
7   
Coor dinat es of K   , 0 H ence, PA = PB
3
 1 
 7  Using t he dist ance for mula, dist ance

=  x1  x2 2   y1  y2 2
 6 
 3
 7 
Coor dinat es of K   , 0
3
 1  2 2  x   a  b  2 
 7   x   a  b    y   b  a  [1]
 y   a  b  2
 21  6  2 2
 7  x2   a  b  2 x  a  b  y2   b  a  2 y  b  a 
Coor dinat es of K   , 0
37 2 2
x2   a  b  2 x  a  b  y2   a  b  2 y  a  b
 
 7 
CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry 6.91

 2 x  a  b   2 y  b  a   2 x  a  b   2 y  a  b  [1] 27. Let us assume the point P divides the line segment
joining t he point s A (12, 5) and B (4, – 3) in t he
 2 x  a  b   2 x  a  b   2 y  a  b   2 y  b  a  r at io r : 1

2 x   a  b  a  b  2 y   a  b  b  a   mx  x my2  y1 
Using sect ion for mula  2 1 , 
 m 1 m 1 
x  2 b   y  2 a 
– 2bx = – 2ay 4 r  12 3r  5 
Then t he coor dinat es of P ar e,  , 
bx = ay  r 1 r 1 
H ence pr oved. [1] [1]
Given, t he coor dinat es of P ar e (x , 2)
 mx2  nx1 my2  ny1 
26. Sect ion For mula  , 
 mn mn   4 r  12 3r  5 
  x, 2   , 
L et t he given point divide line segment in r at io  r 1 r 1 
x:1
4 r  12 3 r  5
  x and 2 [1]
 24  r 1 r 1
Using sect ion for mula and point  , y
11
3 r  5
Now, 2
 24   mx2  nx1 my2  ny1  r 1
 , y   ,  [1]
11 mn mn 
 3 r  5  2  r  1 
Compar ing t he x and y coor dinat e.
 5r  3
24 3x  2 7x  2
 ,y  3
11 x1 x1 r 
5
24 3x  2
For  3 4 r  12
11 x1 Subst it ut e r  in  x , we get
5 r 1
24(x + 1) = 33x + 22
 24x + 24 = 33x + 22  3
4    12
 2 = 9x [1] x
 5
3 [1]
7x  2 1
Now, for y  5
x 1
y  x  1  7 x  2 12
 12
 xy  y  7 x  2 x 5
3
1
2 5
Put x 
9
72
2 2
 y y  7 2 x 5
9 9 8
5
2 14
 y y  2
9 9 72
x
11 4 8
 y
9 9 x9

4 H ence, t he value of x is 9 and t he point P (x , 2)

 y di vi des t he l i n e segment j oi ni ng t he poi nt s
11
3
 24 4  A (12, 5) and B (4, – 3) in t he r at io : 1  3 : 5 [1]
Ther efor e, t he point  ,  divides the line PQ 5
11 11
in r at io 2 : 9. [1]
6.92 CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry

[TOPIC 2] Centroid and Area of Triangle

Summary
Centroid of a Triangle
The coor di nat es of t he cent r oi d of a t r i an gl e wi t h ver t i ces ( x 1, y 1), ( x 2, y 2) an d ( x 3 , y 3) i s gi ven by
x1  x2  x3 y1  y2  y3
, .
3 3

Area of a Triangle
The ar ea of a ABC wit h ver t ices A (x 1, y 1), B (x 2, y 2) and C(x 3, y 3) is given by ar ea

1
(ABC)   x ( y  y3 )  x2 ( y3  y1 )  x3 ( y1  y2 ) .
2 1 2

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 2. I f t he point s A ( x,2) , B ( 3, 4) and C(7, 5) ar e

collinear, t hen t he value of x is:

EXAMINATION QUESTIONS (a) – 63 (b) 63

(c) 60 (d) – 60
TOPIC 2 [TERM 1, 2014]

1 Mark Questions 2 Marks Question

1. I n Fig, find t he ar ea of tr iangle ABC (in sq. unit s) 3. Find t he r elat ion bet ween x and y if t he point s
is:
Y  
A(x, y),B(– 5, 7) and C 4,5 ar e collinear..
[TERM 1, 2015]
5
4
3 Marks Questions
A(1, 3) 4. I f (3,3), (6,y), (x,7) and (5,6) ar e t he ver t ices of a
3 par allelogr am t aken in or der, find t he values of x
2 and y
1 [TERM 1, 2011]
B C
X’ X 5. Find t he value of k, if t he point s P(5,4), Q(7,k)
–3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5
–1 and R(9,-2) ar e collinear.
–2 [TERM 1, 2011]
6. Find t he ar ea of t he quadr ilat er al ABCD whose
Y’ ver t ices ar e A( – 3, – 1), B(– 2, – 4), C(4, – 1) and
(a) 15 D(3, 4).
(b) 10 [TERM 1, 2012]

(c) 7.5 7. I f t he poi nt s A(x, y), B(3, 6) and C(-3, 4) ar e

collinear, show t hat x – 3y + 15 = 0.
(d) 2.5
[TERM 1, 2012]
[TERM 1, 2013]
CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry 6.93

8. Pr ove t hat t he point s(7, 10),(– 2, 5)and(3, -4) ar e 16. I f A (– 4, 8), B (– 3, – 4), C(0, – 5) and D (5, 6) ar e t he
t he ver t ices of an isosceles r ight t r iangle. ver t ices of a quadr ilat er al ABCD , find it s ar ea.
[TERM 1, 2013] [TERM 1, 2015]
9. Find t he ar ea of t he t r iangle ABC wit h (1, – 4) 17. Find t he values of so that t he ar ea of the tr iangle
and mid-point s of sides t hr ough A being (2, – 1) wit h ver t ices (1, – 1), (– 4, 2k ) and (– k , – 5) is 24
and.(0, – 1) squar e unit s.
[TERM 1, 2015] [TERM 1, 2015]
10. I n the given figur e, ABC is a t r iangle coor dinat es 18. I n fig., t he ver t ices of ABC ar e A (4, 6), B (1, 5),
of whose ver t ex A ar e (0, – 1)D and E r espect ively C(7, 2). A line segment DE is dr awn t o int er sect
ar e t he mid-point s of t he sides AB and AC and t he sides AB and AC at D and E r espect ively such
t heir coor dinat es ar e(1, 0)and (0, 1) r espect ively.
AD AE 1
I f F i s t h e m i d-poi nt of B C, f i nd t he ar eas t hat   . Calculat e t he ar ea of and
AB AC 3
of ABC and DEF .
compar e it wit h ar ea of ABC.
A(4, 6)
A(0, – 1)

D E
(1, 0) D E(0, 1)

F B(1, 5) C(7, 2)
B
C [TERM 1, 2016]
19. I f t he poi nt s A (k + 1, 2k ), B (3k , 2k + 3) and
[TERM 1, 2016] C(5k – 1, 5k ) ar e collinear, t hen find t he value of
11. Show t hat ABC ,wher eA(– 2, 0), B(2, 0), C(0, 2) k.
[TERM 1, 2017]
and PQR wher eP (– 4, 0),Q (4, 0) R(4, 0)ar e
similar t r iangles. 20. I f a  b  0, pr ove t hat t he point s (a, a2), (b, b2),
(0, 0) will not be collinear.
[TERM 1, 2017]
[TERM 1, 2017]
12. The ar ea of a t r iangle is 5 sq unit s. Two of it s
ver t ices ar e (2, 1) and (3, – 2) . I f t he t hir d ver t ex  Solutions
7 
is  , y ,find t he value of y . 1. Y
2
[TERM 1, 2017] 5
13. I f A (– 2, 1), B (a, 0), C(4, b) and D (1, 2) ar e t he 4
ver tices of a par allelogr am ABCD , find the values A(1, 3)
3
of a and b. H ence find t he lengt hs of it s sides.
A (x 1, y 1) 2
[DELH I , 2018] 1
B N C
4 Marks Questions X’ X
–3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5
14. The t hr ee ver t ices of a par allelogr am ABCD ar e –1
A (3, – 4), B (– 1, – 3) an d C (– 6, 2). F i n d t h e –2
coor di nat es of ver t ex D and fi nd t he ar ea of [½]
par allelogr am ABCD . Y’
[TERM 1, 2013] Const r uct ion: Dr aw AN  BC.
15. I f A (– 3, 5), B (– 2, – 7), C(1, – 8) and D (6, 3) ar e t he H er e, BC = 4 – (– 1) = 5 unit s and AN = 3 unit s.
ver t ices of a quadr ilat er al ABCD , find it s ar ea.
[TERM 1, 2014]
6.94 CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry

I n ABC, 4. L et A , B , C an d D be t h e v er t i ces of t h e
The base is BC and t he height is AN . par allelogr am.
N ow, Ther efor e, t he coor di nat es of t he ver t i ces ar e
A (3, 3), B (6, y ), C (x , 7) and D (5, 6).
1
Area of t riangle ABC =  base  height A [1]
2 B

1
=  BC  AN O
2
1
=  5  3
2
= 7.5 Sq. Unit s. D C
Thus t he ar ea of the given t r iangle is 7.5 sq units. We know t hat t he diagonals of a par allelogr am
H ence t he opt ion " c" is t he cor r ect answer. [½] bisect each ot her. Ther efor e, t he coor dinat es of
t h e m i dpoi n t of A C ar e t h e sam e as t h e
2. I t is given that t he thr ee points A (x , 2), B (– 3, – 4)
coor dinat es of t he midpoint of BD , i.e.
and C (7, – 5) ar e collinear.
Ar ea of ABC = 0 (Point s ar e collinear )  3  x 3  7  6  5 y  6
 ,   , 
1 2 2   2 2 
[ x ( y - y3 )  x2 ( y3 - y1 )  x3 ( y1 - y2 ) ]  0
2 1 2
 3  x 10   11 y  6 
[½]  ,   ,  [1]
 2 2  2 2 
H er e, x 1 = x , y 1 = 2, x 3 = – 3, y 2 = – 4 and x 3 = 7,
y3 = – 5 Compar ing t he x and y coor dinat es on bot h t he
sides.
x [– 4 – (– 5)] – 3 (– 5 – 2) + 7[2 – (– 4)] = 0
x (– 4 + 5) – 3(– 5 – 2) + 7(2 + 4) = 0 3  x 11 10 y  6
 and 
x – 3 × (– 7) + 7 × 6 = 0 2 2 2 2
x + 21 + 42 = 0  3 + x = 11 and y + 6 = 10
x + 63 = 0  x = 8 and y = 4
x = – 63 Ther efor e, t he val ues of x and y ar e 8 and 4
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (a). [½] r espect ively. [1]
5. Since t he point s P(5, 4), Q(7, k ) and R(9, – 2) ar e
collinear.
3. I f A , B , C ar e collinear t hen ar ea of ABC = 0
Then ar ea of PQR = 0 [1]
Ar ea of t he t r i angl e wi t h coor di nat es (x 1, y 1),
(x 2, y 2), (x 3, y 3) is given by- Ar ea of t he t r i angl e wi t h coor di nat es (x 1, y 1),
(x 2, y 2), (x 3, y 3) is given by-
1
x  y  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2  [1] 1
2 1 2 x  y  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2   0 [1]
2 1 2
Now, if A , B , C ar e collinear, t hen
ABC = 0 1
 5  k   2   7  2  4   9  4  k   0
1 2
 x  7  5  5  5  y   4  y  7  0
2 1
 5  k  2  42  9  4  k   0
1 2
 2 x  25  5 y  4 y  28  0
2  | 5k + 10 – 42 + 36 – 9k | = 0
1  | 4k + 4| = 0
 2x  y  3  0
2  – 4k + 4 = 0
 2x + y + 3 = 0  – 4k = – 4
 2x + y = – 3 k=1
H ence, t he r elat ion bet ween x and y is 2x + y = 3. H ence t he value of k = 1. [1]
[1]
CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry 6.95

6.
1
  3  4  1  3  1  1  4  1  4  
D(3, 4) 2

1
  35
2

35
A(– 3, – 1) 
2
C(4, – 1) H owever, ar ea can't be negat ive,

1
Ar ea of ADC  35
2
B(– 2, – 4) 1
=  35
The ver t i ces of quadr i l at er al ar e A (– 3, – 1), 2
B (– 2, – 4), C (4, – 1) and D (3, 4). 35
L et us join AC t o split t he quadr ilat er al ABCD 
2
int o t wo t r iangles ABC and ADC.
Ther efor e, Ar ea of quadr ilat er al ABCD = Ar ea of
Ther efor e,
ABC + Ar ea of ADC.
Ar ea of quadr ilat er al ABCD = Ar ea of ABC +
Ar ea of ADC. [1] 21 35
 
Ar ea of a t r iangle is given by 2 2

56
1  x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1    
Ar ea of     2
2  x3  y1  y2  
= 28 squar e unit s
For ABC, (x 1, y 1) = (– 3, – 1), (x 2, y 2) = (– 2, – 4) and T h er ef or e, A r ea of qu adr i l at er al A B CD i s
(x 3, y 3) = (4, – 1) 28 sq. unit s. [1]
Subst it ut ing t he values, we have 7. I f t he poi nt s A (x , y ), B (3, 6) and C(– 3, 4) ar e
col l i near, t hen t hey al l ar e poi nt s l yi ng on a
1  x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1    st r aight line.
Ar ea of ABC   
2  x3  y1  y2   H ence, the ar ea of t he tr iangle for med wit h t hese
t hr ee point s A , B and C will be zer o.
1
  3  4  1  2  1  1  4  1  4   For ABC,
2
1  x1, y1   x,y , x2, y2   3,6 and  x3, y3    3,4

2
 9  0  12 [1]
1 Subst it ut ing t he values, we have
  21
2 1  x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   
A r ea of  A B C   0
21 2  x3  y1  y2  
 [1]
2
Similar ly, For ADC, (x 1, y 1)  (– 3, – 1), (x 2, y 2)  1
 x  6  4   3  4  y  3  y  6   0
(3, 4) and (x 3, y 3) = (4, – 1) 2
Subst it ut ing t he values, we have 1
2
 6 x  4 x  12  3 y  3 y  18  0 [1]
1  x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   
Ar ea of ADC   
2  x3  y1  y2   1
 2  x  3 y  15  0
2
1 x – 3y + 15 = 10
  3  4  1  3  1  1  4  1  4  
2 H ence, pr oved. [1]
6.96 CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry

8. L et t he point s be A (7, 10), B (– 2, 5) and C (3, – 4)  0  1  x2 and  2  4  y2

Using dist ance for mula,
 x2  1 and y2  2 [1]
2 2
AB   7  2  10  5  81  25  106 The coor dinat es of point C ar e (– 1, 2).
Ar ea of t he t r iangle ABC having ver t ices (x 1, y 1),
BC   2  32  5  42  25  81  106 (x 2, y 2) and (x 3, y 3) is given by t he for mula,

1
2 2 Ar ea   x  y  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2  
CA   7  3  10  4   16  196  212 [1] 2 1 2

H er e, 1 1  2  2  3  2  4  
 Area of t he ABC   
AB = BC 2  1  4  2 
 ABC is an isosceles t r iangle. [1]
Also, 1
 0  18  1  6  
AB 2 + BC2 = 106 + 106 = 212 = AC2 2
 ABC is also a r ight angled t r iangle. 1
 18  6
H ence, The point s (7, 10), (– 2, 5) and (3, – 4) ar e 2
t he ver t ices of an isosceles r ight angled t r iangle.
1
[1]   24  12
2
9. C(x 2, y 2) H ence, t he ar ea of t he t r iangle ABC is 12 unit 2.
[1]
10. L et t he coor dinat es of B and C be (x 2, y 2) and
(x 3, y 3).
E(0, – 1) Since, D is t he mid-point of AB . So,
x2  0 y2  1 
1,0   , 
 2 2 

x2  0 y2  1
A(1, – 4) D(2, – 1) B(x 1, y 1) 1 and 0 
2 2
Given coor dinates of point and mid-point s of sides
t hr ough A being (2, – 1) and (0, – 1). x2 y2  1
1 and 0 
L et co-or dinate of the point B and C be (x 1, y 1) and 2 2
(x 2, y 2) r espect ively.
 x2  2 and y2  1 [1]
Also, let point D and E be t he mid point s of sides
Thus, t he coor dinat es of B ar e (2, 1).
AB and AC r espect ively.
Similar ly, E is t he mid-point of AC. So,
The mid-point for mula is given as:
x3  0 y3  1 
x x y y   0,1   ,
 x, y    1 2 2 , 1 2 2  [1]  2 2 


x3  0 y3  1
Since D is t he mid-point of AB we get , 0 and 1 
2 2
1  x1 4  y1
2 and  1  x3 y3  1
2 2 0 and 1 
2 2
 4  1  x1 and  2  4  y1
 x3  0 and y3  3
 x1  3 and y1  2 Thus, t he coor dinat es of C ar e (0, 3).
The coor dinat es of point B ar e (3, 2). We know t hat F is t he mid-point of BC. So, it s
Now since E is t he mid-point of AC we get , coor dinat es ar e

1  x2 4  y2  2  0 1  3
0 and  1   ,   1, 2 [1]
2 2 2 2 
CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry 6.97

Now we know that the ar ea of the tr iangle is given We can see t hat t he r at ios of t he cor r esponding
by- sides of t he t r iangles ABC and PQR ar e same.
Ther efor e, ABC and PQR ar e similar tr iangles.
1
 x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2  H ence pr oved. [1]
2
12. We know t hat ar ea of t r iangle can be calculat ed
So, ar ea of ABC is
using t he for mula
1
 0 1  3  2  3  1  0  1  1 1
2 A x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2  [1]
2
1
  8  4 squar e unit 7
2 H er e, x1  2, y1  1, x2  3, y2  2, x3  , y3  y
2
Ar ea of t he is DEF
1 7
1 5  2  2  y  3  y  1  1   2 
 1  1  2   0  2  0   1  0  1 2 2
2
1 21
1 1 5 4  2 y  3 y  3  [1]
  2   2  1 squar e unit 2 2
2 2
Hence, the ar ea of ABC is4 and the ar ea of DEF 14  21
is 1 squar e unit . [1]  10  y
2
11. To pr ove t hat  AB C and  PQR ar e si m i l ar
t r iangles we need t o find pr ove t hat t he r at ios of 7
the lengths of their cor r esponding sides ar e equal.  10  y
2
We know t hat dist ance d bet ween t wo point s is
given by 7 7
 10   y or  10  y
2 2
2 2
d  x2  x1    y2  y1  [1]
7 7
I n ABC  10   y or  10   y
2 2
AB   2   2   2   0  0  2 4
13 27
y or y 
2 2
BC   0  22   2  0  2 2 2
13 27
CA   0   2 2   2  02 2 2 H ence, t he value of y can be or . [1]
2 2
I n PQR 13. Consider t he par allelogr am ABCD :

PQ   4   4   2   0  0  2 8 A(– 2, 1) B(a , 0)

QR   0  4 2   4  02 4 2

PR   0  4 2   4  02 4 2 [1]
Now, t he r at ios of t he cor r esponding sides will be
D(1, 2) C(4, b )
AB 4 1
  
PQ 8 2 The diagonals of a parallelogr am bisect each other.
So coor dinat es of midpoint of AC = Coor dinat es
BC 2 2 1 of midpoint of BD
  
QR 4 2 2 Coor dinat es of midpoint of a line segment joining
t he point s A (x 1, y 1)
CA 2 2 1
    x  x2   y1  y2 
PR 4 2 2 and B  x2 , y2    1 ,
 2   2 
6.98 CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry

14. The t hr ee ver t ices ar e A (3, – 4), B (– 1, – 3) and

 2  4 1  b   a  1 0  2 
Ther efor e,  ,   ,  C (– 6, 2).
2 2   2 2 
L et t he coor dinat es of t he ver t ex D be (x , y ). [1]
 2 1  b  a  1 2 I n a par al l el ogr am, t he di agonal s bi sect each
 ,   ,  ot her.
2 2   2 2
H ence, M id point of AC = M id point of BD
 1  b  a  1 
 1,   , 1 [1]  3  ( 6) 4  2   1  x2 3  y2 
2   2   ,   , 
 2 2   2 2 
Comparing x and y coor dinat es of bot h t he sides.
 3 2   1  x2 3  y2 
a1 1 b  ,   , 
  1 and 1  2 2  2 2 
2 2

 a  1  2 and 1  b  2  3  1  x2 , 2  3  y2

 a  2  1 and b  2  1  x  2, y  1. [1]

H ence, t he coor dinat es of t he four t h ver t ex D is
 a=1 and b=1 (– 2, 1).
So t he coor dinat es ar e A (– 2, 1), B (1, 0), C (4, 1), Now, for t he ar ea of ABCD = ar ea of t r iangle ABC
D (1, 2) + ar ea of t r iangle ACD
L ength of any side having coor dinates (x 1, y 1) and = 2 × ar ea of t r iangle ABC
(x 2, y 2) is given by 2 2 The ar ea of a t r iangle wit h ver t ices (x 1, y 1), (x 2, y 2)
 x2  x1    y2  y1 
and (x 3, y 3) is

So t he lengt h of side AB  1   2 2   0  12 1

 x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x 3  y1  y2  [1]
2
L engt h of side AB  1  22   12 Now subst it ut ing t he values,
Area
L engt h of side AB  32  1
1
L engt h of side AB  9  1

2
 3  3  2   1  2   4    6  4   3
L engt h of side AB  10 [1] 1 ∣ 15 ∣
  15  6  6  squar e unit s
Since ABCD is a par allelogr am, opposite sides ar e 2 2
equal.
15
H ence ar ea of par allelogr am 2   15 squar e
AB  CD= 10 2
units. [1]
L engt h of side BC   4  1 2   1  0  2 15. A(– 3, 5) D(6, 3)

L engt h of side BC  32  12

L engt h of side BC  9  1

L engt h of side BC  10
Since ABCD is a par allelogr am, opposite sides ar e
equal.
B(– 2, – 7) C(1, – 8)
BC  AD= 10
Ar ea of quadr ilat er al ABCD = Ar ea of ABC +
T h er ef or e, t h e l en gt h of t h e si des of t h e Ar ea of ACD
par allelogr am ar e
Ar ea of
AB  BC  CD  DA  10 unit s [1] 1
ABC   x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2 
2
[1]
CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry 6.99

Ar ea of 1
  4  4  5  3  13  0
1 2
ABC   3  7   8    2 8  5  1  5   7 
2 1 35
Ar ea of   4  39   17.5
2 2
1
ABC   3  7  8   2  8  5   1  5  7  Ar ea of ABC = 17.5 unit s2 [1]
2
N ow,
1
Ar ea of ABC   3 1  2  13  1 12  1
2 Area of ACD   4  5  6  0 6  8  5 8   5
2
1
Ar ea of ABC   3  26  12 1
2   4  11  0  5  8  5
2
1
Ar ea of ABC    35 1 1
2  44  5 13   44  65
Ar ea of ABC = 17.5 squar e unit s [1] 2 2
Ar ea of 109
  54.5 [1]
1 2
ADC   x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2 
2 Ar ea of ACD = 54.5 unit s2
Ar ea of
Now ar ea of quadr ilat er al ABCD will be sum of
1 area of ABC and ACD .
ADC   3  3   8    6  8  5  1  5  3
2 Ther efor e Ar ea of quadr ilat er al ABCD = 17.5 +
1 54.5 = 72 sq. unit s
Ar ea of ADC   3  3  8   6  8  5   1  5  3  H ence, answer is 72 sq. unit s. [1]
2
17. Ar ea of a t r i angl e wi t h coor di nat es ( x 1, y 1),
1
Ar ea of ADC   3 11  6  13   1  2 (x 2, y 2), (x 3, y 3) is given by-
2
1
1  x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2  [1]
Ar ea of ADC   33  78  2 [1] 2
2
Put t ing in t he coor dinat es,
1
Ar ea of ADC   109 x1  1, x2  4, x3   k , y1  1, y2  2 k , y3  5
2

1 1
Ar ea of ADC   109 
2
1  2 k  5  4  5  1  k  1  2 k    24 [1]
2
Ar ea of ADC = 54.5 squar e unit s 1
  2 k  5  16  k  2 k 2   24
Ther efor e, Ar ea of quadr ilat er al ABCD = 17.5 + 2 
54.5 = 72 squar e unit s [1]
1
16. I n t his quadr ilat er al ABCD , we have 2 t r iangles   2 k 2  3 k  21  24
2 
i.e. ABC and ACD
Ar ea of a t r iangle  2 k 2  3 k  21  48

1  2 k 2  3 k  27  0 [1]
=
2
 x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2 
 2 k 2  6 k  9 k  27  0
 4  4   5   3  5  8 
1  2 k  k  3  9  k  3   0
 Ar ea of ABC =   [1]
2
 0  8   4   
  k  3 2 k  9   0
N ow,
 k  3  0 and 2 k  9  0
 4  4   5   3  5  8 
1
 Ar ea of ABC =   9
2
 0  8   4    k  3 and k  [1]
 2
6.100 CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry

Thus point E divides line AC in r at io 1 : 2

AD AE 1
18. Given  
AB AC 3 1:2

AD 1 AE 1 A E C
 and 
(4, 6) (7, 2)
AB 3 AC 3

AD 1
Using sect ion for mula, Coor dinat es of E

AB 3  m1 x2  m2 x1 m1 y2  m2 y1 
 m  m ,
 3AD=AD+DB 1 2 m1  m2 
 3AD – AD = DB Put t ing values in t he given above for mula
 2AD = BD m1  1, m2  2

AD 1 x1  4 , x2  7
 
BD 2 y1  6, y2  2
Thus point D divides line AB in r at io 1 : 2
 m1 x2  m2 x1 m1 y2  m2 y1 
1:2 Point E =  ,
 m1  m2 m1  m2 
A D B
(4, 6) (1, 5)  1  7  2  4 1  2  2  6
 , 
 12 12
Using sect ion for mula, Coor dinat es of D

 m1 x2  m2 x1 m1 y2  m2 y1   7  8 2  12 
 , 
 m  m ,  3 3 
1 2 m1  m2 

Put t ing values in t he given above for mula  15 14 

 ,  [1]
 3 3
m1  1, m2  2
Now, Finding ar ea of ABC and ADE
x1  4 , x2  1

y1  6, y2  5 A(4, 6)

 m1 x2  m2 x1 m1 y2  m2 y1 
Point D =  ,
 m1  m2 m1  m2  (9/3, 17/3) D E (15/3, 14/)

 1  1  2  4 1  5  2  6
 , 
 12 12

 1  8 5  12  B(1, 5) C(7, 2)
 , 
 3 3 
Ar ea of ABC =
 9 17 
Point D=  ,  [1]
3 3  1
2
 x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2 
AE 1
 Given,
AC 3
x1  4 , x2  1
 3AE = AE + CE
x3  7, y 1  6
 3AE – AE = CE
y2  5, y3  2
 2AE = CE
1
AE 1   x  y  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2  
  2 1 2
CE 2
CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry 6.101

1  x3  5 k  1, y3  5 k;

2
 4  5  2  1  2  6   7  6  5 
1  k  1   2 k  3   5 k    3 k  5 k  2 k
 0 [1]
1 2   5 k  1  2 k    2 k  3

2
 4  3  1  4   7 1 
  k  1  3 k  3   3 k  3 k   5 k  1 3  0
1
 12  4  7
2  3 k 2  3 k  3 k  3  9 k 2  15 k  3  0

15  6 k 2  15 k  6  0
 sq. unit s [1]
2 Dividing t he above equat ion by 3
Ar ea of ADE =
 2k2  5k  2  0
1

2
 x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2   2k2  4 k  k  2  0

Given,  2 k  k  2  1  k  2  0 [1]

9   k  2 2 k  1  0
x1  4 , x2 
3  k  2  0 and 2 k  1  0
15
x3  , y1  6
3 1
 k  2 and k 
17 14 2
y2  , y3 
3 3
1
Ther efor e, t he values of k  and 2 [1]
2
1   17 14  9  14  15  17  
 4     6  6   20. We know t hat t hr ee point s ar e collinear if t he
2   3 3  3 3  3  3 
ar ea of t he t r iangle for med by t hem is zer o.
1  4   1  The ar ea of t r iangle can be calculat ed using t he
  4  1  3    5    for mula
2  3   3 
1
1 5 5 A x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2  [1]
   sq unit s 2
2 3 6
Ther efor e, H er e, x1  a, y1  a 2 , x2  b, y2  b2 , x3  0, y3  0

5 1
ar  ΔADE  5 2
 6   
1
A
2
    
a b2  0  b 0  a2  0 a2  b2  [1]
ar  ΔABC 15 6 15 9
2 1
A ab2  a2 b
2
H ence, r at io is 1:9. [1]
Accor ding t o t he quest ion a  b  0
19. Gi ven poi nt s ar e col l i near so ar ea of t r i angl e
for med must be zer o. 1
A  ab2  a 2 b  0 [1]
1 2
 x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2   0 [1]
2
Given;
2
 2
 
H ence, t he poi nt s a, a , b, b ,  0, 0  ar e non
collinear.
 x1  k  1, y1  2 k;
H ence pr oved. [1]
 x2  3 k , y2  2 k  3;
6.102 CHAPTER 6 : Coordinate Geometry
CHAPTER 7

Triangles

Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams

Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Area of Triangle 1 mark 1 mark 4 marks
Question based on Proving properties 3, 4 marks 3, 4 marks
of Triangle
7.104 CHAPTER 7 : Triangles

Summary Criteria for Similarity of Two Triangles

Two triangles are said to be similar if (i) their corresponding
Similar Triangles
angles are equal and (ii) their corresponding sides are in the
Similar figures: Geometric figures which have the same shape same ratio (or proportional).
but different sizes are known as similar figures. Thus, two triangles ABC and ABC are similar if
Illustrations: (i) A = A, B = B, C = C and
1. Any two line-segments are similar
AB BC CA
2. Any two squares are similar (ii)  
A  B  B C  C  A 
3. Any two circles are similar
In this section, we shall make use of the theorems discussed
in earlier sections to derive some criteria for similar triangles
which in turn will imply that either of the above two
conditions can be used to define the similarity of two
triangles.
CHARACTERISTIC PROPERTY 1 (AAA SIMILARITY)
Theorem 3: If in two triangles, the corresponding angles are
Two congruent figures are always similar but two similar equal, then the triangles are similar.
figures need not be congruent. CHARACTERISTIC PROPERTY 2 (SSS SIMILARITY)
Similar polygons: Two polygons of the same number of sides Theorem 4: If the corresponding sides of two triangles are
are said to be similar if proportional, then they are similar.
(i) their corresponding angles are equal (i.e., they are CHARACTERISTIC PROPERTY 3 (SAS SIMILARITY)
equiangular) and Theorem 5: If one angle of a triangle is equal to one angle of
(ii) their corresponding sides are in the same ratio (or the other and the sides including these angles are
proportion) proportional than the two triangles are similar.
Similar triangles: Since triangles are also polygons, the same
Areas of Similar Triangles
conditions of similarity are applicable to them.
Two triangles are said to be similar if Theorem 6:The ratio of the areas of two similar triangles is
(i) their corresponding angles are equal and equal to the ratio of the squares of their corresponding sides.

(ii) their corresponding sides are in the same ratio (or Pythagoras Theorem
proportion).
Theorem 7:In a right triangle, the square of the hypotenuse
BASIC-PROPORTIONALITY THEOREM (Thales theorem)
is equal to the sum of the squares of the other two sides.
Theorem 1 : If a line is drawn parallel to one side of a triangle
Theorem 8: (Converse of Pythagoras theorem) In a triangle if
to intersect the other two sides in distinct points, the other
the square of one side is equal to the sum of the squares of
two sides are divided in the same ratio.
the other two sides, then the angle opposite to the first side
Theorem 2 : (Converse of BPT theorem) If a line divides any
is a right angle.
two sides of a triangle in the same ratio, prove that it is
 The mid-point of the hypotenuse of a right triangle is
parallel to the third side.
equidistant from the vertices.
CHAPTER 7 : Triangles 7.105

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 7. Given ABC ~ PQR, if

AB 1
 , t hen
PQ 3
ar ABC
ar PQR
.

EXAMINATION QUESTIONS [DELH I , 2018]

2 Marks Questions
1 Mark Questions
8. I n ABC AB  AC , and D is a point on side AC
1. DEF ~ ABC ; I f DE : AB = 2 : 3 and ar (DEF )
is equal to 44 squar e unit s, then ar ea(ABC) in such t hat BC 2  AC.CD . Pr ove t hat BD  BC .
squar e unit s is [TERM 2, 2011]
(a) 99 (b) 120 9. I n given figur e ABCD is a r ect angle, in which
BC = 2AB. A point E lies on CD pr oduced such
176
(c) (d) 66 t hat CE  2 BC . Find AC : BE
9
[TERM 2, 2012] E
2. T h e f am ou s m at h em at i ci an w h o gav e an
i mpor t ant t r ut h cal l ed "Basi c pr opor t i onal i t y
t heor em" belongs t o:
(a) China
(b) India
A D
(c) Babylonia
(d) Gr eece
[TERM 2, 2013]
B C
3. Find t he lengt h of t he diagonal of a squar e whose
[TERM 2, 2011]
each side is 8 cm.
10. I n the given figur e, if AB| | DC, find the value of x.
[TERM 2, 2014]
D C
4. I n a , r ight angled at B , AC  AB  2 cm , BC = 8

3
–
cm, find the value of AC. x+
x

2
[TERM 2, 2015]
O
5

5. I n ABC , D and E ar e point on side AB and AC

x+

x–

r esp. such t hat DE| | BC . I f AE = 2 cm, AD = 3

1

cm and BD = 4.5 cm t hen find CE .

[TERM 2, 2016] A B
6. I n a ABC, DE  BC , t hen find t he value of x . [TERM 2, 2012]

11. I n ABC, A  90 AN  BC , BC = 13 cm and

A
AC = 5 Cm. Find the ratio of ar (NAC) : ar (ABC)
[TERM 2, 2013]

x x +3 12. I n t he fi gur e, OAD  OBC , I f AOC  90

and OBC  30 , find ODA and COB
D E A D
m
x +1 x +5
90° O

B C
30°
[TERM 2, 2017] l
C B
[TERM 2, 2014]
7.106 CHAPTER 7 : Triangles

13. I n F i gu r e 4, a t r i an gl e A B C i s dr aw n t o 17. D ,E ,F ar e r espectively t he mid-point s of t he sides

cir cumscr ibe a cir cle of r adius 3 cm, such t hat AB , BC and CA of ABC. Find t he r at ios of ar ea
t he segment s BD and DC ar e r espect i vel y of of DEF and ABC.
lengt hs 6 cm and 9 cm. I f t he ar ea of ABC is 54, [TERM 2, 2012]
t hen find t he lengt hs of sides AB and AC. 18. Pr ove t hat t he sum of t he squar es of t he sides of
A a r hombus is equal t o t he sum of t he squar es of
it s diagonals
[TERM 2, 2012]
O
19. Diagonals of a t r apezium ABCD wit h AB | | DC
3 cm int er sect each ot her at t he point O. I f AB  2CD ,
B
D
C find t he r at io of t he ar ea of t r iangles AOB and
6 cm 9 cm COD.
[TERM 2, 2012]
Figure 4
[TERM 2, 2015] 20. I n t h e gi ven f i gu r e, DB  BC; DE  AB an d
14. State which of the two tr iangles given in the figur e BE AC
ar e similar. Also state the similarity criterion used. AC  BC. Pr ove t hat 
DE BC
A
D
A
6 cm
3 cm
D

B 4 cm C E 4.5 mcm F
E
P
B C
12 cm 9 cm
[TERM 2, 2013]
21. I n an equilat er al t r iangle ABC, AD is an alt it ude
dr aw n f r om A on t h e si de B C . Pr ove t h at
Q R
3
[TERM 2, 2015] AB 2  AD 2
4
3 Marks Questions
[TERM 2, 2013]
15. Two r ight t r iangles ABC and DBC ar e dr awn on
t he same hypot enuse BC and on t he same side of 22. I n t he figur e AB | | QR and BC| | RS. Pr ove t hat
BC. I f AC and BD int er sect at P, pr ove t hat : PA PC

AP  PC  BP  DP. PQ PS
[TERM 2, 2011]

16. ABC is r ight angled at B . AD and CE ar e t he

P
t wo medians dr awn fr om A and C, r espect ively. I f

3 5 A C
AC = 5 cm, AD  cm, find t he lengt h of CE .
2
A Q S
B

E
R

B [TERM 2, 2014]
D C
[TERM 2, 2011]
CHAPTER 7 : Triangles 7.107

23. I n t he figur e if CD = 17m, BD = 8m and AD = 4m, 4 Marks Questions

t hen find t he value of AC.
29. I n t he given figur e, in ABC, XY| | AC and XY
C di vi des t he ABC i nt o t wo r egi ons such t hat
AX
ar ( BXY )=) 2ar (ACYX ). Det er mine .
AB
B

A D B
[TERM 2, 2014]

24. I n t he given figur e ABD  PQS when AD and X Y

PS ar e medians. Pr ove t hat ABC  PQR .
A A C
[TERM 2, 2011]
30. Two poles of height p and q met r es ar e st anding
ver tically on a level gr ound, a metr es apar t. Pr ove
t hat t he height of t he point of int er sect ion of t he
lines joining t he t op of each pole t o t he foot of t he
B pq
D C opposit e pole is given by met r es.
pq
P
[TERM 2, 2011]
31. I n the given figure, ABC and DBC are two triangles
on t he same base BC. I f AD int er sect s BC at O,
ar ( ABC ) AO
Q S R show t hat 
ar ( DBC ) DO
[TERM 2, 2015]
A C
25. I n t he given figur e B  D  90 . I f AB = 12
cm, AC = 13 cm, CE = 5 cm and ED = 4 cm, find
t he lengt h of BD .
O
A
E

B D
[TERM 2, 2012]
B C D
[TERM 2, 2015] 32. I n t he given figur e ABC is an equilat er al. D is
26. St at e and pr ove Pyt hagor as t heor em. 1
a point on BC such t hat BD  BC Pr ove t hat
3
[TERM 2, 2017]
9 AD 2  7 AB 2
27. I f the ar ea of two similar tr iangles ar e equal, pr ove
t hat t hey ar e congr uent . A
[DELH I , 2018]
28. Pr ove t h at t h e ar ea of equ i l at er al t r i angl e
descr ibed on one side of t he squar e is equal t o
half of the ar ea of an equilateral triangle described
on one of it s diagonal.
[DELH I , 2018]
B D C
[TERM 2, 2013]
7.108 CHAPTER 7 : Triangles

33. I n ABC , I f ADE  B , t h en pr ove t h at 44 4

 
ADE  ABC . ABC 9
Also if AD = 7.6 cm, AE = 7.2 cm, BE = 4.2 cm and 44  9
 ABC 
BC =5.4 cm, t hen find DE . 4
A  ABC  11  9  99
The ar ea(ABC) in squar e unit s is 99.
E H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (a). [½]
2. Famous Gr eek mat hemat ician Thales (600 B.C.)
gave an impor t ant t r ut h concer ning equiangular
D t r iangles. Which is called Basic pr opor t ionalit y
Theor em.
H ence t he cor r ect opt ion is (d). [1]
B C
[TERM 2, 2015] 3. L et t he lengt h of each side of squar e be a  8 cm ,
34. I n t his given ABC, PQ  AC and it divides t he and suppose t he lengt h of t he diagonal be ,
int o t wo equal par ts in ar ea. Then find the r atio Now using Pyt hagor as t heor em,
AP  d 2  2 a2
of .
AB
 d  2a
A
d 28  8 2
P
H ence lengt h of t he diagonal is 8 2cm . [1]
4. I t is given t hat ABC is r ight angled at B , Also,
B
AC  AB  2 cm and BC = 8 cm.
AC  AB  2 cm This implies
Q AB  AC  2 cm ...(i)
C
C
[TERM 2, 2017]
35. Pr ove t hat , in a r ight t r iangle, t he squar e on t he
hypot enuse is equal t o t he sum of t he squar es on
t he ot her t wo sides. [½]
[DELH I , 2018]

 Solutions A B
Using t he Pyt hagor as t heor em we get ,
1. We know t hat ,
The r at io of t he ar eas of t wo similar t r iangles is  AC 2   AB 2   BC 2
equ al t o t h e squ ar e of t h e r at i o of t h ei r
cor r esponding sides. 2 2 2
  AC    AC  2   BC 
Using (i)
ar (DEF ) DE 2
 ...(i) 2 2 2
ar (ABC) AB 2   AC    AC   4  4 AC   8
We have,
2 2
  AC    AC   4  4 AC  64
DE 2
ar (DEF )  44 squareunit s,and  [½]
AB 3  0  4 AC  68
Subst it ut ing above values in equat ion (i),  4 AC  68

44 22  AC  17
 H ence, t he value of AC is 17 cm. [½]
ABC 32
CHAPTER 7 : Triangles 7.109

5. I n ABC, we have DE| | BC. 7. Accor ding t o t he t heor em "I f t wo t r iangles ar e

similar t hen t he r at io of t he ar eas of t wo similar
A t r iangles is equal t o t he squar e of t he r at io of
t heir cor r esponding sides."
2
ar ABC  AB 

ar PQR  PQ 
D E 2
[½]  1
 
 3

1
B C 
9
By basic pr opor t ionalit y t heor em, ar ABC 1
AD AE
  [1]
ar PQR 9

DB EC 8. Consider ABC wher e AB  AC and D is a point
3 AE on side AC.

4.5 EC
A
3 2

4.5 EC
2  4.5
EC  D
3
9
EC 
3
EC  CE  3 B C
Thus CE  3cm [½] I t is given t hat
6. Given:
 BC  BC  AC  CD
ABC, DE  BC, AD  x, DB  x  1, Rear r anging t he t er ms,
AE  x  3, and EC  x  5 AC BC
  [1]
Now, accor ding to Basic Pr opor t ionality Theor em, BC CD
AD AE Which means t hat ABC is similar t o BDC .

DB EC AC AB
  ...(i)
x x3 BC BD
 
x1 x5 (Cor r espondi ng si des of si mi l ar t r i angl es ar e
pr opor t ional)
 x  x  5   x  3 x  1
As it is given t hat AB  AC ,
2
 x  5 x  x  x  1  3  x  1 [½] Ther efor e, fr om (i) BD  BC .
On simplifying t he expr ession, we get , H ence pr oved. [1]
 x2  5 x  x 2  x  3 x  3 9. ABCD is a r ect angle and each angle of r ect angle
is 90°.
Taking all t he t er ms t o t he left side,
L et lengt h of AB  x ...(i)
2 2
 x  x  5x  4 x  3  0 I t is given t hat BC  2 AB ,
 x3  0
 BC  2 x (Using(i)) ...(ii)
x3
CE  2BC  2  2 x   4 x (Using (ii))
H ence, t he value of x is 3. [½]
7.110 CHAPTER 7 : Triangles

E Solving t he equat ion,

 ( x  5)( x  2)  ( x  1)( x  3)

 x 2  5 x  2 x  10  x 2  3 x  x  3
Cancel l i ng t he same t er ms on bot h si des and
4x solving, we get ,
A D  3 x  10  2 x  3

x x7
H ence, t he value of x is 7. [1]
B 2x C
Apply Pythagor as Theor em in r ight angled ABC, 11. B

AC 2  AB 2  BC 2 13 – x
13 cm
 AC 2  x2   2 x 
2 N
x
 AC 2  5 x2

 AC  5 x
A C
(Neglect ing t he negat ive value of squar e r oot as 5 cm
lengt h cannot be in negat ive) ...(iii) [1]
Apply Pythagor as Theor em in r ight angled BCE, I n r ight BAC ,

BE 2  BC 2  CE 2 AB 2  AC 2  BC 2

2
 BE 2   2 x    4 x
2 AB 2  132  52  144
AB  12 cm [½]
 BE 2  20 x 2 Now, in r ight AN C Using Pyt hagor as t heor em,
 BE  20 x  2 5 x (Neglect ing t he negat ive
AN 2  N C 2  AC 2
val ue of squar e r oot as l engt h cannot be i n
negat ive) ...(iv) l 2  x2  25 ...(i)
Fr om (iii) and (iv),
Now, in r ight ANB, Using Pyt hagor as t heor em
AC : BE  5 x : 2 5 x
AN 2  BN 2  AB 2
H ence, AC : BE  1 : 2 . [1]
2 2
10. I n OAB and OCD , l 2  13  x   12

AOB  COD (ver t ically opposit e angles) l 2  169  x2  26 x  144 ...(ii) [½]
OBA  ODC (alt er nat e int er ior angles) By subst i t ut i ng t he val ue of l 2 fr om eqn(i ) i n
H ence, OAB  OCD eqn(ii),we get .
(AAA similar ity cr it er ion) 25  x 2  169  x2  26 x  144
Since, triangles OAB and OCD ar e similar,
25
x
OA OB 13
Ther efor e,  [1]
OC OD Put t he value of x in eqn (i)
Substitut ing values fr om the given figur e, we get, 2
 25 
l 2     25
x  5 x 1  13 

x3 x2
60
l [½]
13
CHAPTER 7 : Triangles 7.111

Now, ar ea of t r iangle is given by (Tangent s of t he cir cle fr om point B)

1 AB  AF  FB   x  6 cm
 base  height
2
BC  BD  DC  6  9  15cm
1 25 60
  CA  CE  EA   9  x  cm
areaANC 2 13 13

ar eaABC 1
 5  12 1
2 Ar ea of OBC   BC  OD
2
25
 1 45
169   15  3  cm 2 [½]
H ence 2 2

ar  NAC  : ar  ABC   25 : 169 [½] 1

Ar ea of OCA   AC  OE
2
12. I f AOC  90 ,
1 3
t hen COB  90 since AOB is a st r aight line    x  9  3   x  9 cm 2 [½]
2 2
and sum of angles on a st r aight lines ar e 180°°
I n OBC, OBC  30 , COB  90 , 1
Ar ea of OAB   AB  OF
By using angle sum pr oper t y of a t r iangle, 2

OCB  180   COB+OBC [½] 1 3

   x  6  3   x  6 cm 2
2 2
 180   90  30
Ar ea ofABC  Ar ea of OBC  Ar ea of
OCB  180  120 OCA  Ar ea of OAB
OCB  60 45 3 3
 54    x  9   x  6 [½]
Now since, OAD  OBC 2 2 2
OCB  ODA  60 M ult iply t he above equat ion by 2,

H ence OCB  60 and COB = 90 [½]  108  45  3 x  27  3 x  18

13. L et us suppose t hat t he cir cle t ouches t he sides  18  6 x

AB and AC of t he t r iangle of t he t r iangle at point Divide above equat ion by 6,
F and E , r espect ively.
x3
A So,
AB  x  6  3  6  9cm
O AC  9  x  9  3  12cm
3 cm H en ce, t h e l engt h s of si des A B = 9cm an d
AC = 12cm. [½]
B C
D 14. I n ABC and FED we have,
6 cm 9 cm
L et t he lengt h of t he line segment AF be x cm. ABC  FED
Accor di ng t o t he t heor em, t hat t he l engt hs of AB 6 60 4
  
t angent s dr awn for m an ext er nal point t o cir cle FE 4.5 45 3
ar e equal.
BC 4
I n ABC, And, 
ED 3
CE  CD  9cm AB BC
  [1]
(Tangent s of t he cir cle fr om point C) FE ED
BF  BD  6cm  ABC  FED by SAS Rule
7.112 CHAPTER 7 : Triangles

Since one angle of a t r iangle is equal t o one angle 16. Applying Pyt hagor as Theor em in ABC ,
of the other tr iangle and t he sides including these
angles ar e pr opor t ional, t hen t he t wo t r iangles AC 2  AB 2  BC 2 ...(i)
ar e similar. [1]
Applying Pyt hagor as Theor em in ABD ,
15. ABC and DBC ar e r ight angled t r iangles at
A and D r espect ively. AD 2  AB 2  BD 2
DPC is a r ight angled t r iangle at D . Repr esent 1
BD  BC as AD is median.
t he given infor mat ion as a diagr am, 2

D 2
1 
AD 2  AB 2   BC 
2 
B
1
AD 2  AB 2  BC 2 ...(ii) [1]
4
Subt r act (ii) fr om (i),
P A C
 1 
AC 2  AD 2  AB 2  BC 2   AB 2  BC 2 
Using Pyt hagor as Theor em,
 4 

CP 2  CD 2  DP 2 3 5
Subst it ut e AC 5 cm, AD  cm
2
 CD 2  CP 2  DP 2
Now, CP  CA  AP and DP  DB  BP 2
 3 5
2 3
5    BC 2
2
 CD 2   CA  AP    DB  BP 
2  2  4

45 3
Use  a  b2  a2  2ab  b2  25   BC 2
4 4
 CD 2  CA 2  2CA. AP  AP 2 
55 3
  BC 2
2 2 4 4
 DB  2 DB.BP  BP  [1]
55
 CD 2  CA 2  AP ²  2  BC 2  .....(ii i)
3
CA.AP  DB ²  BP ²  2 DB.BP Subst it ut e t he above value in equat ion (i), we get
 CD ²  DB ²  CA ²  (BP – AP ) 2 2

 55 
52  AB 2   
BP ²  AP ²  2 CA .AP  2 DB.BP  3

 CB ²  CA ²  AB ²  2 CA. AP  2 DB.BP [1]

55 20
 AB 2  25   ...(iv)
 2 AB ²  2 CA. AP  2 DB. BP 3 3
CB2  AB 2  AC2  CB 2  AC2  AB 2  Consider EBC ,

 AB ²   PC  AP  AP   DP  BP  BP CE 2  BC 2  BE 2
2
 AB 2  AP. PC  AP ²  DP.BP  BP ² 1 
 CE 2  BC 2   AB  [1]
2 
 AB 2  AP. PC  DP.BP  AB ²
 AP  PC  DP  BP 1
(CE is median, so BE   AB  )
H ence pr oved. [1] 2

1
 CE 2  BC 2  AB 2
4
CHAPTER 7 : Triangles 7.113

18. Consider a rhombus ABCD as shown in the figure:

55 1  20 
2
 CE    
3 4 3  D C
(Using (iii) and (iv))
O
55  5 
 CE 2      20
3  3

 CE  20  2 5cm . [1]
17. Accor ding t o t he given infor mat ion, t he following A B
figur e can be dr awn:
We know t hat t he diagonals of a r hombus bisect
A each ot her at r ight angles. Ther efor e;

1
AO = CO = AC ...(i)
2
D F
1
BO = DO = BD ...(ii)
2
Also, AOB  BOC  COD  DOA  90
B E C
...(iii)
Accor di ng t o t he mi d-poi nt t heor em, t he l i ne Now, consider t he r ight t r iangle AOB .
joining t he midpoint s of t wo sides of a t r iangle is
AB 2  AO2  BO2
par allel t o t hir d side and half of it . [1]
Ther efor e, AB | | EF , BC| | DF and AC| | DE , and 1  1
2

2
or  AB 2   AC    BD 
2  2 
EF 1 {fr om equat ion (i) and (ii)}

AB 2
1 1
DF 1  AB 2  AC 2  BD 2 ...(iv) [1]
 4` 4
BC 2 Similar ly,
DE 1 1 1
 [1] BC 2  AC 2  BD 2 (v)
AC 2 4 4
We know t hat if in t wo t r iangl es, sides of one
t r iangle ar e pr opor t ional t o t he sides of t he ot her 2 1 1
And, CD  AC 2  BD 2 ...(vi)
t r i angl e, t hen t hei r cor r espondi ng angl es ar e 4 4
equal and hence t he t wo t r iangles ar e similar.
2 1 1
Hence, ABC  DFE (by SSS congr uency r ule) Again AD  AC 2  BD 2 ...(vii) [1]
4 4
Again, accor ding t o t he t heor em, t he r at io of t he
Add equat ions (iv) , (v) , (vi) and (vii), we get ;
ar eas of t wo si mi l ar t r i angl es i s equal t o t he
squar e of t he r at io of t heir cor r esponding sides. AB 2  BC 2  CD 2  AD 2

ar (DFE ) EF 2  ( EF )2  1 1 1 1
     AC 2  AC 2  AC 2  AC 2 
ar (ABC) AB 2  (2 EF )2  4 4 4 4

1 1 1 1
12 1 BD 2  BD 2  BD 2  BD 2
  4 4 4 4
2 4
2
H ence, t he r at io of t he ar eas of t wo t r iangles will AB 2  BC 2  CD 2  AD 2  AC 2  BD 2
be 1 : 4 [1] H ence pr oved. [1]
7.114 CHAPTER 7 : Triangles

19. Con si der i n g t h e gi v en si t u at i on , f ol l owi n g 21. A

diagr am can be dr awn:

D C

A B

Given t hat AB | | DC . AC and BD ar e diagonals C D B

t hat int er sect each ot her at O. I n t he ABC , AD is t he Alt it ude.
Ther efor e, AOB  COD (ver t ically opposit e AD ²  DB ²  AB ² [1]
angles)
1
Also, OAB  OCD (alt er nat e angles) [1]
DB  BC (Perpendicular to base bisects the side
2
in equilat er al t r iangle)
Similar ly, OBA  ODC (alt er nat e angles)
2
H en ce, AOB  COD (by A A A si m i l ar i t y 1 
AD ²   BC   AB ²
cr iter ia) 2 
Also, we know t hat t he r at io of t he ar eas of t wo BC ²
 AD ²   AB ²
similar tr iangles is equal to the squar e of the r atio 4
of t heir cor r esponding sides [1]
 4 AD ²  BC ²  4 AB ²
2
ar AOB ( AB)  4 AD ²  4 AB ²  BC ² [1]
So, 
ar COD (CD )2
 4 AD ²  4 AB ²  AB ² ( BC  AB in equilater al
tr iangle)
ar AOB (2CD )2
Or,   4 AD ²  3 AB ²
ar COD (CD )2
3
2  AD ²   AB ²
(2) 4 4
 
2 1 H ence Pr oved. [1]
(1)

Ther efor e, ar AOB : ar COD  4 : 1 [1] PA PC

22. To pr ove: 
PQ PS
20. BD | | AC
Given: AB | | QR and BC| | RS
I n BED and ABC , Pr oof:
P
BED  ACB  each 90o  [1]
A C
DBA  BAC (Alt er nat e int er ior angles)
 BED  ACB (By AAA r ule) [1]
Q S
B
BE DE
So,  (Rat io of cor r esponding sides of
AC BC
similar tr aingles)
R
BE AC
Or,  Since AB | | QR,
DE BC
PAB  PQR [Cor r esponding angles ar e equal]
H ence Pr oved. [1]
PBA  PRQ [Cor r esponding angles ar e equal]
CHAPTER 7 : Triangles 7.115

H ence in PAB and PQR , 24. Given: ABD  PQS

APB  QPR [Common angle] To pr ove: ABC  PQR

PAB  PQR and PBA  PRQ Pr oof:

Since ABD  PQS
PAB  PQR since all t he angles ar e equal.
Similar ly BC| | RS [1] AB BD AD
   (Cor r espon di n g si des of
PCB  PSR [Cor r esponding angles ar e equal] PQ QS PS
similar t r iangles ar e pr opor t ional) ...(i) [1]
PBC  PRS [Cor r esponding angles ar e equal]
Al so, BAD  QPS, B  Q, ADB  PSQ
H ence in PCB and PSR ,
(Cor r esponding angl es of si milar t r iangles ar e
CPB  SPR [common angle] equal). ...(ii)
Now it is given t hat AD and PS ar e medians.
PCB  PSR and PBC  PRS
PCB  PSR since all t he angles ar e equal.
BC QR
Ther efor e BD  and QS=
2 2
Now PCB  PSR and PAB  PQR , [1] Fr om (i) we get ,
T h er ef or e t h ei r cor r espon di n g si des ar e
pr opor tional, BC
AB
PC PB  2
 ...(i) PQ QR
PS PR 2
PA PB
 ...(ii) AB BC
PQ PR   ...(iii) [1]
PQ QR
H ence fr om (i) and (ii),
Now in ABC and PQR we have,
PA PC

PQ PS AB BC
 (Fr om (iii))
H ence pr oved. [1] PQ QR
23. I n r ight t r iangle CBD using Pyt hagor as theor em,
Also B  Q (Fr om (ii))
CD 2  BD 2  BC 2
 ABC  PQR by SAS cr it er ion.
2 2 2
17  8  BC H ence pr oved. [1]

BC 2  172  82  289  64 25. I n ABC , we have AB = 12 cm, AC = 13 cm and

B  90
BC 2  225
Using t he Pyt hagor as t heor em we have,
BC = 15 m [1]
Now since AD = 4m and BD = 8m,  AC 2   AB 2   BC 2 [1]
AB  AD  BD
2 2 2
AB = 12 m [1]  13  12   BC 
Now in t r iangle ABC, 2
 169  144   BC 
AC 2  AB 2  BC 2
2
  BC   169  144  25
AC 2  122  152  144  225
 BC  5 cm
AC 2  369
Now in EDC , we have CE = 5 cm and ED = 4
AC  3 41 m [1]
cm and D  90 [1]
H ence r equir ed answer is AC  3 41 m .
7.116 CHAPTER 7 : Triangles

Using t he Pyt hagor as t heor em we have, Adding (i) and (ii)

 CE 2   CD 2   ED 2  PQ2  QR2  PS  PR  RS  PR

2 2 2  PQ2  QR2  PR  PS  RS 
  5   CD    4 

2
 PQ2  QR2  PR.PR
 25   CD   16
 PQ2  QR2  PR2
2
  CD   25  16  9
 PR2  PQ2  QR2
 CD  3 cm H ence pr oved [1]
BD  BC  CD 27. L et t he t wo t r iangles be ABC and DEF
 BD  5 cm  3 cm  8 cm D
H ence, t he lengt h BD is 8 cm. [1] A
26. Pyt hagor as t heor em: I n a r i ght t r i angl e, t he
squar e of t he hypot enuse is equal t o sum of t he
squar es of t he ot her t wo sides.
Q
B CE F
I f two tr iangles ar e similar than t he r at io of ar eas
is equal t o squar e of r at io of it s cor r esponding
sides
2 2 2
ar ABC  BC   AB   AC 
P S R        [1]
ar DEF  EF DE DF 
Given: PQR is a r ight t r iangle, r ight angled at As t he ar eas ar e same
Q. 2 2 2
 BC   AB   AC 
2
To pr ove: PR  PQ  QR 2 2      1
 EF   DE   DF 
Const r uct ion: Dr aw QS  PR BC AB AC
   1
Pr oof: I n PQS and PQR, EF DE DF
or
 BC = EF, AB = DE and AC = DF .
PSQ  PQR  90
QPS  QPR (common) [1] Now in ABC and DEF

(by AAA similar it y cr it er ion) D

A
PS PQ
 
PQ PR
 PS  PR  PQ2 ...(i) [1]
Now, I n QSR and PQR ,
B CE F
QSR  PQR  90
AB = DE
QRS  QRP (common)
BC = EF
 QSR  PQR (by AA similar ity cr it er ion) CA = FD
H ence by SSS congr uency
RS QR
 
QR PR ABC  DEF
H ence pr oved. [1]
 RS  PR  QR2 ...(ii) [1]
CHAPTER 7 : Triangles 7.117

28. The diagr am will be:

ar  BXY   BX  2
A   ...(ii) [1]
ar  ABC   AB 
Fr om (i) and (ii),
2
 BX  2
  
B C AB 3
Now, BX  AB  AX

2
 AB  AX  2
  
AB 3
E D
2
 AX  2
F  1   [1]
 AB  3
L et t he lengt h of t he side of t he squar e be a .
Taking squar e r oot ,
Diagonal of t he squar e EC = 2a [1]
AX 2
3 1 
Ar ea of an equilat er al t r iangle =  side2 AB 3
4
AX 2
3 2  1 [1]
Ar ea of ABC  a AB 3
4
30. L et height of t he point of int er sect ion of t he lines
3 2 joini ng t he t op of each pol e t o t he foot of t he
Ar ea of ECF 
4
 2a [1] opposit e pole be h .
D
3
  2a2
4
A
3
  a2 q
2 E
p [1]
1 3 
   a2  h
2 2 

Which is equal t o half of ar ea of ABC . B F C

H ence pr oved. [1] Consider ABC and EFC

29. ar (BXY)=2ar(ACYX).
ABC  EFC  90
ar ( BXY ) = 2ar ( ABC – BXY )
ACB  ECF
3ar ( BXY )=2 ar ( ABC)
 ABC  EFC (AAA similar it y cr it er ion)
ar  BXY  2
 
ar  ABC  3
...(i) [1] AB BC
 
EF FC
Consider BXY and  ABC,
p a
BXY  BAC (Cor r espon di n g an gl es as  
h FC
XY | | AC)
BYX  BCA (Cor r espon di n g an gl es as ah
 FC  ...(i) [1]
XY | | AC) p
 BYX  BCA (AA similar it y cr it er ion)
7.118 CHAPTER 7 : Triangles

Consider DCB and EFB Taking r at io of equat ion (i) and equat ion (ii), we
get ,
DCB  EFB  90
ar ( ABC ) AE
DBC  EBF 
ar ( DBC ) DF
 DCB  EFB (AA similar it y cr it er ion) But we need t o pr ove t hat ,
DC BC ar ( ABC ) AO
 
EF FB 
ar ( DBC ) DO
q a H ence, we need t o pr ove t hat ,
 
h FB
AO AE
 [1]
ah DO DF
 FB  ...(ii) [1]
q
I n AOE and DOF ,
Add equat ions (i) and (ii),
AEO  DFO  90
ah ah
 FC  FB   AOE  DOF (Ver t ically opposit e angles)
p q
H ence, by AA similar it y cr it er ion
 1 1
 a  ah    AOE  DOF
 p q
We know t hat , if t wo t r iangles ar e similar, t heir
cor r esponding sides ar e in t he same r at io
1 1
h 
1 1 q p AE AO
 Ther efor e,  ...(iii) [1]
p q pq DF DO
Now, we have,
pq
h
p q ar ( ABC ) AE
 ...(iv)
H ence pr oved. [1] ar ( DBC ) DF

31. Given: BC is t he common base of ABC and On comparing equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get,

(DBC) . ar ( ABC ) AO

ar ( DBC ) DO
ar ( ABC ) AO
To Pr ove:  H ence pr oved. [1]
ar ( DBC ) DO
Dr aw, 32. I t is given t hat in an equilat er al t r iangle ABC,
t h e si de B C i s t r i sect ed at D su ch t h at
AE  BC and DF  BC in ABC and DBC
r espect ively. 1
BD  BC .
3
A C
F To pr ove: 9 AD 2  7 AB 2

Const r uct ion: Dr aw AE  BC .

O
A
E

B D

1
H ence, ar (ABC)   BC  AE ...(i)
2

1 [1]
And, ar ( DBC)   BC  DF ...(ii) [1] B D E C
2
CHAPTER 7 : Triangles 7.119

I n ABE and ACE . C   E (each 90) [1]

AB  AC H ence, ADE  ABC by R.H .S cr it er ion.

AE  AE  Common sides ar e equal. Now ADE  ABC
AEB  AEC  90 So,

 AEB  AEC AC AB BC
= 
Also, BE  EC By C.P.C.T AE AD DE
AB  BE  AE
BC
BE  EC 
2  AB = 4.2  7.2  11.4cm [1]
I n a r ight angled t r iangle ADE . N ow,

AD 2  AE 2  DE 2 ......  i  AC AB BC
= 
AE AD DE
I n a r ight angled t r iangle ABE .
AC 11.4 5.4
AB 2  AE 2  BE 2 ......  i i  [1]  =  [1]
7.2 7.6 DE
Subt r act equat ion (ii) fr om equat ion (i) we get , N ow,
2 2 2 2
 AD  AB  DE  BE 11.4 5.4
 
2 7.6 DE
 AD 2  AB 2   BE  BD   BE 2
 11.4  DE  5.4  7.6
2 2
 BC BC   BC 
 AD 2  AB 2         DE 
7.6  5.4
 2 3  2  11.4
2 2 H ence DE  3.6 cm . [1]
  3 BC  2 BC    BC 
 AD 2  AB 2       [1]
 6  2  34. Now, Given: I n
ABC, PQ  AC and PBC ~ ABC
2 BC 2 BC 2
2
 AD  AB   and ar  PBC   ar  APQC 
36 4

2 A
36 AB  AB 2  9 AB 2 
 AD 2  P
36

2
 AD 2

28 AB  B
36

2
 AD 2

7 AB  Q
9

 9 AD 2  7 AB 2 C

H ence Pr oved. [1] AP

To find: r at io of
33. I n ADE and ABC AB

Given , Solut ion: ar  PBC   ar  APQC  ...  i 

ADE  B (Given) As PBC ~ ABC [1]
A   A (Common)
7.120 CHAPTER 7 : Triangles

So, 35. Consider a r ight t r iangle ABC r ight angled at B.

Dr aw BD  AC
ar  PBC   PB  2  BQ  2  PQ  2
        Consider  ADB and  ABC ,
ar  ABC   AB  BC  AC 
ADB  ABC  90
2
ar  PBC   PB 
Taking   BAD  CAB (Common)
ar  ABC   AB 
B
2
ar  PBC   PB 
  [1]
ar PBC  ar  APQC   AB 

[1]
ar  PBC   PB  2
   ... fr om (ii)
2ar  PBC   AB  A
D C

1  PB  2  ADB   ABC (Using AA similar ity cr iter ion)

  
2  AB 
AD AB
Taking squar e r oot of bot h t he sides, we get  (Cor r espon di n g si des of si m i l ar
AB AC
1 PB t r iangles ar e pr opor t ional)
  [1]
2 AB  AB 2  AD  AC .... (i) [1]

1 PB Consider BDC and ABC ,

1 1
2 AB
BDC  ABC  90

2 1 AB  PB BCD  ACB (Common)

 
2 AB  BDC ~  ABC (Using AA similarity cr iterion)

DC BC (Cor r espon di n g si des of si m i l ar

2 1 AP 
  BC AC
2 AB
t r iangles ar e pr opor t ional)
Aft er r at ionalizat ion of t he denominat or, we get
 BC 2  CD  AC …. (i i ) [1]
AP 2  2 Adding (i) and (ii), we get
 
AB 2
AB 2  BC 2   AD  AC    CD  AC 
So, t he r at io of is
 AB 2  BC 2  AC   AD  CD 
AP 2  2
 is . [1]
AB 2  AB 2  BC 2  AC 2 [1]
H ence pr oved.
CHAPTER 7 : Triangles 7.121
7.122 CHAPTER 7 : Triangles
CHAPTER 8

Circles

Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams

Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Tangent to Circle 2 marks 1 marks 1,2,2,4 marks 1,1 marks
Question based on Proving 3 marks 3 marks 2,3, 4 marks 2,2,4, 4 marks 4 marks 2,4,4 marks
Properties of Tangent
8.124 CHAPTER 8 : Circles

Length of tangent: The lengt h of t he line segment

Summary of t he t angent bet ween a given point and t he given
point of cont act wit h t he cir cle is called t he lengt h of
Circles t he t angent fr om t he point t o t he cir cle.

DEFI N I T I ON S  There is no tangent passing through a point

lying inside the circle.
Secant: A line, which int er sect s a cir cle in t wo dist inct
point s, is called a secant .  T her e is one and only one t angent passing
through a point lying on a circle.
Tangent: A line meet ing a cir cle only in one point is
called a t angent t o t he cir cle at t hat point .  There are exactly two tangents through a point
lying outside a circle.
The point at which t he t angent line meet s t he cir cle is
called t he point of cont act . Theorem 1 : The tangent at any point of a circle
is perpendicular to the radius through the point
of cont act .
Theorem 2 : The lengths of tangents drawn from
O an external point to a circle are equal.
Secant  The cent re lies on the bisector of t he angle
between the two tangents.
Tangent

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 2. The r adi i of t wo ci r cl es ar e 4 cm an d 3 cm

r espect ively. The diamet er of t he cir cle having
ar ea equal t o t he sum of t he ar eas of t he t wo
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS cir cles (in cm) is
1 Mark Questions (a) 5
1. I n t he given figur e, O is t he cent r e of a cir cle, AB (b) 7
is a chor d and AT is t he t angent at A . I f AOB = (c) 10
110, t hen BAT is equal t o (d) 14
[TERM 2, 2011]

3. Fr om a point Q, 13 cm away fr om t he cent r e

A of a ci r cl e, t he l engt h of t angent PQ t o t he
cir cle is 12 cm. The r adius of t he cir cle (in cm)
is
O T (a) 25
(b) 313
B (c) 5
(a) 100° (b) 40° (d) 1
(c) 50° (d) 90° [TERM 2, 2012]
[TERM 2, 2011]
CHAPTER 8 : Circles 8.125

4. I n Figur e 1, AP, AQ and BC ar e t angent s t o t he 7. Two cir cles t ouch each ot her ext er nally at P. AB
cir cle. I f AB = 5, BC = 4 and AC = 6 cm, t hen t he is a common t angent t o t he cir cles touching t hem
lengt h of AP (in cm) is at A and B . The value of APB is
A (a) 30° (b) 45°
(c) 60° (d) 90°
[TERM 2, 2014]

B C 8. I n figur e, QR is a common t angent t o t he given

P Q cir cles, t ouching ext er nally at t he point T . The
t angent at T meet s QR at P. I f QP = 3.8, t hen t he
lengt h of QR (in cm) is :

Q
(a) 7.5 (b) 15 P R
(c) 10 (d) 9
[TERM 2, 2012]
5. I n Fig. PA and PB ar e t wo t angent s dr awn fr om
an ext er nal point P t o a cir cle wit h cent r e C and T
r adius 4 cm. I f PA  PB , t hen t he lengt h of each
t angent is:

A
(a) 3.8 (b) 7.6
(c) 5.7 (d) 1.9
[TERM 2, 2014]
P
C 9. I n a r i ght t r i angl e AB C , r i ght -angl ed at B ,
BC = 12 cm and AB = 5 cm. The r adius of t he
cir cle inscr ibed in t he t r iangle (in cm) is
B (a) 4 (b) 3
(a) 3 cm (b) 4 cm (c) 2 (d) 1
(c) 5 cm (d) 6 cm [TERM 2, 2014]
[TERM 2, 2013] 10. I n figur e, PQ and PR ar e t wo t angent s t o a cir cle
6. I n Fig.2, a cir cle wit h cent r e O is inscr ibed in a with centr e O. I f PQR = 46°, then QOR equals:
quadr ilater al ABCD such that, it touches the sides
BC, AB , AD and CD at poi nt s P, Q, R and S
r espect ively, I f AB = 29 cm, AD = 23 cm, B = 90o Q
and DS = 5 cm, t hen t he r adi us of t he ci r cl e

.
(in cm.) is:
A
R O 46° P
D

O r R
S Q

r (a) 67°
(b) 134°
P B (c) 44°
C
(a) 11 (b) 18 (d) 46°
(c) 6 (d) 15 [TERM 2, 2014]
[TERM 2, 2013]
8.126 CHAPTER 8 : Circles

11. A chor d of a cir cle of r adius 10 cm subt ends a 17. I n Figur e, a r ight t r iangle ABC, cir cumscr ibes a
r ight angle at it s cent r e. The lengt h of t he chor d cir cle of r adius r. I f AB and BC ar e of lengt hs 8
(in cm) is cm and 6 cm r espect ively, find t he value of r .
(a) 5 2 (b) 10 2 A
5
(c) (d) 10 3
2
[TERM 2, 2014]
12. I n given Fig., PA and PB ar e tangents t o t he cir cle
wit h cent r e O such t hat APB = 50o. Wr it e t he
measur e of OAB .
r
A
O

B C
P 50° . [TERM 2, 2012]
O 18. Pr ove t hat t he t angent s dr awn at t he ends of a
diamet er of a cir cle ar e par allel.
[TERM 2, 2012]
B 19. I n Fig., a cir cle inscr ibed in t r iangle ABC t ouches
it s sides AB , BC and AC at point s D , E and F
[TERM 2, 2015] r espect ively. I f AB = 12 cm, BC = 8 cm and AC =
13. I n Fig., AB is t he diamet er of a cir cle wit h cent r e 10 cm, t hen find t he lengt hs of AD , BE and CF .
O and AT is a tangent. I f AOQ = 58°, find ATQ. C
B

F E
O

58°
A B
Q D
[TERM 2, 2013]
A T
20. Pr ove t hat t he par allel ogr am cir cumscr ibing a
[TERM 2, 2015] cir cle is a r hombus.
14. Fr om an ext er nal point P, t angent s PA and PB [TERM 2, 2013]
ar e dr awn t o a cir cle wit h cent r e O. I f PAB = 21. I n Figur e, common t angent s AB and CD t o t he
50°, t hen find AOB . t wo cir cles wit h cent r es O1 and O2 int er sect at E .
[TERM 2, 2016] Pr ove t hat AB = CD .
15. I f t he angle bet ween t wo t angent s dr awn fr om an
ext er nal point P t o a cir cle of r adius a and cent r e
A
O, is 60°, t hen find t he lengt h of OP.
D
[TERM 2, 2017]

2 Marks Questions .
O1 E O2
16. Two concent r ic cir cles ar e of r adii 7 cm and r cm B
r espect ively, wher e r > 7. A chor d of t he lar ger C
cir cle of lengt h 48 cm, t ouches t he smaller cir cle.
Find t he value of r .
[TERM 2, 2011] [TERM 2, 2014]
CHAPTER 8 : Circles 8.127

22. Pr ove t hat t he line segment joining t he point s of 28. I n t he given figur e, PA and PB ar e t angent s t o
cont act of t wo par allel t angent s of a cir cle passes t he cir cle fr om an ext er nal point P. CD is anot her
t hr ough it s cent r e. t angent t ouching t he cir cle at Q. I f PA = 12 cm,
[TERM 2, 2014] QC = QD = 3 cm, t hen find PC + PD .
23. The i nci r cl e of an i soscel es t r i angl e ABC, i n A
whi ch A B = A C , t ou ch es t h e si des B C , CA C
and AB at D , E and F r espect ively. Pr ove t hat
BD = DC.
. Q P
[TERM 2, 2014] O
24. I f fr om an ext er nal poi nt P of a ci r cl e wi t h
cen t er O , t w o t an gen t s PQ an d PR ar e D
dr awn such t h at  QPR = 120 ° , pr ove t h at B
2 PQ = PO [TERM 2, 2017]
[TERM 2, 2014]
3 Marks Questions
25. I n t he given fi gur e, fr om an ext er nal point P,
29. Fr om a poi nt T out si de a ci r cl e of cent r e O ,
t wo t angent s PT and PS ar e dr awn t o a cir cle
tangents TP and TQ ar e dr awn to the cir cle. Pr ove
wit h cent r e O and r adius r . I f OP = 2 r , show t hat
t hat OT is t he r ight bisect or of line segment PQ.
OTS = OST = 30°
[TERM 2, 2015]
30. I n figur e, t wo t angent s RQ and RP ar e dr awn
T fr om an ext er nal poi nt R t o t he ci r cl e wi t h
cent r e O . I f  PRQ = 120 ° , t hen pr ove t h at
OR = PR + RQ.

Q
O P
P

S O R

[TERM 2, 2016]
Q
26. I n Fig., AP and BP ar e t angent s t o a cir cle wit h
cent r e O, such t hat AP = 5 cm and APB = 60°.
Find t he lengt h of chor d AB [TERM 2, 2015]
P 31. I n t he given figur e, a t r iangle ABC is dr awn t o
cir cumscr ibe a cir cle of r adius 2 cm such t hat t he
60° segment s BD and DC int o which BC is divided
by t he point of cont act D ar e of lengt hs 4 cm and
3 cm r espect ively. I f ar ea of ABC = 21 cm 2, t hen
find t he lengt hs of sides AB and AC.
A
A B
.
O
F E

[TERM 2, 2016] O
27. Pr ove t hat t he t angent s dr awn at t he end point s
of a chor d of a cir cle make equal angles wit h t he
chor d. C
B 4 D 3
[TERM 2, 2017] [TERM 2, 2011]
8.128 CHAPTER 8 : Circles

32. I n Figur e, a cir cle is inscr ibed in a t r iangle PQR 38. I n Fig., t angent s PQ and PR ar e dr awn fr om an
wit h PQ = 10 cm, QR = 8 cm and PR = 12 cm. ext er nal point P t o a cir cle wit h cent er O, such
Find t he lengt hs QM , RN and PL . t hat RPQ = 30°. A chor d RS is dr awn par allel t o
P t he t angent PQ. Find RQS.

S R

N .O
L

R 30°
Q M P
[TERM 2, 2012]
Q
33. Two t angent s TP and TQ ar e dr awn t o a cir cle [TERM 2, 2015]
wit h cent r e O fr om an ext er nal point T . Pr ove 39. Pr ove t hat t he t angent dr awn at t he mid-point of
t hat PTQ = 2 OPQ.
an ar c of a cir cle is par allel t o t he chor d joining
[TERM 2, 2017]
t he end point s of t he ar c.
4 Marks Questions [TERM 2, 2015]

34. Pr ove t hat t he lengt hs of t angent s dr awn fr om 40. I n the given figur e, t wo equal cir cles, with centr es
an ext er nal point t o a cir cle ar e equal. O and O', t ouch each ot her at X . OO' pr oduced
[TERM 2, 2012] meets t he cir cle with cent r e O' at A . AC is tangent
35. Pr ove t hat t he t angent at any point of a cir cle is t o t he cir cle wit h cent r e O, at t he point C. O'D is
per pendicular t o t he r adius t hr ough t he point of
DO'
cont act . per pendicular t o AC. Find t he value of
CO
[TERM 2, 2013]
36. I n fig., l and m ar e t wo par allel t angent s t o a
cir cle wit h cent r e O, t ouching t he cir cle at A and C
B r espect ively. Anot her t angent at C int er sect s D
t he line l at D and m at E . Pr ove t hat DOE = 90°
A
A
D
l O' X O

O [TERM 2, 2016]
C 41. I n Fi g., O i s t he cent r e of a ci r cl e of r adi us
5 cm. T is a point such t hat OT = 13 cm and OT
m int er sect s cir cle at E . I f AB is a t angent t o t he
B E cir cle at E , find t he lengt h of AB , wher e TP and
[TERM 2, 2013]
TQ ar e t wo t angent s t o t he cir cle.
37. I n Figur e 4, PQ is a chor d of lengt h 16 cm, of a
P
cir cle of r adius 10 cm. The t angent s at P and Q A
int er sect at a point T . Find t he lengt h of TP.
5
P E
O
13 T
5
T . B
R O Q
[TERM 2, 2016]

Q 42. Pr ove t hat t he lengt hs of t angent s dr awn fr om

an ext er nal point t o a cir cle ar e equal.
[TERM 2, 2014] [CBSE 2017]
CHAPTER 8 : Circles 8.129

 Solutions  R2 = 25

1. Consider t he given diagr am  R  25

 R=5
Diamet er = 2 × Radius
Ther efor e, t he r equir ed diamet er of t he cir cle is
A H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (c). [½]
3. P
12 cm
O T

Q
O 13 cm
B

H er e, in AOB , AOB = 100°, OA = OB = Radius

of t he cir cle We know t hat , t angent at a point is per pendicular
 AOB is an isosceles t r iangle. t o t he r adius t hr ough t hat point . Ther efor e, OP
 OBA = OAB = x is per pendicular t o PQ. [½]
I n AOB apply angle sum pr oper t y. I n r ight tr iangle OPQ, Using pythagor as theor em,
 AOB + OBA + OAB = 180° we have
 100° + x + x = 180° OQ2 = OP2 + PQ2
 100° + 2x = 180°  (13)2 = OP2 + (12)2
 2x = 180° – 100°  OP2 = 169 – 144
 2x = 80°  OP2 = 25
 x = 40°  OP = 5
 OBA = OAB = 40° [½] Ther efor e, t he lengt h of t he r adius of t he cir cle,
Clear ly OAT = 90° (as tangents ar e perpendicular OP is 5 cm.
t o t he r adius at t he point of cont act .) The cor r ect opt ion is (c). [½]
Fr om t he diagr am, 4. L et us suppose t hat t he t angent BC t ouches t he
OAT = OAB + BAT cir cle at point O.
 90° = 40° + BAT N ow, we k now t hat , t angent s dr awn fr om an
ext er ior point t o a cir cle ar e equal in lengt h.
 BAT = 90° – 40° = 50°
 BP = BO [Fr om ext er nal point B ]
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (c). [½]
CQ = CO [Fr om ext er nal point C]
2. L et r 1 and r 2 denot e t he r adii of t wo cir cles and R
be t he r adius of t he bigger cir cle. AP = AQ [Fr om ext er nal point A ]
 r 1 = 4 cm and r 1 = 3 cm Now, I n ABC, [½]
Accor ding t o t he quest ion, AB + BC + AC = 5 cm + 4 cm + 6 cm
Sum of t he ar eas of t wo smaller cir cles = Ar ea of  AB + (BO + CO) + AC = 15 cm
t he bigger cir cle  (AB + BP) + (CQ + AC) = 15 cm
[  BP = BO and CQ = CO]
 r12   r22   R2 [½]
 AP + AQ = 15 cm
Subst it ut ing t he values of r 1 and r 2 in t he above  2AP = 15 cm [  AP = AQ]
equat ion.
 AP = 7.5 cm
 (4)2 + (3)2 = R2
Ther efor e, lengt h of t he t angent AP is 7.5 cm.
 (4)2 + (3)2 = R2
The cor r ect answer is (a). [½]
 16 + 9 = R2
 R2 = 6 + 9
8.130 CHAPTER 8 : Circles

 AQ = AR = 18 cm
5.
 QB = AB – AQ = 29 – 18 = 11 cm (AB = 29 cm)
A And,
QB = BP = 11 cm
PBQ = 90° [Given]
C We know t hat , angle bet ween t he t angent and
P
t he r adius at t he point of cont act is a r ight angle.
Thus,
OPB = 90° and OQB = 90° [½]
B Now
I n quadr ilater al OPBQ,
PBQ + OPB + OQB + POQ = 360°
I t is given t hat AP  PB and r adius of t he cir cle is [Angle sum pr oper t y of a quadr ilat er al]
4 cm
 90° + 90° + 90° = POQ = 360°
Const r uct ion: Join CA and CB .
 270° + POQ = 360°
I t is known fact t hat t he t angent at any point of a
 POQ = 360° – 270°
cir cle is per pendicular t o t he r adius t hr ough t he
point of cont act .  POQ = 90°
 AC  AP and B C  PB H er e all sides of OPBQ ar e equal and all angles
ar e
 CAP = CBP = 90°
 OPBQ is a squar e.
Also,
 OQ = QB = BP = PO = r = 11 cm
I n quadr ilater al ACBP,
Thus t he r adius of t he cir cle is "11 cm"
CAP + APB + PBC + BCA = 360° [½]
H ence t he cor r ect answer is (a). [½]
(Angle sum pr oper t y)
7. The diagr am is r epr esent ed as follows:
 90° + 90° + 90° + BCA = 360°
 270° + BCA = 360°
 BCA = 360° – 270°
 BCA = 90°
P
And also,
AC = CB (Radius of t he cir cle) x y
H er e all sides of APBC ar e equal and all angles
ar e 90° x y
 APBC is a squar e. A T B
 AC = CB = BP = PA = 4 cm I n TAP
Thus t he lengt h of each t angent is "4 cm"
TA = TP (Tangent s fr om an ext er nal point ar e
H ence t he cor r ect answer is (b). [½] equal) [½]
6. H er e i t is given t hat AB , BC, CD and AD ar e So TAP = TPA = x (Cor r esponding angles ar e
t angent s t o t he cir cle wit h cent r e O and t ouch equal)
t he cir cle at Q, P, S and R r espect ively.
I n TBP
And also,
TB = TP (Tangent s fr om an ext er nal point ar e
BA = 29 cm, AD = 23 cm, B = 90° and DS = 5 cm equal)
We know t hat t he lengt hs of t he t angent s dr awn So TBP = TPB = y (Cor r esponding angles ar e
fr om an ext er nal point t o a cir cle ar e equal. equal)
DS = DR = 5 cm I n PAB , PAB + PBA + APB (Sum of angles
AR = AD – DR = 23 – 5 = 18 cm (AD = 23 cm) of a t r iangle)
CHAPTER 8 : Circles 8.131

 x + y + x + y = 180°
1
 2x + 2y = 180° Ar ea of ABC   5  12  30 cm 2
2
 2(x + y ) = 180°
Also, Ar ea of ABC = Ar ea TAB + Ar ea TBC +
180 Ar ea TCA
 x y
2
1 1 1
Ther efor e, APB = x + y = 90°  30   TR  AB   TQ  BC   TP  AC
2 2 2
The cor r ect answer is (d). [½]
8. I t is known t hat the lengt h of t he t angent s dr awn 1 1 1
 30   r  AB   r  BC   r  AC
fr om an ext er nal point t o a cir cle is equal. 2 2 2
QP = PT = 3.8 cm ....(i) (TP, TR and TQ ar e t he r adii of t he cir cle)
PR = PT = 3.8 cm ....(ii)
1
Fr om equat ions (i) and (ii), we get :  30   r  AB  BC  AC [½]
2
QP = PR = 3.8 cm
Subst it ut e t he value for t he lengt h of t he sides
N ow,
QR = QP + PR 1
 30   r  5  12  13
= 3.8 cm + 3.8 cm 2

= 7.6 cm 1
 30   r  30
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (b). [1] 2
9. Consi der t he t r i angl e ABC, r i ght angled at B
wher e AB = 5 cm and BC = 12 cm. 30  2
r   2 cm
30
T is t he cent r e of t he cir cle and TP, TR and TQ
ar e t he r adii of t he inscr ibed cir cle. The cor r ect answer is (c). [½]
A 10. Given: QPR = 46°
PQ and PR ar e t angent s.
Ther efor e, t he r adius dr awn t o t hese t angent s
will be per pendicular t o t he t angent s.
P
5 cm So, we have OQ  PQ and OR  RP.
OQP = ORP = 90°
R T
So, in quadr ilat er al PQOR, we have
OQP + QPR + PRO + ROQ = 360°
C (Angle sum pr oper t y)
B Q 12 cm  90° + 46° + 90° + ROQ = 360°
ABC is a r ight angle t r iangle wit h an inscr ibed
ROQ = 360° – 226° = 134°
cir cle cent er ed at T .
L et r be t he r adius of t he cir cle, so TQ = TR = TP H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (b). [1]

AB , BC and AC ar e t angent s t o t he cir cle at R, Q 11. The figur e r epr esent s t he cir cle of r adius 10 cm
and P. wit h t he chor d t hat subt ends r ight angle at t he
cent r e.
Using Pyt hagor as t heor em in ABC
AC2 = AB 2 + BC2
 AC2 = 52 + 122
 AC2 = 25 + 144
 AC2 = 169 X

 AC  169  13 cm 45° 45°

P Q
1 S
Ar ea of ABC=  AB  BC
2
8.132 CHAPTER 8 : Circles

Consider PXS Now we know t hat t he t angent at any point of a

XS cir cle is per pendicular t o t he r adius t hr ough t he
cos45  point of cont act .
PX
Ther efor e BAT = 90° [½]
XS
 cos45  I n ABT ,
10
ABT + BAT + BTA = 90° (Since t he sum of
1 XS
  all t he angles in a t r iangle is 180°)
2 10
 29  90  BTA  180
10
 XS   5 2 cm  BTA  180  119
2
Thus t he cor r ect answer is (a). [1]  BTA  61
12. H er e PA and PB ar e t he t wo t angent s. H ence, ATQ = 61° [½]
We k now t hat t he t angent s dr awn fr om t he
ext er nal point ar e equal. 14.
A
 PA = PB
The PAB is an isosceles t r iangle wit h PA = PB 50°
Ther efor e PAB = PBA
...(i) (Angles opposit e t o equal sides)
O. P

I n PAB ,
APB  PAB  PBA  180
B
 50  2PAB  180  Using (i)
2PAB  180  50 I t is given t hat PA and PB ar e t angent s t o t he
given cir cle.
130
 PAB   PAO = 90° (Radius is per pendicular t o t he
2
t angent at t he point of cont act .)
 PAB  65 ...  ii  [½] Also, PAB = 50°
Now we know t hat t he r adius is per pendicular t o  OAB = PAO – PAB = 90° – 50° = 40°
t he t angent at t he point of cont act . I n OAB , OB = OA (Radii of t he cir cle)
 OAB  PAB  90  OAB = OBA = 40° (Angles opposite to equal
sides ar e equal.)
 OAB  65  90  Using (ii)
Now, using t he angle sum pr oper t y of t r iangles,
 OAB  90  65 AOB + OAB + OBA = 180°
 OAB  25 AOB = 180° – 40° – 40° = 100°
H ence OAB = 25° [½] H ence, AOB = 100° [1]
13. I t is given t hat AOQ = 58°.
15.
1 A
T h er ef or e ABQ   AOQ (Si n ce an gl e
2
subt ended by an ar c at t he cent r e of t he cir cle is a
t wice t he angle subt ended by it at any point on 60°
t he r emaining par t of t he cir cle). O P

1
 ABQ   58 a
2
B
 ABQ  29
CHAPTER 8 : Circles 8.133

Along wit h cent er O, PA and PB ar e t wo t angent s Applying Pyt hagor as t heor em in ONA ,
dr awn t o t he cir cle OA 2 = ON 2 + NA 2
APB = 60° r 2 = (7)2 + (24)2
I n OPB and OPA r 2 = 49 + 576
The r adii of t he cir cle is equal (OB = OA = a) r 2 = 625
OBP = OAP = 90° .... A t poi n t of con t act
r  625  25
t angent s ar e per pendicular t o r adius
Ther efor e, t he r adius (r ) of t he bigger cir cle is
BP = PA ....Fr om an ext er nal point t o t he cir cle
25 cm. [1]
lengt hs of t angent s dr awn ar e equal
17. Let us suppose t hat t he cir cle touches the t r iangle
So, OPB OPA (SAS congr uence)
ABC, on si des AB , BC and AC at P, Q and R
 OPB = OPA = 30° (By CPCT) r espect ively.
I n OPB

OB A
sin 30 
OP

1 a
 
2 OP
 OP = 2a
Ther efor e, t he lengt h of OP = 2a [1] R
r
16. Given t hat t he r adius of t he smaller cir cle is 7 cm P
and t he r adius of t he bigger cir cle is r cm. O
L et A B , be t h e ch or d of t h e bi gger ci r cl e
w h i ch t ou ch es t h e sm al l er ci r cl e. H er e, B Q C
AB = 48 cm
Join OA and dr op a per pendicular fr om O on chor d
N ow, we k now t hat , t angent s dr awn fr om an
AB meet ing at point N .
ext er nal point t o a cir cle ar e equal in lengt h.
 AP = AR, BP = BQ and CQ = CR. BPOQ is a
squar e as ever y angle measur es 90°
We have, AR = AP
 AR = AB – BP

O = (8 – r )
Similar ly, CR = CQ
 CR = CB – BQ [1]
A B
N Now, AC = AR + CR = (8 – r + 6 – r ) = (14 – 2r )
By Pyt hagor as t heor em,
AC2 = AB 2 + BC2
We know t hat , per pendicular fr om t he cent r e of  (14 – 2 r )2 = 82 + 62
t he cir cle on a chor d bisect s t he chor d.  (14 – 2 r )2 = 102
 ON  AB and
 (14 – 2 r ) = 10
AB 48  2r =4
AN  NB    24 cm [1]
2 2  r =2
N ow, i n ON A , ON = 7 cm, OA = r cm and Ther efor e, t he r adius of t he cir cle is 2 cm. [1]
AN = 24 cm
8.134 CHAPTER 8 : Circles

18. L et M N be a diamet er of a given cir cle, PQ and To Pr ove: ABCD is a r hombus.

RS be t he t angent s dr awn t o t he cir cle at point s I n par allelogr am ABCD ,
M and N r espect ively.
AS = AP (t angent s dr awn t o a ci r cl e fr om an
P M Q ext er ior point )
BQ = BP (t angent s dr awn t o a ci r cl e fr om an
ext er ior point )
CQ = CR (t angent s dr awn t o a cir cle fr om an
O ext er ior point )
[1] DS = DR (t angent s dr awn t o a ci r cle fr om an
ext er ior point ) [1]
Thus,
R N S AS + BQ + CQ + DS = AP + BP + CR + DR
Since, we know t hat t he t angent at a a point t o a
(AS + DS) + (BQ + CQ) = (AP + BP) + (CR + DR)
cir cle is per pendicular t o t he r adius t hr ough t he
point of cont act .  AD + BC = AB + CD

 M N  PQ and M N  RS  AD  BC and AB  CD
 ÐPM N = 90° and M NS = 90° (Opposit e sides of par allelogr am)
 PM N = M NS  2BC = 2AB
Now, since PMN and MNS ar e pair of alternate  BC = AB
angles for t he pair of lines PQ and RS.  AB = BC = DC = AD
 PQ | | RS  ABCD is a r hombus.
H ence pr oved. [1] H ence pr oved. [1]
19. L engt hs of sides of t he t r iangle ar e given as I f 21. Tangents fr om an exter nal point to a cir cle is equal
AB = 12 cm, BC = 8 cm and AC = 10 cm in lengt h.
Assume AD = AF = p cm, BD = BE = q and  EA = EC and EB = ED
CE = CF = r cm (Tangents dr awn fr om an exter nal
Add t he t wo equat ions
point t o t he cir cle ar e equal) [1]
 EA + EB = EC + ED
2 (p + q + r ) = AB + BC + AC = 30 cm
 AB = CD
 (p + q + r ) = 15 cm
H ence pr oved. [2]
 AB = AD + DB = p + q = 12 cm
 r = CF = 15 – 12 = 3 cm 22. X B Y
 AC = AF + FC = p + r = 10 cm
 q = BE = 15 – 10 = 5 cm
 BC = BE + EC = q + r = 8 cm
A O
 p = AD = 15 – 8 = 7 cm
Thus AD = 7 cm, BE = 5 cm and CF = 3 cm [1]
20. L et ABCD is t he par allelogr am cir cumscr ibing a
cir cle wit h cent r e O. P C Q
D R C
L et XBY and PCQ be t wo par allel t angent s t o a
cir cle wit h cent r e O
Const r uct ion: Join OB and OC.
S Now, XB | | AO [1]
.O
XBO + AOB = 180° (sum of adjacent int er ior
Q
angles is 180°)
N ow,  XBO = 90 ° (A t an gen t t o a ci r cl e i s
per pendicular t o t he r adius t hr ough t he point of
A P B contact)
CHAPTER 8 : Circles 8.135

90° + AOB = 180° (Co-int er ior angles) We also know t hat t he t angent s dr awn t o a cir cle
AOB = 180° – 90° = 180° fr om an exter nal point are equally inclined joining
t he cent r e t o t hat point .
Similar ly, AOC = 90°
QPO = 60°
AOB + AOC = 90° + 90° = 180°
Now, in QPO
H ence, BOC is a st r aight line passing t hr ough O.
Thus, t he l i ne segment j oi ni ng t he poi nt s of PQ
cos 60o 
cont act of t wo par allel t angent s of a cir cle passes PO
t hr ough it s cent r e.
1 PQ
H ence pr oved. [1] 
2 PO
23. Con si der t h e i soscel es t r i angl e A BC wher e 2PQ = PO
AB = AC
H ence pr oved. [1]
C 25. Given OP = 2 r ,OTP = 90° (r adius dr awn at t he
point of cont act is per pendicular t o t he t angent )

OT r 1
Now, I n OTP, sin OPT   
OP 2r 2
E D  sin OPT = sin 30°
 OPT = 30°
Sum of angles of a t r iangle is equal t o 180°
Ther efor e, OPT + TOP + TPO = 180°
A B
F 90° + 30° + TOP = 180°
120° + TOP = 180°
Tangent s fr om an ext er nal point on t he cir cle ar e
equal in lengt h. TOP = 60° [1]
 BD = BF ...(i) [1] So, OTP is a r ight angled t r iangle
Also, CD = CE ... (ii) Similar ly, OSP is a r ight angled t r iangle and
Since AB = AC and AF = AE SOP = 60°
 BF = CE ...(iii) H ence, TOS = TOP + SOP = 60° + 60° = 120°
Using equat ions (i), (ii) and (iii) I n OTS, TOS + OTS + OST = 60°
BD = DC OTS + OST + 120° = 180°
H ence pr oved. [1] OTS + OST = 60°
24. L et us dr aw t he cir cle wit h ext ent point P and  OT = OS (Radii of t he same cir cle)
t wo t angent s PQ and PR.  OTS = OST = 30°
H ence pr oved. [1]
26. Two t angent s AP and BP ar e dr awn t o t he cir cle
wit h cent r e O fr om an ext er nal point P.
Q
60° Tangents dr awn fr om an ext er nal point to a cir cle
ar e equal in lengt h, so PA = PB
P O
N ow, i n  PA B, si des PA an d PB ar e of t h e
same length i.e. PAB is an isosceles tr iangle such
R
that
PA = PB amd PAB = PBA = x (L et suppose)
Given t hat APB = 60°, we can find PAB and
We know t hat t he r adius is per pendicular t o t he PBA .
t angent at t he point of cont act . We know t hat t he sum of angles of a t r iangle is
OQP = 90° [1] 180°. [1]
8.136 CHAPTER 8 : Circles

I n PAB , So,
PAB + PBA + APB = 180° Similar ly, CA = CQ = 3 cm
 x + x + 60° = 180° And DB = DQ = 3 cm
 2x = 120° Now, PC = PA – CA = 12 – 3 = 9 cm
 x = 60° And PD = PB – DB = 12 – 3 = 9 cm
Thus, PAB = PBA = 60°  PC + PD = 9 + 9 = 18 cm
Fr om t his we concl ude t hat i s an equi l at er al H ence, PC + PD = 18 cm [1]
t r iangle wit h AP = BP = AB
29.
Now we know t hat AP = 5 cm
P
 AB = AP = 5 cm [1]
H ence, t he lengt h of t he chor d AB is 5 cm.

27. A O T
A

C
O Q
D
Given: TP and TQ ar e t he t angent s dr awn t o
t he cir cle fr om t he point T out side t he cir cle of
cent r e O.
B To Pr ove: OT is t he r ight bisect or of line segment
PQ.
L et AB be chor d of cir cle wit h cent r e O. Pr oof: I n POT and QOT
L et AD and BD be t he t angent s at A and B . PT = QT (L engt hs of t he t angent s dr awn fr om an
OD meet s AB at C. ext er nal point t o a cir cle)
To Pr ove DAC = DBC OP = OQ (Radii of t he cir cle)
L ine segment joining t he cent r e t o exter nal point OT = OT (Common side)
bisect s t he angle bet ween t wo t angent s.
 POT  QOT (By SSS Rule)
DAC = DBC ....(i) [1]
 PTO = QTO (By CPCT Rule) ...(i) [1]
I n DCA and DCB
Suppose OT int er sect PQ at A .
DA = DB [Tangent s fr om an ext er nal point s ar e
Now in PTA and QTA
equal]
ADC = BDC [Fr om (i)] PT = QT (L engt hs of t he t angent s dr awn fr om an
ext er nal point t o a cir cle)
DC = DC [Common]
PTO = QTO (Using (i))
DCA  DCB [By SAS]
TA = TA (Common Side)
 DAC = DBC [By C.P.C.T]
 PTA QTA (By SAS Rule)
H ence pr oved. [1]
 PAT =QAT (By CPCT Rule)
28. Given: PA and PB ar e t angent s t o t he cir cle fr om
an ext er nal point P. And PA = QA (By CPCT Rule) ...(ii) [1]
CD is a t angent t ouching t he cir cle at Q Now PAT + QAT = 180° (L inear pair )
PA = 12 cm  2PAT = 180° ...(iii)
To find: PC + PD [1]  PAT = 90°
Fr om (ii) and (iii) it is pr oved t hat OT is t he r ight
We know t hat t he lengt hs of t angent s t o a cir cle
bisect or of line segment PQ.
fr om same point ar e equal.
H ence pr oved. [1]
CHAPTER 8 : Circles 8.137

30. On joining OP and OQ, we get OPR and OQR

A

x x

P F E

O
R 4 cm 3 cm
O
2 cm

Q B 4 cm D 3 cm C

Si nce l engt h of t he t angent s dr awn fr om an

ext er nal point s ar e equal,
 CD = CE = 3 cm and BD = BF = 4 cm
I n OPR and OQR And let AF = AE = x cm
OPR = OQR = 90° (Tangent is per pendicular Now t he ot her t wo sides ar e,
t o cir cle at point of cont act ) AB = (4 + x ) cm and AC = (3 + x ) cm [1]
OP = OQ (Radii of same cir cle) Now since ar ea of t r iangle ABC = ar ea of (AOB
OR is t he common side. + BOC + AOC)
By r ight hand side congr uency Ar ea of AOB =
OPR OQR 1 1
 base  height    4  x   2   4  x  cm 2
PR = RQ ....(i) [1] 2 2
Also, Ar ea of AOC =
ORQ + ORP = PRQ
1 1
PRQ = 120° (Given)  base  hei ght    3  x   2   3  x  cm 2
2 2
ORP + ORQ = 120°
Ar ea of BOC =
ORP + ORP = 120°
1 1
ORP = 60°  base  height    4  3  2  7cm 2
2 2
Also,
And as ar ea of BOC = 21 cm 2 [1]
Base Ther efor e
cos  [1]
H ypot enuse  21 = (4 + x ) + (3 + x ) + 7
I n OPR  21 = 14 + 2x
 2x = 7
PR
cos60   x = 3.5
OR
H ence t he side AB = 4 + x = 4 + 3.5 = 7.5 cm
1 PR AC = 3 + x = 3 + 3.5 = 6.5 cm

2 OR H ence t he lengt h of AB is 7.5 cm and t he lengt h
OR = 2PR of AC is 6.5 cm. [1]
OR = PR + PR 32. We know t hat , t angent s dr awn t o a cir cle fr om
an ext er nal point ar e equal in lengt h.
OR = PR + RQ (Fr om (i) PR = RQ)
 PL = PN , QL = QM and RM = RN
H ence pr oved. [1]
Now, let us suppose PL = x = PN
31. I t is given t hat r adius of t he cir cle is 2cm, ar ea of
 QL = 10 – x = QM
ABC = 21 cm 2 wher e BD = 4cm and CD = 3cm.
Now, since PN = x
Join OA , OB , and OC.
 RN = 12 – x = RM [1]
8.138 CHAPTER 8 : Circles

Now, QR = 8 cm 34. Gi ven: PQ and PR ar e t wo t angent s fr om an

 QM + M R = 8 ext er nal point P t o a cir cle wit h cent r e O.
 10 – x + 12 – x = 8 To pr ove: L engt hs of t he t angent s PQ and PR ar e
equal i.e., PR = PQ
 22 – 2x = 8
Const r uct ion: Join OP, OQ and OR.
 2x = 14
 x=7 [1]
Ther efor e, PL = x = 7 cm R
QM = 10 – x = 10 – 7 = 3 cm, and
RN = 12 – x = 12 – 7 = 5 cm
The lengt h of QM , PL and RN ar e 3 cm, 7 cm and
O P
5 cm [1]
33. Given: Two t angent s TP and TQ ar e dr awn t o a [1]
cir cle wit h cent r e O fr om an ext er nal point T .
To pr ove: PTQ = 2OPQ Q

P
Pr oof: I n or der t o pr ove t hat PR = PQ, we shall
fir st pr ove t hat ORP OQP.
Si n ce a t an gen t at an y poi n t of a ci r cl e i s
per pendicular t o t he r adius t hr ough t he point of
O T cont act .
 OR  PR and OQ  PQ.
 ORP = OQP = 90° ....(i) [1]
Q Now, in r ight t r iangles ORP and OQP, we have
OR = OQ [Radii of t he cir cle]
ORP = OQP [Fr om (i)]
Pr oof: TP = TQ (Tangents dr awn fr om an exter nal
And, OP = OP [Common] [1]
point t o a cir cle ar e equal in lengt h) [1]
So, by RH S-cr it er ion of congr uence, we get
 I n TPQ
ORP OQP
TPQ = TQP (Angles opposit e t o equal sides of
a tr iangle)  PR = PQ [CPCT]
PTQ + TPQ + TQP = 180° H ence pr oved. [1]
PTQ + TPQ + TPQ = 180° 35. I n a cir cle C(O, r ) and a t angent l t ouches t he
cir cle at point A .
PTQ + 2TPQ = 180°
Const r uct ion: Consider a point B on l , ot her t han
180  PTQ A , on t he t angent l . Join OB . L et OB int er sect
TPQ  ....(i) [1] t he cir cle in C.
2
Also, TPO = 90° (Tangent at any point of a cir cle
is per pendicular t o t he r adius)
OPQ + TPQ = 90°

180  PTQ O
OPQ   90 (Using (i))
2
2OPQ + 180° – PTQ = 180° [1]
2OPQ = PTQ C
l
H ence pr oved. [1] A B
CHAPTER 8 : Circles 8.139

To pr ove: OA  l And AOB is a diamet er of t he cir cle which is a

Pr oof: Among all line segment s joining t he point st r aight line and t he angle on a st r aight line is a
O t o a point on l, t he per pendicular is shor t est str aight angle (180°).
to l.  DOA + COD + COE + EOB = 180° [1]
OA = OC (Radius of t he cir cle) Fr om (i) and (ii),
Now, OB = OC + BC 2COD + 2COE = 180°
 OB > OC  COD + COE = 90°
 OB > OA  DOE = 90°
 OA > OB [1] H ence pr oved. [1]
As B is any point on t he t angent l , OA is shor t er 37. I t is given t hat OP = 10 cm and PQ = 16 cm
than any other line segment joining O to any point Since OR is a per pendicular bisect or of t he chor d
on l . so PR = RQ = 8 cm
Ther efor e, OA  l as smallest line is per pendicular I n ORP, apply Pyt hagor as t heor em [1]
t o r adius. [1]
OP = OR + RP
2 2 2

So, t h e t an gen t at an y poi n t of a ci r cl e i s

OR2 = OP2 – RP2
per pendicular t o t he r adius t hr ough t he point of
cont act . OR  102  82
H ence pr oved. [1]
OR  100  64
36. l and m ar e t wo t angent s t o t he cir cle wit h cent r e
O par allel t o each ot her and t ouching t he cir cle OR  36  6 cm [1]
at A and B r espect ively. DE is anot her t angent at
t he point C, which int er sect s l at D and m at E . Apply Pyt hagor as t heor em in r ight angled PRT
To pr ove: DOE = 90° PT 2 = PR2 + RT 2
Const r uct ion: Join OC. Apply Pyt hagor as t heor em in r ight angled OPT
OT 2 = OP2 + PT 2
A D Subst it ut e the value of PT 2 in t he above equat ion
l OT 2 = OP2 + PR2 + RT 2
(OR + RT )2 = OP2 + PR2 + RT 2
Use (a + b)2 = a2 + 2ab + b2
O OR2 + 2.OR . RT + RT 2 = OP2 + PR2 + RT 2 [1]
C [1] OR2 + 2.OR . RT = OP2 + PR2
62 + 2 . 6 . RT = 102 + 82
B E
m 36 + 12RT = 100 + 64
12RT = 100 + 64 – 36
Pr oof: 12RT = 128
Taking ODA and ODC, 128
OA = OC (Radii of t he same cir cle) RT   10.67 cm
12
AD = DC Apply Pyt hagor as t heor em in r ight angled PRT
(Length of tangents dr awn fr om an exter nal point PT 2 = PR2 + RT 2
t o t he cir cle ar e equal in lengt h)
PT 2 = 82 + (10.67)2
DO = OD (Common side) [1]
PT 2 = 64 + 113.849
ODA ODC (SSS congr uence pr oper t y)
 DOA = COD ....(i) (C.P.C.T.) PT  177.849  13.336 cm
Similar ly,OEB OEC L engt h of t he t angent PT is 13.36 cm. [1]
Ther efor e, EOB = COE ....(i)
8.140 CHAPTER 8 : Circles

L et XY be t he t angent at t he mid-point of t he
38. S R ar c A . [1]
T be t he point of cont act .
O
AB be t he chor d.
30° D is t he mid-point of AB .
P
Q Const r uct ion: Join OA , OB , OT wher e O is t he
cent er of t he cir cle. [1]
As it is given t hat PR and PQ ar e t angents dr awn
fr om point P t o t he same cir cle. OTY = 90°
Ther efor e we can say t hat , ODB = 90°
PR = PQ Since, t angent s dr awn fr om an ext er nal H ence, t he cor r esponding angles ar e equal.
point t o a cir cle ar e equal in lengt h. [1] AB is par allel t o XY .
Now since PR = PQ, t his implies, H ence pr oved. [1]
PRQ = PQR [Angles opposit e t o equal sides in 40. AO' = O'X = XO = OC
a t r iangle ar e equal] ...(i)
(Since t he t wo cir cles ar e equal)
N ow usi ng angle sum pr oper t y of t r i angl e, i n
PQR So, OA = AO' + O'X + XO
PQR + PRQ + RPQ = 180° H ence, OA = 3O' A [1]
Using equat ion (i) and as given RPQ = 30° [1] I n AO'D and AOC,
2PQR + 30° = 180° DAO' = CAO (Common angle)
2PQR = 150° O'D is per pendicular t o AC [1]
PQR = 75° ADO' = ACO (The tangents dr awn at any point
Now by using alt er nat e segment t heor em, of a cir cle is per pendicular t o t he r adius t hr ough
RQP = RSQ = 75° ...(ii), [1] t he point of cont act )
And since RS | | PQ, ADO' – ACO (By AA t est of similar it y)
Ther efor e by using alt er nat e angles pr oper t y,
DO' O' A
RQP = SRQ = 75 ...(iii) 
CO OA
N ow usi ng angle sum pr oper t y of t r i angl e, i n
SQR
SRQ + RSQ + SQR = 180° O' A 1

'
 [1]
3O A 3
Using equat ion (ii) and (iii),
75° + 75° + SQR = 180°
150° + SQR = 180°
DO' 1
H ence,  [1]
CO 3
SQR = 30°
H ence t he r equir ed answer is RQS = 30° [1] 41. Fr om t he given figur e,
TP = TQ Si nce, t wo t angent s dr awn fr om an
X T Y
39. [1] ext er nal point is equal.
Also,
TQO = TPO = 90° Since, t angent dr awn t o a
A cir cle is at r ight angle t o t he r adius.
B
I n TOQ,
QT 2 + OQ2 = OT 2
 QT 2 = 132 – 52 = 144

O
CHAPTER 8 : Circles 8.141

 QT = 12 cm [1] 42. L et us consider t he following diagr am.

So, Q
OT – OE = ET
 13 – 5 = 8 cm
OE  AB Since, t angent dr awn t o a cir cle is at O
r ight angle t o t he r adius. [1] P

L et BQ = x cm
 QB = EB = x cm Since, t wo t angent s dr awn [1]
fr om an ext er nal point is equal. T
And, OEB = 90° Since, tangent dr awn t o a cir cle Given: A cir cle having t wo t angent s PQ and PT ,
is at r ight angle t o t he r adius. dr awn fr om an ext er nal point P.
Consider BET , To pr ove: PQ = PT
BE 2 + TE 2 = TB 2 Const r uct ion: Join PO, OQ and OT .
 x 2 + 82 = (12 – x )2 [1] Pr oof: I n POQ and POT [1]
 x 2 + 64 = x 2 – 24x + 144 OQ = OT [Radii of t he cir cle]
 24x = 80 PQO = PTO = 90°  The t angent s dr awn at
any point of a cir cle is per pendicular to the r adius
80 10
x  t hr ough t he point of cont act .
24 3
OP = OP [Common] [1]
10  POQ  POT [RHS congruence cr iter ion]
So, AB  2 x  2 
3 Al so, PQ = PT  Cor r espondi ng par t s of t he
congr uent t r iangles ar e equal.
20
AB  cm [1] H ence pr oved. [1]
3
8.142 CHAPTER 8 : Circles
CHAPTER 9

Constructions
Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams
Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Construction of Triangle 3 marks 3 marks 4 marks 4 marks
Tangent to Circle 4 marks 4 marks
Division of Line Segment 2 marks
9.144 CHAPTER 9 : Constructions

[TOPIC 1] Construction of a Line Segment

Summary 1. Dr aw any r ay AX , making an acut e angle wit h AB .

2. L ocat e 5 point s A 1, A 2, A 3, A 4 and A 5 on AX so t hat
AA 1 = A 1A 2 = A 2A 3 = A 3A 4 = A 4A 5.
Division of a Line Segment in a given
3. Join BA 5.
Ratio
4. Thr ough t he point A 3, dr aw a line par allel t o A 5B
I n t his chapt er we shall st udy some const r uct ions by (by making an angle equal t o AA 5B ) int er sect ing
using t he knowledge of t he ear lier const r uct ions done AB at t he point C
in pr evious class. Then, AC : CB = 3 : 2
Solved Examples (Three Marks Each) Just ifi cat ion:
Since A 3C is par allel t o A 5B , t her efor e,
Illustration 1 AA3 AC
 (By Basic pr opor t ionalit y t heor em)
Quest ion: A3 A5 CB
To divide a line segment in a given r at io 3 : 2. By const r uct ion,
Sol ut i on: AA3 3
 .
Given a line segment AB , we want t o divide it in t he A3 A5 2
r at io 3 : 2. Ther efor e,
St eps of const r uct ion:
AC 3
 .
A C B CB 2
This shows t hat C divides AB in t he r at io 3 : 2
A1
A2
A3
A4
X
A5

PREVIOUS YEARS’ St ep 2: M ake 9 point s, A 1, A 2, A 3, A 4, ...., A 9 on AQ

such t hat AA 1 = A 1A 2 = A 2A 3 = A 3A 4 ........ A 8A 9
St ep 3: Join BA 9. [½]
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS Step 4: Thr ough the point , dr aw a line par allel t o
TOPIC 1 BA 9 by making an angle equal t o AA 9B at A 4
int er sect ing AB at point P.
2 Marks Question P is t he point dividing line segment AB in t he
1. Dr aw a line segment of lengt h 8cm and divide it r at io of 4 : 5.
inter nally in the r atio 4 : 5.
8 cm
[TERM 2, 2017] A P B

 Solutions A1
A2
A3
1. The st eps t o divide a line segment of lengt h 8cm A4
A5 [1]
in t he r at io of 4 : 5 ar e as follows: A6
A7 Q
St ep 1: Dr aw a line segment AB of 8cm and dr aw A8
A9
a r ay fr om A making an acut e angle wit h line
segment AB . [½]
CHAPTER 9 : Constructions 9.145

[TOPIC 2] Construction of a Tangent to a Circle

from a Point Outside it.
Summary St eps of const r uct ion:
1. Join t he cent r e O of t he cir cle t o t he given ext er nal
point i.e., P.
Construction of Tangents From a 2. Dr aw  bisect or of OP, int er sect ing OP at O.
Point Outside the Circle 3. Taking O as cent r e and OO = PO as r adius, dr aw
WH EN CEN TRE I S GI VEN a cir cle t o int er sect t he given cir cle at T and T .

When point of tangency is on the circle. 4. Join PT and PT  t o get t he r equir ed t angent s as
PT and PT .
WH EN CEN TRE I S N OT GI VEN
When point of tangency is on the circle.
O
R
Q

X P Y

Given : A cir cle wit h cent r e O.

Required : To dr aw a t angent fr om point P on t he
ci r cle. P X

St eps of const r uct ion: Given : A cir cle and a point P on it .

1. Take a point O on t he plane of t he paper and dr aw Required : To dr aw a tangent at P without using centr e
a cir cle of given r adius. of t he cir cle.
2. Take a point P on t he cir cle. St eps of const r uct ion:
3. Join OP. 1. Dr aw any chor d PQ of t he cir cle t hr ough P as in
4. Const r uct OPX = 90. figur e.

5. Pr oduce XP to Y to get XPY as the r equir ed tangent. 2. Take any point R on t he major ar c PQ and join PR
and QR.
When point of tangency is outside the circle
3. Const r uct QPX equal t o PRQ.
T Then PX is t he r equir ed t angent at P t o t he cir cle.
When point of tangency is out side t he circle.

P O O D T

T A
C P B
Given : A cir cle wit h cent r e O.
T
Required : To dr aw a t angent fr om an ext er nal point
D
i.e., P.
9.146 CHAPTER 9 : Constructions

Given : A cir cle and a point P out side it . 3. Pr oduce AP t o a point C such t hat AP = PC.
Required : To dr aw a t angent fr om point P wit hout 4. Dr aw a semi-cir cle wit h BC as diamet er.
using t he cent r e. 5. Dr aw PD  CB , i n t er sect i n g t h e sem i -ci r cl e
St eps of const r uct ion: at D .
1. L et P be t h e ext er n al poi n t f r om wh er e t h e 6. Wit h P as cent r e and PD as r adius dr aw ar cs t o
t angent s ar e t o be dr awn t o t he given cir cle. int er sect t he given cir cle at T and T .
2. Thr ough P dr aw a secant PAB to inter sect the cir cle 7. Joint PT and PT . PT and PT  ar e t he r equir ed
at A and B . tangents.

PREVIOUS YEARS’
ABC. Thus, ABC is cr eat ed. [½]
St ep 2: Bisect BC and name t he midpoint of BC
as E. So, t he cent er of cir cle is E. [½]
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS St ep 3: Join point s A and E. Bisect AE and name
t he midpoint of AE is M . [½]
TOPIC 2 St ep 4: Wit h M as cent r e and M E as r adius, dr aw
a cir cle. [½]
3 Marks Question
St ep 5: L et it int er sect given cir cle at B and P.
1. Dr aw a r ight t r iangle ABC in which AB = 6 cm,
BC = 8 cm and B = 90°. Dr aw BD per pendicular St ep 6: Join AP and AB.
fr om B on AC and dr aw a cir cle passing t hr ough H er e, AB and AP ar e t he r equir ed t angent s t o
t he point s B , C and D . Const r uct t angent s fr om A t he cir cle fr om A.
t o t his cir cle.
C
[TERM 2, 2014]

4 Marks Questions P

2. Dr aw a ci r cle of r adi us 4 cm. Dr aw t wo t angent s

E
t o the cir cle inclined at an angle of t o each other. D
[TERM 2, 2016] [1]
M
3. Dr aw t wo concent r ic cir cles of r adii 3 cm and
B A
5 cm. Const r uct a t angent t o smaller ci r cl e fr om
a poi nt on t he l ar ger ci r cl e. Al so measur e i t s
lengt h. 2. St eps of const r uct ion:
[TERM 2, 2016] (i) Take a point O on t he plane of t he paper and
dr aw a ci r cl e of r adi us
 Solutions
(ii) Pr oduce OA t o B such t hat OA = AB = 4 cm
1. Follow t he given st eps t o const r uct t he figur e.
[½]
St ep 1:Dr aw a line AB = 6 cm segment fr om point (iii)Dr aw a cir cle wit h cent er at A and r adius AB.
B, dr aw a r ay making an angle of 90° wit h AB.
(iv) Suppose i t cut s t he cir cle dr awn in st ep (i ) at
Now wit h B as cent er and r adius 8 cm dr aw an
P and Q. [½]
ar c cut t ing t he r ay at point C. Join AC, t o for m
CHAPTER 9 : Constructions 9.147

(v) Join BP and BQ t o get t he r equi r ed t angent s. 3. The st eps t o dr aw t angent s on t he given cir cle
ar e:
P
St ep 1: Dr aw a cir cle wit h r adius 3 cm and cent r e
60° O. [½]

°
30
30° 60° 60° St ep 2: Dr aw an ot h er ci r cl e of r adi u s an d
B O
30° A
cent r e O. L ocat e a poi nt P on t hi s ci r cl e and
join OP. [½]
[1]
Q St ep 3: Bisect OP and let M be t he midpoint of
OP. [½]
Just ificat ion:
Step 4: Now taking M as centr e and MO as r adius,
I n OAP, OA = OP = 4 cm dr aw a cir cle. L et it int er sect t he cir cles at point s
(r adii of t he same cir cl e) Q and R as given in t he diagr am. [½]
Al so, AP = 4 cm St ep 5: Join PQ and PR which is t he r equir ed
(r adii of t he ci r cl e wit h cent r e A) tangents. [½]

So, OAP isequil at er al. [½]

PAO = 60° And t her efor e, BAP = 120°
I n BAP, we have BA = AP and BAP = 120°
[½] Q O
o
ABP  APB  30 M
Si mi lar ly we can get
[1]
ABQ = 30° R
P
H ence, PBQ = 60° [1]
Aft er const r uct ion, it can be obser ved t hat PQ
and PR each measur e 4cm. [½]
9.148 CHAPTER 9 : Constructions

[TOPIC 3] Construction of a triangle Similar to a

given Triangle
Summary St eps of const r uct ion

Some Constructions of Triangles D

1. Rules of Congruency of Two Triangles Y

(i) SAS : Two t r iangles ar e congr uent , if any t wo A

sides and the included angle of one tr iangle ar e
equal t o any t wo sides and t he included angle
of t he ot her t r iangle. B C

(ii) SSS : Two t r iangles ar e congr uent if t he t hr ee 1. Draw the base BC and at the point B make an angle,
sides of one t r iangle ar e equal to t he t hr ee sides say XBC equal t o t he given angle.
of t he ot her t r iangle. 2. Cut a line segment BD equal t o AB + AC fr om t he
(iii)ASA : Two t r iangles ar e congr uent if any t wo r ay BX.

angles and t he included side of one tr iangle ar e 3. Join DC and make an angle DCY equal t o BDC.
equal to t he t wo angles and t he included side of 4. L et CY int er sect BX at A (see fig.)
t he ot her t r iangle. Then, ABC is t he r equir ed t r iangle.
(iv) RH S : Two r ight t r iangles ar e congr uent if t he N ote : The const r uct ion of t he t r iangle is not possible
hypot enuse and a si de of one t r i angl e ar e if t he sum AB + AC BC.
r espect ively equal to the hypot enuse and a side Statement 2 : To const r uct a t r iangle given it s base,
of t he ot her t r iangle. a base angle and t he differ ence of t he ot her t wo sides.
2. U niqueness of a Triangle Given : The base BC, a base angle, say Z B and t he
differ ence of ot her t wo sides AB – AC or AC – AB.
A t r iangle is unique if
Require : Const r uct t he t r iangle ABC.
(i) t wo sides and t he included angle is given
Case (i) : L et AB > AC t hat is AB – AC is given.
(ii) t hr ee sides and angle is given
St eps of Const ruct ion :
(iii)t wo angles and t he included side is given and,
(iv) in a r ight t r iangle, hypot enuse and one side is X
A
given.
N ote : At least t hr ee par t s of a t r iangle have t o be
given for const r uct ing it but not all combinat ions of P
D
t hr ee par t s ar e sufficient for t he pur pose.

Basic Constructions of Triangles: B C

Q
Statement 1 : To const r uct a t r iangle, given it s base,
a base angle and sum of ot her t wo sides. 1. Dr aw t he base BC and at point B make an angle
say XBC equal t o t he given angle.
Given : Base BC, a base angle, say B and t he sum
AB + AC of t he ot her t wo sides of a t r iangle ABC 2. Cut t he line segment BD equal t o AB – AC fr om
r ay BX.
Required : To const r uct a ABC.
CHAPTER 9 : Constructions 9.149

3. Join DC and dr aw t he per pendicular bisect or, say Required : Const r uct t he t r iangle ABC.
PQ of DC. St eps of Const ruct ion :
4. L et it int er sect BX at a point A. Join AC (see fig.) 1. Dr aw a line segment , say XY equal t o BC + CA –
I hen ABC is t he r equir ed t r iangle. FAB.
Case (ii) : L et AB < AC t hat is AC – AB is given. 2. M ake angle L XY equal t o B and M YX equal t o
St eps of Const ruct ion : C.
3. Bi sect  L XY and M YX. L et t hese bi sect or s
X
int er sect at a point A. (see fig. (i))
L M
A
A
P
B C

X Y
D
Fig (i)
Q
4. Dr aw per pendicular bisect or s PQ of AX and RS of
1. Dr aw t he base BC and at B make an angle XBC AY.
equal t o t he given angle. 5. L et PQ int er sect XY at B and RS int er sect XY at C.
2. Cut t he line segment BD equal t o AC – AB fr om join AB and AC. (see fig. (ii))
t he l i ne BX ext ended on opposi t e si de of l i ne
segment BC. L M

3. Join DC and dr aw t he per pendicular bisect or, say P A R

PQ of DC.
4. L et PQ int er seel BX at A. Join AC (see fig.) Then,
ABC is t he r equir ed t r iangle. B C
St at ement 3 : To const r uct a t r i angl e, gi ven i t s
X Q S Y
per imet er and it s t wo base angles.
Given : The base angles, say B and C and BC + CA Fig (ii)
+ AB. Then ABC is t he r equir ed t r iangle.

PREVIOUS YEARS’
2. Dr aw a tr iangle ABC wit h BC = 7 cm, B = 45°
and C = 60°. Then constr uct another tr iangle,
3
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS whose sides ar e
5
times the cor r esponding sides

of ABC.
TOPIC 3
[TERM 2, 2012]
3 Marks Questions 3. Const r uct a t r iangle wit h sides 5 cm, 4 cm and
1. Dr aw a t r i angl e AB C i n wh i ch A B = 5 cm, 6 cm. Then constr uct another triangle whose sides
BC = 6 cm and ABC = 60°. Then const r uct a 2
ar e t i mes t he cor r espondi ng si des of fi r st
5 3
t r i an gl e w h ose si des ar e t i m es t h e t r iangle.
7
cor r esponding sides of ABC. [TERM 2, 2013]
[TERM 2, 2011]
9.150 CHAPTER 9 : Constructions

4. Const r uct a t r iangle wit h sides 5 cm, 5.5 cm and (2) M ar k 7 points B 1, B 2, B 3, B 4, B 5, B 6, B 7 at equal
6.5 cm. Now const r uct anot her t r iangle, whose dist ance fr om each ot her on BX such t hat

3 BB1  B1B2  B2B3  B3B4  B4 B5  B5B6  B6B7

sides ar e t imes t he cor r esponding sides of t he
5
(3) Join the point C and B 7 and dr aw B 5C' par allel
given t r iangle. t o B 7 C.
[TERM 2, 2014] (4) Dr aw C'A' par allel t o CA . [1]
4 Marks Questions H ence A'B'C is t he r equir ed t r iangle as shown
bel ow.
5. Const r uct a t r i angl e ABC wi t h, BC = 7 cm,
B = 60° and AB = 6. Const r uct anot her t r iangle A

3 A’
whose sides ar e t imes t he cor r esponding sides
4
of ABC.
[TERM 2, 2015] B
C’ C
6. Const r uct a ABC in which AB = 6cm, A = 30° B1
B2
B3
and B = 60°. Const r uct anot her AB'C' similar B4
B5 [1]
t o ABC wit h base AB' = 8 cm. B6
B7 X
[TERM 2, 2015]
2. I n or der t o const r uct t he given t r iangle, follow
7. Const r uct a t r iangle ABC wit h side BC = 7 cm, t he following st eps:
B = 45°, A = 105°. Then const r uct anot her
St ep 1 : Dr aw BC = 7 cm. [½]
t r iangle whose sides ar e t imes t he cor r esponding
sides of t he ABC. St ep 2 : At B , const r uct B = 45° and at C,
const r uct C = 60°. They int er sect each ot her at
[TERM 2, 2017]
A . Thus, ABC is const r uct ed.
8. Constr uct an isosceles tr iangle with base 8cm and
St ep 3: Const r uct an acut e angle CBZ at B on
alt it ude 4 cm.
opposit e side of ver t ex A of ABC [½]
2 St ep 4: Along BZ, mar k off 5 point s B 1, B 2, B 3, B 4,
Const r uct anot her t r iangle whose sides ar e
3 B 5 such t hat
t imes t he cor r esponding si des of t he i sosceles BB1  B1 B2  B2 B3  B3 B4  B4 B5 .
t r iangle.
St ep 5: Join B 5C [½]
[TERM 2, 2017]
St ep 6: Since we have t o const r uct a t r iangle
 Solutions 3
each of whose sides is of t he cor r esponding
1. St eps of const r uct ion for t r iangle ABC: 5
(1) Dr aw a line segment BC = 6 cm sides of ABC. So, t ake t hr ee par t s out of five
(2) Fr om point B , dr aw a r ay making an angle of equal par t s on BZ i.e., fr om B 3, dr aw B 3C'| | B 5C,
60° wit h BC. meet ing BC BC at C'. [½]

(3) Now wit h B as cent er and r adius 5 cm dr aw St ep 7: Fr om C', dr aw C'A'| | CA , meet ing BA at
an ar c cut t ing t he r ay at point A . A'. Thus, A'BC' is t he r equir ed t r iangle, each of
(4) Join AC, t o for m ABC. [1] 3
whose sides ar e of t he cor r esponding sides of
Now st eps of const r uct ion for similar t r iangle, 5
(1) Draw a r ay BX making an acute angle opposite ABC as shown below [½]
t o ver t ex A .
CHAPTER 9 : Constructions 9.151

4. St ep 1: Const r uct a t r i angl e PQR such t hat

QR = 5.5 cm. Consider ing Q as cent er, mar k an
ar c of lengt h 5 cm and consider ing R as cent er,
mar k an ar c of l engt h 6.5 cm. The poi nt of
int er sect ion of ar cs is called P. [½]
45° 60° St ep 2: Dr aw a line QM such t hat it makes an
B acut e angle wit h QR. [½]
St ep 3: Dr aw 5 point s Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Q5 on
[½] equal dist ance fr om each ot her on QM and t hen
Z
join t he fift h mar k t o point R. [½]
3. Following ar e the steps of constr ucting a r equir ed St ep 4: Dr aw a line Q3R' par allel t o Q5R fr om Q3
t r iangle. [½]
St ep1: Dr aw a line segment AB = 4 cm and t hen
P
dr aw an ar c of r adius 5 cm consider ing A as a
cent er.
St ep 2: Dr aw an ar c of r adius 6 cm consider ing B P’
as cent er. [½]
St ep 3: Name t he point wher e bot h t he ar cs fr om
st ep 1 and st ep 2 int er sect as C. R’
R
Q
St ep 4: Join BC and AC. ABC is for med. Q1
St ep 5: Dr aw a r ay AY which for ms an acut e angle Q2
Q3
wit h AB on t he opposit e side of t he ver t ex C [½] Q4
St ep 6: L ocat e t hr ee point s A 1, A 2, and A 3 on lines Q5

AY such t hat AA 1 = A 1A 2 = A 2A 3. [½] M [½]

St ep 7: Join B and A 3. St ep 5: Dr aw a line R'P' par allel t o RP
St ep 8: Dr aw a line segment fr om point A 2 and
P
par allel t o BA 3 which int er sect s AB at point B'.
St ep 9: Dr aw a line segment fr om B' and par allel
t o BC which int er sect s AC at t he point C'. [½] P’
Thus, r equir ed t r iangle AB'C' whose sides ar e

2
t imes t he cor r esponding sides of fir st t r iangle R’
3 Q
R

(ABC) has been const r uct ed. Q1

Q2
C
Q3
Q4
C’ Q5
6 cm [½]
5 cm M

St ep 6: P'QR' is t he r equir ed t r iangle.

B
5. St eps of const r uct ion for t r iangle ABC:
A B’
(1) Dr aw a line segment BC = 7 cm [½]
A1
A2 (2) Fr om point B, dr aw a r ay making an angle of
A3 60° wit h BC. [½]
y (3) Now wit h B as cent er and r adius 6 cm dr aw
4 cm [1] an ar c cut t ing t he r ay at point A. [½]
9.152 CHAPTER 9 : Constructions

(4) Join AC, t o for m ABC. [½] C’

Now st eps of const r uct ion for similar t r iangle, C

(1) Draw a r ay BX making an acute angle opposite

t o ver t ex A. [½] 30° 60° B’
(2) M ar k 4 point s B 1, B 2, B 3, B 4 at equal dist ance A
B
fr om each ot her on BX. A1
(3) Join t he point C and B 4 and dr aw par allel t o A2

B 4C'. [½] A3
A4 X [1]
(4) Dr aw C'A' par allel t o CA.
H ence A'BC' is t he r equir ed t r iangle. 7. Given below ar e t he st eps of const r uct ion
(1) St ar t wit h dr awing BC = 7 cm
A
(2) At point C, const r uct [½]


BCY  180  105  45  30  an d at B,

const r uct CBX  45

60°
(3) The point of int er sect ion of CY and BX gives
B
A. So, is obt ained. [½]
(4) Dr aw r ay BZ making an acut e angle wit h BC
[1]
on opposit e side t o ver t ex A. [½]
X
(5) I dent ify 4 point s B1 , B2, B3 and B4 on BZ such
6. The r at io of t he sides and
t hat BB1 =B1B 2 =B 2 B 3 =B 3 B 4 [½]
8 4
H ence, t he r at io of t o AB' is AB   . [½] (6) Join t he point B 4C and dr aw line t hr ough B 3
6 3
par allel t o B 4C t o int er sect BC at C [½]
St eps of Const r uct ion:
(7) Dr aw line t hr ough C' par allel t o line CA t o
St ep 1: Dr aw t he line segment AB = 6 cm and int er sect BA at A'.
make an angle of 30° wit h A as cent r e and make
Now we have t he r equir ed A'BC'. [½]
anot her angle of 60° wit h B as cent r e. M ar k t he
point of int er sect ion as C. [1]
St ep 2: Wit h A as cent r e, make any acut e angle X
BAX. [½] Y
A
St ep 3: Now cut t he 4 ar cs A 1, A 2, A 3, A 4 of any A’
r adius on line AX such t hat

AA1  AA2  A2 A3  A3 A4 . 45° 30°

B C’ C
St ep 4: Join point B t o t he t hir d ar c A 3. [½]
B1
St ep 5: Dr aw a line fr om A 4 which is par allel t o
B2
A 3B cut t ing AB at point B'.
St ep 6: Now dr aw a line fr om B' par allel t o BC B3

which cut s AC at C'. [½] B4 [1]

Now we have t he r equir ed ABC'C'. Z
CHAPTER 9 : Constructions 9.153

8. The st eps of const r uct ions ar e as below: Tr iangle A'BC' is t he r equir ed t r iangle as shown
St ep 1: Dr aw a line segment BC = 8 cm bel ow. [½]
St ep 2: Dr aw a per pendicular bisect or of BC as P
PQ, int er sect ing BC at D. [½]
St ep 3: Taking D as cent r e, dr aw an ar c of 4cm,
A
cut t ing PQ at A. [½]
A’
St ep 4: Join AB and AC. [½]
St ep 5: Dr aw a r ay BX making an acut e angle
D C’
wit h line segment BC. [½] B C
8 cm
B1
St ep 6: M ake 3 point s, B1 , B2 , B3 , on BC such
B2
t hat BB1  B1 B2  B2 B3 and so on. B3

St ep 7: Join CB 3. [½]
X
Step 8: Thr ough the point , dr aw a line par allel t o Q [1]
meet ing BC at C'.
Step 9: Thr ough the point , dr aw a line par allel t o
AC meet ing AB at A'[½]
9.154 CHAPTER 9 : Constructions
CHAPTER 10
Introduction to
Trigonometry
Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams
Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Question based on Trignometric Values 1 mark 1 mark 4 marks
Question based on Trignometric Identities 1,3,4 marks 1,3,4 marks
10.156 CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry

[TOPIC 1] Trigonometric Ratios

Summary POWER OF T-RATI OS
We wr it e (sin )2 = sin 2 ; (sin )3 = sin 3 ; (cos )3 =
Trigonometry cos3 et c.
QU OTI EN T RELATI ON OF T-RATI OS
TRI GON OM ETRY: I t is t hat br anch of mat hemat ics,
Theorem 1: For any acute angle , prove that
which deals wit h t he measur ement of angles and t he
pr oblems r elat ed wit h angles. (i) t an  = sin 
TRI GON OM ET RI C RAT I OS (T-RATI OS) cos 
R cos 
(ii) cot  =
sin 
z
y SQU ARE RELATI ON
 Theorem 2: For any acute angle , prove that
P x Q (i) sin 2  + cos2 = 1;
L et RPQ =  be t he given angle of a r ight -angled
(ii) 1 + t an 2 = sec2 ;
PQR.
(iii)1 + cot 2 = cosec2 .
I n r ight -angled PQR, let base = PQ = x unit s,
Per pen di cu l ar = QR = y u n i t s an d h ypot en u se  The value of sin  increases from 0 to 1 as the
= PR = z unit s. angle  increases from 0º to 90.
Tr igonomet r ic r at ios for  ar e defined as below:  The value of cos  decreases from 1 to 0 as the
angle  increases from 0º to 90.
perpendicular y
(i) sine  =  , and is wr itten as sin . VA L U E S O F AL L T H E T RI G O N O M E T R I C
hypot enuse z
RATI OS OF 0, 30, 45, 60 AN D 90.
base x
(ii) cosine  =  , and is wr itten as cos .  0 30 45 60 90
hypot enuse z
perpendicul ar y 1 1 3
(iii)t angent  =  , and is wr it t en as sin  0 1
base x 2 2 2
t an .
3 1 1
hypot enuse z cos  1 0
(iv) cosecant  =  , and is wr it t en as 2 2 2
perpendicular y
cosec . 1
t an  0 1 3 n. d.
hypot enuse z 3
(v) secant  =  , and is wr itten as sec .
base x 2
base x cosec n. d. 2 2 1
(vi) cot angent  =  , and is wr it t en 3
perpendicular y
as cot . 2
sec  1 2 2 n. d.
RECI PROCAL REL AT I ON 3
We have 1
cot  n. d. 3 1 0
1 3
(i) cosec  =
sin  I f A and B ar e t wo complement ar y acute angles, i.e., A
1 + B = 90º, t hen we have
(ii) sec  =
cos sin A = sin (90 – B) = cos B
1
(iii)cot  = cos A = cos (90 – B) = sin B
t an 
t an A = t an (90 – B) = cot B
 The value of each of the trigonometric ratios
of an angle does not depend on the size of the cosec A = cosec (90 – B) = sec B
triangle. I t only depends on the angle. sec A = sec (90 – B) = cosec B
cot A =cot (90 – B) = t an B
CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry 10.157

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 5. Gi ven t hat sin  

a
b
, t hen t an  i s equal t o:

b b
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS (a) (b)
a2  b2 b2  a2
TOPIC 1 a a
(c) (d)
1 Mark Questions a2  b2 b2  a2
1. I n figur e below, t he value of sec x is [TERM 2, 2012]
6. The value of si n 2 30° – cos2 30° + t an 2 45° i s:
A  D
1 3
(a) (b)
2 2
4 cm 12 cm 1
(c) (d) 0
2
B 3 cm C [TERM 2, 2013]
7. The value of cot 10° cot 15° cot 75° cot 80° is equal
13 5
(a) (b) t o:
12 12
(a) 0 (b) 2
12 12 (c) 1 (d) cannot be deter mined
(c) (d)
5 13
[TERM 2, 2013]
[TERM 2, 2011]
8. I f =45°, t hen fi nd t he val ue of 2cosec2 +3 sec2 .
2. I n figur e, AB = 4cm and BC = 3cm, then cot 
[TERM 2, 2014]
equals:
9. Fi nd t he val ue of cos  + sec , when it i s given
A 1
t hat cos 
 2
[TERM 2, 2014]
4 cm
10. I f 24 cot A = 7, find t he val ue of sin A .
[TERM 2, 2015]

C 3 cm B 11. Expr ess cosec 48° + t an 88° in t er ms of t -r at io of

Figure I I angle 00 and 45°
[TERM 2, 2016]
3 5
(a) (b) 12. I f t an 2A = cot(A + 60°), find t he value of A , wher e
4 4
2A is an acut e angle.
4 3
(c) (d) [TERM 2, 2017]
3 5
[TERM 2, 2011] 1
13. I f sin   , then find the value of 3 sin a – 4 sin 3 a.
2
1
3. The maximum value of is [TERM 2, 2017]
cos ec
14. Given 3 t an 5  1 , find t he value of .
(a) 1
[TERM 2, 2015]
(b) – 1
(c) 0 2 Marks Questions
(d) Can't be det er mined 15. I f A , B and C ar e int er ior angles of ABC, t hen
show t hat
[TERM 2, 2011]
4. 3 sin 20° – 2 t an 45° + 3 sin 70° is equal t o:
2 2 2  A  B  C
t an    cot
(a) 0 (b) 1  2 2
(c) 2 (d) – 1 [TERM 2, 2011]

[TERM 2, 2012]
10.158 CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry

16. I f 25. Evaluate:

3sin  cos  0 and 0° <  < 90°, find t he
value of .
t an 2 30.sin 30  cos60.sin 2 90.
[TERM 2, 2012]
17. Take A = 60 and B = 30. Wr it e t he value of cosA, t an 2 60  2 t an 45.cos2 0.sin 90
cosB and cos(A + B). I s cos(A + B) = cosA + cosB? [TERM 2, 2015]
[TERM 2, 2016] 26. Find Tr igonometric r atios of 30O & 45O in all values
18. Find cosec 30° & cos 60° geomet r ically. of T.R.
[TERM 2, 2017] [TERM 2, 2017]

1  Solutions
19. sin (A + B) = 1 & sin (A – B) ,
2 1. ABC is a r ight angled t r iangle, t her efor e, using
Pyt hagor as Theor em,
0  A  B  90 & A  B , t hen find A & B .
[TERM 2, 2017] AC  AB 2  BC 2
3 Marks Questions  AC  4 2  32
20. I n fig, PQR is, r ight angled at Q, QR = 6 cm,
QPR = 60°. Find t he lengt h of PQ and PR.  AC  16  9  5 cm ....(i)
P Si m i l ar l y,  ACD i s a r i gh t an gl ed t r i angl e,
60° t her efor e, using Pyt hagor as Theor em,

AD  AC 2  CD 2

Q R  AD  52  122 (Using value of AC fr om (i))

6 cm
[TERM 2, 2011]  AD  25  144  13cm [½]

3 cosec  cot  Using values of AC and AD , we have

21. I f sin   , evaluat e
5 2 cot 
[TERM 2, 2014] 13 cm
A D

22. I f 3 t an A = 4 t hen pr ove t hat :
sec A  CosecA 1 5 cm
(i)  4 cm 12 cm
sec A  CosecA 3
1  sin A 1 B C
(ii)  3 cm
1  CosA 2 2
[TERM 2, 2016]
Base CD 12
cos = = =
4 Mark Questions Hypot enuse A D 13
1
23. I f t an  A  B   3 , t an  A  B   , Now, sec  
1 13
3 
cos  12
0  A  B  90, A  B , find A and B. H ence, cor r ect opt ion is (a). [½]
[TERM 2, 2011]
2. I t is given t hat AB = 4cm and BC = 3cm
24. Evaluate:
Side opposit e t o  BC 3
cot  90    sin  90     cot 40 t an    
 Side adjacent t o  AC 4
si n  t an 50
 cos 20  cos2 70
2 1 4
  cot   
t an  3
[TERM 2, 2012]
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (c). [1]
CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry 10.159

3. We know 2
 1
6. sin 2 30 o   
1  2
 sin 
cosec 2
2  3
o
The maximum value of sin  is 1 and the minimum cos 30   
value of sin  is – 1. H ence, t he maximum value  2 
2
1 t an 2 450  1 [½]
of is 1.
cosec Put t ing t he values in t he given quest ion
The cor r ect opt ion is (a). [1]
 si n 2 30 o  cos2 30 o  t an 2 450
2 2
4. 3sin 20  2 t an 45  3sin 70 2 (Given) 1 3
  1
2 2 2 (1) 4 4
 3(sin 20  sin 70)  2 tan 45
2
We know t hat , sin 70° = sin(90 – 20)° = cos 20°  1
and t an 45° = 1 4
Subst itut ing t hese values in equat ion (1), we get , 42

4
 3(sin 2 20  cos2 20)  2 2 1
 
Also, by an ident it y sin 2 20° + cos2 20° = 1 4 2
321 H ence t he cor r ect opt ion is (c). [½]
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (b). [1] 7. cot 10 o cot 15 o cot 75 o cot 80 o
5. We have, o o
 cot  90  80 cot 80 o cot  90  75 cot 75o
a
si n 
b  t an 80 o.cot 80 o. t an 75 o.cot 75 o
=1×1
B
=1
H ence t he cor r ect opt ion i s (c). [1]
b 8. I f  = 45° t hen,
a
 2 cosec2   3sec2   2 cosec2 45  3sec2 45
2 2
 2  2 3  2  2232
A C
46
AB a
sin   (Given)  10
BC b H ence t he value of 2cosec2  + 3sec2  = 10 [1]
By Pyt hagor as t heor em, we k now,
1
BC 2  AB 2  AC 2 9. Si nce, cos 
2
 b2  a2  AC 2 1 1
 sec   2
2 2 2 cos 1
 AC  b  a
2
 AC  b2  a2 [½] H ence,
Using t r i gonomet r i c r at ios, 1 14 5
cos  sec  2  [1]
AB 2 2 2
t an  
AC 10. C
a
t an   c
b  a2 2 b
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (d). [½]
A B
a
10.160 CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry

24 cot A = 7
3  1
  4 
7 2  8
 cot A 
24
3 1
 
Base 2 2
cot A 
Perpendicular =1 [1]
 a = 7 and b = 24 14. (Given)
3 t an 5  1
Using t he Pyt hagor as t heor em we get ,
c2 = a2 + b2 1
 t an 5 
2 2 3
 c2   7   24 
1
 c2  49  576  625 [½] We k now t hat t an 30 
3
 c = 25
 5  30
Per pendi cular
We k now t hat sin A  30
hypotenuse    6
5
24 H ence, t he val ue of  i s 6°. [1]
 sin A  [½]
25 15. The sum of all t he int er ior angles of a t r iangl e is
11. cos ec 48  t an 88 180°.
So,
Using t he i dent i t y
 A  B  C  180
cos ec  sec  90    and tan   cot  90    ,
 A  B  180  C
we get
Di vi de bot h t he si des by 2,
cos ec 48  t an 88  sec  90  48   cot  90  88 
A   B C
 90  ....(i) [1]
Thus cos ec 48  t an 88  sec42  t an 2 [1] 2 2
Appl yi ng t an t o bot h t he sides of t he equat i on
12. Gi ven t an 2A  cot(A  60 )
 A   B   C 
t an   t an  90 

 t an 2A  cot A  60   2

  
2 
As we k now t an2A = cot (90° – 2A) Also
t an(90° – ) = cot °
  
 cot 90  2A  cot A  60  [½]
On equat i ng t he angl es  A   B  C
 t an    cot
 2 2
 90  2A  A  60
H ence pr oved. [1]
 3A  30 16. We have,
Di vi de t he above equat ion by 3,
3sin  cos  0
 A  10 Di vi ding above equat i on by 2, we get ,
H ence, t he val ue of A is 10 [½]
 3  1
13. I t i s given t hat sin  
1
,  2  sin    2  cos  0 (1) [½]
 
2
So, subst it ut i ng value of sin a,
3  1
Si nce, cos30  and sin 30  , using t his
 1  1
3 2 2
3sin   4 sin 3   3    4   in equat i on 1, we get ,
 2  2
CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry 10.161

cos(30 )sin( )  sin(30 ) cos( )  0 (2) [½] I n, PQS

We know that, sin(A – B ) = sin A cosB – cosA sin B , hypot enuse PQ

cosec30  
using t hi s in equat i on 2 perpendicular QS

 sin(  30)  sin(n ) 2a

 cosec30  2
a
   30  n
base QS
And, cos60  
   n  30 hypot enuse PQ
 a 1
   n   cos60  
6 2a 2
1
The val ue of  i s n  

[1] H ence, cosec 30o = 2 and cos60  . [1]
6 2
17. H er e, I t is given t hat A = 60 and B = 30 19. Gi ven Si n (A + B ) = 1
1  sin(A+B)  sin 90  sin 90  1
 cos A  cos 60 =
2  A  B  90 ......(i )
3
and cos B  cos 30 = 1
2 Al so sin(A  B) 
2
1 3
 cos A  cos B  cos 60  cos 30 =   1
2 2  sin(A  B)  sin 30  sin 30   [1]
2
1 3
 (i) [1]  A  B  30 ......(ii )
2
And Adding Eqn. (i) and (ii)
cos  A+B  =cos  60+30  cos 90 = 0 (ii)  2A  120
Fr om (i) and (i i) Di vi de above equat ion by 2,
1 3  A  60
cos A  ,cos B  , cos  A  B   0
2 2 Subst it ut ing val ue of A i n Eqn. (i), we have
and cos  A+B   cosA + cosB [1]  B  30
18. P H ence, A = 60° and B = 30°. [1]
20. I n PQR,
30° 3
The val ue of sin 60  ,
2a 2
2a So,
QR 3
  [1]
PR 2
60°
Subst i t ut e QR = 6 cm, we get
Q a S a R 6 3
M ake an equilat er al t r i angle PQR  
PR 2
P  Q  R  60 12
 PR  cm
Dr aw a per pendicular PS fr om P t o t he side QR 3
A s, a per p en di cu l ar bi sect or d i v i des t h e 12  3
equilat er al t r iangle int o two congr uent t r iangles,   4 3 cm [1]
3 3
So,  PQS  PRS (by RHS congr uency cr it er ion) I n r ight angl ed PQR,
 QS  RS (CPCT)
PR2  PQ2  QR2
H er e lengt h of each side i s 2a
2
 QS  RS  a [1] 
 4 3   PQ2  62
10.162 CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry

cosec2 A = 1 + cot 2 A
 48  PQ2  36
9 25
 PQ2  12 cosec2 A  1   ( Using(i))
16 16
 PQ  12  4  3  2 3cm
Taki ng squar e r oot ,
H ence, PQ  2 3cm and PR  4 3cm . [1]
5
3 cosecA 
21. sin   (Given) 4
5
(i ) Tak ing L H S
cos2  = 1 – si n 2  [1]
9 16 sec A  CosecA
cos2   1  
25 25 sec A  CosecA
4 5 5
cos  
5 3 4

4 5 5

cos 5 4 3 4
cot    
sin  3 3
5 5
12
1 5 
35
cosec   [1]
sin  3 12
N ow subst i t ut i ng t hese val ues i n t he gi ven
equat i on, 5 1 1
   [1]
5 4 35 7 7

cosec  cot  3 3 H ence, L H S=RH S

2cot  4
2 1  sin A 1
3 (ii) 
1  cosA 2 2
5 4

1 3 1
 3 3    sin A 
1

4
4 3 8 8 cosecA 5
2
3 And,
cosec  cot  1
H ence,  [1] 1 3
2cot  8 cos A  
secA 5
22. 3 t an A = 4
Taki ng L H S,
4 1
 t an A  and cot A  1  sin A
3 t an A
1  cosA
3
 cot A  ....(i)
4
4
1
16 5
 t an 2 A  
9 3
1
And also, 5
sec2 A = 1 + t an 2 A
1
16 25
sec2 A  1   [1]  5
9 9 8
Taki ng squar e r oot , 5
5
secA  1 1
3  
8 2 2
And,
H ence, L H S=RH S. [1]
CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry 10.163

23. I t i s given t hat t an  A  B   3


 1  1  cos2 20  1  sin 2 70
  [1]
We k now t hat t an 60  3
 2  cos2 20  1  sin 2 70
 
 A  B  60 ....(I ) [1]
2
t an  A  B  
1  2   cos 20  1  sin 2 (90  20 ) 
3
2
 2   cos 20  1  cos2 20) 
1
We k now t hat t an 30 
3 2– 1
 A  B  30 ....(I I ) [1] 1
Add equat ions (I ) and (I I ), H ence, t he sol ut ion i s 1. [1]

 A  B  A  B  60  30 25. t an 2 30.sin 30  cos60.sin 2 90.

 2 A  90 [1] t an 2 60  2 t an 45.cos2 0.sin 90
Di vi ding bot h si des by 2,
2
 A  45  1  1 1 2 2 2

 3 
   1  
2 2
 3  2  1   1  1
Subst it ut ing t he value of A in (I ).
[2]
 45  B  60
 B  60  45  15 1 1 1
   1 3 2 [1]
H ence, A = 45° and B = 15°. [1] 3 2 2
24. We have, 1 3
  2
6 2
cot  90    sin  90   

 cot 40   cos2 20 
sin  t an 50   cos2 70 
1
[1]
3
We k now,
26. Foll owi ng t abl e shows all t r igonomet r i c r at ios of
sin  90     cos ,cos  90     sin ,
30 & 45 i n al l val ues of T.R.
t an  90     cot 
 30 45
cos  90    sin  90     cot 40 1 1
  sin  [1]
sin  90    si n  t an 50 2 2
[1]
 cos2 20  cos2 70
  3 1
cos [1]
2 2
cos  90     cot 40  cos2 20  cos2 70 1
 t an 50  
  t an  1 [½]
sin  3
cot  3 1 [½]
sin  tan(90  40 )
   cos2 20  cos2 70
  [1] 2
sin  tan 50 sec 2 [½]
3
t an 50 cosec 2 2 [½]
1
t an 50

 cos2 20  1  sin 2 70  
10.164 CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry

[TOPIC 2] Trigonometric Identities

Summary
Trigonometric Identities
An equat ion involving tr igonomet r ic r at ios of an angle is called a t r igonomet r ic ident it y, if it is t r ue for all values
of t he angle(s) involved.
Following ar e t he t hr ee t r igonomet r ic ident it ies which ar e used t o solve t he basic t r igonomet r ic equat ions.
(i) sin 2 + cos2 = 1;
(ii) 1 + t an 2 = sec2 ;
(iii)1 + cot 2 = cose2 .

PREVIOUS YEARS’  1  t an A 
7. 
 1  cot A 
2
2
  t an A ; A is acut e

EXAMINATION QUESTIONS [TERM 2, 2014]

sin 4   cos4 
TOPIC 2 8. Pr ove the following identity:
1  2sin 2  cos2 
1

1 Mark Questions [TERM 2, 2015]

1. 4 t an A – 4 sec A is equal t o:
2 2
3 Marks Questions
(a) – 1 (b) – 4
2 1  cos
(c) 0 (d) 4 9. Pr ove t hat  cosec  cot   .
1  cos
[TERM 2, 2011] [TERM 2, 2011]
2. [(sec A + t an A ) (1 – sin A )] on simplificat ion gives
1  secA si n 2 A
(a) t an 2 A (b) sec2 A 10. Pr ove t hat : 
secA 1  cosA
(c) cos A (d) sin A
[TERM 2, 2012]
[TERM 2, 2011]
3. Evaluat e: sin 2 A + cos2 A + cot 2 A (1  t an 2 A) cot A
11. Pr ove t hat :  t an A
[TERM 2, 2015] cos ec2 A
4. Find t he value of (sec  – 1) . cot 
2 2
[TERM 2, 2012]
[TERM 2, 2016]
1
12. I f t an    2, find t h e v al u e of
2 Marks Questions t an 
1
5. I f 3 t an   3sin  , fi nd t he v al u e of t an 2  
t an 2 
sin 2   cos2  .
[TERM 2, 2013]
[TERM 2, 2011]
13. Pr ove t hat :
1
6. I f sin – cos  , t h en f i n d t h e v al u e of sin   cos sin   cos 2
2  
2
sin   cos sin   cos 2sin   1
sin  + cos .
[TERM 2, 2012] [TERM 2, 2013]
CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry 10.165

14. Pr ove t hat : (1 + cos – cosec).(1 + t an  + sec)=2

 Solutions
[TERM 2, 2014]
1. We know t hat
15. Pr ove t he ident it y:
1  tan 2 A  sec2 A or
1 1 1 1
   ....(i)
cosec  cot  si n  sin  cosec  cot  tan 2 A  sec2 A  1
[TERM 2, 2016] The given equat ion is 4 t an 2 A – 4 sec2 A
16. Pr ove t hat : By t aking 4 as a common

sin   cos  1 1  4(tan 2 A  sec2 A)

 Using equat ion (i),
sin   cos  1 sec  t an 
[TERM 2, 2017]  4tan 2 A  4 sec2 A  4(1)  4
17. I f A , B , C ar e int er ior angles of a ABC, t hen H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (b). [1]

 B  C A 1 si n A
Show t hat : sin    cos 2. Using sec A  and t an A  in given
2 2 cos A cos A
[TERM 2, 2017]
expr ession, we get
 1 sin A  
4 Marks Questions   
 sec A  t an A 1  sin A      cos A cos A  
18. Pr ove t he following ident it y:
1  sin A  
(sin   sec  )2  (cos   cosec ) 2  (1  sec cosec ) 2
Apply (a + b) (a – b) = a2 – b2 wher e a = 1 and
[TERM 2, 2011] b = sin A
19. Pr ove t hat
1  sin 2 A
 [(sec A  tan A)(1  sin A)]  ...(i) [½]
1 1 1 1 cos A
  
sec  t an  cos cos sec  t an  Also,
[TERM 2, 2011] 1  si n 2 A  cos2 A ....(ii)
Subst it ut e equat ion (ii) in equat ion (i),
sec  t an   1 cos
20. Pr ove t hat :  cos2 A
t an   sec  1 1  sin   [(sec A  t an A)(1  sin A)]   cos A
[TERM 2, 2012] cos A
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (c). [½]
cos sin 
21. Pr ove t hat :    cos  sin   3. sin 2 A  cos2 A  cot 2 A (Given)
1  t an  1  cot  2 2
We know t hat sin A  cos A  1
[TERM 2, 2012]
22. I f 1 + si n 2  = 3 si n  cos , t hen show t hat  sin 2 A  cos2 A  cot 2 A  1  cot 2 A

1  cosec2 A Since 1+cot 2 A  cosec2 A

 
t an   1 or
2
H ence, sin 2 A  cos2 A  cot 2 A  cosec2 A [1]
[TERM 2, 2013]
2 2
23. Pr ove t he following ident it y:  
4. sec θ - 1 . cot θ

2 2 Using t he ident it y sec2 - 1  t an 2 , we get

 1  t an A   1  t an A  2
      t an A 2 2 2 2
1  cot A  1  cot A  sec  - 1 . cot  = t an . cot  [½]
[TERM 2, 2015]
sin 2θ cos2θ
24. I f cos  sin   2 cos , show t hat = . =1
cos2θ sin 2θ
cos  sin   2 sin  .  sin  cos 
[TERM 2, 2015]
 As t an  = cos and cot  = sin  
 
2 2
 
Thus sec  - 1 . cot  = 1 [½]
10.166 CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry

5. 3 t an   3sin  (Given) 3 3
 sin  + cos  1  
sin  4 2
Put t ing t an   in given equat ion,
cos 7
 sin  + cos  [1]
2
sin 
3  3sin  2
cos  1  t an A  2
7. To pr ove    t an A ,
On solving,  1  cot A 
Using t he left hand side of t he equat ion,
1
 cos  2
3  1  t an A 
 1  cot A 
Squar ing bot h t he sides,  
sinA
1 Since, t anA  [½]
cos2   ....(i) [½] cosA
3
2
Using t he Tr igonomet r ic ident it y,  sinA 
 1  cosA 

sin 2   1  cos2  ....(ii) 
 1  cosA 
On Subst it ut e t he value of cos2 fr om equat ion  sinA 
(ii) in (i), 2
 cosA  sinA 
1 2  cosA 
sin 2   1   ....(iii) [½]   [½]
3 3  sinA  cosA 
On put t ing t he value of sin 2 and cos2  sinA 
2
2 1 1  cosA  sinA sinA 
sin 2   cos2       
3 3 3  sinA  cosA cosA 
1 2
H ence, t he value of sin 2 – cos2 is . [1]  sinA  2
3     t an A
 cosA 
6. I t is given t hat ,
Since L H S = RH S,
1 2
si n   cos    1  t an A  2
2 H ence pr oved,    t an A [1]
On squar ing bot h t he sides,  1  cot A 
1 sin 4   cos4 
 sin   cos 2  [½] 8. 1
4 1  2sin 2  cos2 
1 Taking t he L H S and using t he ident it y sin 2A +
sin 2   cos2   2sin  cos  cos2A = 1 we have,
4
Since, sin 2 + cos2 = 1
sin 4   cos4 
1 
1  2sin  cos  1  2sin 2  cos2 
4
1 3 sin 4   cos4 
2sin  cos  1   [1]
4 4 sin 2   cos2   sin 2  cos2   sin 2  cos2 
3
sin  cos  ....(i) [½] sin 4   cos4 
8 
sin  + cos (Given) sin 2  1  cos2   cos2  1  sin 2 
   
2
 sin  + cos  sin   cos   4sin  cos  Since 1  cos2   sin 2  
 
 sin  + cos  1  2sin  cos  4 
3  and 1  si n 2 =cos2 
8
sin 4   cos4 
(Using equat ion 1) 
sin 4   cos4 
3 3 =1
 sin  + cos  1  2  4
8 8 H ence pr oved. [1]
CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry 10.167

9. Pr oceedi n g w i t h t h e l ef t h an d si de of t h e 11. Using t he left hand side of t he equat ion

1
gi ven equat i on and usi ng cosec  and (1  t an 2 A) cot A
sin  
cos cos ec2 A
cot   , We know 1 + t an 2 A = sec2 A [1]
sin 
2 (sec2 A) cot A
2  1 cos 
 cosec  cot   
 sin  si n   cos ec2 A
1
1  cos 2 (cot A)
  cosec  cot 
2
 [1] cos2 A
sin 2  1 [1]
Apply sin  = 1 – cos 
2 2 2
sin A

  cosec  cot  
2 1  cos 1  cos  sin 2 A
2  (cot A)  t an 2 A  cot A
1  cos  cos2 A

  cosec  cot  
2 1  cos 1  cos   t an 2 A 
1
1  cos 1  cos  t an A
(As a2 – b2 = (a – b) (a + b)) [1] 1
 t an 2 A   t anA
t an A
2 1  cos
  cosec  cot   , Which is same as H ence, pr oved. [1]
1  cos
t he Right hand side. 1
12. t an    2 (Given)
H ence pr oved. [1] t an 
10. Using t he L eft hand side of t he equat ion Squar ing bot h sides we get ,
2
1  secA  1 
  t an    2 [1]
secA t an  
1 1
Put t ing sec A  t an 2   cot 2   2 t an  2
cos A t an 
1  1 
1   cot   [1]
cos A t an  
1 [1]
t an 2  + cot 2  + 2 = 2
cos A
t an 2  + cot 2  = 0
cos A  1 The value of t an 2  + cot 2  = 0 [1]
13. Using t he left hand side of t he equat ion,
= cos A
1
cos A  sin   cos 2   sin   cos 2
 [½]
= cos A + 1 [1] sin 2   cos2 
Using t he Right hand side of t he equat ion
sin 2   cos2   2sin  cos  sin 2   cos2 
sin 2 A 2sin  cos
 
1  cosA 2
  cos2 
We know sin2 A = 1 – cos2 A
sin 
[2]
1  cos2 A
 11
1  cosA  2
sin   1  sin 2 
2  sin   cos2   1

(cos A  1)(1  cos A)
 
1  cos A 2

 1  cos A 2
2sin   1
H ence, pr oved. [1] H ence Pr oved. [½]
10.168 CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry

14. To pr ove: Put t ing, 1 = cosec2  – cot 2 

1  cot   cosec  . 1  tan   sec   2 2

cosec   cot   2
cosec  [1]
Solving t he left hand side of t he equat ion cosec  cot 
1  cot   cosec  .1  t an   sec 
cosec 
 cosec  cot   cosec  cot  
 cos 1   sin  1  cosec  cot 
 1    . 1   
 sin  sin    cos cos  = cosec  – (cosec  + cot )
– cot 
 sin   cos  1   cos  si n   1 
  .   [1] Thus L H S = RH S. [1]
 sin  cos
16. Taking L H S,
2
  sin   cos   12  sin   cos  1
 
 sin   cos  sin   cos  1
Dividi ng bot h numer at or and denomi nat or by
 sin 2   cos2   2sin   cos  1  cos, we get
  [1]
 sin   cos  sin  cos 1
 
 cos  cos  cos 
 1  2sin   cos  1  sin  cos 1
   
 sin   cos cos cos cos

 2sin   cos  t an   1  sec

  [1]
 sin   cos  t an   1  sec
2
(t an   sec )  1
Since L H S = RH S, [1] 
(t an   sec )  1
H ence pr oved.
M ult iplying bot h numer ator and denominat or by
15. Taking L H S,
(t an  – sec )
1 1
 {(t an   sec )  1} (t an   sec )
cosec  cot  sin  
{(t an   sec )  1} (t an   sec )
Using t he ident it y,
cosec2  – cot 2  = 1 2
  sec2    t an   sec 
Put t ing 1 = cosec  – cot 
2 2
 t an  [1]
 t an   sec  1 t an   sec 
cosec2  cot 2  1
 [As a2 – b2 = (a + b) (a – b)]
cosec  cot  sin 
 1  t an   sec 
 cosec  cot   cosec  cot    cosec 
 t an   sec  1 t an   sec 
 cosec  cot  
(cosec  – cot ) – cosec  [ tan 2   sec2   1]
– cot  [1]
1
Taking RH S, 
t an   sec
1 1
 1
sin  cosec  cot  
sec  t an 
1 H ence, L H S = RH S, Pr oved [1]
cosec 
cosec  cot 
CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry 10.169

17. I n ABC,
 (sin   sec )2  (cos  cosec )2  1
A 1  sin 2   cos2  
  2 
cos2  sin 2   sin  cos 

 (sin   sec )2  (cos  cosec )2  1

 1 
B C [1]  sec2  cos ec2  2 
 sin  cos  [1]
Sum of int er ior angles of t r iangles = 180° (Angle
sum pr oper t y of t r iangle)  (sin   sec )2  (cos  cosec )2  1
A + B + C = 180°  sec2  cos ec2  2cos ec sec
 B + C = 180° – A
Dividing bot h t he sides by 2  (sin   sec )2  (cos  cosec )2
2
B+C 180  A  1  sec cos ec 
 
2 2 H ence pr oved. [1]
19. Solving left hand side of t he equat ion,
B+C A
  90  ....(i ) [1]
2 2 1 sin 
Using, sec  and t an  
Now t aking L .H .S of t he given expr ession, cos cos

 B  C 1 1 1 1
sin    
 2  sec  t an  cos 1 sin  cos

cos cos
 A A 1 1 cos 1
 sin  90    cos   sin 90    cos 
    
 2  2  
sec  t an  cos 1  sin  cos
= R.H .S [1]
cos2   (1  sin  )
1 1  [1]
18. We know, sec  and cosec  cos 1  sin  
cos sin 
Apply cos2  = 1 – sin 2 
Subst it ut ing in t he left hand side,
2
1  sin 2   (1  sin  ) sin   sin 2 
 1   
(sin   sec)2  (cos  cosec)2   sin   
cos 1  sin   cos 1  sin  
 cos 
1 1 sin  1  sin  
2    t an  ....(i)
 1  sec  t an  cos cos 1  si n  
  cos  
 si n   [1]
Using (a + b) = a + 2ab + b
2 2 2
[1] Solving r ight hand side of t he equat ion,
2sin  1 sin 
(sin   sec)2  (cos  cosec)2  sin 2   Use sec  and t an  
cos cos cos
1 2cos 1
  cos2    1 1 1 1
2 sin  sin 2    
cos  cos sec  t an  cos 1 sin 

cos cos
(sin   sec )2  (cos  cosec )2 
1 cos
cos2   sin 2 
 sin  cos   
cos 1  sin 
1  2 
2 2
cos  sin   cos sin  
1  sin   cos2 
(Also, sin 2 + cos2 = 1) [1]  [1]
cos 1  sin  
10.170 CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry

Apply cos2  = 1 – sin 2 

sin  cos
We know, t an   and cot  
2 cos sin 


1  sin   1  sin   sin   sin 2 
cos 1  sin   cos (1  sin  ) cos2  sin 2 
  [1]
cos  sin  sin   cos
sin  (1  sin  )
  t an  ....(ii)
cos (1  sin  ) cos2  sin 2 
 
Using equat ion (i) and (ii), cos  sin  cos  sin 

1 1 1 1 cos2   sin 2 
   [1]  [1]
sec  t an  cos cos sec  t an  cos  sin 
20. Taking L H S of t he equat ion
 cos  sin   cos  sin  
t an   sec  1 
 cos  sin 
t an   sec  1
{ a2  b2  (a  b)(a  b) }
t an   sec  1
 [1]  cos  sin  = Right hand side of t he equat ion
t an   sec  (sec2   t an 2  )
H ence, pr oved. [1]
(Using, sec2  – t an 2  = 1)
22. 1 + sin 2  = 3 sin  cos  (Given)
t an   sec  1 On dividing bot h sides by cos2 ,

 (sec   t an  )  (sec  t an  )(sec  t an  )
1 sin ² 3sin  cos
using, a2 – b2 = (a – b) (a + b)  
cos² cos ² cos ²
[1]
sec2  + t an 2  = 3 t an  [1]
Taking (sec  – tan ) common fr om denominat or,
1 + t an 2  + t an 2  = 3 t an 
we get ,
1 + 2 t an 2  = 3 t an 
t an   sec  1 2 t an 2  – 3 t an  + 1 = 0

(sec  t an  )( 1  sec  t an  ) 2 t an 2  – 2 t an  – t an  + 1 = 0 [1]
On cancelling t he like t er ms, 2 t an  (t an  – 1) – 1 (t an  – 1) = 0
1 (t an  – 1) (2 t an  – 1) = 0 [1]
 [1] t an  – 1 = 0
sec  t an 
t an  = 1
1 Or

1 sin 
 2 t an  – 1 = 0
cos cos
2 t an  = 1
cos
 1
1  sin  tan  [1]
2
This is equal t o RH S. [1]
2 2
H ence pr oved.  1  t an A   1  t an A 
23.    t an 2 A
21. Using t he left hand side of t he equat ion,  1  cot A   1  cot A 

cos sin  We know

 
1  t an  1  cot  1
cot A 
M ult iplying by cos  and sin  t an A
On using t he left hand side of t he equat ion
cos2  sin 2 
  [1]
cos (1  t an  ) sin  (1  cot  ) 2
 1  t an A 
 
1  cot A 
CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry 10.171

2 2
     t an A 
2
 1  t an A   1  t an A 
 
 1  cot A  1  [1]  t an 2 A
 
1  
 t an A 
H ence pr oved. [1]
2
  24. cos  sin   2 cos (Given)
 1  t an A  Squar ing bot h t he sides we get ,

t an A  1 
  2
 t an A 
 cos  sin  2   2 cos  [1]
2
 t an A 1  t an A   Using cos2   sin 2   1  cos2  1  sin 2 
 
 t an A  1  we get ,
2 [1]
  t an A   cos2   sin 2   2 cos sin   2 cos2 

 t an 2 A
  [1]  1  2cos sin   2 1  sin 2 
 
Also,
 1  2 cos sin   2  2sin 2 
2
 1  t an A  On r ear r anging t he t er ms,
 
1  cot A 
 2  1  2 cos sin   2sin 2 
2

2
  1  2 cos sin   2sin 2  [1]
 1  t an A   1  t an A 
  Subst it ut ing 1  sin 2   cos2  ,
 1  cot A  1  [1]
1  
 t an A 
sin 2   cos2   2 cos sin   2sin 2 
2
  2 2
 1  t an A 

  sin   cos    2 sin  
t an A  1  Taking squar e r oot on bot h t he sides,
 
 t an A 
sin   cos  2 sin 
2
  t an A 1  t an A   H ence pr oved. [1]
 
 1  t an A 
10.172 CHAPTER 10 : Introduction to Trigonometry
CHAPTER 11
Some Applications of
Trigonometry
Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams
Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Problem related to Height and 4 marks 4 marks 1,3,4 marks 1,3,4 marks 1,3,4 marks 1,3,4 marks
Distance
11.174 CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry

Summary E xampl e: L et OX be a h or i zon t al l i n e on t h e

l evel gr ound and l et a per son at O be l ook i ng up
t owar ds an object P, say an aer oplane or t he t op of a
Introduction t r ee or t he t op of a t ower, or a flag at t he t op of a
LI N E OF SI GH T house.

When an obser ver looks fr om a point O at an object P Then, XOP is t he angle of elevat ion of P fr om O.
t hen t he line OP is called t he line of sight . AN GLE OF DEPRESSI ON
AN GLE OF ELEVATI ON Assume that fr om a point O, we look down at an object
Assume t hat fr om a point O, we look up at an object P, placed below t he level of our eye.
P, placed above t he level of our eye. Then, t he angle Horizontal line
which the line of sight makes wit h t he hor izontal line A O
Angle of depression
t hr ough O is called t he angle of elevat ion of P, as
seen fr om O.
P Line of sight

Line of sight
P
Then, t he angle which t he line of sight makes wit h
Angle of elevation t he hor izont al line t hr ough O is called t he angle of
depr ession of P, as seen fr om O.
O Horizontal line X

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 2. A kite is flying at a height of 30 m from the gr ound.

The lengt h of st r ing fr om t he kit e t o t he gr ound
is 60 m. Assuming t hat t her e is no slack in t he
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS st r ing, t he angle of elevat ion of t he kit e at t he
1 Mark Questions gr ound is
(a) 45° (b) 30°
1. The angle of elevat ion of t he t op of a t ower fr om
a point on t he gr ound, which is 30m away fr om (c) 60° (d) 90°
t he foot of t he t ower is 45°. The height of t he [TERM 2, 2012]
t ower (in met r es) is 3. The angle of depr ession of a car, st anding on t he
(a) 15 gr ound, fr om t he t op of a 75 m high t ower, is 30°.
(b) 30 The dist ance of t he car fr om the base of t he t ower
(in m.) is:
(c) 30 3
(a) 25 3 (b) 50 3
(d) 10 3
(c) 75 3 (d) 150
[TERM 2, 2011]
[TERM 2, 2013]
CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry 11.175

4. A ladder makes an angle of 60° wit h t he gr ound 9. A ladder leaning against a wall, makes an angle
when placed against a wall. I f the foot of the ladder of 60° wit h t he hor izont al. I f t he foot of t he ladder
is 2 m away fr om t he wall, t hen t he lengt h of t he is 2.5 m away fr om t he wall, find t he lengt h of
ladder (in met er s) is: t he ladder.
4 [TERM 2, 2016]
(a) (b) 4 3
3 10. I f a t ower 30 m high, casts a shadow 10 3m long
(c) 2 2 (d) 4 on the gr ound, then what is the angle of elevat ion
[TERM 2, 2014] of t he sun?
5. The angle of depr ession of a car par ked on t he [TERM 2, 2017]
r oad fr om t he t op of a 150 m high t ower is 30°. 11. The r at io of t he height of a t ower and t he lengt h
The distance of the car fr om t he t ower (in metr es) of it s shadow on t he gr ound is 3 : 1 . What is t he
is angle of elevat ion of t he Sun?
(a) 50 3 (b) 150 3
[TERM 2, 2017]
(c) 150 2 (d) 75
[TERM 2, 2014]
3 Marks Questions
12. Fr om t he t op of a t ower 100 m hi gh, a man
6. The tops of two t ower s of height x and y , standing
obser ves t wo car s on t he opposit e si des of t he
on level gr ound, subt end angles of 30° and 60° t ower wi t h angl es of depr essi on 30 ° and 45°
r espect ively at t he cent r e of t he line joining t heir r espect ively. Find t he dist ance bet ween t he car s.
feet , t hen find x : y .
[Use 3  1.73 ]
[TERM 2, 2015]
[TERM 2, 2011]
7. I n figur e 1, a t ower AB is 20 m high and BC, it s
13. The angles of depr ession of t he t op and bot t om of
shadow on t he gr ound, is 20 3m long. Find t he
a t ower as seen fr om t he t op of a 60 3 m high
Sun's alt itude.
cliff ar e 45° and 60° r espect ively. Find t he height
A of t he t ower.
[TERM 2, 2012]
14. The hor i zont al di st ance bet ween t wo pol es i s
15 m. The angle of depr ession of t he t op of fir st
pole as seen fr om t he t op of second pole is 30o. I f
t he height of the second pole is 24, find t he height
C B of t he fir st pole.  3  1.732
 
Figure 1 [TERM 2, 2013]
[TERM 2, 2015]
15. The angle of elevat i on of an aer oplane fr om a
8. I n Fig. 1, AB is a 6 m high pole and CD is a ladder point on t he gr ound is 60°. Aft er a flight of 30
inclined at an angle of 60° t o t he hor izont al and seconds t he angle of elevat ion becomes 30°. I f the
r eaches up t o a point D of pole. I f AD = 2.54 m , aer opl ane i s fl yi n g at a con st an t hei gh t of
find t he lengt h of t he ladder. (Use 3  1.732 ) 3000 3 m , find t he speed of t he aer oplane.
A [TERM 2, 2014]

2.54 16. Two ships ar e t her e in t he sea on eit her side of a

light house in such a way t hat t he ships and t he
D
6m light house ar e i n t he same st r aight line. The
angles of depr ession of t he t wo ships as obser ved
fr om t he t op of t he light house ar e 60° and 45°. I f
60°
t he height of t he light house is 200 m, find t he
B C
dist ance bet ween t he t wo ships.  Use 3  1.73
Fig. 1
[TERM 2, 2016] [TERM 2, 2014]
11.176 CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry

17. The angle of elevat ion of t he t op of a building 22. A moving boat is obser ved fr om t he t op of a 150m
fr om t he foot of t he t ower is 30° and t he angle of high cliff moving away fr om t he cliff. The angle
elevat ion of t he t op of t he t ower fr om t he foot of of depr ession of t he boat changes fr om 60° t o 45°
t he building is 45°. I f t he t ower is 30 m high, find in 2 minut es. Find t he speed of t he boat in m/h.
[TERM 2, 2017]
t he height of t he building.
[TERM 2, 2015] 4 Marks Questions
18. The angle of elevat ion of an aer o plane fr om a 23. Two poles of equal height s ar e st anding opposit e
point A on t he gr ound i s 60°. Aft er a flight of t o each ot her on eit her side of t he r oad, which is
15 seconds, t he angle of elevat ion changes t o 30°. 100 m wide. Fr om a point bet ween t hen on t he
I f t he aer o plane is flying at a const ant height of r oad, the angles of elevation of the top of t he poles
ar e 60° and 30°, r espect ively. Find t he height of
1500 3m , find t he speed of t he plane in km/hr.. t he poles.
[TERM 2, 2015] [TERM 2, 2011]
19. A man st anding on t he deck of a ship, which is 24. The angles of elevat ion and depr ession of t he t op
10 m above wat er l evel, obser ves t he angle of and bot t om of a light -house fr om t he top of a 60m
elevat ion of t he t op of a hill as 60° and t he angle high building ar e 30° and 60° r espect ively. Find
of depr ession of t he base of hill as 30°. Find t he
(i) The di ffer ence bet ween t he hei ght s of t he
dist ance of t he hill fr om t he ship and t he height
light -house and t he building.
of t he hill.
(ii) The dist ance bet ween t he light -house and the
D building.
[TERM 2, 2012]

25. The angle of elevat ion of t he t op of a building

fr om t he foot of t he t ower is 30° and t he angle of
h elevat ion of t he t op of t he t ower fr om t he foot of
t he building is 60°. I f t he t ower is 60 m high, find
t he height of t he building.
[TERM 2, 2013]
60° 26. Fr om a poi nt D on t he gr ound t he angl e of
A E elevat ion of t he t op of a t ower is 45o and t hat of
x
t he t op of a flagst aff fixed on t he t op of t he t ower
10 m 10 m is 60o. I f t he dist ance bet ween t he foot & point D
30° is 120 m, t hen find t he height of t he flagst aff.
B x C
[Use 3  1.73 ] [TERM 2, 2014]
[TERM 2, 2016]
20. The angles of depr ession of t he t op and bot t om of 27. The angles of elevat ion and depr ession of t he t op
a 50 m high building fr om t he t op of a t ower ar e and t he bot t om of a t ower fr om t he t op of a
45° and 60° r espect ively. Find t he height of t he building, 60 m high, ar e 30° and 60° r espect ively.
t ower and t hehor i zont al dist ance bet ween t he Find t he differ ence bet ween t he height s of t he
t ower and t he building. building and t he t ower and t he dist ance bet ween
[TERM 2, 2016]
t hem.
21. On a st r aight line passing t hr ough t he foot of a [TERM 2, 2014]

t ower, t wo point s C and D ar e at dist ances of 4 m 28. Fr om a poi nt P on t he gr ound t he angl e of

and 16 m fr om t he foot r espect ively. I f t he angles elevat ion of t he t op of a t ower is 30° and t hat of
of elevat ion fr om C and D of t he t op of t he t ower t he t op of a flag st aff fixed on t he t op of t he t ower,
ar e complement ar y, t hen find t he height of t he is 60°. I f t he lengt h of t he flag st aff is 5 m , find
t ower. t he height of t he t ower.
[TERM 2, 2017] [TERM 2, 2015]
CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry 11.177

29. At a point A , 20 met r es above t he level of wat er h

in a lake, t he angle of elevat ion of a cloud is 30°. 1
30
The angle of depr ession of t he r eflect ion of t he
cloud in t he lake, at A is 60°. Find t he dist ance of  h = 30 [½]
t he cloud fr om A . H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (b).
[TERM 2, 2015]
30. The angle of elevat ion of t he t op Q of a ver t ical 2.
t ower PQ fr om a point X on t he gr ound is 60°.
Fr om a point Y, 40 m ver tically above X, t he angle
60 m
of elevat ion of t he t op Q of t he t ower is 45°. Find
t he height of t he t ower PQ and t he dist ance PX . 30 m
[TERM 2, 2016]
31. An aer oplane is flying at a height of 300 m above 
t he gr ound. Flying at t his height , t he angles of
depr ession fr om t he aer oplane of t wo point s on
bot h banks of a r iver in opposit e dir ect ions ar e Fr om t he figur e,
45° and 60° r espect ively. Find t he widt h of t he perpendicular
sin  
r iver. [Use 3  1.732 ] hypot enuse
[TERM 2, 2017]
30
32. The angle of elevat ion of a cloud fr om a point  sin θ  [½]
60
60m above t he sur face of t he wat er of a lake is
30° and t he angle of depr ession of it s shadow in 1
wat er of lake is 60°. Find t he height of t he cloud  sin θ 
2
fr om t he sur face of wat er.
[TERM 2, 2017]  sin θ  sin 30
33. As obser ved fr om t he t op of a 100 m high light
house fr om sea level, t he angles of depr ession of  θ  30
t wo ships ar e 30° and 45°. I f one ship is exact ly The angle of elevat ion of ki t e at t he gr ound is
behind t he ot her on t he same side of t he light 30°.
house, find t he dist ance bet ween t he t wo ships. Opt i on (b) is cor r ect . [½]
[Use 3  1.732 ]
3. D
[DELH I , 2018] B
30°
 Solutions
1. A
Tower 75 m

30°
h C A
L et AB is t he Tower of height 75 m and Car is at
t he point C on t he gr ound.
45°
B C N ow,
30m
Accor ding t o t he quest ion,
I n t he figur e above, AB is t he t ower and C is t he
point 30m away fr om t he foot of t he t ower. CBD  30
L et h denot e t he height of t he t ower (in met r es).
BCA  30  alt er nat e opposit e angles [½]
o AB h
t an 45   [½] And,
BC 30
11.178 CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry

I n t he ABC, Consider the tower AB of height 150 m and DAC

= ACB = 30° (alt er nat e angles)
AC
Cot 30 
AB Perpendicular
t an  
Base
 AC  AB Cot 30
AB
Put t ing Cot 30  3  t an 30 
BC
AC  75  3
 1
 The dist ance of t he car fr om t he base of t he Using t an 30 
3
t ower is 75 3m [½]
1 150
H ence opt ion (c) is cor r ect .  
3 BC
4. A
 BC  150 3m [½]
M Thus t he cor r ect answer is (b).

6. S

60° y
B N Q
2m
Let the length of the ladder is MN , placed against x
t he wall AB and makes an angle of 60° wit h t he 30° 60°

gr ound. P T R

The foot of t he ladder is at N , which is 2 m away L et T i s t he cent r e of t he l ine joi ni ng t he feet of

fr om t he wall. t he t wo t ower s PR.
BN = 2 m I n QPT
I n r ight -angled t r iangle M BN : QP
t an 30 
BN 2 [½] PT
cos60  
MN MN
 1
1 Using t an 30  we get ,
Using cos60 

we get , 3
2
1 2
1 x
 

2 MN 3 PT
 MN = 4 m  PT  3 x [½]
Ther efor e, t he lengt h of t he ladder is 4 m . [½] Also,
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (d). I n SRT
5. A [½]
D RS
30° t an 60 
TR

150 m t an 60  3

y
 3
TR
30°
B C (Car)
CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry 11.179

y 9. I n t he given figur e AB is ladder,

 TR 
3 A
Si nce it is given t hat T i s t he cent r e of PR t hi s
impl ies t hat PT = TR

y Ladder
 3x  wall
3

x 1
  60°
y 3
B 2.5 m C
H ence, t he r at io of x and y i s 1 : 3. [½]
Base
7. AB = p = 20 m (Given)  cos600 [½]
Hypot enuse
BC  b  20 3 m (Given)
 1
N ow, Using cos60  we get ,
2
p
t an   BC 1
b 
AB 2
20 1 AB = 2BC
t an   
20 3 3 AB = 2 × 2.5
t an  = t an 60° AB = 5 m
 = 60° [1] Ther efor e, t he lengt h of t he ladder is 5 m . [½]
8. Given: AB = 6 m , AD = 2.54 m and CD is inclined
at an angle of 60° 10. A
To find: L engt h of t he ladder i.e. CD
Solut ion: Fr om t he figur e, we can see t hat ,
AB = AD + DB = 6 m 30 m
Since, AD = 2.54 m
So, 2.54 m + DB = 6 m 
DB = 3.46 m [½] C 10 3m B
Now in t he BCD ,
Given:
BD
 sin 60 AB = 30 m (H eight )
CD
BC = 10 3m (L engt h)
3.46 3
  L et t he angle of elevat ion be 
CD 2
I n ABC
3.46 1.732
 
CD 2 AB
t an  
BC
2  3.46
 CD 
1.732 30
 t an   [½]
 CD = 3.99 m 10 3
Hence, t he length of the ladder CD is 3.99m  4m . 3 3 3 3
[½]  t an    
3 3 3
11.180 CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry

L et M N be t he t ower of hei ght 100 m. C and D

 t an   3
ar e t he posi t i on of t wo car s whose angl e of
As t an 60  3 depr ession fr om t he t op of t he t ower is 30° and
40° r espect ivel y.
 = 60° [½]
Ther efor e, the angle of elevation of the sun is 60° Cl ear ly, fr om t he diagr am YAC  ACB  30 o

11. L et t he angle of elevat ion of t he Sun be . and XAD  ADB  45o

L et t he height of t he t ower be p. (Alt er nat e int er ior angles)
And t he lengt h of t he shadow be b. I n ABC,

AB
A t an 30 o 
CB

1 100

3 CB
p
 CB  100 3
I n ABD ,
 AB
t an 45o 
B b C BD
I t is given t han r at io of height t o t he lengt h of 100
1
t he shadow is  3 : 1 BD

 p:b  3 :1 [½]  BD  100 [1]

The dist ance bet ween t wo car s = CD
We know that tan  is given by per pendicular over
= CB + BD (fr om t he diagr am)
base
 100 3  100
per pendi cular AB
 t an   
base BC  100( 3  1)
= 100 (1.73 + 1)
p
 t an   = 100 (2.73)
b
= 273 m
3 Ther efor e, t he dist ance bet ween t he t wo car s is
 t an    3
1 273 m . [1]


   60  t an 60  3  [½] 13. C
45
[1]

H ence, t he angle of elevat ion of t he sun is 60°. 60

12. Consi der t he diagr am,
45
E A
Y A X
30° 45°
x x

60
D B

30° 45° L et t he hei ght of t he t ower be AB be x

C D
B  AB  DE  x
CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry 11.181

I t is given that the height of t he cliff CD = 60 3 m N ow,

L et t he height of t he pole AB be h
 CE  60 3 – x
 LD = h
Now, I n r ight t r iangle AEC,
 CL  24  h
 CE
t an 45  I n t he r ight angled ACL ,
EA
CL
60 3 – x t an A =
1 AL
EA
24  h
 EA  60 3 – x (1) [1] t an 30 = [1]
15
I n r ight t r i angle CDB
 1
CD Using t an 30 
t an 60  3
DB
1 24  h
 
60 3 3 15
 3
DB
15
 DB = 60 m  24  h
3
 DB = EA = 60 m
Now, fr om Equat ion (1), we have 15 3
24  h
3
 EA  60 3 – x
24  5 3  h
 60  60 3 – x
24   5  1.732  h
x  60  3 1 m h = 15.34
Thus, t he hei ght of t he t ower is 60  
3  1 m [1] Thus t he height of t he pole (AB ) is 15.34 m [1]

14. Let two poles AB and CD ar e apar t and CD = 24m 15. A B [½]

Accor ding t o t he quest ion,

Angle of depr ession of t he t op of fir st pole as seen
from the top of second pole is 30°.
Using t he figur e accor ding t o t he quest ion,
C 60°
[1]
30° 30°
24 – h E D C

H er e AD  3000 3 m
A 30°
24 m
15 m L Consider t he BCE ,
BC
t an 30 
h h EC

3000 3
t an 30 
B 15 m D EC
CAL = 30 and BD = 15 m 1 3000 3

 BD = AL 3 EC
 AL =15m EC = 9000 m [1]
11.182 CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry

Now consider ADE , Put t ing x = 200

AD 200
t an 60  d  200
ED 3
3000 3 200  200 3
3 d
ED 3
ED = 3000 m
Dist ance cover ed by t he aer oplane in 30 seconds d

200 1  3 
= AB = CD = EC – ED 3
Dist ance cover ed by t he aer oplane in 30 seconds d = 200 × 1.58
= 9000 – 3000 = 6000 m d = 316

Dist ance T h u s, t h e di st an ce bet w een t w o sh i ps i s

Speed of aer oplane  [½] appr oximat ely 316 m . [1]
Time
17. L et t he hei ght of t he buil di ng is PQ = x m .
6000
Speed of aer oplane   200 m / s R [½]
30
H ence t he speed of t he aer oplane is 200 m/s [1]
16. L et d be t he dist ance bet ween t he t wo ships. P
Suppose t he dist ance of one of t he ships fr om t he 30 m
light house is x met er s, t hen t he dist ance of t he
ot her ship fr om t he light house is (d-x ) met er.
O 45° 30°
[1]
45° 60° Q S
I n QRS we have,
200 m
RS
t an 45 
QS
45° 60°
A D d – x B 30
x 1
QS
d
 QS  30 m (i) [½]
I n r ight -angled ADO, we have,
Now in SPQ we have,
oOD 200
t an 45   PQ
AD x t an 30 
QS
200
1 1 PQ
x    Using (i)
3 30
x = 200 m
I n r ight -angled BDO, we have 30
 PQ  [1]
3
oOD 200
t an 60   On r at ional izing we get ,
BD d  x
30 3
Using t an 60  3 PQ  
3 3
200
3 30 3
dx  PQ   10 3 m
3
200
dx [1] H ence, t he hei ght of t he buil di ng is 10 3 m . [1]
3
CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry 11.183

19. Let CD be the hill and suppose the man is standing

18. R S [½]
on t he deck of t he ship at point A .
The angle of depr ession of t he base C of t he hill
1500 3 m
CD fr om point A is 30° and t he angle of elevat ion
of t he t op D of t he hill CD is 60°.
So, EAD = 60° and BCA = 30° [½]

60° o DE
I n AED, t an 60 
30° EA
A T U
Using t an 60  3 we get ,
L et , R and S be t he t wo posit ion of t he plane and
A be t he point of obser vat ion. L et , ATU be t he h
3 [½]
hor izont al line t hr ough A . The angle of elevat ion x
of t he plane in t wo posit ion P and Q fr om a point
H ence, h  3 x (equation I )
A ar e r espect ively.
RAT  60, SAU  30 o AB
I n ABC, t an 30 
BC
RT  1500 3 m (Given)
 1
I n ATR, Using t an 30  we get ,
3
RT
t an 60  1 10
AT  [1]
3 x
1500 3 H ence, x  10 3 (equation I I )
 3 [½]
AT
Using equat ions I and I I
AT = 1500 m
I n ASU h  3  10 3  30
H ence, DE = 30 m
SU
t an 30  So, CD = CE + ED = 10 + 30 = 40 m
AU
Thus, t he dist ance of t he hill fr om t he ship is
1 1500 3 and t he height of t he hill is 40 m . [1]
 
3 AU 60°
20. [½]
AU = 4500 m A
Distance t r avelled by the plane is 4500m – 1500m
45°
= 3000 m [1]

Dist ance
Speed 
Time
h
3000 45°
=  200 m/sec E D
15

18 50 m
 200   720 k m/hr
5
60°
H ence t he speed of t he plane is 720 km/hr. [1]
B x C
11.184 CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry

L et t he height of t he t ower AB be h met er s and 21. A [½]

t he hor izont al dist ance bet ween t he t ower and
t he building BC be x met er s.
Fr om t he figur e, we can see t hat , h
AE = AB – EB
 90 – 
AE = (h – 50) m B D
C
Now, in AED , 4m
AE 16 m
t an 45  [½]
ED L et AB be t he height of t ower
Using t an 45° = 1 we get , Angle of elevat ion of t op of t he t ower fr om point
C be 
h  50
1 Angle of elevat ion of t op of t he t ower fr om point
x
D be 90 – 
 x  h  50 ....(1)
I n ABD
I n ABC,
AB h
AB t an  90      [½]
t an 60  BD 16
BC
h
cot   ......(i )
t an 60  3 we get ,
 16
I n ABC,
h
 3
x AB h
t an    .....(i i ) [½]
BC 4
 3x  h ....(2) [½]
M ultiply (i) by (ii)
Using (1) and (2),
h h h2
x  3 x  50 t an   cot    
4 16 64
x  
3  1  50
Since t an  
1
[½]
cot 
Solving and put t ing 3  1.73 ,
h2
50 1
x 64
 3 1   h = 64
2

h=8m
50
 Ther efor e, t he height of t ower is h = 8 m [1]
0.73
22. L et us consider t he following diagr am.
 x  68.49 m [½]
Now subst it ut ing t he value of x in (1), we get , A [½]
68.49 = (h – 50) m 45°
60°
 h = 68.49 + 50
 h = 118.49 m
H ence, t he height of t he t ower is 118.49 m and 150 m
t he hor izont al dist ance bet ween t he t ower and
t he building is 68.449 m . [1]
45° 60°
D C B
CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry 11.185

I n ABC

p AB

 30  50 3  3 1 
t an   
b BC  1500 3  
3  1 m/h
150 H ence, t he speed of t he boat is
 t an 60 
BC

150
1500 3  
3  1 m/h [1]
 3 [½]
BC
23. C A
150
 BC 
3
h m h m
150 3
 
3 3
30° 60°
 50 3m (i) D x m B
(100 – x ) m O
I n ABD
100 m
p AB
t an   
b BD
[1]
150 L et AB and CD be t he pol es of equal hei ght s
 t an 45  [½]
BD st an di n g opposi t e t o each ot h er on ei t h er
sides of t he r oad and dist ance bet ween t hem is
150
1 BD = 100m
BD
L et O be t he poi nt on t he r oad, t he angles of
 BD  150 m (ii)
elevat ion of t he t op of t he poles ar e 60° and 30°,
Also, BD = BC + CD r espect ively.
Putting equat ion (i) and (ii), in the above equation L et OB = x m , t her efor e OD = (100 – x ) m
 150  50 3  CD Now in AOB
 CD  150  50 3a AB h
t an 60  
OB x
 CD  150  50 3  50 3  
3 1 [½]

Accor ding t o t he quest ion, t ime t aken t o cover h

 3
t he dist ance fr om C t o D is 2 min. x
Conver t ing 2 min in hour s hx 3 (1) [1]
2 1 Now in DOC
2 min   hour s
60 30
CD h
Dist ance t an 30  
 Speed  OD 100  x
Time
1 h
CD   [1]
 Speed  3 100  x
1
30 Using equat ion (1),

50 3  3 1  1 x 3
 

1 3 100  x
30  100  x  3 x
11.186 CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry

 100  4 x (i) I n r ight t r i angle CDE ,

 x  25 DE
t an 30 
Now using equat ion (1) CD

 h  25 3 1 h
 
3 x
H ence height of t he poles is

h  25 3m [1] x
h
3
24. E
20 3
h
3
h
 h  20 m
C 30° Ther efor e, t he differ ence bet ween t he height s of
D
60° t he light -house and t he buil ding is h = 20 m [1]
25. Assume AB as t he building and CD as t he t ower.
60 m 60 m Suppose t he height of t he building AB as 'h ' m .

Gi ven t h at , ACB  30 , CBD  60 an d

60°
CD = 60 m.
x B [1]
A
D [1]
L et AC be t he buil ding such t hat AC = 60 m and
BE be t he l ight house.
L et AB = CD = x be t he hor i zont al di st ance
Tower
bet ween t he buil ding and l ight house.
I t i s gi ven t hat t he angl es of el evat i on and
depr ession of t he t op and bot t om of a light -house
A
fr om t he t op of a 60 m high bui lding ar e 30° and 60 m
60° r espect ivel y.
Building

 DCE  30 and ABC  60  [1] h
L et DE be t he di ffer ence bet ween t he hei ght s of 60° 30°
t he li ght -house and t he buil di ng h . B C
(ii) Now, i n r ight t r iangle ABC,
BCD is a r ight angled t r iangle t hen,
AC
t an 60  BC
AB cot 60  [1]
CD
60  BC  CD cot 60
 3
x
1
60  BC  60  [1]
x 3
3
60 3
= 
 x  20 3 [1] 3 3
Ther efor e, t he dist ance bet ween t he li ght -house  20 3m
and t he buil ding, x  20 3m
CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry 11.187

ACB is a r ight angled t r iangle t hen,

27. T
AB
tan 30  
BC
30° S
 AB  BC tan 30 P
60°
1
 h  20 3 
3
 20m
60 m
 The height of t he building is 20 m . [1]
26. Consider BC as t he t ower and AB as t he flagst aff
fi xed on t op of t he t ower. The di st ance CD i s
60°
120 m .
Q R [1]
A
Fr om t he given figur e we have,
PQ = 60 m , PS = QR
B I n PQR

PQ
 t an 60
QR

60 3
  [1]
QR 1
60°
45°
D [1] 60
C  QR 
BC 3
I n BCD, t an 45  ,
CD 60 3
 
BC 3 3
1
120  20 3m
BC = 120
I n TSP
So t he height of t he t ower is 120 m . [1]
TS
Now in ACD, t an 60 
AC
,  t an 30
PS
CD
AB+BC TS 1
3  
CD 20 3 3
AB+120 20 3
3 [1]  TS   20m
120 [1]
3
120 3  AB  120 Then, t he hei ght of t he t ower, TR = TS + SR
AB  120 3  120 = 20 + 60 = 80 m
H ence, di ffer ence bet ween t he hei ght s of t he
AB  120  
3 1
t ower and t he building is 80 m – 60 m = 20 m
AB = 120 (1.732 – 1)
And t he di st ance bet ween t he t ower and t he
AB = 120 (0.732)
building is 20 3m . [1]
AB = 87.84 m
Ther efor e t he height of t he flagst aff is 87.84 m .
[1]
11.188 CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry

28. 5
B h  2.5
2
H er e we get t he value of, h = 2.5 m
5m H ence t he height of t he t ower is 2.5 m . [1]

29. Q
A h
P 30° A
60° 20 m 60° 20 m
h m
R S
30°
O P [1] 20 + h

L et OA be t he t ower of t he height h met er s and

AB be t he height of flag st aff i.e. 5 m . 60°
T
Now angle of elevat ion of t he t op of t he t ower
and t he fl ag st aff fr om point P is 30° and 60° [1]
r espect ively. L et t he dist ance of t he cloud fr om A be h met er s.
OA = h m , A B = 5 m an d OPA  30, Dist ance of t he r eflect ion of t he cloud in t he lake
will be same as dist ance of t he cloud fr om t he
OPB  60
level of wat er in t he lake.
I n r ight OAP, OPA = 30°,
 TS = 20 + h
h I n TAP
 t an 30  [1]
OP
AT
1 t an 60 
Using t an 30  
we get , AP
3 40  h
 3
AP
1 h
 
3 OP 40  h
 AP  ....(i) [1]
... (i) 3
 OP  h 3
I n APQ
Now in r ight OBP, OPB = 60°,
h5 h
 t an 60  t an 30 
OP AP

Using t an 60  3 we get , 1 h

 
3 AP
h5
 3 [1]
OP  AP  h 3 [1]
Now using equation (i) and substituting the value Equat ing bot h t he values of AP we get ,
of OP,
40  h
 3h
h5 3
 3
h 3  40 + h = 3h
3h=h+5  h = 20 m
2h=5 Dist ance of t he cloud fr om A is 20 m . [1]
CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry 11.189

30. Accor ding t o t he quest ion, t he angle of elevat ion X D Y

31.
of t he t op Q of a ver t ical t ower PQ fr om a point X 60° 45°
on t he gr ound i s 60°. Fr om a poi nt Y , 40 m
ver t ically above X , t he angle of elevat ion of t he
t op Q of t he t ower is
300 m
Q

60° 45°
A C B
h 45°
Y [1]
M
40 m Let height of t he aer oplane above the r iver is CD .
60° L et A and B be t wo poi nt s on bot h bank s i n
P X
opposit e dir ect ion.
[1] Given:
M P = XY = 40 m H ei ght of t h e aer opl an e above t h e r i ver i s
QM = h – 40 CD = 300 m [1]

I n r ight angled t r iangle QMY , ADX  CAD  60 ......  Alt er nat eangle
Using t an 45° = 1 we get ,
BDY  CBD  45 ......  Alt ernat eangle
h  40
1 (M Y = PX ) I n r ight BCD
PX
CD
H ence, PX = h – 40 (Equat ion I ) t an 45 
BC
QP
t an 60o  [1] Using t an 45° = 1 we get ,
PX
300
Using t an 60  3 we get , 1
BC
QP  BC = 300 m
3
PX I n r ight ACD
h CD
PX  (Equation I I ) t an 60 
3 AC
Fr om equat ions I and I I , Using t an 60  3 we get ,
h 300
h  40  3
3 AC
3h  40 3  h [1] 300
 AC   100 3m [1]
3h  h  40 3 3

1.732 h – h = 40 (1.732) As widt h of r iver is AB = BC + AC

h = 94.645 m = 300+100 3
Thus, PQ = 94.645 m = 300 + 100 × 1.73
Also, PX = 94.645 – 40 = 54.645 = 300 + 173
(Using Equat ion I ) = 473 m
Thus, PX = 54.79 m [1] Ther efor e, Widt h of t he r iver is 473 m . [1]
11.190 CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry

32. The dept h of t he shadow wi ll be same as t he H eight of t he cloud fr om t he sur face of t he lake
dist ance of the cloud fr om t he sur face of t he lake. = QC = h + 60 = 60 + 60 = 120 m
L et us consider t he following diagr am. H ence, t he height of t he cloud fr om t he sur face
of t he lake is 120 m . [1]
C [1]

h 33. A [1]

30° 30°
A M
60° 45°
60 m 60 m

Q 100 m
P

h + 60 m
45° 30°
B B C D

H er e, AP = 60 m i s t he height of t he poi nt of
H eight of t he light house = 100 m
obser vat ion. QC = h + 60 m is t he height of t he
cloud fr om t he sur face of t he lake. QB = h + 60 m Consider ABC
is t he dept h of t he shadow. AB
t an 45  [1]
I n AMC BC
CM Using t an 45° = 1 we get ,
t an 30 
MA 100
1
1 h BC
 
3 MA BC = 100 m
Consider ABD
 M A  3h ........ (i) [1]
I n AMB  1
Using t an 30  we get ,
3
BM
t an 60 
MA 1 100
 [1]
3 BD
60  h  60
 3
MA BD  100 3 m
120  h Dist ance bet ween t he t wo ships = BD – BC
 MA  ........ (ii) [1]
3 Dist ance bet ween t he t wo ships  100 3  100
Equating equat ion (i) and (ii)
Dist ance bet ween t he t wo ships  100  3 1
120  h
3h  Dist ance bet ween t he t wo ships = 100 (1.732 – 1)
3
Dist ance bet ween t he t wo ships = 100 (0.732)
 3h = 120 + h
Dist ance bet ween t he t wo ships is 73.2 m [1]
 2h = 120
 h = 60 m
CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry 11.191
11.192 CHAPTER 11 : Some Applications of Trigonometry
CHAPTER 12

Areas Related to Circles

Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams

Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Finding Area of Shaded 3 marks 3 marks 3,4,4 marks 3,3, 4 marks 3,4 marks 3,3 marks
Region
12.194 CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles

Summary I n t he given figur e of a cir cle wit h cent r e O, cent r al

angle of PQ = POQ = º.
Terms Related to Circles I f º< 180º t hen t he ar c PQ is called t he minor ar c and
CI RCL E t he ar c QP is called t he major ar c.
1.5 SE M I CI RCL E
S
O r

P Q
O
The set of point s which ar e at a const ant dist ance of
unit s fr om a fixed point O is called a cir cle wit h cent r e
O and r adius = r unit s. The cir cle is denot ed by C(O, R
r ). A diamet er divides a cir cle into two equal ar cs. Each of
The fixed point O is called t he cent r e and t he const ant t hese t wo ar cs is called a semicir cle.
dist ance r unit s is called it s r adius.
I n t he given figur e of a cir cle wit h cent r e O, PRQ and
CI RCU M F ERE N CE
The per imet er (or lengt h of boundar y) of a cir cle is QSP ar e semicir cles.
called it s cir cumfer ence. An ar c whose length is less t han the ar c of a semicir cle
ARC is called a minor arc. An ar c whose lengt h is mor e
t han t he ar c of a semicir cle is called a major arc.
A cont inuous piece of a cir cle is called an ar c of t he
ci r cle. SEGM EN T

Major
segment
O
O Minor
P segment Q
P Q

I n t he given figur e, PQ is an ar c of a cir cle, with cent r e A segment of a cir cle is t he r egion bounded by an ar c
O, denot ed by PQ . The r emaining par t of t he cir cle, and a chor d, including t he ar c and t he chor d.
The segment containing the minor ar c is called a minor
shown by t he dot t ed lines, r epr esent s QP .
segment , while t he segment cont aining t he major ar c
CEN TRAL AN GLE is t he major segment .
The cent r e of t he cir cle lies in t he major segment .
SECTOR OF A CI RCLE
O

O
P Q

An angle subt ended by an ar c at t he cent r e of a cir cle
P Q
is called it s cent r al angle. R
CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles 12.195

The r egion enclosed by an ar c of a cir cle and it s t wo Rot ation of the hands of a clock
bounding r adii is called a sect or of t he cir cle. (i) Angle descr ibed by t he minut e hand of a clock in
I n t he given figur e, OPRQO is a sect or of t he cir cle 60 minut es = 360.
wit h cent r e O. (ii) Angl e descr i bed by t he hour hand of a clock in
I f ar c PQ is a minor ar c t hen OPRQO is called t he 12hour s = 360.
minor sect or of t he cir cle.
The r emaining par t of t he cir cle is called t he major
Area of Sector and Segment of a
sect or of t he cir cle. Circle
QU ADRAN T Lengt h of arc, area of sector and segment
One-four t h of a cir cular disc is called a quadr ant . The L et an ar c AB make an angle  < 180 at t he cent r e of
cent r al angle of a quadr ant is 90º. a cir cle of r adius r . Then, we have
F ORM U LAE
Circumference and area of a circle S
For a cir cle of r adius r , we have
O

P Q

O r
R

2r 
(i) L engt h of t he ar c PQ = 
(i) Cir cumfer ence of t he cir cle = 2r 360
(ii) Ar ea of t he cir cle = r 2 (ii) (a) Ar ea of t he sect or OPRQO
1 2
(iii)Ar ea of t he semicir cle = r r 2
2 =
360
(iv) Per imet er of t he semicir cle = (r + 2r )
Area of a ring  1 2 r   1 
=   r    l  r
 2 360  2 

(b) Per imet er of t he sect or OPRQO

O
 2r  
R r = OP + OQ + lengt h of ar c PRQ   2r  
360 

(iii)(a) Ar ea of t he minor segment PRQP

L et R and r be t he out er and inner r adii of a r ing. = (ar ea of the sector OPRQO) – (ar ea of OPQ)

 r 2  1 2 
Then, ar ea of t he r ing = (R2 – r 2).   r sin 
 360 2 
Rot at ing wheels
(i) D i st an ce m oved by a w h eel i n 1 r ot at i on = (b) Ar ea of t he major segment QSPQ
cir cumfer ence of t he wheel = (ar ea of t he cir cle)
(ii) Number of r ot at ions in 1 minut e – (ar ea of t he minor segment PRQP)

dist ance moved in 1 minut e

=
circumfer ence
12.196 CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles

PREVIOUS YEARS’
5. I n t he given figur e, ABCD is a squar e of side 4
cm. A quadr ant of a cir cle of r adius 1 cm is dr awn
at each ver t ex of t he squar e and a ci r cl e of
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS diamet er 2 cm is also dr awn. Find t he ar ea of t he
shaded r egion. (Use  = 3.14 )
1 Mark Questions D C
1. The cir cumfer ence of a cir cle is 22 cm. The ar ea
of it s quadr ant (in cm 2) is

77 77
(a) (b)
2 4

77 77
(c) (d)
8 16 A B
Figure 4 [TERM 2, 2012]
[TERM 2, 2012]
2. I f t he differ ence bet ween t he cir cumfer ence and 6. Two cir cular pieces of equal r adii and maximum
ar ea, t ouchi ng each ot her ar e cut out fr om a
22 rectangular card board of dimensions 14cm  7cm.
t he r adius of a cir cle is 37cm, t hen using   ,
7 Fi nd t he ar ea of t he r emai ni ng car d boar d.
t he cir cumfer ence (in cm) of t he cir cle is:
 22 
(a) 144 (b) 44  Use   7  [TERM 2, 2013]
 
(c) 14 (d) 7
7. I n t he given figur e, a squar e OABC is inscr ibed
[TERM 2, 2013] in a quadr ant OPBQ of a cir cle. I f OA = 20cm,
2 Marks Questions find t he ar ea of the shaded r egion.  Use   3.14 
3. I n t he gi ven fi gur e, APB and CQD ar e semi Q
ci r cles of diamet er 7 cm each, whi le ARC and
BSD ar e semi cir cl es of di amet er 14 cm each. C B
Find t he per imet er of t he shaded r egion.
22
[Use   ]
7
O P
A
R [TERM 2, 2014]
8. I n t he given figur e, ABCD is a squar e of side 14
cm. Semi -ci r cl es ar e dr awn wi t h each si de of
P squar e as diamet er. Find t he ar ea of t he shaded
B C D r egi on.
A 7 cm 7 cm 7 cm
Q  22 
 Use   
7

A B
S
[TERM 2, 2011]
4. Find t he ar ea of a quadr ant of a cir cle, wher e t he
22
cir cumfer ence of cir cle is 44 cm. [Use   ]
7
[TERM 2, 2011] D C
Figure 4
[TERM 2, 2016]
CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles 12.197

3 Marks Questions C
9. Find t he ar ea of t he major segment APB, in t he
gi v en f i gu r e, of a ci r cl e of r adi u s 35 cm
22 O
and AOB  90 . [Use   ] B A
7
P

D
[TERM 2, 2013]
O
13. I n a cir cle of r adius21 cm, an ar c subt ends an
90° angle of 60 at t he cent r e. Find: (i) t he lengt h of
t he ar c (i i ) ar ea of t he sect or for med by t he
A B
[TERM 2, 2011] ar c.  Use  = 22 
 7 
10. I n t he given figur e, O is t he cent r e of t he cir cle 
wi t h AC  24 cm , AB  7cm an d BOD  90 . [TERM 2, 2013]

Find t he ar ea of t he shaded r egion. 14. I n t he given figur e, t wo concent r ic cir cles wit h
cen t r e O, h av e r adi i 21 cm an d42 cm .
A
I f AOB  60 , find the ar ea of the shaded r egion.
B 22
[Use   ]
O 7

D
Figure 6 O
[TERM 2, 2012]
11. I n t he given figur e, find t he ar ea of t he shaded
C 60° D
r egion, if ABCD is a squar e of side 14 cm and
APD and BPC ar e semicir cles.
A B
A B [TERM 2, 2014]
15. I n t he given figur e, ABCD is a t r apezium of ar ea
24.5 sq. cm I n it , AD | | BC
P DAB  90, AD  10 cm and BC  4 cm .I f ABE
is a quadr ant of a circle, find the ar ea of the shaded
22
D C r egion. [Take   ]
7
Figure 4
[TERM 2, 2012]
D E A
12. I n t he given figur e, AB and CD ar e t wo diameter s
of a cir cle wit h cent r e O, which ar e per pendicular
t o each ot her. OB is t he diamet er of t he smaller
cir cle. I f OA = 7 cm , find t he ar ea of t he shaded
22
r egion. [Use  = ] C B
7
Figure 3[TERM 2, 2014]
12.198 CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles

16. I n t he given figur e, a ci r cl e i s i nscr ibed in an 19. I n t he given figur e, find t he ar ea of t he shaded
equilat er al t r iangle ABC of side 12 cm. Find t he r egion, enclosed bet ween t wo concent r ic cir cles
r adi us of i nscr i bed ci r cl e and t he ar ea of t he of r adii 7 cm and 14 cm wher e
shaded r egion.
 22 
AOC  40o.  Use   
Use   3.14 and 3  1.73  7

40°
O
B D
A C
B C [TERM 2, 2016]
20. I n t he given figur e, ar e shown t wo ar cs PAQ and
[TERM 2, 2014] PBQ. Ar c PAQ is a par t of cir cle wit h cent r e O
17. I n t he given figur e, PSR, RTQ and PAQ ar e t hr ee and r adi us OP whi le ar c PBQ is a semi-ci r cle
semicir cles of diamet er s 10 cm, 3 cm and 7 cm dr awn on PQ as diamet er wit h cent r e M . I f OP =
r espect i vely. Find t he per imet er of t he shaded PQ = 10 cm show t hat ar ea of shaded r egion is
r egi on. U se   3.14  
25  3   cm 2
 6
S
P

10 cm
A 5 cm

O M A B

P 7 cm Q 3 cm R 5 cm

T Q
[TERM 2, 2016]
[TERM 2, 2014] 21. Thr ee semicir cles each of diamet er 3 cm, a cir cle
18. I n t he given figur e, O i s t he cent r e of a ci r cle of diamet er 4.5 cm and a semicir cle of r adius 4.5
such t hat diameter AB  13cm and AC  12cm . cm ar e dr awn in t he given figur e. Find t he ar ea
BC is joined. Find t he ar ea of t he shaded r egion of t he shaded r egion.

(Take   3.14 )

O
3 cm 3 cm 3 cm

[TERM 2, 2017]
B C

[TERM 2, 2011]
CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles 12.199

22. I n the given figur e, OACB is a quadr ant of a cir cle 25. I n t he gi ven fi gur e, ABCD i s a r ect angl e of
wit h cent r e O and r adius3.5cm. I f OD=2cm, find dimensions 21 cm × 14 cm. A semicir cle is dr awn
t he ar ea of t he shaded r egion. wi t h BC as di amet er. Fi nd t he ar ea and t he
per imet er of t he shaded r egion in t he figur e.
A
A 21 cm B
C
D

14 cm

O B
[TERM 2, 2017] D C
4 Marks Questions [TERM 2, 2017]
26. A chor d PQ of a cir cle of r adius 10 cm subt ends
23. I n t he given figur e, is shown a sect or OAP of a
an angl e of 60 at t he cent r e of ci r cl e. Fi nd
ci r cl e wi t h cent r e O, cont ai ni ng  . AB i s
t he ar ea of major and mi nor segment s of t he
per pendicular t o t he r adius OA and meet s OP
ci r cle.
pr oduced at B. Pr ove that the per imeter of shaded
[TERM 2, 2017]
  
r egion is r  t an   sec   1 27. I n t h e gi v en f i gu r e, t h e si de of squ ar e i s
 180  28 cm and r adius of each cir cle is half of the length
B of t he si de of t he squar e wher e O and O ar e
cent r es of t he cir cles. Find t he ar ea of shaded
r egi on.

O
 A
O r

[TERM 2, 2016] O’
24. An elast ic belt is placed ar ound t he r im of a pulley
of r adius 5 cm. (given figur e). Fr om one point C
on the belt, t he elast ic belt is pulled dir ect ly away
fr om t he cent r e O of t he pul l ey unt i l i t i s at [TERM 2, 2017]
P,10cmfr om t he point O. Find t he lengt h of t he
belt t hat is st ill in cont act wit h t he pulley. Also  Solutions
1. Cir cumfer ence of a cir cle  2 r

find the shaded ar ea. Use   3.14 and 3  1.73 
 22  2 r
A
 11   r
5 cm
C 22
O

P   r  11
7

7
r  cm [½]
B 2
[TERM 2, 2016]
12.200 CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles

4. L et r be t he r adius of t he cir cle.

1 2
Now, ar ea of a quadr ant of a cir cle  r Given t hat cir cumfer ence of cir cle is 44 cm.
4
 2 r  44
1 22 7 7
   
4 7 2 2 44
r 
2
77
 cm 2 [½]
8 44  7
r 
2. L et t he r adius of t he cir cle be ‘r ’. 2  22

Then t he cir cumfer ence of t he cir cle  2 r  r  7 cm [1]

Accor ding t o t he quest ion, Now, t he ar ea of t he quadr ant of t he cir cle

2 r  r = 37 r 2

4
 r  2  1 = 37
22  (7)2 77
 22     38.5
 r 2  -1 = 37 74 2
 7 
Ther efor e, t he ar ea of t he quadr ant of t he cir cle
 37  is 38.5 cm 2 [1]
 r   = 37
 7
5. L et A be t he ar ea of each quadr ant of t he cir cle of
r =7 r adius 1 cm.

22 1 2
 Cir cumfer ence = 2 r  2   7 = 44  Area of a quadrant = r
[1] 4
7
3. L et r and R be t he r adii of t he semicir cle APB 1
and ARC r espect ively. A  3.14  1  1
4
7 14
r  cm and R   7 cm  A  0.785 cm 2 [1]
2 2
Ther efor e, ar ea of t he 4 quadr ant s
The given shape is symmet r ic.
Requ i r ed per i m et er of t h e sh aded r egi on  4 A  4  0.785  3.14 cm 2
 2  R   r  Ar ea of t he cir cle inside t he

(H int : Perimet er of t he semicircle   r ) squar e   r 2  3.14  1  1  3.14 cm 2

 2  R  r  Now, Ar ea of thesquar e   side 2   4 2  16 cm 2

  7  So, A r ea of t h e sh aded par t of t h e squ ar e

 2   7     [1]
  2   Ar ea of 4 quadr ant s +
 Ar ea of t he squar e   
 Ar ea of t he cir cle
 7
 2 
 2  16   3.14  3.14 

22  7   16  6.28
 2  
7  2
 9.72 cm 2
 22 cm
t he ar ea of t he shaded r egion is 9.72 cm 2 [1]
Ther efor e, t he per imet er of t he shaded r egion is
22 cm [1]
CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles 12.201

6. The ar ea of t he r ect angular sheet Radius of t he cir cle,

r =20 2
(A 1 )  14  7  98cm 2
Ar ea of quadr ant OPBQ
Accor ding t o t he quest ion,

Two cir cular pieces of equal r adii which ar e cut   r 2
360 o [1]
out fr om r ect angular sheet have t he maximum
ar ea.
90 o
H ence, 
360 o
 3.14  20 2  2
14
The diamet er of each cir cle is, (d   7 cm  0.25  3.14  800 cm 2
2
Ther efor e, r adius of each cir cular sheet ,  628 cm 2
d 7 Ar ea of squar e
Thus t he cor r ect answer is (C). r = = cm
2 2 OABC = (Side)2 = (20)2 cm 2 = 400 cm 2
[1] Ar ea of t he shaded r egion = Ar ea of quadr ant
OPBQ – Ar ea of squar e OABC

7 cm  628  400

 228 cm 2 [1]

H ence, t he ar ea of shaded ar ea is 228 cm 2

14 cm
Ar ea of a cir cular piece
8. P
2 A B
 7 22 49 77
=    =  = cm 2 I
 2 7 4 2
 Ar ea of bot h t he cir cular pieces
S IV O Q 14 cm
II
77
(A 2 ) = 2  =77cm 2
2
N ow, III
D C
Ar ea of t he r emaining car d boar d  A 1  A 2 R
 98  77  21cm 2 We have mar ked t he four shaded r egion as I , I I ,
Thus t he ar ea of t he r emaini ng car d boar d i s I I I and I V and t he cent r es of t he semicir cles as P,
Q, R and S in t he figur e above.I t is given t hat t he
21 cm 2 [1]
side of t he squar e is 14cm.
7. I n  OAB N ow,
Q Ar ea of t he r egion I + Ar ea of t he r egion I I I =
Ar ea of t he squar e – Ar ea of t he semicir cles wit h
C B
cent r es S and Q and r adius  7cm

1
 14  14  2     72
2
90° P
O A 22
20 cm  196  49 
7
2 2 2
OB 2  OA 2  AB 2   20   20  2   20  196  154

 42cm 2 [1]
OB = 20 2
12.202 CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles

Si mi l ar l y, Ar ea of t he r egion I I + Ar ea of t he
r egi on I V = Ar ea of t he squar e – Ar ea of t he A
semicir cles wit h cent r es P and R and r adius =
7cm B
O
1
 14  14  2     72
2
C
22
 196  49  D
7 Figure 6
 196  154 Thus, ABC is a r ight -angled t r iangle, r ight -
angled at A.
 42cm 2  By Pyt hagor as t heor em,
So, t he ar ea of t he shaded r egion = Ar ea of r egion
AB 2  AC 2  BC 2
I + Ar ea of r egion I I I + Ar ea of r egion I I + Ar ea of
r egion I V  72  24 2  BC 2
 42cm 2  42cm 2  BC 2  625

 84cm 2  BC  25 cm [1]

1
H ence, t he ar ea of t he shaded r egion is 84cm 2 Now, Ar ea of t he ABC  b h
2
[1]
9. A r ea of t h e gi ven m aj or sect or PA OB wi t h 1
  24  7
2
270 3 22  35  35
270   r 2    12  7
360 4 7
 84 cm 2
3
  11  5  35 Again, since O is t he cent r e of t he cir cle
2
and BOD  90
5775
  COD  90
2
BC is t he diamet er. Ther efor e,
 2887.5 cm 2 [1] 1 25
OC  BC  cm is t he r adius of t he cir cle.
Ar ea of r ight t r iangle 2 2

1 1 1 2
bh   35  35  612.5cm 2 Ther efor e, ar ea of t he quadr ant COD  r
AOB  4
2 2
1 22 25 25
Now t he ar ea of the complete major segment APB    
4 7 2 2
= ar ea of major sect or PAOB + ar ea of r i ght
tr iangle AOB 13750

112
 2887.5  612.5 [1]
 122.76 cm 2 [1]
 3500cm 2
L ast ly, ar ea of t he cir cle   r 2
H en ce t h e ar ea of t h e m aj or segm en t
22 25 25
APB  3500cm 2
  
[1] 7 2 2
10. Since O is t he cent r e of t he cir cle, t her efor e, BC 13750
will be t he diamet er of t he cir cle.We know t hat , 
28
an angle in a semi-cir cle is always a r ight angle.
 491.07 cm 2

 BAC  90
CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles 12.203

Ther efor e, Ar ea of t he shaded r egion of t he cir c Ar ea of t he shaded r egion = Ar ea of t he cir cle

with diameter OB + (Area of the semi-cir cle ACDA
 Ar ea of Quadr ant + 
= Ar ea of cir cle    “ Ar ea of  ACD)
 Ar ea of ABC
1 1 
 491.07  122.76  84    r 2    r 2   CD  OA  [1]
2 2 
 491.07  206.76 Subst it ut ing t he values,
2
 284.31 cm
2
22  7   1 22 1 
The ar ea of t he shaded r egion is 284.31 cm 2 [1]       72   14  7
7  2 2 7 2 
11. Given that, side of the square is 14 cm
 Diamet er of t he semi-cir cles APD and
77  22  7 14  7 
BPC  14 cm     [1]
2  2 2 
 Radius of t he semi-cir cle APD and BPC
 7 cm  38.5  77  49  66.5 cm 2

A B H ence t he ar ea of t he shaded par t is 66.5 cm 2

[1]
13. We know t hat ,

P Radius of t he cir cle  21 cm

Angle subt ended by t he ar c is 60

(i) L engt h of t he ar c
[1]
D C
Figure 4 60 22
 2  21 [1]
Ar ea of t he squar e   si de2  14 2  196 cm 2 360 7

Ar ea of t he semi-cir cle APD will be equal t o 1

  2  22  3  22 cm
t he ar ea of t he semi-cir cle BPC, 6

1 2 H ence t he lengt h of t he ar c is 22 cm
 r
2

1 22 (ii) Ar ea of sect or   r 2
  77 360
2 7
Subst it ut ing t he values again,
 77 cm 2 [1]
60 22
Ther efor e, ar ea of t he shaded r egion is    21  21 [1]
360 7
Ar ea of square   Area of two semicircles
1
  22  3  21  231 cm 2
 196 –  77  77 6
 196 – 154 H ence t he ar ea of t he sect or is 231 cm 2 [1]
 42 cm 2 14. I t is given t hat r adius of inner cir cle  21cm and

The ar ea of shaded r egion is 42 cm 2 [1] r adius of out er cir cle  42 cm

12. We know t hat AB and CD ar e t he diamet er s of a
ci r cle. Ar ea bet ween t he t wo cir cles   R2  r 2
  [1]
H ence,
Ar ea bet ween t he t wo cir cles
OA = OB = OC = OD = 7cm (Radius)
22
 422  212
 
7
12.204 CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles

Ar ea bet ween t he t wo cir cles 1

Ar ea of t r apezium   AD  BC   AB [1]
22 2
 1764  441
7 1
Ar ea bet ween t he t wo cir cles
24.5  10  4   AB
2

22 49
 1323  4158 cm 2 AB 
14
 3.5 cm
7
Ar ea cover ed by t he sect or of 60 in t he Radius of t he quadr ant  3.5 cm

60 r 2
out er cir cle is   R2 Ar ea of t he quadr ant  [1]
360 4
Ar ea cover ed by t he sect or of 60 in t he 1 22 2
Ar ea of t he quadr ant     3.5
4 7
60  22 
out er cir cle      422
360  7  Ar ea of t he quadr ant  9.625 cm 2

Ar ea cover ed by t he sect or of 60 in t he Ar ea of shaded r egion

 Ar ea of t rapezi um  Area of quadr ant
out er cir cle  22  42  924 cm 2
Ar ea of shaded r egion
Ar ea cover ed by t he sect or of 60 in t he
 24.5  9.625  14.875 cm 2
60
inner cir cle is  r 2 [1] The ar ea of shaded r egion is 14.875 cm 2 [1]
360
16. I t is given t hat ABC is an equilat er al t r iangle of
Ar ea cover ed by t he sect or of 60 in t he inner
side 12 cm Const r uct ion: Join OA, OB and OC
60  22  Dr aw
cir cle      212
360  7  OP  BC

Ar ea cover ed by t he sect or of 60 in t he inner OQ  AC

cir cle  21  11  231 cm 2 OR  AB

Ar ea cover ed by t he sect or in bet ween t he cir cles A

2
924  231  693 cm
Ar ea of shaded por t ion
12 cm R r r Q 12 cm
 Ar ea bet ween  O
 
 t he t wo cir cles
[1]
r
 Ar ea cover ed by t he sect or 
 in bet ween t he cir cles  B P C
12 cm

Ar ea of shaded por t ion  4158  693  3465 cm 2 L et t he r adius of t he cir cle be r cm.
Ar ea of  AOB +Ar ea of  BOC + Ar ea of  AOC
Thus, t he ar ea of shaded r egion is 3465 cm 2 [1] = Ar ea of  ABC
15. I t is given t hat ar ea of t r apezium is 2 4 .5 cm 2
1 1
Ar ea of t r apezium  AB  OR   BC  OP
2 2
1 1 3 2
  Sum of parallel sides  H eight   AC  OQ    Side
2 2 4
CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles 12.205

18. Accor ding t o t he given figur e,

1 1
 12  r   12  r
2 2 ACB  90o (Angle in a semi-cir cle)
1 3 2 Now, in ACB , using Pyt hagor as t heor em, we
  12  r   12
2 4 have

1 3
AB 2  AC 2  BC 2
3   12  r   12  12
2 4 [1] 132  122   BC 2
r  2 3  2  1.73  3.46
Ther efor e t he r adius of t he inscr i bed ci r cl e i s  BC 2  169  144  25
3.46 cm Now,
BC  25  5cm [1]
ar ea of t he shaded r egion = Ar ea of  ABC – Ar ea
of t he inscr ibed cir cle Now, ar ea of the shaded r egion= Ar ea of t he cir cle
– ar ea of t he t r iangle
 3 2
=   122   2 3  cm 2
  Area of t he shaded r egion [1]
 4 
1 2 1
  r   BC  AC
2 2 2
 36 3  12  cm
1 2 1
  36  1.73  12  3.14  cm 2    3.14    6.5   5  12
2 2

 24.6 cm 2  66.33  30
Ther efor e, t he ar ea of t he shaded r egi on i s
 36.33 cm 2
2
24.6 cm [1]
Thus, ar ea of t he shaded r egion is 36.33 cm 2 [1]
17. Radius of Semicir cle PSR
19. Accor ding t o t he figur e,
1
  10 cm  5 cm [½] Ar ea of t he r egion ABDC = Ar ea of t he sect or
2
AOC – Ar ea of t he sect or BO
Radius of Semicircle RTQ
 40 o 22   40 o 22 
1    14  14     7  7
 3  1.5 cm o 7 o 7
  360   360 
2
Radius of semicir cle PAQ 1  1 
   22  14  2    22  7
1 9  9 
  7 cm  3.5 cm [½]
2
1
Per imet er of t he shaded r egion = Cir cumfer ence   22   28  7 
9
of semicir cle PSR + Cir cumfer ence of semicir cle
RTQ + Cir cumfer ence of semicir cle PAQ  51.33 cm 2 [1]

1 1 1 
   2  5   2 1.5   2  3.5  cm Now, area of t he cir cul ar ring 
2 2 2  [1]
22 22
 14  14  77
   5  1.5  3.5 cm 7 7

 3.14  10  22  14  2  22  7

 31.4 cm [1]  22   28  7

 462 cm 2 [1]
12.206 CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles

Ther efor e, r equir ed shaded ar ea = Ar ea of t he

25 100
cir cular r ing – Ar ea of t he r egion ABDC     25 3
2 6
 462  51.33
 
 410.67 cm 2  25  3   sq unit s
 6
Thus, the ar ea of the shaded r egion is 410.67 cm 2 H ence, we have shown t hat ar ea of t he shaded

[1]  
r egion is  25  3   sq unit s [1]
6
20. P

10 cm 21. Fr om t he figur e,
5 cm

O I M II A III B
5 cm 4.5 cm
E
D
Q A C

I t is given t hat OP=OQ=10 cm .And we know t he B

3 cm 3 cm
fact t hat t angent s dr awn fr om an ext er nal point
t o a ci r cl e ar e equ al i n l en gt h su ch t h at 3 cm
OP=OQ=10 cm
Ar ea of t he semi-cir cle.
This makes POQ an equilat er al t r iangle.And Diamet er = 9 cm
POQ  PQO  QPO  60 [1] Radius = 4.5 cm

Now, Area of par t I I = Area of t he sect or – r 2

Ar ea 
Area of t he equilat eral t riangle POQ 2

2 2
POQ 3   4.5   4.5
  r  2
 10
2   cm 2 [1]
360 4 2 2

60 2 3 2 Area of circle D wit h Radius,

 4.5 cm
   10   10 2
360  4
Ar ea   r 2
 3
 100   sq uni t s 2
6 4   4.5 

 2 
Area of t he semicir cle on diamet er PQ =
Area of part I I + Ar ea of par t I I I  4.5 
2
  cm 2
 2 
1 2 25
    5   sq unit s [1]
2 2 Ar ea of region  A  C 
Area of t he shaded r egion i.e. part I I I =
 3
Area of t he semicir cle on diamet er PQ r  
 2
– Ar ea of par t I I
2
 3
25  3     cm 2
   100    2
2 6 4 
CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles 12.207

Subt r act ing equat ion (ii) fr om (i) t o find t he ar ea

Area  2.25 cm 2 [1]
of t he shaded r egion, we’ll get
Ar ea of r egion B
 9.625  3.5
 3
r    6.125 cm 2
 2
H en ce, t h e ar ea of t h e sh aded r egi on i s

  3
2 6.125 cm 2 [1]
Ar ea   
2  2 23. Fr om t he figur e,
Per imet er of shaded r egion

  2.25 cm 2 = AB  PB  AP ... (i )
2
Ar ea of shaded r egion = ar ea of semi-cir cle – OAB  90
ar ea of cir cle D – ar ea of r egion (A+C) +ar ea of  Tangent is per pen dicular t o 
r egion B  r adius t hr ough point of cont act 
 
2 2
  4.5  4.5  
   2.25   2.25 cm 2 I n OAB,
2  2  2
AB
 10.125  5.0625  2.25  1.125 t an   [1]
OA
 3.9375
AB  OA  t an 
2 [1]
 12.375cm AB  r  t an  ......(ii )
22. We know t hat t he ar ea of a cir cle is given by t he
I n OAB,
for mula

A  r 2 OB
sec 
OA
The given quadr ant is quar t er of a cir cle. So, t he
ar ea of t he given quadr ant will be OB  OA  sec
1 2 OB  r  sec
 r [1]
4
 PB  OB  OP [1]
Put t ing t he values, we’ll get
 r sec  r ....(iii )
1 22 2
 Ar ea     3.5 Ther efor e, t he per imet er is
4 7
 AB  PB  AP
1 22 35 35
 Area     
4 7 10 10  r  t an   r  sec  r   r [1]
180
2
 Ar ea  9.625 cm .....................  i 
On solving it fur t her,
Now, t he ar ea of t he t r iangle ODB will be given
by   
 r  t an   sec   1
 180 
1
  base  height
2 H ence Proved. [1]
24. We ar e given t hat OA=5cm and OP=10cm
1
  3.5  2 Now we know t hat t he t angent at any point of
2
a cir cle fr om an exter nal point, P is per pendicular
 3.5 cm 2 .......................  ii  [1] t o t he r adius t hr ough t he point of cont act .
So, OAP is a r ight -angled t r iangle,
12.208 CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles

Ther efor e, Ar ea of t he shaded r egion = (Ar ea of

 OAP  90
OAP + Ar ea of OBP ) – Ar ea of t he sect or
Now, using t he Pyt hagor as t heor em,
OACB
OP 2  OA 2  AP 2
=43.25cm 2 -26.17cm 2
 102  52  AP 2 =17.08cm 2
 AP 2  75 H ence, t he lengt h of t he belt is 20.93 cm and t he
ar ea of t he shaded r egion is 17.08 cm 2 [1]
 AP  5 3cm [1]
25. Ar ea of shaded r egion = Ar ea of r ect angle – Ar ea
OA 5 of semicir cle [1]
Now, cos  
OP 10  1 2
 14  
1  21  14        
 cos   2  2 

2

   60  1 22 
 294     7  7
 2 7 
So,AOP  BOP  60
 294  77
 as OAP  OBP 
 217 cm 2 [1]
 AOB  120
L engt h of t he belt st ill in cont act wit h t he pulley So, t he ar ea of shaded r egion is 217 cm 2 .
= Cir cumfer ence of t he cir cle – L engt h of t he ar c Per imet er of shaded r egion

120  AB  AD  DC  BC
AC  2  3.14  5   2  3.14  5
360
1  14 
 1  AB  AD  DC   2   [1]
 2  3.14  5   1   2  2
 3
22
2  21  14  21  7
 2  3.14  5  7
3
[1]  56  22
 20.93cm
 78cm
1
Now, Ar ea of OAP   AP  OA  So, t he per imet er of shaded r egion is 78 cm. [1]
2
26. To find t he ar ea of minor ar c we need t o calculat e
1 25 3
5 3 5  cm 2 t he ar ea of t he sect or OPRQ
2 2
25 3
Area of OBP  cm 2
2

So, Ar ea of OAP  Area of OBP

O
2 2
[1]
 25 3 cm  25  1.73  43.25 cm
10 cm 60° 10 cm
Ar ea of sect or OACB
P Q
120 2 R
  3.14   5
360
OPQ i s a i soscel es t r i angl e as OP  OQ We
e
1
  3.14  25 know t hat in an isosceles t r iangle base angles
3 ar e equal.
 26.17 cm 2 [1]
CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles 12.209

 OPQ  OQP.........  i  Ar ea of t he cir cle is given by t he for mula

2
Now, POQ  OPQ  OQP  180 A   r 2  3.14  10

Using equat ion  i   3.14  10  10

60  OPQ  OPQ  180  314 cm 2

Ar ea of t he major segment = Ar ea of cir cle –
2OPQ  120 Ar ea of minor segment
OPQ  60 [1] A  314  9.03
 All angles ar e of 60 which is a pr oper t y of A  304.97 cm 2
equilat er al t r iangleSo, OPQ is an equilat er al H ence, t he ar ea of minor segment is 9.03 cm 2
t r iangle.Ar ea of an equilat er al is given by t he and t he ar ea of major segment is 304.97 cm 2 [1]
for mula 27. Ar ea of t he squar e is given by t he for mula
3 2 A   si de
2
A   L engt h of t he side
4
2
  28
3 2
A  10
4  784 cm 2
50 3 Area of t he cir cle is given by t he formula
A  43.30 cm 2 .......  a 
2
2
A   r 2   14  [1]
Also, we know t hat t he area of
We can see that 2 quadr ants ar e over lapping with
sect or is given by t he for mula,
t he ar ea of t he squar e.
  Ar ea of the shaded r egion = Ar ea of the squar e
A  r 2 + 2  Ar ea of cir cle – Ar ea of t wo quadr ant s [1]
360
So, Area of sector OPRQ 22  1
 784   14  14  2  
7  2
60 2
   10 
360  3
 784  22  2  14    [1]
2
 2
 52.33 cm .......  b  [1]
 784  22  14  3
Now, t o find t he ar ea of minor segment , we
need t o subt r act t he ar ea of  OPQ fr om t he  784  924
ar ea of t he sect or OPRQ .  1708 cm 2
so, ar ea of minor segment is H ence, t he ar ea of t he shaded r egion is 1708 cm 2
Subt r act ing equat ion (a) fr om (b) [1]
 52.33  43.30

 9.03 cm 2
12.210 CHAPTER 12 : Areas Related to Circles
CHAPTER 13
Surface Areas
and Volumes
Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams
Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Problem related to Area 3,4 marks 3,4 marks 3 marks 2,3 marks 3 marks
Problem related to Volume 1,3,4,4 marks 4 marks 3,3 marks 3,3,4 marks
Frustum of Cone 3 marks 4 marks
Converting one type of metallic 3 marks
solid into another
13.212 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

[TOPIC 1] Surface Area & Volume of a Solid

Summary Wher e  = lengt h of cuboid

b = br eadt h of cuboid
Surface Area and Volume of Solids h = height of cuboid
Total surface area of cube
CU BOI DS AN D CU BES
Since cube is a cuboid in which lengt h () = br eadth (b)
Cuboi d : A cuboi d i s a sol i d fi gur e, h el d by si x = height (h ) side of cube (a) i.e.  = b = h = a
r ect angular plane r egions
H er e, I n cuboid we have six faces namely E D

AFGB, BGDC, GFED, OCDE , OEFA, OABC.

We also have 12 edges, wher e t wo sides meet namely F G

OA, AB, BC, OC, FG, EF , ED, OG, AF , OE , BG, CD.

C
Cube: A cuboid in which all lengt h, br eadt h, height O a
ar e of equal lengt hs, is called a cube. a

E A a B
D
 Tot al sur face ar ea of cube

F G  2  a  a  a  a  a  a

 2 a 2  a2  a 2
 
C
O

Area  2 3a2  6 a2
 
A B
Lateral surface area of cube
I t also has six faces and t welve edges.
SU RFACE AREA OF A CU BOI D AN D A CU BE Area = 2  a  a  a  a

Tot al surface area of cuboid

 2 a 2  a2  2  2 a2
 
 Ar ( ABCO)  Ar ( EFGD )  Ar ( AOEF ) 
= 4a2
Ar ( BCDG)  Ar ( ABGF )  Ar (OCDE )
So, lat er al sur face ar ea of cube = 4a2
= b  b  bh  bh  h  h
Wher e a = lengt h of a side.
= 2  b  bh  h  L engt h of diagonal of a cuboid
E D L engt h of diagonal  OG  AD  BE  CF

 2  b2  h 2
F G
 = lengt h; b = br eadt h; h = height
Length of diagonal of a cube
C
O h L engt h of diagonal = OG  AD  BE  CF
b
= a2  a 2  a2
A l B
L ateral surface area of cuboid = 3a2  3a unit
= 2bh  h  Wher e a = lengt h of a side.
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.213

Sur face A r ea o f a Ri g ht Ci r cu l ar Surface Area of a Right Circular Cone

Cylinder CU RVED SU RFACE AREA OF A CON E
CU RVED SU RFACE AREA OF A CYLI N DER A

= 2rh
Wher e r = r adius of base
h = height of cylinder. l
h
TOTAL SU RFACE AREA OF A CYLI N DER

= 2rh  2r 2 C O r B
 2r ( h  r )
r = r adius of base C =  r
h = height of cylinder C = cur ved sur face ar ea
r = r adius of base of cone
22
= or 3.14 appr ox.  = slant height
7

r = h2  r 2
TOTAL SU RFACE AREA OF A CON E

T = r   r 2 = r (r  )
h
H er e, T = t ot al sur face ar ea
r = r adius of base of cone
 = slant height of cone
VOLU M E OF RI GH T CI RCU LAR CON E
VOLU M E OF CYLI N DER
1 2
V  r 2 h V  r h
3
Wher e r = r adius of base Wher e V = volume of cone
h = height of cylinder r = r adius of base of cone
h = height of cone

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 2. Volume and sur face ar ea of a solid hemispher e

ar e numer ically equal.
What is t he diamet er of hemispher e?
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS
[TERM 2, 2017]
TOPIC 1 2 Marks Question
1 Mark Questions 3. I f t he t ot al sur face ar ea of a solid hemispher e is
1. A spher e of diamet er 18 cm i s dr opped i nt o a 22
462 cm 2, find it s volume. [Take   ]
cylindr ical vessel of diamet er 36 cm, par t ly filled 7
with water. I f the spher e is completely submer ged, [TERM 2, 2014]
t hen t he wat er level r ises (in cm) by 3 Marks Questions
(a) 3 4. A hemispher ical bowl of int er nal r adius 9 cm is
(b) 4 ful l of wat er. I t s cont ent s ar e empt i ed i n a
(c) 5 cylindr ical vessel of int er nal r adius 6 cm. Find
(d) 6 t he height of wat er in t he cylindr ical vessel.
[TERM 2, 2011] [TERM 2, 2012]
13.214 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

5. A vessel is in t he for m of hemi spher i cal bowl

su r m ou n t ed by a h ol l ow cy l i n der of sam e 2.8 m
di amet er. The di amet er of t he hemi spher i cal
bowl is 14 cm and t he t ot al height of t he vessel is
13 cm Find t he t ot al sur face ar ea of t he vessel.
 22 
  7 
  2.1 m
[TERM 2, 2013]
6. A wooden t oy was m ade by scoopi n g out a
hemispher e of same r adius fr om each end of a
sol i d cyl i nder. I f t he hei ght of t he cyl i nder i s
10 cm, and it s base is of r adius 3.5 cm find t he
3m
 22  [TERM 2, 2016]
volume of wood in t he t oy.  
 7 
11. A conical vessel, wit h base r adius 5 cm and height
[TERM 2, 2013] 24 cm, is full of wat er. This wat er is empt ied int o
7. The l ar gest possible spher e is car ved out of a a cylindr ical vessel of base r adius 10 cm. Find
wooden solid cube of side 7 cm. Find t he volume t he hei ght t o whi ch t he wat er wi ll r i se in t he
22 cylindr ical vessel.
of t he wood left . [Use   ] [TERM 2, 2016]
7
[TERM 2, 2014] 12. A spher e of diamet er 12 cm is dr opped in a r ight
8. A solid wooden t oy is in t he for m of a hemispher e cir cular cylindr ical vessel par t ly filled with wat er.
sur mounted by a cone of same r adius. The r adius I f the spher e is completely submer ged in wat er,
of hemispher e is 3.5 cm and t he t ot al wood used the water level in the cylindr ical vessel r ises by
5 5
in the making of toy is 166 cm 3 . Find the height 3 cm. Find the diameter of the cylindrical vessel.
6 9
[TERM 2, 2016]
of t he t oy. Al so, fi nd t he cost of pai nt i ng t he
13. The sum of t he r adius of base and height of a
hemispher ical par t of t he t oy at t he r at e of Rs 10 solid r ight cir cular cylinder is 37 cm. I f t he t ot al
 22  sur face ar ea of t he solid cylinder is 1628 sq. cm,
per cm 2. Use 
 7  22 
find t he volume of t he cylinder.  Use   
[TERM 2, 2015]  7
9. A cubi cal bl ock of si de10 cm i s sur mount ed [TERM 2, 2016]
by a hemispher e. What is t he lar gest diamet er 14. The slant height of a fr ust um of a cone is 4 cm
t hat t he hemi spher e can have? Fi nd t he cost and t he per imet er s of it s cir cular ends ar e 18 cm
of pai nt ing t he t ot al sur face ar ea of t he sol i d and 6 cm. Find t he cur ved sur face ar ea of t he
so for med, at t he r at e of Rs 5 per 100 sq. cm. fr ust um.
[Use  = 3.14] [TERM 2, 2017]
[TERM 2, 2015] 3
10. I n t he given figur e, a t ent is in t he shape of a 15. The th part of a conical vessel of inter nal r adius
4
cyl inder sur mount ed by a coni cal t op of same 5 cm and height 24 cm is full of wat er. The wat er
diameter. I f the height and diameter of cylindr ical is empt ied int o a cylindr ical vessel wit h int er nal
par t ar e 2.1 m and 3 m r espect ively and t he slant r adi u s 10 cm . F i n d t h e h ei gh t of w at er i n
height of conical par t is 2.8 m, find t he cost of cylindr ical vessel.
canvas needed t o make t he t ent if t he canvas is [TERM 2, 2017]
avai l abl e at t he r at e of Rs. 500/sq. m et r e. 16. A heap of r ice is in t he for m of a cone of base
diameter 24 m and height 3.5 m. Find the volume
 22 
 Use    of t he r ice. H ow much canvas clot h is r equir ed t o
7 just cover t he heap?
[DELH I , 2018]
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.215

17. A wooden ar t i cle was made by scooping out a Accor ding t o t he quest ion,
hemispher e fr om each of t he solid cylinder, as
Volume of spher e = volume of wat er r ising up
shown in fig. I f t he height of t he cylinder is 10 cm
and it s base is of r adius 3.5 cm. Find t he t ot al 4 3
sur face ar ea of t he ar t icle.  r   R2 H [½]
3
Subst i t ut i n g t h e gi ven val u es i n t h e above
equat ion.

4
  (9)3   (18)2 H
3
[DELH I , 2018]

4 Mark Questions 4 (9)3

H 
18. Fr om a solid cylinder whose height is 15 cm and 3 (18)2
di amet er 16 cm, a coni cal cavi t y of t he same
H =3
height and same diamet er is hollowed out . Find
t he t ot al sur face ar ea of t he r emai ni ng sol i d. H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (a). [½]
[Take  = 3.14] 2. We know t hat volume of a solid hemispher e is
[TERM 2, 2011] given by
19. A hemispher ical t ank, full of wat er, is empt ied by
2 3
25 V  r
a pipe at t he r at e of . H ow much t ime will it 3
7
t ake t o empt y half t he t ank if t he diamet er of t he Also, surface area of a solid hemisphere is given by
base of t he t ank is 3 m? S = 3r 2 [½]
[TERM 2, 2012]
Wher e, r is t he r adius of t he solid hemispher e
20. Wat er is flowing t hr ough a cylindr ical pipe, of
int er nal diamet er 2 cm, int o a cylindr ical t ank of Accor ding t o t he quest ion,
base r adi u s 40 cm , at t h e r at e of 0.4 m /s. Volume and sur face ar ea of a solid hemispher e
Det er mine t he r ise in level of wat er in t he t ank
ar e numer ically equal
in half an hour.
[TERM 2, 2013] 2 3
 r = 3 r 2
21. 150 spher ical mar bles, each of diamet er 1.4 cm, 3
ar e dr opped in a cylindr ical vessel of diamet er
7 cm containing some water, which ar e completely 2r =9
immer sed in wat er. Find t he r ise in t he level of We know t hat 2 r = diamet er
wat er in t he vessel.
 diamet er = 9 unit s
[TERM 2, 2014]
22. F r om a sol i d cyl i n der of h ei gh t 2.8cm an d H ence, t he diamet er of t he solid hemispher e is
diamet er 4.2 cm, a coni cal cavi t y of t he same 9 unit s. [½]
height and same diamet er is hollowed out . Find 3. Tot al sur face ar ea of a solid hemispher e = 3  r 2
t he t ot al sur face ar ea of t he r emaining solid.
 3 r 2  462
 22 
 Tak e   7 
   22 
 3   r 2  462
[TERM 2, 2014]  7
 Solutions 462  7
 r2 
1. Let r and R denote the r adii of spher e and cylinder 3  22
r espect ively.
L et H denot e t he r ise in t he wat er level.  r 2  49

d 18 D 36  r  7 cm [1]
 r    9cm and R    18cm
2 2 2 2
13.216 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

Tot al sur face ar ea of t he vessel = Cur ved sur face

2 3
Volume of hemispher e  r ar ea of t h e cy l i n der + Su r f ace ar ea of t h e
3 hemispher e = 2r h + 2r 2
2 22 = 2  r (h + r ) [1]
  777
3 7 Subst it ut ing t he values,

2156 22
  718.67 cm 3  2  7(6  7) = 572 cm 2
3 7
Hence the sur face area of the vessel is 572 cm 2. [1]
So t he volume of hemispher e is 718.67 cm 3. [1]
6. 3.5 cm
4. L et R and r be t he r adii of hemispher ical bowl
and cylindr ical vessel r espect ively and h be t he
height of wat er pr esent in t he cylindr ical vessel.
Vol ume of wat er i n t h e hemi spher i cal bowl
10 cm
2 2 22
  R3   999
3 3 7

10692
 cm 3 [1]
7 3.5 cm
Thi s whol e vol ume of wat er i s empt i ed i n a We know t hat ,
cylindr ical vessel of int er nal r adius 6 cm. H eight of t he cylinder (h ) = 10 cm
Ther efor e, Vol ume of wat er i n t he cyl i ndr i cal Radius of hemispher e (r ) = 3.5 cm
10692 H ence, Radius of cylinder (r ) = 3.5 cm
vessel  cm 3
7 Vol ume of wood i n t he t oy = Vol ume of t he
10692 cylinder – 2 × Volume of each hemispher e. [1]
 r 2h  [1]
7 2
 
22 10692  ( r 2 h)   2    r 3  [1]
 66h   3 
7 7
Subst it ut ing t he values,
10692
h
792  22   4 22 
  (3.5)2  10     (3.5)3 
 h = 13.5 cm  7  3 7 
Ther efor e, t he height of wat er in t he cylindr ical = 385 – 179.66 = 205.33 cm 3
vessel is 13.5 cm. [1]
H ence t he vol ume of t he wood i n t he t oy i s
5. 205.33 cm 2. [1]
7. Side of cube = 7 cm
Volume of cube = s3
13 cm = 7 × 7 × 7 = 343 cm 3 [1]
7 cm
7
Radius of t he spher e car ved out   3.5cm
2

4 3
L et us assume t he r adius of t he cylinder be r and Volume of the spher e of r adius 3.5 cm   r [1]
t he height be h . 3
Volume of t he spher e
14
The r adius of hemispher ical bowl   7cm
2 4 22 3
    3.5  179.7 cm 3
Vessel H eight = 13 cm [1] 3 7
Height of the cylinder = Total height of t he vessel- Volume of wood left = Volume of cube – Volume
Radius of t he hemispher ical bowl So, of spher e car ved out
 13 – 7 = 6 cm Volume of wood left = 343 – 179.7 = 163.3 cm 3
Thus, 163.3 cm 3 of wood was left . [1]
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.217

8. L et h r epr esent t he hei ght of t he cone and r Tot al sur face ar ea of t he solid = Tot al Sur face
r epr esent t he r adius of t he base of t he cone. ar ea of t he cube + Cur ved sur face ar ea of t he
I t i s gi ven t hat t he r adi us of hemi spher e i s hemispher e – ar ea of t he base of t he hemispher e
3.5 cm and t he t ot al wood used in t he making of
 6 a2  2 r 2   r 2 [1]
5 3
t oy is 166 cm 22 22
6  6  102  2   52   52
T h er ef or e t h e t ot al v ol u m e of t h e t oy i s 7 7

5 22
166 cm 3 . [1]  6  10  10   25
6 7
Volume of t he t oy = Volume of t he hemispher e + = 600 + 78.57
Volume of t he cone. = 678.57 cm 2 [1]
2 3 1 2 The cost of paint ing t he t ot al sur face ar ea of t he
 Volume of t he t oy  r  r h solid so for med, at t he r at e of Rs 5 per 100 sq. cm
3 3
1 678.57
=  r 2  2r  h    5  33.93
3 100
5 1 22 2
H ence, t he amount is Rs. 33.93. [1]
 166     3.5  2  3.5  h  10. Given,
6 3 7
H eight of t he cylindr ical par t = 2.1 m
1001 269.5
  7  h  Diamet er of t he cylindr ical par t = 3 m
6 21
Slant height (l) of t he conical par t = 2.8 m
1001  21
  7h Accor ding t o t he figur e, [1]
6  269.5
Tot al canvas used = CSA of t he cylindr ical par t +
21021 CSA of t he conical par t
  7 h
1617 = 2  rh +  rl
 13  7  h 22 3
   2  2.1  2.8
 h  13  7  6 [1] 7 2
Ther efor e t he height of t he t oy = height of cone +
22 3
r adius of hemispher e    4.2  2.8 
7 2
= 6 + 3.5 = 9.5 cm
To paint t he hemispher ical par t we need t o find 22 3
  7
out t he cur ved sur face ar ea of t he hemispher e. 7 2
Cur ved sur face ar ea of t he hemispher e = 2 r 2 = 33 m 2 [1]
22 2
Cost of 1m 2 canvas = Rs 500
 2   3.5
7 Cost of 33m 2 canvas = 33 × 500 = 16,500
Ther efor e, t he cost of t he canvas needed t o make
44 t he t ent is Rs. 16,500. [1]
  12.25
7 11. Radius of t he conical vessel = r 1 = 5 cm
= 77 cm 2 H eight of t he conical vessel = h 1 = 24
Now, cost t o paint 1 cm 2 ar ea t he cost is Rs 10 Radius of t he cylindr ical vessel = r 2 = 10 cm
 Cost t o paint 77 cm 2 t he cost = 77 × 10 = 770 L et t he wat er r ise upt o t he height of h 2 cm in t he
Ther efor e, t he cost of paint ing t he hemispher ical cylindr ical vessel.
par t is Rs 770. [1] Now, volume of wat er in conical vessel = Volume
9. L et r be t he r adius of t he hemispher e and a be of wat er in cylindr ical vessel [1]
t he lengt h of t he sides of t he cubical block.
1
The lar gest diamet er t he hemispher e can have is H ence,  r 2 h   r22 h2
10 cm. 3 1 1
13.218 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

Subst it ut ing t he value of r in (1), we get ,

r12 h1  3r22 h2
7 + h = 37
52 × 24 = 3 × 102 × h 2 [1]
 h = 30 cm
5  5  24 Now, we know t he for mula for t he Volume of t he
h2   2cm Cylinder as  r 3 h
3  10  10
Thus, t he wat er will r ise up t o t he height of 2 cm So, Volume of t he Cylinder
in t he cylindr ical vessel. [1]
22
12. Diamet er of spher e is 12 cm,   7  7  30  4,620 cm 3
7
Ther efor e, r adius of spher e is 6 cm.
Hence, the volume of the cylinder is 4,620 cm 3. [1]
4 3 4 3 3
Volume of spher e   r    6  288 cm 14. Given, Per imet er of lower end, c = 6 cm
3 3
Per imet er of upper end, C = 18 cm
L et R be t he r adius of cylindr ical vessel. [1]
Slant height , l = 4 cm
5 L et r adius of upper end be R and r adius of lower
Rise in t he wat er level of t he cylinder = h = 3 cm
9 end be r
32 As, We know
= cm C = 2 R
9
Ri se in t he volume of wat er in t he cyl indr ical  2 R = 18 [1]
32 32 18
vessel   R2 h   R2   R2 [1] R
9 9 2
Now, volume of wat er displaced by t he spher e is
equal t o volume of t he spher e. 9
R cm

32
Ther efor e,  R2  288 As, c = 6 cm
9
 2 R = 6
288  9
R2   81 6
32 r 
2
R = 9 cm
H ence, diamet er of t he cylindr ical vessel = 2R = 3
r  cm [1]
2 × 9 = 18 cm. [1] 
13. L et suppose t he base and height of t he solid r ight Cur ved sur face ar ea of fr ust um =  (R + r ) l
cir cular cylinder be r cm and h cm, r espect ively.
Accor ding t o t he quest ion,  9 3
   4
r + h = 37 ....(1)  
Now t he Tot al sur face ar ea = 1628 sq. cm
We know t hat Tot al Sur face ar ea of t he cylinder  12 
   4
is 2 r (r + h ). 
So, 2  r (r + h ) = 1628 ....(2) [1]  48 cm 2
For m (1) and (2), Ther efor e, t he cur ved sur face ar ea of fr ust um is
2  r (37) = 1628 48 cm 2. [1]
 2 r  44 15. Given: H eight (h) of conical vessel = 24 cm
22 Radius (r ) of t he conical vessel = 5 cm
 2  r  44
7 Radius (R) of t he cylindr ical vessel = 10 cm
44  7 Volume of t he conical vessel is given by
r 
2  22 1 2
 r = 7 cm [1] V  r h
3
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.219

Accor ding t o t he quest ion t he height of wat er is 2 2

Sur face ar ea of t he heap =  r r  h [1]
3
t h of t he height of t he conical vessel. [1]
4 22
  12 122  3.52
7
3
Ther efor e, volume of wat er  of volume of t he
4 22
  12  12.5
conical vessel 7
 471.42 m 2
3 1
   r 2h Thus 471.42 m 2 ar ea of canvas r equir ed t o cover
4 3
t he heap. [1]
Put t ing t he values 17. L et r be t he r adius of t he hemispher e and t he
3 1 cylinder and h be t he height of t he cylinder.
2
    5  24 For t he hemispher e
4 3
Radius (r ) = 3.5 cm
=  × 25 × 6
Sur face ar ea = 2r 2
= 150  ....(i) [1]
Now, it is given t hat t he wat er is empt ied int o a 22
 2  3.5  3.5
cylindr ical vessel wit h int er nal r adius 10 cm. 7
 77 cm 2 [1]
Volume of a cylinder is given by t he for mula
For t he cylinder.
V = R2 h
Radius (r ) = 3.5cm
Put t ing t he values in t he above equat ion
H eight (h ) = 10cm
V =  × (10)2 × h
Cur ved sur face ar ea of cylinder = 2  r h [1]
V = 100  h ....(ii)
22
Equat ing (i) and (ii), we'll get  2  3.5  10
7
100 h = 150 
 220 cm 2
150 Total sur face ar ea of t he ar t icle = 2 × sur face ar ea
h
100 of t he hemispher e + cur ved sur face ar ea of t he
cylinder.
h = 1.5 cm
Tot al sur face ar ea of the ar t icle=(2 × 77 + 220)cm 2
H ence, hei ght of wat er i n cyl indr i cal vessel is
1.5 cm. [1] = 374 cm 2 [1]
18. Tot al sur face ar ea of r emaining por t ion will be =
d 24 Cur ved sur face ar ea of cylinder + Cur ved sur face
16. Radius of t he heap (r ) =   12m
2 2 ar ea of cone + Ar ea of t he base of t he cylinder
H eight if t he heap (h ) = 3.5 m = 2r h + r l + r 2 [1]
H er e, h = 15 cm,
1 2
Volume of a cone = r h
3 Slant height of cone, l  h2  r 2

1 2 l  152  82  225  64  289

 Volume of t he heap of r ice =  12  3.5 [1]
3 l = 17 cm [1]
1 22 Now t ot al sur face ar ea of r emaining por t ion is,
   144  3.5
3 7 TSA = r l + r 2 + 2r h
 528 m 3  r (l + r + 2h )
 3.14 × 8 (17 + 8 + 2 × 15) [1]
The amount canvas r equir ed = Sur face ar ea of
t he cone made by t he r ice heap.  3.14 × 8 (55)
Sur face ar ea of a cone =  r l  3.14 × 440
 1381.6
wher e l  r 2  h 2 Hence the r equired total sur face area is 1381.6.[1]
13.220 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

19. Di am et er of t h e base of t h e h em i sph er i cal 20. We know,

t ank = 3 m I nt er nal diamet er of cir cular end of pipe = 2cm
3  Radius (r 1) of cir cular end of pipe
 The r adius of t he hemispher ical t ank  m
2 1
 1c m  m  0.01 m [1]
2 100
volume of t he hemispher ical t ank   r 2
3 Speed of wat er = 0.4 m/s = 0.4×60 = 24 met r e/min
L engt h of wat er column in one minut e = 24 m
2 22 3 3 3
     Volume of wat er t hat flows t hr ough t he pipe in
3 7 2 2 2
1 minut e   r12 h [1]
99 3
 m [1]
14   (0.01)2  24  0.0024 m 3
 The amount of wat er i n t he hemispher ical Volume of wat er t hat flows t hr ough t he pipe in
99 30 minut es = 30 × 0.0024 m 3 = 0.072m 3
t ank =  1000 1 m 3  1000 L 
14    Radius (r 3) of base of cylindr ical t ank = 40 cm
= 0.4 m
99000 L et t he r ise in level of the wat er in t he cylindr ical
 lit res [1]
14 t ank filled in 30 minut es be h m.
1 Now, Volume of water filled in t ank in 30 minutes
Volume of wat er t o be empt ied = × Volume of = Volume of wat er flowed in 30 minut es fr om t he
2
pipe. [1]
t he t ank
2
1 99000     r2   h  0.072
  lit r es
2 14 2
  0.4   h  0.072
99000
 lit res [1]  0.16  h  0.072
28
Now, it is given t hat t ank is empt ied at t he r at e 0.072
h 
25 0.16
of lit r es per second.
7  h  0.45 m  45 cm
H ence t he r ise i n t he l evel i n half an hour i s
99000
99000 45 cm. [1]
 Time t aken t o empt y li t r es  28 21. Let h be t he r ise in t he level of wat er in the vessel.
28 25
7 Diamet er of spher ical mar ble = 1.4 cm

1.4
7 99000 Radius of spher ical mar ble   0.7 cm
  seconds 2
25 28
4 3
693000 Volume of spher ical mar ble =  r
 seconds 3
700
= 990 seconds 4 22
Volume of spher ical mar ble =   0.73
3 7
990
= mi nut es Volume of spher ical mar ble
60
= 16.5 minut es 30.184
=  1.437 cm 3 [1]
Ther efor e, it will take 16.5 minut es t o empt y half 21
t he t ank. [1]
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.221

Volume occupied by 150 spher ical mar bles Height of the cone = Height of the cylinder = 2.8cm
= 150 × 1.437 = 215.6 cm 3
Diamet er of t he cylinder = Diamet er of t he cone
Volume of wat er incr eased = 4.2 cm
Hence, Radius of the cylinder = Radius of the cone
2 22 2 = 2.1cm
 r h    3.5  h [1]
7
Slant height (l) of t he conical par t = r 2  h2
Vol ume of wat er i ncr eased = Vol ume of 150
spher ical mar bles.
  2.12   2.82 cm
22 2
  3.5  h  215.6
7  4.41  7.84 cm
215.6  7  12.25 cm
h 2 [1]
22   3.5 = 3.5cm [1]
Now, Tot al Sur face Ar ea of t he r emaining solid =
1509.2 Cur ved Sur face Ar ea of t he Cylindr ical sect ion +
h  5.6 cm
269.5 Cur ved Sur face Ar ea of the Conical section + Ar ea
The level of wat er incr eased by 5.6 cm. [1] of t he base of t he cylinder

 2 r h   r l   r 2 [1]
22. 4.2 cm [1]
 22 22 22 
2  2.1  2.8   2.1  3.5  2
  7 7 7  cm
 
 2.1  2.1 

2.8 cm = (36.96 + 23.1 + 13.86) cm 2

= 73.92 cm 2
H ence, t he t ot al sur face ar ea of t he r emaining
solid = 73.92 cm 2. [1]
13.222 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

[TOPIC 2] Conversion of Solid

Summary
Conversion of Solid from One Shape to Another
For commer cial wor ks and for indust r ial development wor k, we need t o conver t a solid int o anot her solid of
differ ent shape or mor e t han one solid of similar shape but wit h r educed size
A cylinder, a cone and a hemisphere are of equal base and have the same height. The ratio of their
volume is 3:1:2

PREVIOUS YEARS’
5. A far mer connect s a pipe of int er nal diamet er 20
cm fr om a canal int o a cylindr ical t ank which is
10 m in diamet er and 2 m deep. I f t he water flows
EXAMINATION QUESTION t hr ough t he pipe at t he r at e of 4 km per hour, in
how much t ime will t he tank be filled complet ely?
TOPIC 2 [TERM 2, 2014]
6. A hemispher ical bowl of int er nal diamet er 36 cm
1 Mark Questions cont ai ns l i qui d. Thi s l i qui d i s fi l l ed i nt o 72
1. The number of solid spher es, each of diamet er 6 cyl i ndr ical bot t les of di amet er 6 cm. Fi nd t he
cm t hat can be made by melt ing a solid met al height of t he each bot t le, if 10% liquid is wast ed
cylinder of height 45 cm and diamet er 4cm, is: in t his t r ansfer.
(a) 3 (b) 5 [TERM 2, 2015]
(c) 4 (d) 6 7. 504 cones, each of diamet er 3.5 cm and height
[TERM 2, 2014] 3 cm, ar e melted and r ecast into a metallic spher e.
Find t he diamet er of t he spher e and hence find
2 Marks Questions 22
it s sur face ar ea. [Use  ]
2. Two cubes, each of side 4 cm ar e joined end t o 7
end. Find the sur face ar ea of t he r esulting cuboid. [TERM 2, 2015]

[TERM 2, 2011] 8. A well of diamet er 4 m is dug 21 m deep. The

3. A solid spher e of r adius 10.5 cm is melt ed and ear t h t aken out of it has been spr ead evenly all
r ecast int o smaller solid cones, each of r adius 3.5 ar ound it in t he shape of a cir cular r ing of widt h
cm and height 3 cm. find t he number of cones so t o for m an embankment . Find t he height of t he
embank ment .
22
for med. (Use   ) [TERM 2, 2016]
7
[TERM 2, 2012] 9. Wat er in a canal, 5.4 m wide and 1.8 m deep, is
flowing wit h a speed of 25 km/hour. H ow much
3 Marks Questions ar ea can it ir r igat e in 40 minut es, if 10 cm of
4. Wat er in a canal, 6 m wide and 1.5 m deep, is st anding wat er is r equir ed for ir r igat ion?
flowing at a speed of 4 km/h. H ow much ar ea will [TERM 2, 2016]
it ir r igate in 10 minutes, if 8 cm of standing wat er 10. The dimensions of a solid ir on cuboid ar e 4.4 m ×
is needed for ir r igat ion? 2. 6 m × 1.0 m. I t i s melt ed and r ecast int o a
[TERM 2, 2014] hollow cylindr ical pipe of 30 cm inner r adius and
t hickness 5 cm. Find t he lengt h of t he pipe.
[TERM 2, 2017]
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.223

4 Marks Questions n × Volume of t he solid spher es = Volume of t he

solid cylinder
11. Sushant has a vessel, of t he for m of an inver t ed
cone, open at t he t op, of height 11 cm and r adius 4
of t op as 2.5 cm and i s ful l of wat er. M et al li c n   R3  180
3
spher ical balls each of diamet er 0.5 cm ar e put in
2 4
t he vessel due t o which t h of t he wat er in t he n    33  180
5 3
vessel flows out . Find how many balls wer e put
in t he vessel. Sushant made t he ar r angement so 180  3
n 5
t hat t he wat er t hat flows out ir r igat es t he flower 4  27
beds. What value has been shown by Sushant ?
Thus, t he number of solid spher es t hat can be
[TERM 2, 2014]
for med is 5.
12. A well of diamet er 4 m is dug 14 m deep. The
ear t h t aken out is spr ead evenly all ar ound t he H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (b). [½]
well t o for m a 40 cm high embankment . Find t he 2. Gi ven t hat , si des of each cube = 4 cm
widt h of t he embankment . Now, when t he cubes ar e joined end t o end, t hen
[TERM 2, 2015]
The lengt h of t he r esul t ing cuboi d = 4 + 4 = 8 cm
13. Wat er is flowing at t he r at e of 2.52 km/h t hr ough Wi dt h of t he r esul t i ng cuboid = 4 cm
a cylindr ical pipe into a cylindrical tank, the r adius
of whose base is 40 cm, if t he incr ease in t he level H eight of t he r esul t i ng cuboid = 4 cm
of wat er in t he t ank, in half an hour is 3.15 m, We k now t hat , t he sur face ar ea of t he cuboid
find t he int er nal diamet er of t he pipe. = 2 (I b + bh + hl) [1]
[TERM 2, 2015] = 2 (8 × 4 + 4 × 4 + 4 × 8)
14. Fr om each end of a solid met al cylinder, met al = 2 (32 + 16 + 32)
was scooped out in hemispher ical for m of same
= 2 (80)
diamet er. The height of t he cylinder is 10 cm and
it s base is of r adius 10 cm. The r est of the cylinder = 160 cm 2
is melt ed and conver t ed int o a cylindr ical wir e H ence, t he sur face ar ea of t he r esul t i ng cuboid
of 1.4 cm t hickness. Find t he lengt h of t he wir e. is 160 cm 2. [1]
22 3. Since t he solid spher e has been melted and r ecast
[Use  ]
7 int o smaller solid cones, t he t ot al volume of all
[TERM 2, 2015]
t he solid cones will be equal t o t he volume of t he
 Solutions sol i d spher e. L et n sol i d cones ar e for med by
melt ing a solid spher e.
1. L et r and h be t he r adius and t he height of t he
L et R and r be t he r adi i of spher e and cone
cylinder, r espect ively.
r espect ively and h be t he height of t he cone.
Given: Diamet er of t he cylinder = 4cm
 R = 10.5 cm, r = 3.5 cm and h = 3 cm
Radius of t he cylinder, (r ) = 2 cm
Volume of t he solid spher e
H eight of t he cylinder (h ) = 45 cm
Volume of t he solid cylinder 4
  R3
3
= r 2 h
= × 2 × 2 × 45 cm 2 4 22
   10.5  10.5  10.5
= 180  cm 3 [½] 3 7
Suppose t he r adius of each spher e be R cm. = 4851 cm 3 [1]
Diamet er of t he spher e = 6 cm Now, volume of one smaller solid cone
Radius of t he spher e, R = 3 cm 1 2
 r h
L et n be t he number of solid spher es for med by 3
melt ing t he solid met allic cylinder.
13.224 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

1 22 Rat e of flow of wat er, h = 4 km / h = 4000 m /h [1]

   3.5  3.5  3
3 7 L et t be t he t ime t aken t o fill t he t ank. So, t he
wat er flows t hr ough t he pipe in t hour s will equal
= 38.5 cm 3
t o t he volume of t he t ank
Clear ly, volume of solid spher e = n × volume of
one solid cone.   r 2  h  t   R2 H [1]
2
4851 = n × 38.5  1
     4000  t    52  2
 10 
4851
n
38.5 25  2  100 5
t 
4000 4
 n = 126
1
Therefor e, 126 cones ar e for med by melting a solid H ence, t he t ime t aken is 1 H our s or 1 hour
4
spher e. [1] and 15 minut es. [1]
4. I t is given t hat widt h of canal is 6 m and dept h is 6. A hemispher ical bowl of int er nal diamet er 36 cm
1.5 m.
(Given)
Speed of wat er in canal is 4 km/h.
Radius of t he hemispher ical bowl is 18 cm.
Distance cover ed by water in 1 hour or 60 minutes
Radius of cylindr ical bot t les = 3 cm
= 4 km
2 3
4 1 Volume of hemispher e = r
Dist ance cover ed in 1 minut e   km 3
60 15
Dist ance cover ed in 10 minut es 2 22
   18  18  18
3 7
1 2 2000
 10  k m  m [1] = 12219.43 cm 3 [1]
15 3 3
10% liquid is wasted in transfer from hemispherical
Vol ume of wat er fl owi ng t hr ough canal i n 10
bowl t o cylindr ical bot t les.
minut es = Volume of ar ea ir r igat ed
= 10% of volume of t he hemispher e
Volume of water in canal = Ar ea irr igated × Height
Volume of wat er in canal = 1
  12219.43
10
8
Area ir rigat ed  m [1] = 1221.943 cm 3 is wast ed.
100
The volume of t he r emaining liquid = 12219.430
100 – 1221.943 = 10997.487
Ar ea ir r igat ed = Volume of wat er in canal 
8
L et , h r epr esent t he height of t he cylinder
2000 100 Volume of cylinder =  r 2 h
Ar ea ir r igat ed   6  1.5 
3 8 22
 33 h [1]
Ar ea ir r igat ed = 75,000 m 2 7
Ther efor e, 75,000 m 2 ar ea wi ll be i r r i gat ed i n 22
Volume of 72 cylindr ical bot t les =  9  h  72
10 minut es. [1] 7
5. For t he given t ank. Volume of t he r emaining liquid aft er wast age =
Volume of 72 cylindr ical bot t les
Diamet er = 10 m
Radius, R = 5 m 22
 10997.487   9  h  72
Dept h, H = 2 m 7
h = 5.4 cm
20
I nt er nal r adius of t he pipe, r   10cm Ther efor e, the height of each bottle is 5.4 cm. [1]
2
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.225

7. L et r and h be t he r adius and t he diamet er of t he

r 2h
cone r espect i vel y and R be t he r adi us of t he H 
spher e. R2  r 2
Di amet er and hei ght of each cone 3.5 cm and
22  21
3 cm r espect ively. H   4m [1]
52  22
3.5
Radius of t he cone = cm H ence, t he height of t he embankment is 4 m .
2

1 2 9. Given
Volume of cone = r h
3
Dept h of canal = 1.8 m
1 22 3.5 3.5 Widt h of canal = 5.4 m
    3
3 7 2 2 H eight of st anding wat er = 10 cm =0.1 m
77 Speed of flowing wat er = 25 km/h
 [1]
8 25000
=
77 60
Volume of 504 cones =  504  4851 cm 3
8 1250
 m / min [1]
They ar e melt ed and made int o spher e. 3
 volume of 504 cones = volume of t he spher e Volume of wat er flowing out of canal in 1 min 
widt h × dept h × wat er flowing in 1 minut e
4
4851    r3 [1]
3 1250
 5.4  1.8 
3
4851  3  7
 r3   1157.625 cm  4050 m 3 [1]
4  22
= r = 10.5 cm Volume of wat er flowing out of canal in 40 min 
40 × 4050 m 3 = 162000 m 3
 Diamet er = 2 × 10.5 = 21 cm
Ar ea of ir r igat ion × H eight of st anding wat er =
Tot al sur face ar ea of spher e = 4  r 2
Volume of wat er flowing out in 40 minut es.
22
4   10.52  1386 cm 2 Ar ea of ir r igat ion
7
Volumeof wat er out in 40min
Tot al sur face ar ea of spher e = 1386 cm 2 [1] 
H eight of st anding wat er
8. L et suppose r and h be t he r adius and dept h of
t he well r espect ively. 162000

0.1
4
r   2m and h  21m [1]  1620000 m 2
2
L et suppose R and H be t he out er r adius and  162 hect ar e ( 1 hect ar e = 10000 m 2)
height of t he embankment r espect ively. I t can ir r igat e 162 hect ar e in 40 min. [1]
 R=r +3=2+3=5m 10. Given,
N ow, Vol ume of t he ear t h u sed t o for m t he Volume of solid ir on cuboid = 4.4 m × 2.6 m ×
embankment = Volume of t he ear t h dug out of 1.0 m = 440 cm × 260 cm × 100 cm
t he well. I nt er nal r adius of pipe, r = 30 cm
Ext er nal r adius of pipe, R = 30 + 5 = 35 cm [1]
  R2  r 2 H   r 2 h
  [1]
L et lengt h of pipe be h cm
13.226 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

Volume of ir on in t he pipe 2 3
  2.5  11  n  10   0.25
  R2 h   r 2 h   h R2  r 2
   68.75  0.15625n
=  h (352 – 302)  n  440
=  h (35 – 30) (35 + 30) Thus, t he number of spher ical balls dr opped in
=  h (5 – 65) [1] t he vessel is 440.
Vol ume of ir on i n pi pe = Vol ume of sol i d i r on Sushant has shown a r esponsible attitude by using
cuboid t he wat er sensibly by making t he ar r angement
 h (5 × 65) = 440 × 260 × 100 so t hat wat er t hat flows out , ir r igat es t he flower
beds. [1]
440  260  100  7
h 12. L et h be t he dept h of t he well, h = 14 m and let r
5  65  22
be t he r adius of t he well,
h = 11, 200 cm = 112 m r =d/2=4/2=2m [1]
Ther efor e, lengt h of pipe is 112 m. [1] Now let R be the outer r adius of the embankment,
and h be t he height of t he embankment i.e. h ' =
11. 2.5 cm [1] 40 cm = 0.4 m,
Now as we know volume of t he embankment and
volume of t he well will be same,
Ther efor e,
Volume of well = Volume of t he embankment
11 cm   r 2 h   R2 h '   r 2 h '

  r 2 h   h ' R2  r 2
  [1]

Taking  common fr om bot h sides,

 r 2 h  h ' R2  r 2
 
Given,
The height , h of t he conical vessel = 11cm N ow subst i t ut ing val ues of r , h , h ' and solvi ng
for R,
Radius, r 1 of t he conical vessel = 2.5cm
Radius, r 2 of t he met allic spher ical balls  22  14  0.4 R2  22 
0.5
  0.25cm [1] 4  14
2   R2  4
0.4
L et t he number of spher ical balls dr opped in t he
vessel be ‘n '.  10 × 14 = R2 – 4

Volume of t he wat er spilled = Volume of t he t ot al  140 + 4 = R2

spher ical balls dr opped.  R2 = 144 [1]
 R = 12
2
  Vol ume of cone = n  Volume of one [1] Now since R = 12 m and r = 2 m,
5
spherical ball Ther efor e Wi dt h of t he embank ment wi l l be
di f fer ence of t h e ou t er r adi u s( R ) and i nn er
2 1 4 r adius(r ),
   r 2 h  n   r23
5 3 1 3 Widt h = R – r = 12 – 2 = 10 m
H ence, widt h of t he embankment is 10 m. [1]
 r12 h  n  10r23 [1]
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.227

13. L et us suppose t he int er nal r adius of t he pipe is 14. The height of t he cylinder is 10 cm and it s base is
r m and t he dist ance cover ed by t he wat er in half of r adius 4.2 cm. (Given)
an hour will be t he lengt h of t he cylindr ical pipe L et r be t he r adius of t he base of t he cylinder and
i .e. the hemispher e and h be the height of the cylinder.
1 L et R and H be t he r adius and t he height of t he
H  2.52   1.26 km  1.26  1000m  1260 m , cylindr ical wir e r espect ively.
2
Volume of t he cylinder = r 2h [1]
[1]
Now r adius of base of cylindr ical t ank is 40 cm 22
  4.22  10
i.e. 0.4 m and height is 3.15 m, 7
H ence volume of wat er filled in t ank in half an = 554.4 cm 3
hour will be,
Volume of t he hemispher ical par t scooped out =
Vol ume [1] 2 × volume of t he hemispher e
22 2
  r 2h   0.4  0.4  3.15  22  0.16  0.45  2   r3
7 3
 22  0.072
4 22
 1.584 m 3    4.23
3 7
N ow t hi s vol ume i s same as vol ume of wat er
= 310.464 cm 3 [1]
r eleased by t he pipe,
Remaining volume of t he cylinder aft er scooping
Volume of wat er r eleased by pipe = 1.584 m 3
out t wo hemispher es = 554.4 cm 3 – 310.464 cm 3
  r 2 H  1.584 [1] = 243.936 cm 3 [1]
  r 2  1260  1.584 Diamet er of t he cylindr ical wir e is given 1.4 cm
So, t he r adius of t he cylindr ical wir e is 0.7 cm
1.584 1.584  7 0.072 0.004 The volume of t he wir e = Remaining volume of
 r2    
  1260 22  1260 180 10 t he cylinder aft er scooping out t wo hemispher es
 0.0004
   0.72  h  243.936
 r 2 = 0.0004 Wher e, h is t he lengt h of t he wir e.
 r = 0.02
 243.936  1.54  h
Hence the inter nal r adius of the pipe is, r = 0.02m
Ther efor e diamet er is 0.04 m or 4 cm. [1] 243.936
h
1.54
h = 158.4 cm [1]
13.228 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

[TOPIC 3] Frustum of a Right Circular Cone

Summary
Frustum of a Right Cicular Cone
When a cone is cut by a plane par allel t o t he base of t he cone t hen t he por t ion bet ween t he plane and t he base
is called t he fr ust um of t he cone.
L et R and r be t he r adii of t he base and t he t op of t he fr ust um of a cone.
L et h be it s height and  be it s slant height .
Then,
VOLU M E OF TH E FRU STU M OF TH E CON E
r

h l

h 2
 [ R  r 2  Rr ] cubic unit s.
3
LATERAL SU RFACE AREA OF TH E FRU STU M OF TH E CON E

= ( R  r ), wher e 2  h 2  ( R  r )2 sq unit s.

TOTAL SU RFACE AREA OF TH E FRU STU M OF TH E CON E
= (ar ea of t he base) + (ar ea of t he t op) + lat er al sur face ar ea)
= [ R 2  r 2  ( R  r )]
= [ R 2  r 2  ( R  r )] sq unit s.

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 3 Marks Questions

2. The r adii of t he cir cular ends of a bucket of height
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS 15 cm ar e 14 cm and r cm (r <14 cm). I f the volume
of bucket is 5390 cm 3, t hen find t he value of r.
TOPIC 3 22
[Use   ]
7
1 Mark Question [TERM 2, 2011]
1. A solid r ight cir cular cone is cut int o t wo par t s at 3. A sol i d m et al l i c r i gh t ci r cu l ar con e 20 cm
t he middle of it s height by a plane par allel t o it s high and whose vertical angle is 60°, is cut into two
base. The r at io of t he volume of t he smaller cone parts at the middle of its height by a plane par allel
t o t he whole cone is to its base. I f the frustum so obtained be drawn into
(a) 1 : 2 1
(b) 1 : 4 a wir e of diameter cm, find the length of the
12
(c) 1 : 6 wir e.
(d) 1 : 8 [TERM 2, 2014]

[TERM 2, 2012]
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.229

4. I n t he given figur e, fr om t he t op of a solid cone of but of height 2.8 m, and t he canvas t o be used
height 12 cm and base r adi us 6 cm, a cone of cost s Rs. 100 per sq. m, fi nd t he amount , t he
height 4 cm is r emoved by a plane par allel t o t he associat ions will have t o pay. What values ar e
base. Find t he t ot al sur face ar ea of t he r emaining 22
 22  shown by t hese associat ions? [Use   ]
and 5  2.236 . 7
solid. Use   
7 
[TERM 2, 2015]
7. I n t he figur e below, a decor at ive block, made up
of t wo solids - a cube and a hemi-spher e? The
4 cm base of t he block is a cube of side 6 cm and t he
hemispher e fixed on t he t op has a diamet er of
3.5 cm. Find t he t ot al sur face ar ea of t he block.
12 cm  22 
 use   
7

6 cm

[TERM 2, 2015]
5. I n t he figur e below, fr om a cuboidal solid met allic
bl ock , of di mensi ons 15cm × 10cm × 5cm, a
cylindr ical hole of diamet er 7 cm is dr illed out .
Find t he sur face ar ea of t he r emai ni ng block .
[TERM 2, 2016]
 22 
Use   7  4 Marks Questions
 
8. A dr inking glass is in t he shape of t he fr ust um of
7 cm a cone of height 14 cm. The diamet er s of it s t wo
cir cular ends ar e 4 cm and 2 cm. Find the capacity
22
of t he glass. [Use   ]
7
[TERM 2, 2012]
5 cm
9. A bucket open at t he t op and made up of a met al
sheet is in t he for m of a fr ust um of a cone. The
dept h of t he bucket is 24 cm and t he diamet er s of
i t s upper and l ower ci r cul ar ends ar e 30 cm
and 10 cm r espect ively. Find t he cost of met al
sheet used in it at t he r at e of Rs. 10 per 100 cm 2.
10 cm [Use  = 3.14]
15 cm [TERM 2, 2013]
10. A cont ainer open at t he t op, is in t he for m of a
[TERM 2, 2015] fr ust um of a cone of height 24 cm wit h r adii of it s
6. Due t o sudden floods, some welfar e associat ions lower and upper cir cular ends as 8 cm and 20 cm
joint ly r equested t he gover nment to get 100 tent s r espect i vel y. Fi nd t he cost of mi l k whi ch can
fixed immediat ely and offer ed t o cont r ibut e 50% complet ely fill t he cont ainer at t he r at e of 21 per
of t he cost . I f t he lower par t of each t ent is of t he 22
lit r e. [Use   ]
for m of a cylinder of diamet er 4.2 m and height 7
4 m wit h t he conical upper par t of same diamet er [TERM 2, 2016]
13.230 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

11. A bucket open at the top is in the form of a frustum 2

of a cone wit h a capacity of 12308.8 cm 3. The r adii 1  R h
  
of t he t op and bot t om cir cular ends ar e 20 cm 3  2 2
and 12 cm r espect ively. Find t he height of t he
bucket and the area of metal sheet used in making 1 R2 h
   
t he bucket . (Use  = 3.14) 3 4 2
[TERM 2, 2016]
 R2 h
12. The height of a cone is 10 cm. The cone is divided 
24
int o two par t s using a plane par allel t o it s base at
t he middl e of i t s height . Find t he r at io of t he  R2 h
volumes of t he t wo par t s. Volume of t he smaller cone 3 1
 24  
[TERM 2, 2017] Volume of t he whole cone 2 24 8
R h
 Solutions 3
Ther efor e, t he r at i o of t he vol ume of t he small er
1. L et t he height of t he whol e cone be h and i t s
cone t o t he whol e cone is 1 : 8. [½]
r adi us be R.
Opt i on (d) is cor r ect .
Si nce, t he cone has been cut i nt o t wo par t s at
t he mi ddl e of it s hei ght by a plane par all el t o i t s 2. Since t he bucket will be in a shape of fr ust um,
base. And volume of a fr ust um is,
h 1
Ther efor e, hei ght of t he smaller cone wi ll be . V   h R2  r 2  R  r
 
2 3
H er e h is t he height of t he bucket i.e. h = 15 cm
A
R is the r adius of the lar ger circular end, R= 14cm,
h/2 Volume is given i.e. V = 5390 cm 3
D r E 1
h V   h R2  r 2  R  r
 
M 3
1
 5390    15 14 2  r 2  14  r
  [1]
3
B N C
R
5390  3
  14 2  r 2  14 r
 
  15
L et t he r adius of t he smaller cone be r .
5390  7 2
Now, we can see that AME and ANC ar e similar   196  r  14 r 
t r iangles. 22  5
2
AM M E  49  7   r  196  14r 
 
AN NC 2
 343   r  196  14r 
h/2 r
 
h R  r 2  196  14 r  343  0 [1]

R  r 2  14 r  147  0
r 
2  r 2  21r  7r  147  0
1  r  r  21  7  r  21  0
Now, Volume of t he whole cone =  R2 h
3
  r  21 r  7  0
2
R h Now r = 7 or r = – 21
 , and [½]
3
Since r cannot be negat ive,
1 2h Ther efor e r = 7 cm. [1]
Volume of t he small er cone  r
3 2
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.231

Volume of t he fr ust um
3. C
1
V   R2 H  x2 h
 
30° 3
20 cm 2 2
S x Q 1   20   10  
P V      .20    .10
3   3   3 
10 cm

A R B 1  8000 1000 
V    
3  3 3 

1 1  7000 
r  cm V  
24 3  3 

l
1
L et A CB be t h e con e wh ose v er t i cal an gl e V    7000
9
ACB = 60°.
L et R and x be t he r adii of t he lower and upper 7000
V  
end of t he fr ust um. 9
H er e, height of t he cone, The volumes of t he fr ust um and t he wir e for med
ar e equal
OC = 20 cm = H and CP = h = 10 cm
L et us consider P as t he mid-Point of OC. Aft er  1
2
7000
cut t ing t he cone int o t wo par t s t hr ough P.    l   Volumeof wire   r 2 h
 
 24  9
20
OP   10 cm [1] 7000
2 l  24  24
9
1 l = 448000 cm
Also, ACO and OCB   60 o  30 o
2 l = 4480 m
Aft er cut t i ng cone CQS fr om cone CBA , t he H ence t he lengt h of t he wir e is 4480 m. [1]
r emaining solid obt ained is a fr ust um. 4. When fr om t he t op of a sol i d cone of hei ght
Now, in t r iangle CPQ: 12 cm and base r adius 6 cm, a cone of height
4 cm is r emoved by a plane par all el t o t he base
x t he r emai ning sol id will be a fr ust um.
t an 30 o 
10

1 x P

3 10
Q 4 cm
10
x cm R
3
I n t r iangle COB : 12 cm

R
t an 30 o 
CO

1 R S T

3 20
6 cm
20
R cm [1]
3
13.232 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

The t ot al sur face ar ea of t he fr ust um 5. Gi ven t he di mensi ons of t he cuboi dal box as
15 cm × 10 cm × 5 cm.
=  l  r1  r2    r12   r22
L engt h 'l' of t he cuboidal block = 15 cm
Wher e
Br eadt h 'b' of t he cuboidal block = 10cm
r 1 i s t he smal ler r adius of t he fr ust um.
H eight 'h' of t he cuboidal block = 5cm
r 2 i s t he l ar ger r adius of t he fr ust um = 6 cm.
l i s t he slant height of t he fr ust um. L et d and r r epr esent t he diamet er and r adius of
t he cylindr ical hole r espect ively. [1]
PQR  PST by AA si mil ar it y cr i t er ion.
The diamet er of t he cylindr ical hole = 7cm
QR PQ The r adius of t he cylindr ical hole
 
ST PS
d 7
r 4 =   3.5 cm
 1  2 2
6 12
I t is given that from a cuboidal solid metallic block,
4 a cylindr ical hole of diamet er 7 cm is dr illed out .
 r1   6  2 cm [1]
12 Ther efor e t he sur face ar ea of t he r emaining block
H eight of t he fr ust um i s 12 cm – 4 cm = 8 cm = Sur face ar ea of t he cuboid + Cur ved sur face
We k now t h at sl an t h ei gh t i s gi ven by t h e ar ea of t he cyl i nder – 2 (Ar ea of t he base of
for mula, cylinder )

2 = Remaining ar ea = 2(lb + bh + lh ) + 2rh – 2(r 2)

l  h 2   r2  r1 
[1]
2
l  82   6  2  22
2 15  10  10  5  5  15  2   3.5
7
 l  64  16 22
52  3.52
7
 l  80  4 5 cm
Ther efor e t he t ot al sur face ar ea of t he fr ust um = 2 (150 + 50 + 75) + 110 – 77
= 550 + 110 – 77
=  l  r1  r2    r12   r22
= 583 cm 2
22 22 2 22 2 H en ce, t h e ar ea of t h e r em ai n i n g bl ock i s
  4 5  2  6   2   6  [1]
7 7 7 583 cm 2. [1]
22 6. The height and diamet er of t he cylinder ar e 4m
 32 5  4  36 
7   and 4.2 m r espect ively. (Given)
The height and diamet er of t he cone ar e 2.8 m
22
 32 5  40  and 4.2 m r espect ively. (Given)
7  
So, t he r adius of cylindr ical and conical par t is
22 2.1 m.

7
 32  2.236  40
Cur ved sur face ar ea of cylindr ical par t = 2 r h
22 22

7
111.552  2  2.1  4  52.80 m 2 [1]
7
2454.144 Cur ved sur face ar ea of conical par t = r l

7 Wher e, l = Slant height
= 350.592 cm 2
H en ce t h e su r f ace ar ea of t h e f r u st u m i s l  h2  r 2
350.592 cm 2. [1]
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.233

Cur ved sur face ar ea of conical par t 8. Given t hat , t he height of t he fr ust um of a cone =
14 cm
22
=  2.1  2.82  2.12 The diamet er s of it s t wo cir cular ends ar e 4 cm
7
and 2 cm.
 6.6  12.25 = 23.10 m 2  The r adi us of it s t wo ci r cular ends wi ll be
Sur face ar ea of t ent = Cur ved sur face ar ea of 2 cm and 1 cm r espect ively. [1]
cylindr ical par t + Cur ved sur face ar ea of conical L et us suppose, r adius of one end, r 1 = 2 cm, and
part Radius of anot her end, r 2 = 1 cm
Sur face ar ea of t ent = 52.80 m 2 + 23.10 m 2
1
= 75.90 m 2 [1] Volume of t he fr ust um   h r12  r22  r1 r2 [1]
 
3
Sur face ar ea of 100 t ent s = 100 × 75.90 = 7590 m 2
1 22
Cost of canvas used is Rs 100 per sq. m    14 22  12  2  1
 
3 7
 Cost of 100 t ent s = 100 × 7590 = Rs. 759000
1
Welfar e associat ion is paying of the total amount   22  2  4  1  2 [1]
= 50% of 759000 = Rs. 379500 3

The welfar e associat ions will pay Rs 3,79,500 1

  22  14
3
The wel far e associ at i on has shown a sense of
r esponsibilit y t owar ds t he societ y. [1] 308

3
7. 3.5 cm [1] = 102.6 cm 3
Ther efor e, capacit y of t he glass in t he shape of a
fr ust um is 102.6 cm 3. [1]
9. 15 cm [1]
6 cm

6 cm
24 cm

6 cm
5 cm
Sur face ar ea of t he block = Tot al sur face ar ea
of the cube – Base area of the hemisphere + Cur ved We know t hat ,
sur face ar ea of t he hemispher e [1] Diamet er of upper end of bucket = 30cm
2 H ence, Radius (r 1) of upper end of bucket = 15 cm
 6   Edge   r 2  2 r 2
Diamet er of lower end of bucket = 10 cm [1]
2 2

 6  (6)   r  H ence, Radius (r 2) of lower end of bucket =5 cm
H eight (h ) of bucket = 24 cm
 22 3.5 3.5  Slant height (l ) of fr ust um
  216    
 7 2 2 
= (216 + 9.625)   r1  r2 2  h 2
= 225.625 cm 2
H ence, t he t ot al sur face ar ea of t he bl ock i s  (15  5)2  242
225.625 cm 2. [1]
 100  576  676  26 cm
13.234 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

Ar ea of met al sheet r equir ed t o make t he bucket Radii, r1  20 cm and r2  12cm

= CSA of fr ust um + ar ea of t he base of bucket Now we know t he for mula for t he volume of t he
fr ust um,
  (r1  r2 )l   r 2 [1]
1
  15  5 26    5
2 V   h r12  r22  r1 r2
  [1]
3
 520  25   545 cm 2  12308.8  3   h 202  122  20  12
 
Cost of 100 cm 2 met al sheet = Rs 10
Cost of 545  cm 2 met al sheet  12308.8  3   h  400  144  240

10  12308.8  3   h  784 
Rs.545  3.14   Rs.171.13
100 12308.8  3
H ence t he t ot al cost is Rs. 171.13. [1] h
3.14  784
10. Consider a fr ust um of cone of height (h ) 24 cm, h = 15 cm [1]
r adius of lower end (r ) 8 cm and r adius of upper Thus, t he height of t he fr ust um is 15cm.
end (R) 20 cm. N ow,
 Slant height of t he fr ust um of cone is given by;
Volume of fr ust um of cone  h R2  Rr  r 2
 
3 2
Subst it ut e t he values of R, r and h in t he above l  h 2   r1  r2 
equation
So, l  152   20  122
Volume of fr ust um of cone
  l  225  64
  24  202  20  8  82
  [1]
3
Volume of fr ust um of cone  l  289  17 cm
N ow, Cu r v ed Su r f ace ar ea of t h e f r u st u m

  24  400  160  64  [1]    r1  r2  l
3
    20  12 17
Volume of fr ust um of cone   24  624 
3
 544  3.14 = 1708.16 cm 2 [1]
Volume of fr ust um of cone = 15689.14 cm 3
The cost of milk for 1 lit r e is Rupees 21. [1] Ar ea of t he base   r 2   122  452.16 cm 2

Since, M et al Sheet r equi r ed t o mak e t he fr ust um =

Cur ved Sur face ar ea + Ar ea of t he base of t he
15689.14 fr ustum
1L  1,000 cm3, 15689.14 cm3   15.69L
1,000 So, the met al sheet r equir ed to make the fr ustum
Cost of 15.68 L of milk is 15.69  21 `329.49 [1] = 1708.16 + 452.16 = 2160.32 cm 2
11. Consider t he figur e. H ence, t he height of t he bucket is 15 cm and t he
ar ea of the metal sheet used in making the bucket
r 1 = 20 cm is 2160.32 cm 2. [1]
12. L et OA and AB be h and r r espect ively.
Also, OC and CD be H and R r espect ively.
O

h h
A
H B

r 2 = 12 cm
D
C
Volume of t he fr ust um = 12308.8 cm 3
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.235

Accor ding t o t he quest ion 2h = H  Volume of t he bigger cone

I n OAB and OCD
1 1 2
OAB = OCD = 90°   R 2 H    2r   2 h  [1]
3 3
AOB = COD [ common]
Vol ume of t he r emai ni ng por t i on = volume of
 OAB – OCD [ AA similarity] [1] bigger cone - volume of smaller cone.
Now, t he r at io of t he sides must be equal.
1 1
 8   r 2h   r 2h
OC CD 3 3

OA AB
1
 7   r 2h
H R 3
 
h r Now, r at io of t he volumes of t he t wo par t s will
be,
2h R
 
h r 1 2
r h 1
 2r  R [1]  3 
1 2 7
We know t hat t he volume of a cone is given by 7  r h
3
t he for mula
H ence, t he r at io of t he volumes of t he t wo par t s
1 2
V  r h is 1 : 7. [1]
3

1 2
 Volume of t he smaller cone  r h
3
13.236 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes

Value Based

PREVIOUS YEARS’  Solutions

1. Let the slant height, r adius and height of t he cone
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS be l , r and h r espect ively.
L et H be t he height of t he cylindr ical base of t he
4 Marks Questions t ent .
1. Due t o heavy floods in a st at e, t housands wer e Slant height is given by l 2 = h 2 + r 2
r ender ed homeless. 50 schools collect ively offer ed 2 2
t o t he st at e gover nment t o pr ovide place and t he l 2   2.1   2.8
can v as f or 1500 t en t s t o be f i x ed by t h e
gover n m en t an d deci de t o sh ar e t h e wh ol e l 2  4.41  7.84
expendit ur e equally. The lower par t of each t ent
l 2  12.25
is cylindr ical of base r adius 2.8 m and height 3.5
m, wit h conical upper par t of same base r adius l  12.25  3.5 m [1]
but of height 2.1 m. I f t he canvas used t o make
t he t ent s cost s Rs. 120/sq. m, find t he amount The canvas used for each tent = CSA of cylindr ical
shar ed by each school t o set up t he t ent s. What base + CSA of conical upper par t
value is gener at ed by t he above pr oblem? The canvas used for each t ent = 2r H + r l
 22    r 2H  l 
 use   
7
[TERM 2, 2016]    2.8   2(3.5)  3.5
2. I n a r ain-water har vesting system, the r ain-water
fr om a r oof of 22 m × 20 m dr ains into a cylindr ical 22
  2.8  10.5
t ank havi ng diamet er of base 2 m and height 7
3.5 m. I f t he t ank is full, find t he r ainfall in cm. = 92.4 m 2 [1]
Wr it e your views on wat er conser vat ion. So, canvas used for 1 t ent is 92.4 m 2
[TERM 2, 2016]
Thus, canvas used for 1500 t ent s
3. I n a h ospi t al , u sed wat er i s col l ect ed i n a
cylindr ical t ank of diamet er 2 m and height 5 m.   92.4  1500  m 2
Aft er r ecycling, t his wat er is used t o ir r igat e a
Cost of canvas is Rs 120/sq. m
par k of hospital whose length is 25 m and br eadth
is 20 m. I f tank is filled complet ely then what will So, cost of canvas for 1500 t ent s
be the height of st anding water used for ir r igating  Rs  92.4  1500  120 [1]
t he par k. Wr it e your views on r ecycling of wat er.
[TERM 2, 2017]
As 50 schools par t icipat ed t o pr ovide t he t ent s.
4. The diamet er of lower and upper ends of a bucket Ther efor e, t he amount shar ed by each school t o
in t he for m of a fr ust um of a cone ar e 10 cm and set up t he t ent s
30 cm r espect ively. I f it s height is 24 cm, find: 92.4  1500  120
  Rs3,32,640
(i) The ar ea of t he met al sheet used t o make t he 50
buck et . Thus, t he amount shar ed by each school t o set
(ii) Why we shoul d avoi d t he bucket made by up t he t ent s is Rs. 3, 32, 640. [1]
ordinary plastic? [Use  = 3.14] 2. Given:
[DELH I , 2018]
Widt h of t he r oof b = 20 m
L engt h of t he r oof l = 22 m
H eight of cylindr ical vessel H = 3.5 m
CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes 13.237

The height of st anding wat er used for ir r igat ing

2
Base r adius of cylindr ical vessel R   1m t he par k can be found by equat ing t he volume of
2 cylindr ical t ank and the volume of wat er used for
L et h cm of r ainfall has t aken place. [1] ir r igat ing t he par k.
N ow, Equat ing equat ion (i) and (ii), we'll get
Tot al amount of r ainfall = Volume of r ain wat er
 15.7  500  h 
collect ed in cylindr ical vessel

 l bh   R 2 H [1] 15.7
 h
500
22 2
 22  20  h   1  3.5
7  h  0.0314 m
22 H ence, t he h ei gh t of t he st andi n g wat er i s
 440 h   3.5 0.0314m [1]
7
Recycling of wat er is one of t he best met hods for
22 3.5
h  sustainable development as it reduces wastage and
7 440 help in r euse of water. I t r educes water pollution
 h  0.025m and also helps in conser vation of wat er. [1]
 h  2.5cm [1] 4. (i) H er e, h = 24 cm, r 1 = 30 cm and r 2 = 5 cm
I t i s v er y i m por t an t t o con ser ve wat er f or 2
l  h 2   r1  r2   242  15  5
2
sust ainable development . For conser ving wat er
differ ent met hods can be put in use. Rain wat er  676  26 cm [1]
har vest i ng i s one of t hem i t not onl y avoi ds
Tot al sur face ar ea = Cur ved sur face Ar ea of
wast age of wat er but also helps in fulfilling all
fr ust um + Ar ea of base
demands of wat er in summer s. [1]
3. We know t hat t he volume of a cylinder is given    r1  r2  L   r22
by t he for mula,
  15  5  26    5 ² [1]
V  r 2H ,
Wher e r is t he r adius of t he base of t he cylinder  3.14  20  26  25  3.14
and H is it s height . = 3.14 (520 + 25)
d 2 = 545 × 3.14
H er e, r    1m and h = 5m = 1711.3 cm 2
2 2
H ence, t he Ar ea of met al sheet used t o make t he
2
 V   3.14 1  5  15.7m 3 ..  i  [1] bucket is 1711.3 cm 2 [1]
Also, Volume of a r ect angular field is given by (ii) Plastics ar e non biodegr adable. That is, plastic
t he for mula, mat er i al most l y end as har mful wast e t hat
pol l ut es t he envi r onment and causes heal t h
V = lbh , pr oblems, we should avoid using plast ic. [1]
Wher e h is t he height of t he st anding wat er.
H er e, l = 25m , b = 20m
V = 25 × 20 × h = 500 (h ) m 3 ....(ii ) [1]
13.238 CHAPTER 13 : Surface Areas and Volumes
CHAPTER 14
Statistics

Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams

Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Mean
Median 3 marks 3 marks
Mode
Cumulative Frequency Graph 4 marks 4 marks
14.240 CHAPTER 14 : Statistics

[TOPIC 1] Mean, Median and Mode

Summary Step-Deviation Method

Fol l owi ng st eps ar e t ak en t o sol ve cases by st ep-
I t is gener ally obser ved t hat obser vat ions or dat a on a
deviat ion met hod.
var iable t end t o gat her ar ound some cent r al value.
This gather ing of dat a t owar ds a centr al value is called Step 1: For each class int er val, calculat e t he cl ass
cen t r al t en den cy or t h e m i ddl e v al u e of t h e mar k x i by using t he
dist r ibut ion, also known as middle of t he dat a set .
1
A cer t ain value r epr esent at ive of t he whole dat a and for mula: xi  (lower limit + upper limit ).
2
signifying it s char act er ist ics is called an average of
t he dat a. St ep 2: Ch oose a v al u e of x i i n t h e m i ddl e of
t he x i column as t he assumed mean and denot e i t
Thr ee t ypes of aver ages ar e useful for analyzing dat a.
by A .
They ar e : (i) M ean, (ii) M edian, (iii) M ode.
Step 3: Calculat e h = [(upper limit ) – (lower limit )].
Mean for a Grouped Frequency Dis ( xi  A )
Tribution Step 4: Calculat e u i  for each class.
h
DI RECT M ETH OD
Step 5: Calculat e f i u i for each class and find  ( f i ui ) .
Step 1: For each class, find t he class mar k x i , as
Step 6: Calculat e t he mean, by using t he for mula:
1
xi  (lower limit + upper limit )
2   ( f i ui ) 
x  A  h .
Step 2: Calculat e f i x i for each i .   f i 
 ( f i xi )
Step 3: Use t he for mula :  .
 fi Mode
I t i s t h at val ue of a var i at e whi ch occur s m ost
Assumed-Mean Method oft en. M or e pr eci sel y, mode i s t hat val ue of t he
Following st eps ar e t aken t o solve cases by assumed- var i abl e at whi ch t he concent r at i on of t he dat a i s
mean met hod. maximum.
Step 1: For each class int er val, calculat e t he cl ass M odal Class : I n a fr equency dist r ibut ion, t he class
mar k x i by using t he having maximum fr equency is called t he modal class.
F ormula for Calculat ing M ode:
1
for mula: xi  (lower limit + upper limit ). We have:
2
St ep 2: Choose a val ue of x i i n t he mi ddl e as t he  ( f1  f 0 ) 
M ode, M 0    h.   , wher e
assumed mean and denot e it by A .  (2 f1  f 0  f 2 ) 
Step 3: Calculate t he deviat ions di = (X i – A ) for each i .
Step 4: Calculat e t he (f i di ) for each i .  = lower limit of t he modal class int er val;

Step 5: Find n = f i . f 1 = fr equency of t he modal class;

f 0 = fr equency of t he class pr eceding t he modal class;
Step 6: Calculat e t he mean, x , by using t he for mula:
f 2 = fr equency of the class succeeding the modal class;
x  A
 f i di . h = widt h of t he class int er val.
n
CHAPTER 14 : Statistics 14.241

Method for Finding the Median for Step 4: Use t he for mula:
Grouped Data 

N 
  c 
2
M edian of a dist r ibut ion is t he value of t he var iable M edian, Me     h   , wher e
 f 
which divides it int o t wo equal par t s. I t is t he value  
 
which exceeds and is exceeded by t he same number of
 = lower limit of median class,
obser vat ion i.e., it is t he value such t hat t he number
of obser vat i on above i t i s equal t o t he number of h = widt h of median class,
obser vat ion below it . f = fr equency of median class,
I n case of gr ouped fr equency dist r ibut ion, t he class c = cumulat ive fr equency of t he class
cor r esponding to the cumulat ive (c.f) just gr eater t han pr eceding t he median class, N = f i .
N
is called t he median class. Relationship Among Mean, Median
2
and Mode
Following st eps ar e involved in finding t he median of
t he given fr equency dist r ibut ion. We have, M ode = 3(M edian) 2(M ean)
Step 1: For t he given fr equency dist r ibut ion, pr epar e or
t he cumulat ive fr equency t able and obt ain N = f i . 2
M edian = M ode  (M ean  M ode)
Step 2: Find (N / 2). 3
Step 3: Find t he cumulat ive fr equency just gr eat er or
t han (N / 2) and find t he cor r esponding class, known 3
M ean = M ode  (M edian  M ode)
as median class. 2

PREVIOUS YEARS’
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS
TOPIC 1
1 Mark Questions
1. I f the mode of some data is 7 and their mean is also 7, t hen their median is:
(a) 10 (b) 9
(c) 8 (d) 7 [TERM 1, 2011]
2. Relationship among mean, median and mode is:
(a) 3 M edian = M ode + 2 M ean
(b) 3 M ean = M edian + 2 M ode
(c) 3 M ode = M ean = 2 M edian
(d) M ode = 3 M ean – 2 M edian [TERM 1, 2012]
3. M ont hl y pocket money of 50 st udent s of a class ar e given in t he followi ng di st r ibut ion:

M ont hly pocket money 0  50 50  100 100  150 150  200 200  250 250  300
 in Rs 
Number of students 2 7 8 30 12 1

Fi nd modal class and al so gi ve cl ass r ank of t he modal cl ass. [TERM 1, 2014]

14.242 CHAPTER 14 : Statistics

4. Wr it e an empir ical r elat ionship bet ween t he t hr ee measur es of cent r al t endency i.e. mean, median and
mode.
[TERM 1, 2015]

2 Marks Questions
5. Fi nd t he mode of t he foll owi ng di st r i but ion of mar ks obt ained by 50 st udent s.

M ar ks 0  10 10  20 20  30 30  40 40  50
N umber of
4 8 10 20 8
stu dent s

[TERM 1, 2011]
6. Fi nd t he mode of t he followi ng fr equency di st r i but ion:

Class 0  10 10  20 20  30 30  40 40  50
Frequency 3 8 9 10 3

[TERM 1, 2012]
7. Dat a r egar ding weight s of st udent s of cl ass X of a school i s given below. Calculat e t he aver age (M ean)
weight of t he st udent s.

Weight (in K g ) 50  52 52  54 54  56 56  58 58  60 60  62 62  64
Number of st udent s 18 21 17 28 16 35 15

[TERM 1, 2014]
8. I n a class t est , 50 st udent s obt ained mar ks ar e as follows. Find t he modal class and t he median class

M ar k s 0  20 20  40 40  60 60  80 80  100
Number s 4 6 25 10 5

[TERM 1, 2016]

3 Marks Questions
9. Find t he mean of t he following fr equency dist r ibut ion using assumed mean met hod.
Classes 2-8 8-14 14-20 20-26 26-32
Fr equen cy f : 6 3 12 11 8
[TERM 1, 2011]
10. 200 sur names wer e r andomly picked up fr om a local t elephone dir ect or y and t he fr equency dist r ibut ion of
t he number of let t er s in English alphabet s in t he sur names was obt ained as follows
No. of 1-5 5-10 10-15 15-20 20-25
let t ers
No. of 20 60 80 32 8
surn ames
Evaluat e t he median of it . [TERM 1, 2011]
11. The mean of t he following fr equency dist r ibut ion is 52. Find t he missing fr equency.

C.I . 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80

Frequency 5 3 4 f 2 6 13

[TERM 1, 2011]
CHAPTER 14 : Statistics 14.243

12. Calculat e t he median for t he following dist r ibut ion:

Marks Obt ain ed Number of
st udent s

B elow 10 6

B elow 20 15

B elow 30 29

B elow 40 41

B elow 50 60

B elow 60 70

[TERM 1, 2012]
13. Comput e t he ar it hmet ic mean for t he following dat a:
Marks obt ai ned Number of st uden ts

L ess t han 10 14

L ess t han 20 22

L ess t han 30 37

L ess t han 40 58

L ess t han 50 67

L ess t han 60 75

[TERM 1, 2012]
14. Find t he mean of t he following dat a:

Classes 5  15 15  25 25  35 35  45 45  55 55  65 65  75
Fr equency 6 10 16 15 24 8 7

[TERM 1, 2013]
15. Find t he median of t he following dat a:

M ar ks 20  30 30  40 40  50 50  60 60  70 70  80 80  90

Number of Studen ts 5 15 25 20 7 8 10

[TERM 1, 2013]
16. I n annual examinat ion, mar ks (out of 90) obt ained by st udent s of class I X in mat hemat ics ar e given below:

M ar ks 0-15 15-30 30-45 45-60 60-75 75-90

Number of st udent s 2 4 5 20 9 10

Find t he mean mar ks of t he st udent .

[TERM 1, 2014]
14.244 CHAPTER 14 : Statistics

17. I n a hospit al, age r ecor d of diabet ic pat ient s was r ecor ded as follows:

Age (in year s) 0-15 15-30 30-45 45-60 60-75

Number of pat ient s 5 20 40 50 25

Find t he median age.

[TERM 1, 2014]
18. The following t able gives t he ages of 1000 per sons who visit ed a shopping cent r e on Sunday:

Age 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70

(in year s)

Number 105 222 220 138 102 113 100

of persons

Find t he mean number of t he people who visit ed a shopping cent r e on Sunday

[TERM 1, 2015]
19. A school conduct ed a t est (of 100 mar ks) in English for st udent s of class X. The mar ks obt ained by st udent s
ar e shown in t he following t able:

Mar ks 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90 90-100
obtained

Number 1 2 4 15 15 25 15 10 2 1
of
stu den t s

Evaluat e modal mar ks. [TERM 1, 2015]

20. Find t he mean of t he following dist r ibut ion:

Class 0 6 6  12 12  18 18  24 24  30
Fr equency 7 5 10 12 2

[TERM 1, 2016]
21. The following t able gives t he lit er acy r at e of 40 cit ies:

L it er acy Rate 30  40 40  50 50  60 60  70 70  80 80  90
(in %)

Number of odes 6 7 10 6 8 3

Find t he modal lit er acy r at e.

[TERM 1, 2016]
22. Find t he mean of t he dat a by st ep deviat ion met hod.

C.I 15  25 25  35 35  45 45  55 55  65 65  75 75  85 85  95
Frequency 6 11 7 4 4 2 1 10

[TERM 1, 2017]
CHAPTER 14 : Statistics 14.245

4 Marks Questions
23. I f t he median of t he following dat a is 525. Find t he values of x and y if t he sum of t he fr equencies is 100.

C.I . 0-100 100-200 200-300 300-400 400-500

Frequency 2 5 x 12 17

C.I . 500-600 600-700 700-800 800-900 900-1000

Frequency 20 y 9 7 4

[TERM 1, 2011]
24. Find t he missing fr equency f 1 and f 2 in t he following dist r ibut ion t able, if N = 100 and median is 32.

Class: 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 Tot al

Fr equency: 10 f1 25 30 f2 10 100

[TERM 1, 2012]
25. Find mode of t he following dat a:

Classes 0  20 20  40 40  60 60  80 80  100 100  120 120  140

Fr equency 6 8 10 12 6 5 3

[TERM 1, 2013]
26. The mean of t he following dat a is 42. Find t he missing fr equencies x and y if t he t ot al fr equency is 100.
Classes 0  10 10  20 20  30 30  40 40  50 50  60 60  70 70  80

Frequency 7 10 x 13 y 10 14 9

[TERM 1, 2013]
27. Weight s of new bor n babies in a hospit al ar e as follows:

Wei ght 1.3-1.5 1.5-1.7 1.7-1.9 1.9-2.1 2.1-2.3 2.3-2.5 2.5-2.7 2.7-2.9
(in k g)
Number 1 4 6 9 10 x 8 3
of new
bor n
babi es

I f t he mode of t he dat a is 2.2 kg, find t he unknown fr equency x .

[TERM 1, 2015]
28. Following dist r ibut ion gives t he mar ks obt ained out of 200 by t he st udent s of class I X in t heir class t est .

M ar k s 0-25 25-50 50-75 75-100 100-125 125-150 150-175 175-200

Number of 10 15 22 30 28 27 12 6
st udent s

Find t he mean and mode of t he dat a.

[TERM 1, 2015]
29. The houses in a r ow ar e number ed consecut ively fr om 1 t o 49. Show t hat t her e exist s a value of X such t hat
sum of houses pr eceding t he house number ed X is equal t o sum of t he number s of houses following X.
[TERM 1, 2016]
14.246 CHAPTER 14 : Statistics

 Solutions L ower limit of t he modal class, l = 30

Widt h of t he modal class, h = 10
1. The r elat ion bet ween mean, median and mode is
Fr equency of t he modal class, f = 10
M ode = 3 M edian – 2 M ean
Fr equency of the class preceeding the modal class,
Subst i t ut e mode = 7 and mean = 7 i n above f1 = 9
equat ion,
Fr equency of t he class following t he modal class,
7 = 3 × M edian – 2 × 7
f2 = 3
 7 = 3 × M edian – 14
We know t hat ,
 3 × M edian = 21
f  f1
Divide t he above equat ion by 3, M ode  l  h [1]
2 f  f1  f 2
21 Subst it ut ing values in t he for mula, we get ,
M edian  7
3
10  9
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (d). [1] M ode  30   10
20  9  3
2. The empi r i cal r el at i onshi p bet ween t he t hr ee
measur es of cent r al t endency is M edian = M ode 10
 M ode  30 
+ 2 M ean 8
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (a). [1]
 M ode  30  1.25  31.25
3. Si n ce w e can see f r om t h e gi v en gr ou ped
T h er ef or e, t h e m ode of gi v en f r equ en cy
fr equency t able t he highest fr equency is in t he
dist r ibut ion is 31.25 [1]
gr oup 150 – 200
7. To find t he mean of t he gi ven dat a, we can fi nd
So t he modal class is 150 – 200 and it s r ank is 30
t he mi dpoint of t he given cl ass.
as t her e ar e 30 st udent s in t he modal class. [1]
4. E m pi r i cal r el at i on sh i p bet w een t h e t h r ee Weight Number of M id-point Pr oduct
measur es of cent r al t endency i.e. mean, median
(in K g) st udent s of t he wf
and mode is:
(f) class w
3 M edian – 2 M ean = M ode [1]
50  52 18 51 918
 f1  f 0  52  54 21 53 1113
5. M ode  l   2 f  f  f   h
 1 0 2 54 – 56 17 55 935
The modal cl ass wit h highest fr equency = 30 – 56  58 28 57 1596
40 wher e l = L ower li mi t of modal class = 30 58  60 16 59 944
f1 =Fr equency of modal class=20 60  62 35 61 2135
62  64 15 63 945
f 0 =Frequency of class befor e modal cl ass=10

f 2 =Frequency of class aft er modal cl ass=8 [1]

H er e t ot al number of st udent s
h=Class I nt er val=40-30=10 [1]
= 18 + 21 + 17 + 28 + 16 + 35 + 15
Substitut ing t he above values in for mula of mode, = 150
 20  10 
M ode  30     10 Tot al weight = wf  8586 kg
 2  20  10  8 
Tot al weight
 10  M ean 
M ode  30     10  30  4.545  34.55 Number of st udent s
22
8586
H ence, t he mode is 34.55. [1]   57.24
150
6. H er e, t he maxi mum fr equency i s 10 and t he
M ean weight of t he st udent s i s 57.24 k g. [1]
cor r esponding class is 30 – 40. So, 30 – 40 is t he
modal class such t hat
CHAPTER 14 : Statistics 14.247

8. M odal class i s t he class wit h hi ghest fr equency. 10. Const r uct t he followi ng t abl e:
H er e, 25 st udent s got t heir mar k s bet ween Class Fr equ ency Cu mu lat ive [1]
Thus, I nt erval Frequency
M odal class = 40 – 60 1 5 20 20
5  10 60 80
Cl ass int er val fr equency Cumul at ive 10  15 80 160
fr equency 15  20 32 192
0  20 4 4 20  25 8 200
20  40 6 4  6  10 N 200
40  60 25 10  25  35   100
2 2
60  80 10 35  10  45 So, t he median class is 10 – 15.
80  100 5 45  5  50
N 
Tot al  cf
M edian  l   2
 
(N)  50
f  h [1]
 
 
[1] Her e cf = cumulative fr equency of class pr eceding
We have, medi an cl ass, f = fr equency of medi an cl ass,
N = 50 l = l ower li mi t of median cl ass and h = size of
class.
N 50
  25 l  10, cf  80, f  80 and h  5
2 2
The cumul at i ve fr equency wit h just gr eat er 25 100  80
M edian  10  5
and t hi s bel ongs t o t he cl ass 40 – 60. 80
H ence, median cl ass 40 – 60. M edi an = 10 + 1.25 = 11.25
Thus bot h t he modal class and t he median class H ence, median is 11.25. [1]
ar e 40 – 60. [1] 11. Const r uct t he followi ng t abl e:
9. Const r uct t he followi ng t abl e: Class Fr equency xi fi x i
Classes fi xi di  x i  A di  f i I nt er val f
( i)
28 6 5 12 72 10  20 5 15 75
8  14 3 11 6 18 20  30 3 25 75
14  20 12 17  A 0 0 30  40 4 35 140
20  26 11 23 6 66 40  50 f 45 45f
26  32 8 29 12 96 50  60 2 55 110
60  70 6 65 390
[2]
70  80 13 75 975
H er e, A = 17 [2]
 f i xi
 A
 f i di M ean 
M ean f
 fi 1765  45 f
52 
33  f
 f i di  72 and f  40
 1716  52 f  1765  45 f
72  7 f  49
M ean  17   52  33  f   1765  45 f
40
Di vi ding bot h si des by 7,
M ean = 17 + 1.8 = 18.8
49
H ence, t he mean is 18.8. [1] f  7
7
H ence, t he mi ssi ng fr equency i s 7. [1]
14.248 CHAPTER 14 : Statistics

12. The gi ven fr equency t able is of less t han t ype Ther efor e, median class = 30 – 40
r epr esent ed wi t h upper class li mi t s. Ther efor e, L ower limit (l ) of median cl ass = 30.
t h e cl ass i n t er v al s w i t h t h ei r r espect i v e
Cl ass size (h) = 10
cumulat ive fr equency can be defined as below:
Fr equency (f t ) of medi an class = 12
M ar ks Number of Cumulat ive Cumulat ive fr equency (cf) of class pr ecedi ng t he
Obtained st udents (f i ) fr equency (cf) medi an cl ass = 29
0- 10 6 6
10- 20 15  6  9 15 n 
 cf
Median = l   2
20- 30 29  15  14 29  
f h
30- 40 41  29  12 41  
40- 50 60 – 41  19 60
 
50- 60 70 – 60  10 70
Total(??) 70  35  29 
 30    10
[1]  12 
Fr om t he t abl e, it can be obser ved t hat n = 70
 6
 30     10
n 70  12 
   35
2 2
= 30 + 5
Al so, cumul at ive fr equency(cf) just gr eat er t han
= 35
n
(i.e. 35) is 41, whi ch belongs t o t he i nt er val H ence, t he medi an is 35. [1]
2
30 – 40. [1]

13. The gi ven fr equency t able is of l ess t han t ype r epr esent ed wit h upper class li mit s. Ther efor e, t he class
int er vals wit h t heir r espect ive cumul at i ve fr equency can be defined as below:

M ar k s Obt ained Number of st udent s Cumulat ive xi fi xi

(f i ) fr equency (cf)
0- 10 14 14 5 70
10- 20 22  14 = 8 22 15 120
20- 30 37 – 22 = 15 37 25 375
30- 40 58 – 37 = 21 58 35 735
40- 50 67 – 58 = 9 67 45 405
50- 60 75 – 67 = 8 75 55 440
Tot al(n) 75 fixi  2145

[2]
The mean is gi ven by t he for mul a:

 f i xi
M ean 
 fi
2145
  28.6
75
Ther efor e, mean = 28.6. [1]
CHAPTER 14 : Statistics 14.249

14. Using dir ect met hod:

n 
Classes Fr equency Class Mar k fi xi
 cf
Median = l   2
 
f 1  x1  f h
 
5  15 6 10 60  
15  25 10 20 200
25  35 16 30 480  45  45 
M edian = 50    10
35  45 15 40 600
 20 
45  55 24 50 1200 M edi an = 50 + 0 = 50
55  65 8 60 480 H ence, t he medi an is 50. [1]
65  75 7 70 490 16. To find t he mean of t he gi ven dat a, we can fi nd
Tot al fi  86 fixi  3510 t he mi dpoint of t he given cl ass.
[2]
M ar k s Number of xi fi xi [2]
The sum of t he val ues i n t he l ast col umn gives
st udent s
 f i xi . So, t he mean is gi ven by f i 
 f i xi 3510 0-15 2 7.5 15
x   40.81
 fi 86 15-30 4 22.5 90
H ence, t he mean of dat a is 40.81. [1] 30-45 5 37.5 187.5
45-60 20 52.5 1050
15. Mar k s Number of Cumulat iv e [1]
60-75 9 67.5 607.5
st udent s Fr equency 75-90 10 82.5 825
20  30 5 5
H er e t ot al number of st udent s = 50
30  40 15 5  15  20
Tot al weight   f i xi  2775
40  50 25 25  20  45
 f i xi 2775
 55.5
50  60 20 20  45  65 M ean  
fi 50
60  70 7 7  65  72
M ean mar k s of t he st udent s 55.5. [1]
70  80 8 8  72  80 17. [1]
Age N umber of Cumulat ive
80  90 10 10  80  90 (in year s) pat i ent s fr equency
(fi)
0-15 5 5
Fr om t he t abl e, it can be obser ved t hat n = 90
15-30 20 25
n 90 30-45 40 65
   45
2 2 45-60 50 115
A l so, cum u l at i ve f r equ en cy(cf) j u st gr eat er 60-75 25 140
n
t han (i .e. 45) i s 65, whi ch bel ongs t o t he
2 N 
int er val 50 – 60 F
 2 
M edian m  L   C [1]
Ther efor e, median class 50 – 60 f
 m 
L ower limit (l ) of median cl ass = 50. [1]  
Cl ass size (h) = 10 H er e, L = lower boundar y of median class
Fr equency (f i ) of medi an class = 20 N = Tot al fr equency
Cumulat ive fr equency (cf) of class pr ecedi ng t he F = Cumul at ive fr equency befor e median class
medi an cl ass = 45 C = Class si ze
14.250 CHAPTER 14 : Statistics

fm = fr equency of medi an cl ass,

Ther efor e mean = x 
 f i xi 
31490
 31.490
N 1000
 70 , so medi an class is 45 – 60.  fi
2
[1]
f m = 50, C = 1,5, F = 65, L = 45 and N = 140
H ence, t he mean number of t he peopl e who
Now subst it ut i ng t hese val ues, visited a shopping centre on Sunday is 31 r ounded
 140  t o near est whol e number.
 65
 2   70  65  19. To find t he modal mar ks look for t he gr oup t hat
m  45   15  45   15
50   50  has t he highest fr equency. Thi s is because t he
  mode i s t he number t hat comes up t he most
 
t imes.
75
 45  Fr om t he given table it can be obser ved that ther e
50 ar e 25 st udent s who have obt ai ned t he mar k s in
= 45 + 1.5 t he r ange 50 – 60.
m = 46.5 Ther efor e t he modal class is 50 – 60.
H ence median age is 46.5 year s. [1] The for mula t o est imat e t he M ode i s:

18. [2] M ode  L 

 f m  f m 1  w
Age Class Number f i xi [2]
(in mar k s of per sons
 f m  f m 1    f m  f m 1 
year s) Wher e,
x i  f i 
L = t he lower boundar y of t he modal gr oup = 50
0-10 5 105 525 f m – 1 = the fr equency of the gr oup befor e t he modal
10-20 15 222 3330 gr oup = 15
20-30 25 220 5500 f m = t he fr equency of t he modal gr oup = 25
30-40 35 138 4830 f m + 1 = t he fr equency of t he gr oup aft er t he modal
40-50 45 102 4590 gr oup =15
50-60 55 113 6215 w = t he gr oup wi dt h =10
60-70 65 100 6500  25  15
Mode  50   10
 25  15   25  15
I t i s given t hat t her e ar e 1000 per sons. 10
M ode  50   10
10  10
Ther efor e  fi  1000
 M ode = 50 + 5 = 55
 fi xi  525  3330  5500  4830  4590 H ence, t he modal mar k s ar e 55. [1]
 6215  6500  31490

20. M ean can be found usi ng t he st ep-deviat ion met hod,

Class int erval Mid value  x i  d i  x i – 15 xi  15  Frequency f i f iui

ui 
6
06 3 12 2 7 14
6  12 9 6 1 5 5
12  18 15 0 0 10 0
18  24 21 6 1 12 12
24  30 27 12 2 2 4
f i  36  f i ui  3

[2]
CHAPTER 14 : Statistics 14.251

H ear, a = 15 and t he class int er val (h ) = 6  f1  f 0 

The mean of t he dat a is gi ven by, M ode  l   h [1]
 2  f1  f0  f 2 
  f i ui  Wher e, l = L ower cl ass l imit of t he modal class
x  a  h
  fi  h = Class si ze
f 1 = st ands for t he fr equency of t he modal cl ass.
 3 
 15     6 f 0 = Fr equency of t he class pr eceding t he modal
 36 
class.
1 f 2 = Fr equency of t he class succeeding t he modal
 15 
2 class.
= 14.5 M odal class i s t he class wit h hi ghest fr equency.
Thus t he mean of t he foll owi ng dist r i but ion is Thus,
14.5. [1]
M odal class = 50 – 60
21. L it er acy Number of odes Cumul at ive [1]  10  7 
M ode  50    10
Rat e (in %) (fr equency) fr equency  2  10  7  6 
fi  3 
M ode  50    10
30  40 6 6  20  13 
40  50 7 6  7  13
3 
50  60 10 13  10  23 M ode  50    10
 7 
60  70 6 23  6  29
70  80 8 29  8  37
M ode = 54.29
80  90 3 37  3  40 Thus t he modal l it er acy r at e i s 54.29%. [1]

22. We will fir st find t he mid values and t ake middle value as assumed mean.
H er e, let assumed mean (a) = 60 and h = upper limit – lower limit = 10

u.l  l .l d [2]
C. I xi  fi di  xi  a ui  i f i ui
2 h
15  25 20 6 40 4 24
25  35 30 11 30 3 33
35  45 40 7 20 2 14
45  55 50 4 10 1 4
55  65 60 4 0 0 0
65  75 70 2 10 1 2
75  85 80 1 20 2 2
85  95 90 10 30 3 30
 fi  45  f i ui  41
  f i ui 
M ean x  a  h  
  f1 

 41 
x  60  10  
 45 

x  60  10  0.91

x  60  9.1 , x  50.9
Ther efor e, t he mean of t he given dat a is 50.9. [1]
14.252 CHAPTER 14 : Statistics

23. Const r uct t he followi ng t abl e.  100  85  y

Class Fr equ en c Cumulat ive fr equ en cy
 y  100  85  15
I nt erval y
0  100 2 2 Hence, the value of x is 9 and value of y is 15. [1]
100  200 5 2 5  7 24. We k now t hat t he fr equency of t he cl ass 10 – 20
200  300 x 7x is f 1 and t hat of t he cl ass 40 – 50 is f 2.
300  400 12 12  7  x  19  x Al so, t he t ot al fr equency is 100.
400  500 17 19  x  17  36  x Ther efor e, 10 + f 1 + 25 + 30 + f 2 + 10 = 100
500  600 20 20  36  x  56  x f 1 + f 2 = 100 – 75
600  700 y 56  x  y f 1 + f 2 = 25 ....(i) [1]
700  800 9 9  56  x  y  65  x  y
Class Frequency Cumulat ive Frequency
800  900 7 7  65  x  y  72  x  y 0  10 10 10
10  20 f1 10  f 1
900  1000 4 4  72  x  y  76  x  y 20  30 25 25  10  f 1  35  f 1
30  40 30 30  35  f 1  65  f 1
[2] 40  50 f2 f 2  65  f 1  65  f 1  f 2
As median i s 525, t he median class is 500 – 600. 50  60 10 10  f 2  65  f 1  75  f 1  f 2
l = L ower li mi t of median cl ass = 500
h = Class Size = 100 [1]
n = Sum of fr equencies = 100 We k now t hat median i s 32, so i t l ies in t he class
cf = Cumulat ive fr equency of class befor e median 30 – 40.
cl ass = 36 + x H ence 30 – 40 is t he medi an cl ass.
f = Fr equency of median class = 20 We have, l = L ower li mi t of median cl ass = 30,
h = 10, f = Fr equency of medi an cl ass = 30,
n  cf = Cumul at i ve fr equency of cl ass pr ecedi ng
 cf
medi an cl ass = 35 + f 1, N = 100
M edian  l   2
 
f  h
  We k now,
 
N
 cf
100 M edian  l  2 h [1]
 (36  x) f
525  500  2  100
20
100
 (35  f1 )
 525  500  (50  (36  x))  5
32  30  2  10
30
 25  (14  x)  5

 5  (14  x) 50  (35  f1 )
2
3
 x  14  5  9 [1]
 6  15  f1
The sum of fr equencies is 100.
 100  76  x  y  f1  9

Subst it ut i ng x = 9, we get We k now t hat , f 1 + f 2 = 25 (Using (i))

100 = 76 + 9 + y  f 2  16
The missi ng fr equency f 1 = 9 and f 2 = 16. [1]
CHAPTER 14 : Statistics 14.253

25. Find out the modal gr oup (t he gr oup wit h highest

fr equency), which is 60 – 80.  5  7  15  10   25  x   35  13
The for mula t o est imat e t he M ode i s:   45  y   55  10    65  14    75  9 

 7  10  x  13  y  10  14  9
M ode  L 
 f m  f m 1  w [2] [1]
 f m  f m 1    f m  f m 1 
Si mplifying we get :
Wher e,
L = t he lower boundar y of t he modal gr oup = 60 25 x  45 y  2775
  42
f m– 1 = t he fr equency of t he gr oup befor e t he modal x  y  63
gr oup = 10
 25 x  45 y  2775  42  x  y  63
f m = t he fr equency of t he modal gr oup = 12
f m +1 = t he fr equency of t he gr oup aft er t he modal  25 x  45 y  2775  42 x  42 y  2646
gr oup =6
w = t he gr oup widt h =20  17 x  3 y  129           ii 
M ult iply (i) by 3,
Mode  60 
12  10  20 [1]  3 x  3 y  111           iii  [1]
12  10  12  6
Add (ii) and (iii),
2
M ode  60   20 20x = 240
26
Di vi de t he above equat i on by 20,
 M ode = 60 + 5 = 65
 x  12
H ence, mode is 65. [1]
Put t ing t he above val ue in x + y = 37,
26. Fr om quest ion, t ot al fr equency is 100.
We get y = 25
7 + 10 + x + 13 + y + 10 + 14 + 9 = 100
Ther efor e, x = 12 and y = 25. [1]
 x + y = 37 ....(i)
27. H er e t he unk nown fr equency i s x So, l = 2,
Classes xi Fr equency [1] h = 0.2, f = 10, f 1 = 9, f 2 = x
(fi ) As we know

0  10 5 7 f  f1
M ode  l  h [2]
10  20 15 10 2 f  f1  f 2
20  30 25 x
30  40 35 13 10  9
2.2  2.1   0.2
40  50 45 y 20  9  x

50  60 55 10
 1 
60  70 65 14 2.2  2.1    0.2 [1]
 11  x 
70  80 75 9
 1 
0.1    0.2
The M ean will be given by t he following for mula:  11  x 

 11  x  2
 Midpoint of I st interval  frequency1 + 
  x9
  Midpoint of 10t h int erval  
...........................+   frequency10   H ence, t he mi ssi ng fr equency i s 9. [1]
 
sum of frequencies
14.254 CHAPTER 14 : Statistics

28. Cal culat ion of M ean

M ar k s Fr equency M id Values x i di  x i  A xi  A f iui [1]

ui 
 x i  112.5 h
0  25 10 12.5 100 4 40
25  50 15 37.5 75 3 45
50  75 22 62.5  50 2  44
75  100 30 87.5 25 1 30
100  125 28 112.5 0 0 0
125  150 27 137.5 25 1 27
150  175 12 162.5 50 2 24
175  200 6 187.5 75 3 18

A = 112.5 is t he assumed M ean,

h = 25
Tot al of t he fr equency N = 150

 f i ui  90

Using t he for mula

1 
M ean  X  A  h   f i ui 
N 

 1 
X  112.5  25   90
 150 

 90 
 112.5  25  [1]
 150 

 3 
 112.5  25  
 5

 112.5  15
M ean  97.5
Calcul at ion of M ode

M ar ks 0-25 25-50 50-75 75-100 100-125 125-150 150-175 175-200

Number of 10 15 22 30 28 27 12 6
st udent s

H er e t he maximum fr equency i s 30 and cor r esponding class is 75 – 100

l = 75 L ower li mi t of modal class
f = 30 Fr equency of modal class
h = 25 Widt h of modal class
CHAPTER 14 : Statistics 14.255

f 1 = 22 Fr equency of cl ass pr eceding t he modal 29. Assume a val ue of x such t hat t he sum of houses
class pr eceding t he house number ed X is equal t o sum
f 2 = 28 Fr equency of cl ass fol lowing t he modal of t he number s of houses fol lowing X.
class [1] That is, 1 + 2 + 3 .... + (x – 1) = (x + 1) + (x + 2)
Put t ing value is t he for mula + .... + 49 [1]
So,
f  f1
M ode  l  h 1 + 2 + 3 + .... + (x – 1) = {1 + 2 + .... + x + (x + 1)
2 f  f1  f 2
+ .... + 49} – (1 + 2 + 3 + .... + x )

30  22  x  1 49 x
 75   25 1  x  1  1  49  1  x [1]
2  30  22  28 2 2 2

8 x  x  1  49  50  x 1  x
 75   25
60  22  28
x  x  1  1 1  x   49  50
8
 75   25
10 x 2  x  x  x 2  49  50
 75  20 x 2 = 49 × 25 [1]
Taki ng squar e r oot ,
M ode  95
x = 7 × 5 = 35
H ence, t he mean is 97.5 and mode is 95. [1]
Si nce x i s not a fr act ion, t he value of x sat isfyi ng
t he gi ven condi t i on exi st s and has a val ue of
35. [1]
14.256 CHAPTER 14 : Statistics

[TOPIC 2] Cumulative Frequency Distribution

Summary
Graphical Representation of Cumulative Fequency Distribution
L et a gr ouped fr equency dist r ibut ion be given t o us.
FOR A ‘LESS TH AN ’ SERI ES
On a gr aph paper, mar k t he upper class limit s along t he x -axis and t he cor r esponding cumulat ive fr equencies
along t he y -axis.
(i) On joining t hese points successively by line segment s, we get a polygon, called cumulative fr equency polygon.
(ii) On joining t hese point s successively by smoot h cur ves, we get a cur ve, known as cumulat ive fr equency
cur ve or an ogive.

 N
 Taken a point A  0,  on the y-axis and draw AP I I x-axis, cutting the above curve at a point P..
 2
Draw PM  x-axis, cutting the x-axis at M . Then, median = length of OM .
FOR A ‘GREATER TH AN ’ SERI ES
On a gr aph paper, mar k t he lower class limit s along t he x -axis and t he cor r esponding cumulat ive fr equencies
along t he y -axis.
(i) On joining t hese points successively by line segment s, we get a polygon, called cumulative fr equency polygon.
(ii) On joining t hese point s successively by smoot h cur ves, we get a cur ve, known as cumulat ive fr equency
cur ve or an ogive.
 Let P be the point of intersection of ‘less than’ and ‘more than’ curves. Draw PM  x-axis, cutting x-axis at
M . Then, median = length of OM .

PREVIOUS YEARS’
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS
TOPIC 2
1 Mark Questions
1. The following ar e t he ages of 300 pat ient s get t ing medical t r eat ment in a hospit al on a par t icular day.
Wr it e t he above dist r ibut ion as less t han t ype cumulat ive fr equency dist r ibut ion.
Age  in years  10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70
Cumulat ive fr equen cy 60 42 55 70 53 20

[TERM 1, 2011]
CHAPTER 14 : Statistics 14.257

2. I f t he 'less t han' t ype ogive and 'mor e t han' t ype ogive int er sect each ot her at (20.5, 15.5) t hen the median
of t he given dat a is
(a) 36.0 (b) 20.5

(c) 15.5 (d) 5.5

[TERM 1, 2013]

2 Marks Questions
3. Conver t t he foll owi ng di st r i but ion t o a 'mor e t han t ype' cumulat i ve fr equency di st r i but ion:

Class 10  20 20  30 30  40 40  50 50  60
Frequency 4 8 10 12 10

[TERM 1, 2012]
4. The fol lowi ng ar e t he ages of 300 pat i ent s get t ing medi cal t r eat ment in a hospi t al on a par t i cular day

Age(in year s) 10  20 20  30 30  40 40  50 50  60 60  70
Number of pat ient s 60 42 55 70 53 20

For m 'less t han t ype' cumulat i ve fr equency di st r ibut ion.

[TERM 1, 2013]
5. Gi ven bel ow is a fr equency dist r i but ion t able showing dai ly income of 100 wor ker s of a fact or y:

Daily income of 200-300 300-400 400-500 500-600 600-700

work er s (in Rs)

Nu mber of 12 18 35 20 15
wor k ers

Conver t t hi s t able t o a cumul at ive fr equency dist r i but i on t able of 'mor e t han t ype'.
[TERM 1, 2015]

4 Marks Questions
6. For t he following fr equency dist r ibut ion, dr aw a cumulat ive fr equency cur ve of less t han t ype.

Class: 200-250 250-300 300-350 350-400 400-450 450-500 500-550 550-600

Fr equency: 30 15 45 20 25 40 10 15

[TERM 1, 2012]

 Solutions
1. The following is less t han t ype cumulat ive fr equency dist r ibut ion.

Age  i n year s Cumulat ive fr equen cy

L ess t han 20 60
L ess t han 30 60  42  102
L ess t han 40 102  55  157
L ess t han 50 157  70  227 [1]
L ess t han 60 227  53  280
L ess t han 70 280  20  300
14.258 CHAPTER 14 : Statistics

2. The l ess t han ogi ve cur ve gi ves cumul at i ve 6. The less t han t ype cumul at ive fr equency for t he
fr equency (pr obabilit y) for x  a. gi ven fr equency di st r ibut i on i s:

The mor e t han ogi ve cur ve gi ves cumul at i ve M ar k s Fr equency Cumulat ive
Fr equency
fr equency (pr obabilit y) for x  a.
L ess t han 200 0 0
They i nt er sect exact l y at t he median because
L ess t han 250 30 30
cumulat ive fr equency will be 50% of t he t ot al at
median. So, median is 20.5 L ess t han 300 15 30  15  45

H ence t he cor r ect opt ion is (b). [1] L ess t han 350 45 45  45  90
L ess t han 400 20 20  90  110
3. The fol l owi ng i s mor e t han t ype cumul at i ve
L ess t han 450 25 25  110  135
fr equency di st r ibut ion.
[2] L ess t han 500 40 40  135  175
Cumulat ive
M or e t han t ype L ess t han 550 10 10  175  185
Fr equency
M or e t han or equal t o 10 4  40  44 L ess t han 600 15 15  185  200
M or e t han or equal t o 20 32  8  40
[2]
M or e t han or equal t o 30 22  10  32
M or e t han or equal t o 40 10  12  22 M ar k t he upper cl ass l i mi t on t he x -axi s and
M or e t han or equal t o 50 10 cumulat ive fr equency on t he y axi s.
Then, plot t he point s (200, 0), (250, 30), (300, 45),
4. T he f ol l owi ng i s l ess t h an t ype cu mu l at i ve (350, 90), (400, 110), (450, 110), (450, 135),
fr equency dist r ibut ion. (500, 175), (550, 185), (600, 200) and joi n t he
[2] point s.
Age (in year s) Cumulat ive
fr equency H ence, t he cumul at i ve fr equency cur ve of less
t han t ype i s gi ven bel ow [1]
L ess t han 20 60
Y
L ess t han 30 60  42  102 [1]
L ess t han 40 102  55  157 200
L ess t han 50 157  70  227
L ess t han 60 227  53  280 150
L ess t han 70 280  20  300

5. The t able can be r e-wr it t en in 'mor e t han t ype' 100

as:
Daily income Cumulat ive Fr equency (C.F.) 50
of t he wor ker s
(I n Rs)
X’ X
M or e t han 200 12 + (18 + 35 + 20 + 15) = 100 0 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
M or e t han 300 18 + (35 + 20 + 15) = 88
Y’
M or e t han 400 35 + (20 + 15) = 70
M or e t han 500 20 + 15 = 35
M or e t han 600 15
[2]
CHAPTER 14 : Statistics 14.259
14.260 CHAPTER 14 : Statistics
CHAPTER 15
Probability

Chapter Analysis of Previous Three Years' Board Exams

Number of Questions asked in Exams
2018 2017 2016
Delhi All India Delhi All India Delhi All India
Question based on Dice 2 marks 2 marks 3, 4 marks 4 marks 3 marks
Question based on Cards 1 mark 1 mark
Question based on Coin 3 marks
Mix question on Probability 2 marks 2 marks 1 mark 1, 3 marks 4 marks 4 marks
15.262 CHAPTER 15 : Probability

Summary E xamples:
(i) I n thr owing a coin, H is the event of get ting a head.
Probability (ii) Suppose we t hr ow t wo coins simult aneously and
let E be t he event of get t ing at least one head.
Pr obabilit y is a concept which numer ically measur es Then, E cont ains H T, TH , H H .
t he degr ee of cer t aint y of t he occur r ence of event s. EQU ALLY LI KELY EVEN TS
EXPERI M EN T A given number of event s ar e said t o be equally likely
An oper at ion which can pr oduce some well-defined if none of t hem is expect ed t o occur in pr efer ence t o
out comes is called an exper iment . t he ot her s.
I . Tossing a coi n. When we t hr ow a coin, ei t her a
head (H ) or a t ail (T) appear s on t he upper face. Probability of Occurrence of an Event
I I . Thr owing a die. A die is a solid cube, having 6 faces, Pr obabilit y of occur r ence of an event E , denot ed by
mar ked 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, or having 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and P(E ) is defined as:
6 dot s.
Number of out comesfavourablet o E
I I I . A deck of playing car ds has in all 52 car ds. P(E) 
Tot al number of possibleout comes
(i) I t has 13 car ds each of four suit s, namely
COM PLEM EN TARY EVEN T
Spades, clubs, hear t s and diamonds.
(a) Car ds of spades and clubs ar e black car ds. L et E be an event and (not E ) be an event which occur s
only when E does not occur.
(b) Car ds of hear t s and diamonds ar e r ed car ds.
(ii) Kings, queens and jacks ar e known as face cards. The event (not E ) is called t he complement ar y event
of E .
EVEN T
The collect ion of all or some of t he possible out comes Clear ly, P(E ) + P(not E ) = 1.
is called an event .  P(E ) = 1 – P(not E ).

Some Special Sample Spaces

A die is t hr own once S  1,2,3,4,5,6 ; n (S)  6
A coin is t ossed once S   H , T  ; n ( S)  2
A coin is t ossed t wice S   H H , H T , TH , TT  ; n (S)  4  22
or
Two coins ar e t ossed simult aneously
A coin is t ossed t hr ee t imes
 H H H , H H T , H TH , TH H  3
or S  ; n ( S)  8  2
TTT , TTH , TH T , H TT 
Thr ee coins ar e t ossed simult aneously (1,1), (1, 2), (1,3),(1, 4), (1,5), (1,6) 
Two dice ar e t hr own t oget her (2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (2,4), (2,5), (2,6) 
 
or (3,1), (3, 2), (3,3),(3, 4), (3,5),(3,6) 
A die is t hr own t wice S 
(4,1),(4,2), (4,3),(4,4), (4,5), (4,6)
(5,1), (5, 2), (5,3),(5, 4), (5,5),(5,6) 
 
(6,1), (6,2), (6,3), (6,4), (6,5), (6,6) 
n ( S)  6 2
number of fa vour a bl e ca ses
 1. P(E) =
tota l number of cases
2. P(E) + P (not E) = 1
3. 0  P(E)  1
4. Sum of the probabilities of all the outcomes of random experiment is 1.
CHAPTER 15 : Probability 15.263

PREVIOUS YEARS’ 6. The pr obability that a number selected at r andom

fr om t he number s 1, 2, 3, ........, 15 is a mult iple
of 4, is
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS 4 2
(a) (b)
1 Mark Questions 15 15
1. Which of the following cannot be the pr obability of 1 1
an event? (c) (d)
5 3
3 [TERM 2, 2014]
(a) 1.5 (b)
5 7. A number is selected at r andom fr om the number s
(c) 25% (d) 0.3 1 t o 30. The pr obabilit y t hat i t is a pr ime number
[TERM 2, 2011] is:
2. Car ds bear ing number s 2, 3, 4 ... 11 ar e kept in a 2 1
bag. A car d is dr awn at r andom fr om t he bag. (a) (b)
3 6
The pr obabilit y of get t ing a car d wit h a pr ime
number is 1 11
(c) (d)
1 2 3 30
(a) (b) [TERM 2, 2014]
2 5
8. I f t wo di ffer ent di ce ar e r ol l ed t oget her, t he
3 5 pr obabi li t y of get t ing an even number on bot h
(c) (d)
10 9 di ce, i s:
[TERM 2, 2012]
1 1
3. The pr obability of getting an even number, when (a) (b)
36 2
a die is t hr own once, is:
1 1 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 3 6 4
1 5 [TERM 2, 2014]
(c) (d)
6 6 9. A car d is dr awn at r andom fr om a well shuffl ed
[TERM 2, 2013] pack of 52 playi ng car ds. Fi nd t he pr obabil it y of
4. A box cont ains discs, number ed fr om 1 t o 90. get t ing nei t her a r ed car d nor a queen.
I f one di sc i s dr awn at r andom fr om t he box, [TERM 2, 2016]
t he pr obabilit y t hat it bear s a pr ime-number less 10. Car ds mar ked wit h number 3, 4, 5, ...., 50 ar e
t han 23, is: pl aced in a box and mixed t hor oughly. A car d is
7 10 dr aw n at r an dom f r om t h e box . F i n d t h e
(a) (b) pr obabili t y t hat t he select ed car d bear s a per fect
90 90
squar e number.
4 9
(c) (d) [TERM 2, 2016]
45 89
[TERM 2, 2013] 11. A number is chosen at r andom fr om the number s
5. I n a family of 3 childr en, the pr obabilit y of having – 3, – 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2, 3. What wi ll be t he pr obabi li t y
at l east one boy is t hat squar e of t hi s number i s less t han or equal
t o 1?
7 1
(a) (b) [TERM 2, 2017]
8 8
5 3
2 Marks Questions
(c) (d) 12. A coin is t ossed t wo t i mes. Fi nd t he pr obabi li t y
8 4
of get t ing at least one head.
[TERM 2, 2014]
[TERM 2, 2011]
15.264 CHAPTER 15 : Probability

13. A car d is dr awn at r andom fr om a well-shuffled 23. A bag cont ains 15 whit e and some black balls. I f
pack of car ds. Find t he pr obabilit y of get t ing t he pr obabilit y of dr awing a black ball fr om t he
(i) A r ed king bag is thr ice that of dr awing a whit e ball, find the
(ii) A queen or a jack number of black balls in t he bag.
[TERM 2, 2017]
[TERM 2, 2012]
14. A car d is dr awn at r andom fr om a well shuffled 24. Two differ ent dice ar e t hr own t oget her. Find t he
pack of 52 playing car ds. Find the pr obability that pr obabilit y t hat t he number s obt ained
t he dr awn car d is neit her a king nor a queen. (i) have a sum less t han 7
[TERM 2, 2013] (ii) have a pr oduct less t han 16
15. Rahim, t osses t wo differ ent coins simultaneously. (iii) is a doublet of odd number s.
Find t he pr obabilit y of get t ing at least one t ail.
[TERM 2, 2017]
[TERM 2, 2014]
16. Two differ ent dice ar e t ossed t oget her. Find t he 4 Marks Questions
probability 25. A gr oup consist s of 12 per sons, of which 3 ar e
(i) That t he number on each die is even. ext r emely pat ient , ot her 6 ar e ext r emely honest
(ii) That t he sum of number s appear ing on t he and r est ar e ext r emely kind. A per son fr om t he
t wo dice is 5. gr oup is select ed at r andom. Assuming t hat each
[TERM 2, 2014]
per son is equally likely t o be select ed, find t he
pr obabilit y of select ing a per son who is
17. T h e pr obabi l i t y of sel ect i n g a r ot t en appl e
r andomly fr om a heap of 900 apples is 0.18. What (i) ext r emely pat ient
is t he number of r ot t en apples in t he heap? (ii) ext r emely kind or honest .
[TERM 2, 2017] Which of t he above values you pr efer mor e?
3 Marks Questions [TERM 2, 2013]

18. Two dice ar e r olled once. Find t he pr obabilit y of 26. Red queens and black jacks ar e r emoved fr om a
get t ing such number s on two dice, whose pr oduct pack of playing car ds. A car d is dr awn at r andom
is a per fect squar e. fr om the r emaining car ds, aft er r eshuffling t hem.
Find t he pr obabilit y t hat t he dr awn car d is
[TERM 2, 2011]
19. A game consist s of t ossing a coin t hr ee t imes and (i) a king (ii) of r ed colour
not ing it s out come each t ime. H anif wins if he (iii) a face car d (iv) a queen
get s t h r ee h eads or t h r ee t ai l s, an d l oses [TERM 2, 2014]
ot her wise. Calculat e t he pr obabilit y t hat H anif 27. A bag cont ains car ds number ed fr om 1 t o 49.
will lose t he game. A car d is dr awn fr om t he bag at r andom, aft er
[TERM 2, 2011] mixing t he car ds thor oughly. Find the pr obability
20. All kings, queens and aces ar e r emoved fr om a t hat t he number on t he dr awn car d is:
pack of 52 car ds. The r emaining car ds ar e well (i) an odd number
shuffled and t hen a car d is dr awn fr om it . Find
(ii) a mult iple of 5
t he pr obabilit y t hat t he dr awn car d is
(i) A black face car d (iii)a per fect squar e

(ii) A r ed car d (iv) an even pr ime number

[TERM 2, 2014]
[TERM 2, 2012]
21. Thr ee differ ent coins ar e t ossed t oget her. Find 28. Two differ ent dice ar e t hr own t oget her. Find t he
t he pr obabilit y of get t ing pr obabilit y t hat t he number s obt ained have
(i) Exact ly t wo heads (i) Even sum, and
(ii) At least t wo heads (ii) Even pr oduct .
[TERM 2, 2017]
(iii) at least t wo t ails
[TERM 2, 2016] 29. Pet er thr ows two differ ent dice toget her and finds
the pr oduct of the two number s as 25. Rina thr ows
22. I n a single t hr ow of a pair of differ ent dice, what
a die and squar es t he number obt ained. Who has
is t he pr obabilit y of get t ing (i) a pr ime number
on each dice? (ii) a t ot al of 9 or 11? t he bet t er chance t o get t he number
[TERM 2, 2017]
[TERM 2, 2016]
CHAPTER 15 : Probability 15.265

 Solutions Thus t he pr obabilit y of get t ing a disc wit h pr ime

4
1. L et E be any event and P (E ) be t he pr obabilit y of number less t han 23 is
45
t he happening of t hat event .
H ence t he cor r ect answer is (c). [½]
The value of P(E ) will lie in t he r ange 0  P(E )  1
Ther efor e, it s value can never be gr eat er t han 1. 1
5. Pr obabilit y of having a boy child is
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (a). 2
2. Tot al car ds in t he bag = 2, 3, 4, ...., 11 = 10 [1]
1
The car ds bear ing pr ime number s Pr obabilit y of having a gir l child is
2
= 2, 3, 5, 7, 11 = 5
Pr obabilit y of having no boy in t he family
Ther efor e, t he pr obabilit y of get t ing a car d wit h
a pr ime number 1 1 1 1
    [½]
2 2 2 8
Number of cards bear ing prime n umbers
 Thus, t he pr obabilit y of having at least 1 boy
Tot al number of cards
1
5 = 1
 8
10
8 1 7
1  
 [1] 8 8
2
The cor r ect answer is (a). [½]
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (a).
6. I t is given t hat t he number s ar e fr om 1 t o 15.
3. I n an event of t hr owing a die,
Tot al possibilit ies = 15
Tot al number of possible out comes = 6
Out of t he fir st 15 number s chosen, mult iples of
I n a die, even number s ar e 2, 4 and 6
4 ar e 4, 8, 12
Thus, number of favour able out comes = 3
Favor able out comes = 3
 Pr obabilit y of get t ing an even number
The pr obability that a number selected at r andom
Number of favour able out comes [½]
P  E 
Tot al number of possible out comes fr om t he number s 1, 2, 3, ..., 15 is a mult iple of 4,

3 1 Number of favourable out comes

 P E   PE  .`
6 2 Tot al number of possible out comes
Thus t he pr obabilit y of get t ing an even number, 3 1
 
1 15 5
when a die is t hr own once is [1]
2 Thus t he cor r ect answer is (c). [½]
H ence t he cor r ect opt ion is (a). 7. Tot al number of possi ble out comes = 30
4. There ar e 90 discs in the box and one disc is dr awn Pr ime number s bet ween 1 t o 30 ar e 2, 3, 5, 7, 11,
at r andom. 13, 17,19, 23 and 29.
So, t he t ot al number of possible out comes = 90 Tot al number of favour able out comes = 10
Pr ime number s less t han 23 ar e 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, Pr obabi li t y of sel ect ing a pr i me number fr om
17 and 19. 1 t o 30
 Number of favour able out comes = 8
Tot al number of favour able out comes
 Pr obabilit y of get t ing a pr ime number s less =
t han 23 [½] Tot al possible out comes

Number of favour able out comes 10 1

P(E)  = =
Tot al number of possible out com es 30 3
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (c). [1]
8 4
 P E  
90 45
15.266 CHAPTER 15 : Probability

8. Possi bl e out comes on r ol l ing t he t wo di ce ar e And, t he favour able out comes E i s E = {– 1, 0, 1}

given below:
Number of element s in E
 P E 
1,1 , 1,2 , 1,3 , 1,4  , 1,5 , 1,6   Number of element s in S
 
 2,1 ,  2,2 ,  2,3 ,  2,4  ,  2,5 ,  2,6   P E 
3
 3,1 , 3,2 , 3,3 , 3,4 , 3,5 , 3,6  [½]
            7
  H ence, t he pr obabilit y of gett ing a number whose
 4,1 ,  4,2 ,  4,3 ,  4, 4  ,  4,5 ,  4,6   [½]
 5,1 , 5,2 , 5,3 , 5,4 , 5,5 , 5,6  3
            squar e is less t han or equal t o 1 is . [½]
 6,1 ,  6,2 ,  6,3 ,  6,4  ,  6,5 ,  6,6  7
 
12. When a coin is t ossed t wo t i mes, t he element ar y
Tot al number of out comes = 36
Favor able out comes ar e given below: out comes ar e:  HH , HT , TH , TT  [1]

 2, 2  ,  2, 4  ,  2, 6  ,  4, 2  ,  4, 4  ,  4, 6  , 6, 2  , 6, 4  , 6, 6  Tot al out comes = 4

Favor able out come for at least one head
Tot al number of favour able out comes = 9
 Pr obabilit y of getting an even number on both = {H T, TH , H H } = 3
dice Pr obabi li t y of get t ing at least one head
Tot al number of favour able out comes Favourable out come 3
  
Tot al possible out comes Tot al out come 4
9 1 Hence, the pr obability of getting at least one head
 
36 4 3
is . [1]
H ence, t he cor r ect opt ion is (d). [½] 4
9. Ther e ar e 26 r ed car ds and 26 bl ack car ds in a 13. (i) I n a deck of wel l-shuffl ed pack of 52 playi ng
pack of 52 playi ng car ds. car ds, ther e ar e 2 r ed car ds wit h 'king' face car ds.
Tot al number of out come = 52 Ther efor e, t he pr obabil it y of get t i ng a r ed ki ng
Favor able number of outcome (neit her a r ed car d
2 1
nor a queen) = 52 – (26 + 2) = 24   [1]
52 26
Pr obabi li t y of get t ing nei t her a r ed car d nor a
(ii) I n a deck of wel l-shuffl ed pack of 52 playi ng
queen
car ds, t her e ar e 4 'queen' car ds and 4 'jack' car ds.
number of favourable out comes 24 6 Ther efor e, t he pr obabil it y of get t i ng a queen or
  
t ot al number of out comes 52 13
8 2
H ence, t he pr obabil it y of get t i ng neit her a r ed a jack   [1]
52 13
6 14. Tot al number of possi ble out comes = 52
car d nor a queen is . [1]
13 Number of car ds t hat ar e ki ng or queen= 4 + 4=8
10. I t is given t hat t he box cont ains car ds mar ked  Number of ot her car ds = 52 – 8 = 44
wit h number s 3, 4, 5, ...., 50 Thus t he number of car ds whi ch ar e nei t her a
Ther efor e, t he t ot al number of out comes = 48 ki ng nor a queen = 44
The per fect squar es bet ween number s 3 and 50 Tot al number of favour abl e out comes = 44
ar e 4, 9, 16, 25, 36 and 49.  Pr obabili t y of get t ing a car d which i s nei t her
So, t he number of favour able out comes = 6 a ki ng nor a queen [1]
H ence, t he pr obabi l i t y t hat a car d dr awn at Number of favour able out comes
r andom is a per fect squar e P  E 
Tot al number of possible out comes
Number of favourable out comes 6 1 44 11
   [1]  
Tot al number of out comes 48 8 52 13
11. H er e, t he sampl e space S i s Thus t he pr obabi lit y of get t ing a car d which is
S = {– 3, – 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2, 3} 11
neit her a ki ng nor a queen is [1]
13
CHAPTER 15 : Probability 15.267

15. Rahi m t osses t wo coi ns si mul t aneousl y. The 18. When t wo di ce ar e r ol l ed, t hen t he possi bl e
sample space of t he exper i ment is {H H , H T, TH out comes ar e:
and TT}  (1,1) (1,2) (1,3) (1,4) (1,5) (1,6)
Tot al number of out comes = 4 [1]  (2,1) (2, 2) (2,3) (2,4) (2,5) (2,6) 
 
N umber of out comes whi ch ar e i n favour of  (3,1) (3,2) (3,3) (3, 4) (3,5) (3,6) 
 36 [1]
get t ing at l east one t ai l on t ossi ng t he t wo coi ns  (4,1) (4,2) (4,3) (4, 4) (4,5) (4,6) 
= {H T, TH , TT}  
 (5,1) (5,2) (5,3) (5, 4) (5,5) (5,6) 
Number of out comes i n favour of get t i ng at l east 
 (6,1)

(6, 2) (6,3) (6,4) (6,5) (6,6) 
one t ail = 3
out comes
Pr obabili t y of get t ing at least one t ail on t ossi ng
Favor abl e out comes for t he number s on t wo
t he t wo coi ns
di ce, whose pr oduct i s a per fect squar e ar e
Number of favour able out comes
 1,1 1, 4  2,2  3,3  4,1  4,4   5,5  6,6 ,
Tot al possible out comes
i.e. 8 out comes. [1]
3 Ther efor e, pr obabi lit y of get t ing such number s
 [1]
4 on t wo di ce, whose pr oduct i s a per fect squar e
16. Two dice ar e t ossed t oget her, n (S) = 62 = 36
Favourable out come 8 2
(i) L et P be t he event of get t ing an even number    [1]
Tot a l out come 36 9
 2,2 ,  2,4  ,  2,6  ,  4, 2 ,  4,4  ,  4,6  , 19. When a coi n i s t ossed t hr ee t i mes, t hen t he
n  P   9
  6,2 ,  6, 4  ,  6,6  possible out comes ar e:
[1] {(TH H ), (TTT), (TTH ), (TH T), (H H H ), (H TT),
(H TH ), (H H T)} [1]
Pr obabi l i t y t hat t h e nu mber on each di e i s
even  Tot al out comes = 8
Favor able out come for t hr ee heads or t hr ee t ai ls
n  P 9 1 ar e (H H H ), (TTT) i.e. 2 out comes.
  
n  S  36 4 Pr obabi li t y of H ani f wi nni ng t he game
(ii) L et Q be t he event of get t ing a sum of 5 on
Favour able out come for t hr ee heads or t hr ee t ails
t he t wo di ce  [1]
Tot a l out come
n  Q   1,4  ,  2,3 ,  3,2 ,  4,1  4
2 1
 
Pr obabi li t y t hat t he sum of number s appear i ng 8 4
n  Q 4 1 Cl ear ly, pr obabi lit y of H anif l osi ng t he game
on t he t wo dice is    [1]
n  S  36 9 = 1 – Pr obabil it y of winni ng

17. L et A be t he event of select ing r ot t en apples. 1

1
L et n be t he number of r ot t en appl es fr om t he 4
heap.
3
Pr obabi li t y of an event 
4
Number of favour ableout comes
A [1] Ther efor e, t he pr obabili t y t hat H ani f wi ll lose
Tot al number of out comes
3
n t he game is . [1]
P  A  4
900
20. I n a pack of 52 pl aying car ds, t her e ar e 4 k ings
n (2 r ed + 2 black ), 4 queens (2 r ed + 2 black) and
 0.18 
900 aces (2 black + 2 r ed).
 n  162 So, when al l t he k i ngs, queens and aces ar e
Thus, ther e ar e 162 r otten apples in the heap. [1] r emoved fr om a pack of 52 car ds, t he r emai ni ng
car ds ar e 52 – 12 = 40 [1]
15.268 CHAPTER 15 : Probability

Now, in a standar d deck of 52 playing car ds, ther e 22. We k now t hat t he t ot al number of out comes on
are four suits: clubs, diamonds, hear ts and spades. t hr owi ng a pair of dice = 6 × 6 = 36
Each suit has one Jack, Queen, and K i ng as t he (i) L et A be t he event of get t ing a pr i me number
face car ds. H ence t her e ar e 12 face car ds in a on each dice.
deck of 52 playi ng car ds. So, t he favour able out comes
So, aft er r emoving all the kings and queens car ds
 2, 2 ,  2, 3 ,  2, 5 ,  3, 2 ,  3, 3 ,  3, 5 ,
fr om t he pack, t her e wil l be 4(2 r ed + 2 bl ack)   [1]
face car ds r emai ning in t he deck of 40 car ds.  5, 2 ,  5, 3 ,  5, 5 
(i) Pr obabi l i t y of get t i ng a bl ack face car d i s Number of favour abl e out comes = 9
2 1 N ow,
  . [1]
40 20 Number of favourable outcomes 9 1
P( A)   
(ii) I n a deck of 52 car ds, 26 car ds ar e black car ds Total possible outcomes 36 4
and 26 car ds ar e r ed car ds. When all t he ki ngs, Thus, t he pr obabili t y of get t ing a pr i me number
qu een s an d aces ar e r em ov ed, ou t of t h e
1
m 2 kings, 2 queens and 2 aces ar e r ed car ds. So, on each dice is . [1]
4
t he t ot al number of r ed car ds r emai ni ng in t he
deck of car ds i s 26 – 6 = 20. (ii) Let B be t he event of get ting a total of 9 or 11.
So, t he favour able out comes
20 1
Pr obabi li t y of get t ing a r ed car d   [1]
40 2   3, 6 ,  4, 5 ,  5,4  ,  6, 3 ,  5, 6  ,  6, 5
21. The possi bl e out comes, when t hr ee coi ns ar e Number of favour abl e out comes = 9
t ossed t oget her ar e
6 1
{H H H , H H T, H TT, H TH , TH H , TTH , TH T, TTT} Now, P ( B)  
36 6
Ther efor e, t ot al number of possible out comes= 8
Thus, t he pr obabil it y of get t i ng a t ot al of 9 or 11
[1]
1
(i) Favor able out comes of exact ly t wo heads ar e is . [1]
H H T, H TH , TH H 6
Ther efor e, t ot al number of possible out comes= 3 23. L et us assume t hat t he number of black ball = x
Pr obabili t y of get t ing exact ly t wo head Number of whit e bal ls = 15

Tot al number of favourable out comes 3 P  Black Ball   3  P  Whit eBalls [1]
 
Tot al possible out comes 8 x 15
  3 [1]
[1] 15  x 15  x
 x  3  15
(ii) Favor able out comes of at l east t wo heads ar e
H H H , H H T, H TH , TH H  x  45
Ther efor e, number of black ball s ar e 45. [1]
Ther efor e, t ot al number of possible out comes= 4
24. We know t hat t he t ot al number of out come when
Pr obabili t y of get t ing at least t wo heads t wo di ce ar e t hr own t oget her i s 36
Total number of favourable outcomes 4 1 (i) H ave a sum less t han 7
  
Total possible outcomes 8 2 The favour able out comes ar e
(iii)Favor able out comes of at l east t wo t ai ls ar e 1,1 , 1,2 , 1,3 , 1, 4  , 1,5 ,  2,1 , 
H H T, TTH , TH T, TTT  
  2,2 ,  2,3 ,  2,4  ,  3,1 ,  3,2 ,  3,3 ,
Ther efor e, t ot al number of possible out comes= 4  
Pr obabili t y of get t ing at least t wo t ai ls  4,1 ,  4,2 ,  5,1 
Number of favour able out comes = 15
Tot al number of favourable out comes 4 1 So, pr obabi lit y of get t ing a sum less t han 7
  
Total possible out comes 8 2
Number of favourable out comes 15
 
[1] Tot al number of out comes 36
5
 [1]
12
CHAPTER 15 : Probability 15.269

(ii) H ave a pr oduct l ess t han 16 Pr obabili t y t hat t he car d dr awn is a ki ng

The favour able out comes ar e
4 1
  [1]
1,1 , 1,2 , 1,3 , 1,4  , 1,5 , 1,6  ,  2,1 ,  48 12
 
 2,2 ,  2,3 ,  2,4  ,  2,5 ,  2,6  ,  3,1 ,  3, 2 , The pr obability of dr awing a king aft er r emoving
 
 3,3 ,  3, 4  ,  3,5 ,  4,1 ,  4,2 ,  4,3 ,  5,1 , 1
bl ack jacks and r ed queens is
 5,2 , 5,3 , 6,1 , 6,2
     12
 
Number of favour able out comes = 25 (ii) Pr obabilit y that t he car d dr awn is of r ed color
So, pr obabil it y wil l be Number of red cards
 .
Number of favourable out comes 25 Tot al number of car ds
  [1]
Tot al number of out comes 36 Ther e ar e 26 r ed car ds i n a pack out of whi ch
(iii) A doublet of odd number s. 2 r ed car ds ar e r emoved
The favour able out comes ar e Number of r ed car ds r emaining = 26 – 2 – 24
= (1, 1), (3, 3), (5, 5) Pr obabi li t y t hat t he car d dr awn i s of r ed col or
Number of favour abl e out comes = 3 24 1
 
So, pr obabil it y wil l be 48 2

Number of favourable out comes 3 The pr obabi l i t y of dr awi ng a r ed car d aft er

 
Tot al number of out comes 36 1
r emoving bl ack jack s and r ed queens is [1]
2
1
 [1] (iii)Pr obabilit y t hat t he car d dr awn is a face car d
12
25. Number of people i n t he gr oup = 12 Number of face car ds

Number of possible out comes = 12 Tot al number of car ds
L et us assume, E 1 as an event for sel ect i ng Ther e ar e 12 face car ds in a pack out of which 4
ext r emely pat i ent peopl e and E 2 be t he event for ar e r emoved.
select i ng ext r emely k ing or honest . Number of face car ds r emai ning = 12 – 4 = 8
Number of out comes for E 1 = 3 Pr obabili t y t hat t he car d dr awn is a face car d
Number of ext r emely honest people = 6
8 1
Ext r emely k ind people = 12 – (6 + 3) = 3  
48 6
Number of out comes for E 2 = 9 [2]
The pr obabi l i t y of dr awi ng a face car d aft er
(i) P (Ext r emely Pat i ent )
1
Out comesfor E1 3 1 r emoving bl ack jack s and r ed queens is [1]
 P ( E1 )    [1] 6
Tot al possible out comes 12 4 (iv) Pr obabi li t y t hat t he car d dr awn i s a queen
(ii) P (K ind and H onest )
Number of queens

Out comesfor E2 9 3 Tot al number of car ds
 P ( E2 )    [1]
Tot al possible out comes 12 4 Ther e ar e 4 queens in a pack of car ds out of which
26. Tot al car ds in a pack = 52 2 ar e r emoved.
Number of black jacks = 2 Number of queens r emaini ng = 4 – 2 = 2
Number of r ed queens = 2 Pr obabi li t y t hat t he car d dr awn i s a queen
Number of car ds r emaining aft er r emoving black 2 1
 
jack s and r ed queens = 52 – 2 – 2 = 48 48 24
(i) Pr obabili t y t hat t he car d dr awn is a ki ng The pr obability of drawing a queen after removing

Number of kings 1
 bl ack jacks and r ed queens is . [1]
Tot al number of car ds 24
15.270 CHAPTER 15 : Probability

27. (i) Tot al number of car ds = 49 (i) When sum of number s i s even
Odd number s fr om 1 t o 49 ar e L et B be t he event of get t ing even sum.
1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15,17,19,21,23,25,27, 29,31,33, 1,1 , 1,3 , 1,5
 
35,37,39, 41,43,45,47,49  2,2 ,  2,4  ,  2,6  
 3,1 , 3,3 , 3,5 
Tot al number of favour able out comes = 25       
 
H ence t he r equir e pr obabi li t y  4,2 ,  4,4  ,  4,6   [1]
 5,1 , 5,3 , 5,5 

Tot al number of favour able out comes 25
 [1]       
Tot al possible out comes 49  6,2 ,  6,4  ,  6,6  
 
(ii) Sampl e space or t ot al number of out come=49 Ther e ar e 18 favour able out comes.
M ul t i pl es of 5 t hat can be consi der ed as t he Pr obabi li t y for even sum out comes
favour abl e number of out comes ar e
18 1
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 P  A  
36 2
The number of favour abl e out comes = 9 (ii) Even pr oduct out come
H ence t he r equir ed pr obabi li t y L et B be t he event of get t ing even pr oduct . [1]
Total number of favourable out comes 9 29. We k now t hat t he t ot al number of out come when
  [1]
Total possible out comes 49 t wo di ce ar e t hr own t oget her i s 36
Favor able out comes = (5, 5) [1]
(iii)Sample space or t ot al number of outcomes=49
Pr obabi l i t y of get t i n g t wo n u mber s h avi n g
The number s less t han or equal t o 49 t hat ar e
per fect squar es ar e 1
pr oduct as 25  [1]
1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49 36
Tot al number of favour abl e out comes = 7 Ri na t hr ows t he di e onl y once. So, t he t ot al
H ence t he r equir ed pr obabi li t y number of out comes wi ll be 6 onl y.
Favor able out comes = (5) [1]
Tot al number of favour able out comes 7
  [1] Pr obabi li t y of get t ing a number whose squar e is
Tot al possible out comes 49
1
(iv) Sample space or t ot al number of out 20 comes 25 
= 49 6
Only one even pr ime number exists and that is, 2 1 1
Cl ear l y,
Tot al number of favour abl e out comes = 1 6 36
H ence t he r equir ed pr obabi li t y H ence, Ri na has t he bet t er chance t o get t he
number 25. [1]
Tot al number of favour able out comes 1
  [1]
Tot al possible out comes 49
28. T h e ou t com es w h en t w o di ces ar e t h r ow n
t oget her
1,1 , 1, 2 , 1,3 , 1,4  , 1,5 , 1,6 
 
 2,1 ,  2,2 ,  2,3 ,  2,4  ,  2,5 ,  2,6  
 3,1 , 3, 2 , 3,3 , 3,4 , 3,5 , 3,6 
         
 
 4,1 ,  4,2 ,  4,3 ,  4,4  ,  4,5 ,  4,6  [2]
 5,1 , 5, 2 , 5,3 , 5,4 , 5,5 , 5,6 
           
 6,1 ,  6,2 ,  6,3 ,  6,4  ,  6,5 ,  6,6  
 
Ther e ar e 36 t ot al out comes
CHAPTER 15 : Probability 15.271
15.272 CHAPTER 15 : Probability
 CBSE
Sample Question Paper 1

Mathematics
Class X
Time : 3 hrs MM : 80

General Instructions
(i ) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) The question paper consists of 30 questions divided into four sections A, B, C and D.
(iii) Section A contains 6 questions of 1 mark each. Section B contains 6 questions of
2 marks each. Section C contains 10 questions of 3 marks each. Section D contains
8 questions of 4 marks each.
(iv) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in four
questions of 3 marks each and three questions of 4 marks each. You have to attempt
only one of the alternatives in all such questions.
(v) Use of calculators is not permitted.

Section A (1 × 6 = 6)

1. ‘The product of two consecutive positive integers is divisible by 2’. Is this statement true or
false? Give reasons.

2. For all real values of c, the pair of equations

x – 2y = 8 and 5x – 10y = c

has a unique solution. Justify whether it is true or false.

3. Can the quadratic polynomial x 2 + kx + k have equal zeros for odd integer
k > 1?

4. Find the 7th term from the end of the A.P.: 7, 10, 13, …, 184.
2 Sample Paper 1

5. In Fig. ABC is circumscribing a circle. Find the length of BC.

A
3 cm

9
N M cm

4 cm

B C
L

6. If a dice is rolled, find the probability that number which turnup is even prime.

Section B (2 × 6 = 12)

7. Show that 21 n cannot end with the digits 0, 2, 4, 6 or 8 for any natural
number n.

8. If  and  are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = 2x2 – 5x + 7, find a polynomial whose
zeros are 2 + 3 and 3 + 2.

9. Solve the quadratic equation x2 – 4x + 1=0 by the method of completing the square.

sec  + 1
10. Prove that : (cosec  +cot )2 = .
sec  – 1

4 2 3
11. Evaluate : cot 30+ 3sin 2 60– 2cosec 2 60– tan 2 30.
3 4

12. A chord of a circle of radius 12 cm subtends an angle of 1200 at the centre. Find the area of the
corresponding segment of the circle.

(Use  = 3.14 and 3 = 1.73 )

Section C (3 × 10 = 30)

13. Show that 5 – 3 is irrational.

OR

Prove that 2  5 is irrational.

14. If one zero of the polynomial 3x2 – 8x – (2k + 1) is seven times the other, find both zeros of the
polynomial and the value of k.
Sample Paper 1 3

15. Determine graphically, the vertices of the triangle formed by the lines y = x,
3y = x and x + y = 8.

OR
The area of a rectangle gets reduced by 9 sq. units if its length is reduced by 5 units and the
breadth is increased by 3 units. If we increase the length by 3 units and the breadth by 2
units, then the area is increased by 67 sq. units. Find the dimensions of the rectangle.

1 1 3
16. Which term of the sequence 20, 19 , 18 , 17 , … is the first negative term?
4 2 4

17. If P(9a – 2, – b) divides the line segment joining A (3a + 1, –3) and B (8a, 5) in the ratio 3: l,
find the values of a and b.

18. If the point A (2, – 4) is equidistant from P (3, 8) and Q (– 10, y), find the value of y. Also find
distance PQ.

19. Prove that, if a line is drawn parallel to one side of a triangle to intersect the other two sides
in distinct points, the other two sides are divided in the same ratio.
OR
D and E are points on the sides AB and AC respectively of ABC such that DE is parallel to
BC, and AD : DB = 4 : 5. CD and BE intersect each other at F. Find the ratio of the areas of
DEF and CBF.

20. If a, b, c are the sides of a right triangle where c is the hypotenuse, prove
that the radius r of the circle which touches the sides of the triangle is given by

a+b–c
r= .
2

OR

T' AT is a tangent drawn to the circle with centre O. If BAC = 50°, find BAT and BCA.
Also find DAB + DCB.

21. A box contains 5 red marbles, 8 white marbles and 4 green marbles. One marble is taken out
of the box at random. What is the probability that the marble taken out will be

(i) red ?

(ii) white ?

(iii) not green?

22. The lengths of 40 leaves of a plant are measured correctly to the nearest millimeter, and the
data obtained is represented in the following table:
4 Sample Paper 1

Length
118–126 127–135 136–144 145–153 154–162 163–171 172–180
(in mm)
Number
3 5 9 12 5 4 2
of Leaves

Find the median length of the leaves.

Section D (4 × 8 = 32)

23. A pole has to be erected at a point on the boundary of a circular park of diameter 13 metres in
such a way that the differences of its distances from two diametrically opposite fixed gates A
and B on the boundary is 7 metres. Is it possible to do it so? If yes, at what distances from the
two gates should the pole be erected?

24. Sides AB, AC and median AD of a triangle ABC are respectively proportional
to sides PQ, PR and median PM of another triangle PQR. Show that
ABC ~ PQR.

OR

ABC is a triangle in which AB = AC and D is a point on AC such that

BC2 = AC × CD. Prove that BD = BC.

25. Let ABC be a right angled triangle in which AB = 6 cm, BC = 8 cm and

B = 90°. BD is the perpendicular from B on AC. The circle through B, C, D is drawn. Construct
the tangents from A to this circle.

26. Prove that:

tan  cot 
+ = 1 + sec .cosec .
1 – cot  1 – tan 

OR

If sin  + sin2 = 1, find the value of

cos12 + 3 cos10+ 3 cos8 cos6 + 2 cos4 + 2 cos2  – 2

27. Two ships are there in the sea on either side of a light house in such a way that the ships and
the light house are in the same straight line. The angles of depression of the two ships as
observed from the top of the light house are 600 and 450. If the height of the light house is 200
m, find the distance between the two ships. [Use 3 = 1.73]

28. From a solid cylinder whose height is 2.4 cm and diameter 1.4 cm, a conical cavity of the same
height and same diameter is hollowed out. Find the total surface area of the remaining solid
to the nearest cm2.
Sample Paper 1 5

OR

Two types of water tankers are available in a shop at same cost. One is in a cylindrical form
of diameter 3.5 m and height 2 m and another is in the form of a sphere of diameter 3 m.
Calculate the volume of both tankers. The shopkeeper advises to purchase cylindrical tanker.
What value is depicted by the shopkeeper?

29. In Fig. ABC is a quadrant of a circle of radius 14 cm and a semicircle is drawn with BC as
diameter. Find the area of the shaded region.

B
Q

14 P
2c
14 cm m

90°
A 14 cm C

30. The median of the following data is 50. Find the values of p and q, if the sum of all the
frequencies is 90.

Marks 20–30 30–40 40–50 50–60 60–70 70–80 80–90

Frequency P 15 25 20 q 8 10
 CBSE
Sample Question Paper 2

Mathematics
Class X
Time : 3 hrs MM : 80

General Instructions
(i ) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) The question paper consists of 30 questions divided into four sections A, B, C and D.
(iii) Section A contains 6 questions of 1 mark each. Section B contains 6 questions of
2 marks each. Section C contains 10 questions of 3 marks each. Section D contains
8 questions of 4 marks each.
(iv) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in four
questions of 3 marks each and three questions of 4 marks each. You have to attempt
only one of the alternatives in all such questions.
(v) Use of calculators is not permitted.

Section A (1 × 6 = 6)

1. What is L.C.M. of smallest prime number and smallest composite number?

2. What number should be added to the polynomial x2 – 5x + 4, so that 3 is the zero of the
polynomial?

3. If radii of two concentric circles are 4 cm and 5 cm, then find the length of each chord of one circle
which is tangent to the other circle.

4. Is 0 a term of the AP 31, 28, 25,...? Justify your answer.

5. For what value of k, will the system of equations x + 2y = 5

3x + ky – 15 = 0. have no solution?

6. Two dice are thrown at the same time and the product of numbers appearing on them is noted.
Find the probability that the product is a prime number.
2 Sample Paper 2

Section B (2 × 6 = 12)

7. Find the largest number which divides 70 and 125, leaving remainders 5 and
8 respectively.

8. If one of the zeroes of the cubic polynomial x3 + ax2 + bx + c is –1, then prove that the product
of other two zeroes is b – a + 1.

9. For what value of K the equation : x2 + kx –1 = 0 has equal roots?

10. If x = a cos , y = b sin , then find the value of b2x2 + a2y2 – a2b2.

11. If sin + sin2  = 1, prove that cos2 + cos4 = 1.

12. 2 cubes each of volume 64 cm3 are joined end to end. Find the surface area of the resulting
cuboid.

Section C (3 × 10 = 30)

13. On a morning walk, three persons step off together and their steps measure
40 cm, 42 cm and 45 cm, respectively. What is the minimum distance each
should walk, so that each can cover the same distance in complete steps?

14. The sum of the third and the seventh terms of an AP is 6 and their product is 8. Find the sum
of first sixteen terms of the AP.

OR

Find the sum of the two middle most terms of the A.P.:

4 2 1
, 1, ,.... ,4 .
3 3 3
15. If  and  are the zeroes of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = 3x2 – 4x + 1, find a quadratic
2 2
polynomial whose zeroes are and .
 

16. Draw the graphs of the equations x – y + 1 = 0 and 3x + 2y – 12 = 0. Determine the coordinates
of the vertices of the triangle formed by these lines and the x-axis, and shade the triangular
region.

17. Find the value of m, if the points (5, 1), (–2, –3) and (8, 2m) are collinear.
OR
The centre of a circle is (x + 2, x – 1). Find x if the circle passes through (2, –2) and (8, –2).
Sample Paper 2 3

18. In what ratio does the X-axis divide the line segment joining the points (–4, –6) and (–1, 7)? Find
the coordinates of the points of division.

19. P and Q are the mid-points of the sides CA and CB respectively of a ABC, right angled at C.
Prove that:

(i) 4 AQ2 = 4AC2 + BC2

(ii) 4BP2 = 4BC2 + AC2

(iii) 4(AQ2 + BP2) = 5AB2

OR
In ABC, If AP  BC and AC2 = BC2 – AB2, then prove that PA2 = PB × CP.

20. In figure, OP is equal to diameter of the circle. Prove that ABP is a equilateral triangle.
A

O P

21. A bag contains 35 balls out of which x are blue.

(i) If one ball is drawn at random, what is the probability that it will be a blue ball?

(ii) If 7 more blue balls are put in the bag, the probability of drawing a blue ball will be double
than that in (i).

Find x.
OR
A box contains 90 discs which are numbered from 1 to 90. If one disc is drawn at random from
the box, find the probability that it bears (i) a two-digit number (ii) a perfect square number
(iii) a number divisible by 5.

22. Find the mean of the following distribution by Assumed Mean Method:
Class Interval Frequency
10–20 8
20–30 7
30–40 12
40–50 23
50–60 11
60–70 13
70–80 8
80–90 6
90–100 12
4 Sample Paper 2

Section D (4 × 8 = 32)

23. A train travels 360 km at a uniform speed. If the speed had been 5 km/h
more, it would have taken 1 hour less for the same journey. Find the speed of the train.

OR

A shopkeeper buys a number of books for ] 80. If he had bought 4 more books for the same
amount, each book would have cost a 1 less. How many books did he buy ?

24. Prove that the sum of the squares of the diagonals of parallelogram is equal to the sum of the
squares of its sides.

1  sec   tan  1  sin 

25. Prove that 
1  sec   tan  cos 

OR

m2  1
If tan A = n tan B and sin A = m sin B, prove that cos2 A = .
n2  1

26. A 1.5 m tall boy is standing at some distance from a 30 m tall building. The
angle of elevation from his eyes to the top of the building increases from 30° to 60° as he walks
towards the building. Find the distance he walked towards the building.

27. Construct two circles of radii 3 cm and 5 cm, such that their centres are
12 cm apart. Join their centres and construct the perpendicular bisector
of the line segment thus obtained. Take a point M, 3.5 cm away from the
mid-point of the line segment joining the two centres and lying on perpendicular bisector. From
M, construct tangents to the bigger circle. Write steps of construction.

28. Due to heavy floods in a state, thousands were rendered homeless. 50 schools collectively offered
to the state government to provide place and the canvas for 1500 tents to be fixed by the
government and decided to share the whole expenditure equally. The lower part of each tent
is cylindrical of base radius 2.8 m and height 3.5 m, with conical upper part of same base radius
but of height 2.1 m. If the canvas used to make the tents costs a 120 per sq. m, find the amount
shared by each school to set up the tents. What value is generated by the above problem?
 22 
 Use   7  .

29. A well of diameter 3 m is dug 14 m deep. The mud taken out of it has been spread evenly all
around it in the shape of a circular ring of width 4 m to form an embankment. Find the height
of the embankment.
Sample Paper 2 5

OR

Milk in a container, which is in the form of a frustum of a cone of height 30 cm and the radii
of whose lower and upper circular ends are 20 cm and 40 cm respectively, is to be distributed
in a camp for flood victims. If this milk is available at the rate of a 35 per litre and 880 litres
of milk is needed daily for a camp, find how many such containers of milk are needed for a
camp and what cost will it put on the donor agency for this.

30. 50 students enter a school javelin throw competition. The distance (in metre) thrown are
recorded below
Distance (in m) 0-20 20-40 40-60 60-80 80-100
Numbers 6 11 17 12 4
of students
(i) Construct a cumulative frequency table.

(ii) Draw a cumulative frequency curve (less than type) and calculate the median distance
drawn by using this curve.

(iii)Calculate the median distance by using the formula for median.

(iv) Are the median distance calculated in (ii) and (iii) same?